Association for Behavior Analysis International

The Association for Behavior Analysis International® (ABAI) is a nonprofit membership organization with the mission to contribute to the well-being of society by developing, enhancing, and supporting the growth and vitality of the science of behavior analysis through research, education, and practice.

Search

32nd Annual Convention; Atlanta, GA; 2006

Program by Day for Sunday, May 28, 2006


Manage My Personal Schedule

 

Special Event #93
ABA Program Committee Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
University
Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: N/a
 
AUT
JACK SCOTT (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract: N/a
 
BPH
JOHN M. ROLL (Washington State University)
Abstract: N/a
 
CBM
KELLY G. WILSON (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: N/a
 
CSE
JANET ELLIS (University of North Texas), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College)
Abstract: N/a
 
DDA
KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy)
Abstract: N/a
 
DEV
JACOB L. GEWIRTZ (Florida International University), Martha Pelaez (Florida International University)
Abstract: N/a
 
EAB
WILLIAM L. PALYA (Jacksonville State University)
Abstract: N/a
 
EDC
TIMOTHY A. SLOCUM (Utah State University)
Abstract: N/a
 
OBM
TIMOTHY D. LUDWIG (Appalachian State University)
Abstract: N/a
 
TBA
PAMELA G. OSNES (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: N/a
 
TPC
DAVID C. PALMER (Smith College)
Abstract: N/a
 
VRB
WILLIAM F. POTTER (California State University, Stanislaus)
Abstract: N/a
 
 
Business Meeting #94
Behavior Analyst Certification Board International Certification Development
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Montreal
Chair: Gerald A Shook (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Presenting Authors:
The presentation will discuss important components of the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® which include: Board Certified Behavior Analyst™ (BCBA®) and Board Certified Behavior Analyst™ (BCABA®) credentials; professional experience, coursework, and degree requirements; approved course sequences; international examination administration; eligibility standards; and application for examination. Special emphasis will be on how individual countries can work with the BACB to develop time-limited alternative pathways for residents of the country to qualify for the BACB examinations. The presentation also will provide an overview of the current status of the BACB® and its certificants. The presentation will focus on development of the BACB in the future, particularly as it relates to certification outside of the United States. Time will be provided for participant questions and discussion with the presenter.
 
 
Business Meeting #94a
CalABA Business Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Auburn
Chair: Gina Green (San Diego State University)
Presenting Authors:
This will be an open board meeting for members of the California Association for Behavior Analysis (CalABA). Non-members are invited, to find out more about CalABA and how they may become involved in the organization.
 
 
Business Meeting #95
HABA: Hawai'ian Association for Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Inman
Chair: Kimberly A. Smalley (Hawai'ian Association for Behavior Analysis)
Presenting Authors:
Quarterly meeting of HABA.
 
 
Business Meeting #96
HSF Activity: Trunk Training
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Greenbriar
Chair: Gordon O. Henry (Ottawa University)
Presenting Authors:
Participants will learn and practice exercises designed to maximize reinforcement gained through participation in racquet sports and other recreational activities, avoid pain stemming from back and abdominal muscle weakness, and to counteract the physiological effects of long hours sitting at one's desk.
 
 
Business Meeting #97
Interbehaviorists in ABA Special Interest Group Business Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Piedmont
Chair: Thomas L. Sharpe, Jr. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
Presenting Authors:
To re-establish a membership communication exchange and enhance interdisciplinary information visibility for potentially interested professionals. Focus of the interest group provides an interdisciplincary forum for those engaged in the experimental and/or applied analysis of behavior to include a systemic, ecological, inclusive, and functionally interactive approach to time-sensitive behavior and event relationships. Interest has been stimulated in large part by the pioneering work of J. R. Kantor. Those with a diverse range of content interests across education, social, and experimental and applied psychology are encouraged to participate. All ABA members interested in Interbehaviorism are welcome and encouraged to attend in providing a rich and supportive forum for research and application engagement from an interbehavioral perspective.
 
 
Business Meeting #97a
JABA Business Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Lenox
Chair: Patrick C. Friman (Father Flanagan's Girls and Boys' Town)
Presenting Authors:
Annual meeting of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis.
 
 
Business Meeting #98
Parent Professional Partnership Special Interest Group
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Vancouver
Chair: David A. Celiberti (Private Practice)
Presenting Authors:
The discipline of applied behavior analysis owes much to parents who have been staunch advocates for higher quality services for their children. The synergy that can arise from parents and professional working together presents both exciting opportunities and possibilities. A business meeting will be held to provide a forum for networking, to disseminate the revised Consumer Guidelines, to discuss our webpage, and to further develop priorities. The New Jersey Association for Outreach and Services for the Autism Community (COSAC) will provide continental breakfast. All interested parents and professionals are encouraged to attend.
 
 
Business Meeting #99
The New Jersey Association for Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Fairlie
Chair: Marlene Cohen (Rutgers University)
Presenting Authors:
To review progress of our affiliate chapter over the past year and to plan for future goals and events.
 
 
Paper Session #100
International Paper Session - Behavioral Interventions: Measuring ADHD, Assertiveness Training for Clients with TBI, and Teaching Autistic Children to Ride Bicycles
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Lenox
Area: CSE
Chair: James K. Cormier (Willowbrook Rehabilitation Services)
 
The Effectiveness of Using Direct Method for Teaching the Ability of Riding Balance Wheeled Bicycle to the Autistic Children
Domain: Basic Research
SAFIYE SUNAY YILDIRIM DOGRU (Selcuk University), Ozgul Yucalan (Selcuk University), Hafiz Bek (Selcuk University)
 
Abstract: The aim of this research is examining the effectiveness of using direct method for teaching of balance wheeled bicycle riding ability to the autistic children. In order to reach this aim a teaching method composing of activities increasing attention control and psycho-motor abilities is used. 3 male autistic children (between the age of 5-10) lacking the ability of riding balance wheeled bicycle have been chosen as subjects. In this research, direct teaching method is used in order to teach the ability of riding balance wheeled bicycle. The autistic children are trained individually. It is thought that when children learn riding of balance wheeled bicycle, this will contribute to their attention improvement, body balance control and muscle development.The findings of the research will be reached in 2006, February. Till that time, the data such as generalization, observation, application and reliability of observers will be gathered. The results of the study will be discussed in the congress.
 
A Questionnaire for Measuring ADD(H) in Middle School Children: A Pilot Study
Domain: Applied Research
ANDREE FLEMING-HOLLAND (University of Veracruz, Mexico), Marco Wilfredo Salas-Martinez (University of Veracruz, Mexico)
 
Abstract: ADD(H) is not only a childhood disorder which children "grow out of" in adolescence as previously believed. Recent studies show that presenting syntoms continue into adolescence and even adulthood, causing problems in school, at home, with friends, and even with the legal system. Although the DSM-IV has attempted to include middle school children in the diagnostic questionnaire presented,given the characteristics of this population and the fact that many of the presenting syntoms are present in a "normal" population, the childhood diagnosis is not always accurate. A new questionnairew is presented for adolescents, piloted with Mexican adolescents and cross-validated against the DSM-IV questionnaire.
 
Assertiveness Training with Traumatically Brain Injuried Clients
Domain: Service Delivery
JAMES K. CORMIER (Willowbrook Rehabilitation Services)
 
Abstract: Training mildly brain injured clients to implement assertiveness behaviors across multiple settings. The trained assertiveness behaviors were introduced to replace aggressive behaviors, passive behaviors, and passive-aggressive behaviors. Assertiveness training was implemented as part and/or as the whole of each clients' self-management plan to be utilized during active rehabilitation, within supervised settings, within semi-independent settings, and/or within independent settings.
 
 
 
Paper Session #101
Behavioral Approaches to Impulsivity
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
University
Area: EDC
Chair: Summer Ferreri (Michigan State University)
 
Impulsive Choice as a Function of Point of Reinforcer Delay: Assessment and Intervention
Domain: Applied Research
SUMMER FERRERI (Michigan State University), Nancy A. Neef (The Ohio State University)
 
Abstract: Eight participants with and without Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) participated in this two-part investigation. Part 1 involved a functional assessment of impulsivity, defined as choices that produce more immediate but smaller or less preferred reinforcers relative to a concurrently available response alternative that produces delayed but larger or more preferred reinforcers. Impulsivity was assessed under two delay conditions--delay to point delivery and delay to exchange of points for the terminal reinforcer. Part 2 addressed (a) the need for assessment-based interventions that focus on increasing academic productivity and accuracy and decreasing off-task behavior in a classroom setting and (b) the effects of an assessment-based intervention in conjunction with a commitment strategy on decreasing impulsive choice making to the terminal reinforcer in a classroom setting. The presentation will briefly outline the methodology of the investigations and focus more closely on the effectiveness of the interventions and implications of the results.
 
It's Not the End of the World!Use of Imagery Procedures to Reduce Impulsivity in Elementary-Aged Students
Domain: Applied Research
DANIEL E. PARKER (Kingston Hill Academy/Groden Center), Kati Wilcox (Kingston Hill Academy)
 
Abstract: In this study, the researchers have used imagery in an attempt to decrease targeted impulsive behaviors for three elementary aged students in response to teacher and peer verbal and physical stimuli. Imagery is a stress reduction technique that teaches participants to identify their own maladaptive behaviors and the stimuli that elicits these behaviors. Once participants are able to identify maladaptive stimuli, imagery techniques use pictures or words to teach desired responses to the eliciting stimulus. Through continued practice with the imagery procedure, participants are able to generalize the desired response to multiple settings in which maladaptive behaviors had occurred in the past.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #102
CE Offered: BACB

Ethics and Values in Behavior Analysis: Do Our Consumers Know What they Are? Do We?

Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: CSE; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Jon S. Bailey, Ph.D.
Chair: Janet Ellis (University of North Texas)
JON S. BAILEY (Behavior Management Consultants, Florida State University, and Florida Association for Behavior Analysis)
Dr. Jon S. Bailey worked with Jack Michael, Lee Meyerson, and Mont Wolf as a graduate student at Arizona State University and the University of Kansas where he received his PhD in 1970. In 2005 he received the SABA Award for Distinguished Service to Behavior Analysis. Jon Bailey's research has spanned a wide range of topics over his 35-years at Florida State University. He has worked in developmental disabilities, was a pioneer in behavioral community psychology and most recently has published and trained students in performance management. In the last six years he has teamed up with his co-author Mary R. Burch to produce a similarly wide range of books on dog training (How Dogs Learn), single-subject design (Research Methods for Applied Behavior Analysis), and most recently he has turned his attention to ethics (Ethics for Behavior Analysts). In his address to day he will discuss the relationship between ethics and values
Abstract:

Behavior analysts who are Board Certified now have Guidelines for Responsible Conduct that clearly define our ethical responsibilities to our clients, students, colleagues, society, and to the field of behavior analysis itself.Remaining to be codified, however, are a set of values statements that represent the best our field has to offer those individuals we serve. Often, the services we provide involve life-saving behavioral procedures. Because we are now in constant competition with other professions who work hard to sell their "values" (almost in lieu of an effective technology of behavior change), I believe it is critical that we address our own values. In a recent survey of leaders in ABA we found that the question, "What values are important for our field?" yielded a diverse range of responses from "empiricism" to "logic" to "induction" and "save the world through BF Skinner" none of which are likely to appeal to consumers.In this presentation I will attempt to offer some guidelines for the development of a set of values statements for behavior analysis that will appeal to advocates and consumers in autism, education, rehabilitation, and community treatment.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #103
CE Offered: None

Self-Control and Social Cooperation: Implications For An Account of Addiction

Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CE Instructor: Edmund J. Fantino, M.D.
Chair: Edmund J. Fantino (University of California, San Diego)
HOWARD RACHLIN (State University of New York, Stony Brook)
Dr. Howard Rachlin obtained his PhD in psychology at Harvard University in 1965. He is currently a Research Professor and an Emeritus Distinguished Professor of Psychology at the State University of New York at Stony Brook. He has published more than 100 articles, written six books including Behavior And Mind and The Science of Self-Control and edited two others. He has served on study sections for The National Institute of Health (NIH) and The National Science Foundation (NSF). He is on the editorial boards of 6 journals. Since he received his PhD his research (on choice, self-control, social cooperation, and experimental economics) has been continuously supported by grants from NIH and NSF including an NIH MERIT award. Among other honors he has been elected Fellow at the American Psychological Society and the Society of Experimental Psychologists. He has been the recipient of a James McKeen Cattell Fellowship (1975-76), and an Award For The Impact of Science on Application from the Society For The Advancement of Behavior Analysis (2005). He was a visiting scholar at the Russell Sage Foundation (1988-89) and an invited speaker at the Nobel Symposium on Behavioral And Experimental Economics, Stockholm, Sweden (2001)
Abstract:

Failures of self-control and social cooperation may both be described in terms of hyperbolic discounting: failures of self-control as due to discounting by delay of reinforcement -- failures of social cooperation as due to discounting by social distance. Moreover, both self-control and social cooperation may be seen as choice of distributed rewards over individual rewards: self-control as choice of rewards distributed in time -- social cooperation as choice of rewards distributed over social space. An experiment is described in which reinforcement history and reward magnitudes were balanced; under these conditions normal people learned self-control but not social cooperation. It is speculated that addicts behave towards their own future selves as normal people behave towards other people (relatively distant from them on a social scale). That is, for an addict, the problem of self-control is the same as the (usually much more difficult) problem of social cooperation.

 
 
Symposium #105
Behavioral Systems Analysis and Computer-Based Instructional Design: The Reciprocity Between Basic Theory and Instructional Applications
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Dunwoody
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Roger D. Ray ((AI)2, Inc.; Rollins College)
Discussant: Patrick S. Williams (University of Houston, Downtown)
Abstract: Kantor’s disregard for experimentation and advocacy of purely descriptive strategies resulted in his having little influence on the current science of behavior analysis (Verplank, 1983; Schoenfeld, 1969). Disparity between Kantor’s powerful conceptualization of interbehavioral psychology and weak or non-existent efforts to translate his ideas into research led Ray and Brown (1975, 1976) to publish some of the earliest studies to address this problem. A series of research articles articulating their “systems approach to behavior” followed (Ray & Ray, 1976; Ray, 1977; Ray, Upson & Henderson, 1977) and a decade later Ray and Delprato (1989) presented a systematic summarization of this approach emphasizing three facets of descriptive interbehavioral systems research strategies and tactics: structural analysis, functional analysis, and operations analysis. But it may be argued that all descriptive research strategies lack confirmation of their completeness (i.e., lack tests for the adequacy of descriptions). However, computerized modeling and simulations offer unique solutions to this confirmation problem. Simulations, in the form of interactive computerized instructional and training systems, present a “virtual reality” that is precisely the affirming phenomenological feedback descriptive researchers need for making adequacy inferences. Software that allows user history analysis offers yet another approach to adequacy feedback and analysis.
 
Interbehavioral Systems Analysis, Simulations, Modeling, and Computerized Instructional Systems Design: A Retrospective on Lessons from CyberRat.
ROGER D. RAY ((AI)2, Inc.; Rollins College)
Abstract: Verplank (1983) noted that, despite the highly significant conceptual power of Kantor’s “interbehavioral” approach to psychology (Kantor, 1959), Kantor shunned laboratory experimentation. Kantor rejected the existence of cause-effect relations among the various participating factors defining his Interbehavioral event (Kantor, 1959). Thus, instead of analyzing causal relations, Kantor argued for purely descriptive approaches. CyberRat is a “virtual reality” simulation that models rats in operant chambers based on such an approach. CyberRat is based upon concepts first presented by Ray et al’s “Systems Approach to Behavior” publication series (Ray & Brown, 1975, 1976; Ray & Ray, 1976; Ray, 1977; Ray, Upson & Henderson, 1977). Ray and Delprato (1989) summarized descriptive interbehavioral systems research’s strategies and tactics. In their article, a “narrative reconstruction” of coded behaviors was described as one strategy for assessing the completeness, or adequacy, of descriptive data. CyberRat offers yet another unexplored approach to adequacy testing based on “virtual reality” reconstructions. These are accomplished via dynamically and stochastically determined digital video editing algorithms that have parameters altered via user interactions that simulate operant experimental manipulations and their implications for behavior. Lessons learned about inadequacies of descriptive research that inspired CyberRat are discussed.
 
Modeling an Operations Analysis of Descriptive Research Publications: A New Taxonomy of Observational Procedure Variations.
JESSICA M. RAY (Rollins College), Roger D. Ray ((AI)2, Inc.; Rollins College)
Abstract: Verplanck’s Operations Analysis (http://web.utk.edu/~wverplan/opanalma.html) was developed for defining terms in their clearest and most fundamental forms. Most of the experimental operations defined in Verplanck’s Glossary & Thesaurus (c.f., Verplanck, 1957; and the expanded on-line version at: http://psych-ai.com/www/WSV.html) are reflective of this process. Much of the G/T presents a taxonomy for describing experimenter behaviors. This empirically founded taxonomic approach to categorizing extant research efforts led Verplanck to articulate operations analysis as a fundamental procedure in making inductive generalizations in the behavioral sciences--a synthesis he eventually referred to as “Operation Analytic Behaviorism” (Verplanck, 1996). Using a similar operations approach we reviewed as many exemplar publications as possible to reflect differences in observational sampling and recording procedures used by researchers. Attempts to model these operations in a new coding trainer software system suggested the need for new criteria and terms for classifying and simulating observational procedure variations. Our operations analysis uses concurrent applications of time and behavior as defining events for when and what to observe and record in observational research. What emerged from our effort is a general software system that trains users for any method defined by the taxonomy we present.
 
Adapting Adaptive Instruction: The students should guide us (with a nod to the Wiki Way).
DAVID A. ECKERMAN (University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill), Steven M. Kemp (University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill)
Abstract: Feedback from students and colleagues may be used to continuously improve online learning materials such as those provided by AI2, Inc. Their MediaMatrix system preserves student responses in a manner that aids this process. Responses to fill-blank questions from a newly developed "Learning Chapter" provided guidance to a colleague helping to revise the text, the questions, and the acceptable answers to these questions. In this process, effective sections of the current text were distinguished from less effective. Further, questions occasioning technical (small response class) were distinguished from those occasioning nontechnical (larger response class) answers. Using MediaMatrix, an author may aspire to develop "expert" rather than merely "stereotyped" behavior. Basic behavioral principles apply to this process of text-improvement, which also mimics the "open source" approach to the development of software and information resources sometimes known as The Wiki Way.
 
 
Symposium #106
CE Offered: BACB
Child Clinical Applications of Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Kennesaw
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Teresa A. Rodgers (Agency for Persons with Disabilities)
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Children and adolescents can be treated effectively using functional behavioral assessment and behavioral interventions for social, emotional and medical difficulties in a variety of settings. These settings include: a hospital treating children for chronic or terminal illnesses, a permanent residence with a loving family, a group home specifically designed to treat adolescents with multiple diagnoses, and a regular public school. The speakers in this symposium will present research-based approaches from the behavioral literature, as well as techniques they have used in clinical case studies, that effectively deal with numerous social, emotional and medical difficulties in children. Diagnoses that have been given to the children in these case studies include: Cancer, Diabetes, Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, Oppositional Defiant Disorder, Conduct Disorder, Moderate Mental Retardation, Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder, Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder, Motor Stereotypy, Depression, Psychosis, Learning Disability, School Phobia with Panic Attacks and Social Anxiety Disorder. In each of the case studies discussed, these children either: were able to be receive necessary medical treatments that were previously refused, had one or more of their diagnostic labels removed or were able to be served in a typical setting after previously being removed due to their behavioral, social and emotional difficulties.

 
Using Functional Behavioral Assessment to Identify Appropriate Treatment Strategies for Children in Hospital Settings.
LYNN A. OLSON PAGE (Regent University)
Abstract: Children with chronic and acute medical conditions face a number of challenges, both medically and psychologically. Pediatric psychologists are often to assist with issues that arise during hospitalization. Concerns about patient functioning may revolve around the physical consequences of emotional or behavioral distress, emotional or behavioral symptoms resulting from the diagnosis, or psychological trauma (Kush & Campo, 1998). Often these difficulties require an individualized, problem-solving approach to address difficulties quickly. A functional behavioral assessment approach represents a feasible and effective means of addressing problems within the hospital setting, but there is a paucity of research documenting the use of functional behavioral assessment in the acute hospital setting. Three case examples are used to provide a model of functional behavioral assessment in the hospital setting to improve coping, increase exercise and physical activity, and decrease distress to a medical procedure.
 
Using Applied Behavior Analysis & Cognitive Behavioral Methods to Promote Long-Term Emotional & Moral Development in a Child with Attachment Problems.
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University)
Abstract: A five-and-a-half-year-old girl with diagnoses of ADHD, Depression & Psychoses was placed in foster care after having been removed from her biological home due to abuse and neglect, two other foster homes and several day care settings. The foster mother was a behavioral psychologist who used several behavioral interventions including: positive reinforcement, tokens, role-playing, feedback, coordinating of all adult caregivers, and consistent follow-through. The child was taken off of all medications within three weeks, was adopted two-and-a-half years later, and is currently twelve-and-a-half years old and in a regular seventh-grade class. The child has, however, experienced some attachment problems and receives ongoing treatment in order to promote emotional and moral development.
 
Using Applied Behavior Analysis to Treat School Phobia with Panic Attacks & Social Anxiety Disorder: Two & Three Year Follow-Up.
ADAM A. SPENCER (East Carolina University), Troy Roberts (East Carolina University), Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University)
Abstract: A twelve-year-old boy who appeared to have been the victim of a traumatic event developed school phobia and was being home-schooled one hour a week due to his school avoidance. When attempting to return to school, he was told by the principal to return for a full day or he would be expelled from school. Working with another school principal who was willing to try a more gradual approach, the behavioral consultant was able to use systematic desensitization, shaping, token reinforcement, role playing, and feedback to return the child to full days at school. Comparison of several treatments from the research literature will be discussed, as well as the use of functional behavioral assessment to understand school avoidance.
 
Managing the Behavior of Elementary School Children with Various Behavioral & Learning Problems.
BRYAN CRISP (East Carolina University), Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University)
Abstract: Differential reinforcement has been demonstrated to be an effective strategy to reduce or eliminate behavior without the presentation of a punishing stimulus. The purpose of this study was to decrease the out of seat behavior of students in a general education elementary classroom. Data for the reduction of out of seat behavior of three elementary students is presented. Problems associated with the use of differential reinforcement in the general education classroom are discussed. Additionally, a training tape in the implementation of differential reinforcement procedures in a class of students with severe behavior problems and learning difficulties will be shown and discussed.
 
 
Paper Session #107
Complex Issues in Verbal Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Vinings
Area: VBC
Chair: Robert Dlouhy (Western Michigan University)
 
Using RFT to Develop Training Protocols for Complex Language Skills
Domain: Applied Research
C. A. THOMAS (TCLC MS Behavior Clinic), Kimberly P. Ray (TCLC MS Behavior Clinic)
 
Abstract: Using RFT protocols were developed and deployed with students who had previously failed to develop more complex conversational skills, after implementation of protocols using RFT as the basis for development these children gained complex conversational skills.
 
Transformations of Web-Based Trigonometric and Stimulus Functions: Accelerating the Acquisition of Derived Complex Mathematical Relations
Domain: Basic Research
CHRIS NINNESS (Stephen F. Austin State University), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Robin Rumph (Stephen F. Austin State University), Glen L. McCuller (Stephen. F. Austin State University), Angela Ford (Stephen. F. Austin State University), Sharon K. Ninness (Nacogdoches ISD), James Holland (Stephen F. Austin State University)
 
Abstract: Participants who were unfamiliar with odd and even trigonometric functions as they pertain to amplitude and frequency on the coordinate axis were given a brief Web-based presentation regarding these mathematical operations. Then, they took part in a computer-interactive matching-to-sample procedure that included training formula-to-formula and formula-to-graph relations as they address the odd or even properties of sine, cosine, secant, and cosecant. After participants demonstrated accurate responding in accordance with mutual entailment and combinatorial entailment, we conducted a second Web-based presentation addressing transformation of these functions in terms of amplitude and frequency. Following tests for mutual entailment only, we assessed participants’ ability to identify 30 complex transformations of the original trigonometric functions. Multiple exemplar training will be discussed in terms of its potential as an accelerated Web-based approach to training complex mathematical relations.
 
Functional Linguistics and the Analysis of Verbal Behavior
Domain: Theory
ROBERT DLOUHY (Western Michigan University)
 
Abstract: Functional approaches to the analysis of language have become increasingly influential in the fields of general linguistics, second language acquisition, and language pedagogy. For example, recent insights from pragmatics, discourse analysis, and corpus studies are influencing the design of language textbooks. Although debates between linguistic functionalists and proponents of Chomskian autonomous syntax continue, new functionalist approaches continue to emerge, particularly those Newmeyer (1998) describes as “integrative functionalism.” Representative of this is the “Emergent Grammar” of Paul Hopper (1988, 1998), which seeks to explain language structure as a result of environmental factors, not innate qualities. Hopper views language as dynamic, continuously evolving or adapting to new conditions. However, he provides little explanation of how the dynamic processes actually work. This paper will argue that Skinner’s treatments of verbal behavior and the principles of Relational Frame Theory can inform Hopper’s functional emergent grammar proposals by providing principles which explain the acquisition and organization of the dynamic verbal phenomena he describes. Hopper’s functional view of language and the analysis of verbal behavior therefore can be seen as complementary.
 
 
 
Symposium #108
Current Applications of Performance Management in Our Communities
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Cairo
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Christine L. Ratcliff (Florida State University)
Abstract: Performance management can be applied in a variety of settings, for a variety of behaviors, and with many different people. This session showcases four diverse applications of performance management interventions throughout the community.
 
Feel the Burn: Using PM Strategies to Manage the Workout Behaviors of Others.
STEPH PERRINO (Florida State University), Marco D. Tomasi (Florida State University)
Abstract: In 2002, 58.5% of Americans over the age of 18 were either overweight or obese. In addition, soda was consumed at an average of 37.7 gallons per U.S. household in 2000. The current study intervened on the exercise behaviors and consumption behaviors of three individuals. A program was developed composed of cardiovascular activity, weight-training, abdominal exercises, and yoga/pilates activities, as well as food consumption for each participant. A treatment package utilizing goal setting in conjunction with reinforcement and penalty contingencies was used to help the participants reach their individual workout and healthy eating goals. Weight change and percent body fat were recorded daily as a secondary measure of success. A multiple baseline design across participants with changing criterion goals was used to evaluate the effects of intervention package. During baseline, the three participants engaged in a mean of 0.00 instances of exercise. Performance increased during intervention phases to meet intermediate goals until each participant reached consistently reached their ultimate exercise and consumption performance goals.
 
Using Written and Graphic Feedback to Improve the Performance of Undergraduate Research Assistants.
MARISA SNOW (Florida State University), Marco D. Tomasi (Florida State University)
Abstract: The poor performance of research assistants can hinder successful completion of a research project. The current study looked to address such performance problems with two groups of undergraduate research assistants. Individual on-time performance was targeted for each group. An ABC modified multiple baseline design across group was used to implement two formats of a feedback intervention. During intervention phases individual feedback was privately distributed each week. Results showed that, while both feedback interventions improved performance from both baseline levels and the levels of the previous semester’s group of research assistants, the use of graphic feedback was more effective at improving the research assistants’ performance than written feedback.
 
Managing Two Important Problems in a Community Hotline: Improving Kitchen Cleanliness and Phone Counselor Effectiveness.
ERICA HESS (Florida State University), Angela Buchanio (Florida State University), Jon S. Bailey (Florida State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was implementing the use of Performance Management and applying it to a non-profit organization. The study was carried out at a 2-1-1 Big Bend a telephone counseling/information and referral service throughout Florida. The Hotline had approximately 92 counselors in and out of the facility. Data was collected three to four times weekly in a checklist format for both dependent variables. The dependent variables were to increase kitchen cleanliness as well increasing counselor effectiveness with their callers. Intervention for the kitchen cleanliness included the establishment of task clarification, an “I Did It” checklist, and visual prompts placed around the kitchen. The intervention for the amount of feelings reflected per counselor included a task clarification, the “feeling tabs” module, and a vocabulary chart. Results strongly showed that using Performance Management techniques, self-monitoring specifically in this type of setting, proved to work best increased performance on both variables.
 
Taking ABA to the Streets: Intervening on the Seatbelt and Cellular Phone Usage of Drivers.
MARCO D. TOMASI (Florida State University), Jessica Tomasi (Florida State University), Anne Potteiger (Florida State University), Jon S. Bailey (Florida State University), Faunamin Jimenez (Florida State University)
Abstract: Experimental studies have demonstrated diminished driving ability due to cell phone usage. The present study expanded upon previous literature to intervene on both cell phone use and seat belt use by automobile drivers. An ABCACB modified reversal design was used to evaluate the effects of visual prompts given in traffic to drivers. Change in cell phone usage by unsafe drivers increased to 31% when intervened upon. Change in seat belt by unsafe drivers increased to a mean of 68% when intervened upon. Change in each target behavior had means of 0% when not intervened upon.
 
 
Paper Session #109
Human Learning II
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Manila
Area: EAB
Chair: Iver H. Iversen (University of North Florida)
 
Consumer Observational Research: Examining Video-Taped Behavior vs. Self-Report-Based Research on Food-Related Activities
Domain: Applied Research
CARLA KUESTEN (TIAX LLC)
 
Abstract: Global concern about obesity and the impact on health has inspired researchers to consider how efficacious, sustainable changes might be incorporated within our daily lives to maintain proper energy balance. PlaceLab provides a research tool that can be used to explore food-related behaviors, study dietary intakes, and examine and test interventions or solutions to positively impact long-term eating behaviors. PlaceLab, an MIT House_n + TIAX Initiative, is an apartment-scale research facility with video and sensors where innovations can be evaluated in the context of everyday living. The goal is to measure and compare results of dietary instruments with a video-enabled supervision of the true intake, activities, and emotive responses. Results provide predictors of errors associated with energy intakes derived from commonly used dietary instruments such as the food frequency questionnaire (FFQ), seven-day dietary recall (7DDR), or 24-hour recall interview (24HR). The presentation will review the methodological considerations associated with this type of research using data from two individuals who were monitored during ten-day stays at PlaceLab. The data collected from video recordings, physical activity assessments, 24HR, FFQ and 7DDR and various health-related measures will be used to show the strengths and challenges associated with integration of sensor-based and self-report methods.
 
The Role of Feedback in Human Motor Learning
Domain: Basic Research
IVER H. IVERSEN (University of North Florida)
 
Abstract: Human motor learning and operant conditioning are two seemingly disjointed areas in Psychology. While reinforcement is the cornerstone experimental variable in operant conditioning this variable is downplayed in some literature on human motor learning. As feedback of their performance, human subjects are often given “knowledge of results” consisting of verbal statements or number scores. Often, such knowledge does not seem to help skill learning. When verbal statements and graded numbers are given as feedback it is tacitly assumed that the subject’s behavior is controlled by such stimuli. Two experiments were conducted with human subjects to determine the extent to which “knowledge of results” actually controls performance. Subjects participated in a computerized aiming task and were given graded numbers as feedback. Some subjects were trained prior to the experiment to use the same graded numbers such that they became discriminative stimuli. Subjects, who had such prior training, learned a new motor task much faster than did subjects who had no prior training with the use of this feedback. The experiments illustrate that symbolic feedback given in human motor learning tasks may influence the learning speed to the extent that the feedback serves a discriminative function.
 
Gambling Research: Current Procedures and an Experimental Study of Varying Win Rates
Domain: Applied Research
JOHN HAYES (Spalding University), Frank Hammonds (Troy University)
 
Abstract: Behavioral research has not kept up with the recent increase in popularity of gambling (Weatherly and Brandt, 2004). This could be due to the lack of computer programs and other instruments especially suited for the research. MacLin, Dixon and Hayes (1999) created simulated gambling programs that allow for manipulation of the variables involved in gambling. Using this software, Weather and Brandt (2004) found participants showed no sensitivity to changing odds. The current study involves a simulated slot machine program used to test a player’s sensitivity to changing odds. Participants played 160 trials of video slots. Every 40 trials, the win rate percentage changed. The results revealed that both the amount bet each trial and the participants’ reported confidence in their chance of winning on the next trial were affected by the change in the win rate percentages. This presentation will discuss the results of this study as well as computer programs and other procedures currently being used for gambling research.
 
 
 
Symposium #110
Individual Child Profiles and Best Treatments for Autism: Finding the Right Fit
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Regency V
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Laura Schreibman (University of California, San Diego)
Discussant: Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College)
Abstract: Outcome variability is frequently reported in early intervention studies. Current empirical evidence indicates that not all children will respond well to any one type of treatment, therefore, advocating one type of treatment program or approach is generally not recommended. The recognition that there is a need to individualize treatment for each child with autism makes it vital that we further our understanding of how to match children with the most efficacious treatments. The presentations in this symposium discuss research projects that specifically look at identifying potential predictor variables that could predict a child’s responsiveness to specific treatment approaches. The first presentation concerns the identification of participant characteristics associated with either positive or poor outcomes within two popular behaviorally based therapy approaches, pivotal response training and discrete trial training. The second presentation discusses the development of a "clinician friendly" predictive profile for children with autism to identify responders and nonresponders to a naturalistic behavioral treatment, Pivotal Response Training. The final presentation addresses the possibility of predicting language development based on pretreatment behavioral profiles, thus affording clinicians the ability to individualize treatment and tailor language interventions more rapidly and effectively.
 
Individual Behavioral Profiles and Predictors of Treatment Effectiveness for Children with Autism.
LAURA SCHREIBMAN (University of California, San Diego), Aubyn C. Stahmer (Children's Hospital, San Diego), Sarah A. Dufek (University of California, San Diego, Psychology)
Abstract: Differential responsiveness to intervention programs suggests the inadequacy of a single treatment approach for all children with autism. One method of reducing outcome variability is to identify participant characteristics associated with different outcomes for a specific intervention. In this paper, results of two studies will be presented. In the first study an analysis of archival data that yielded two distinct behavioral profiles for treatment responders and nonresponders to a widely used behavioral intervention, Pivotal Response Training (PRT). A subsequent prospective study validates the profiles. In the second study, children whose behavioral profiles differed on one of the profile elements were presented with PRT training. Data suggest that as the elements of the profile vary, so does child response to PRT. Also, data suggest that the PRT predictive profile was NOT predictive of child response to another widely used behavioral treatment, discrete trial training, thus suggesting the PRT profile is indeed specific to PRT responsiveness and not of treatment outcome in general.
 
The Development of Verbal Behavior in Children with Autism: Predicting Language Outcome.
DEBRA ANNE RAUSCH (University of California, San Diego, Autism Research Program), Laura Schreibman (University of California, San Diego)
Abstract: One of the central features of autism involves the great range of behavioral and cognitive profiles present in children diagnosed with this disorder. This variation makes it increasingly difficult to efficiently tailor language interventions to effectively meet the needs of each child with autism. It would be beneficial to start conceptualizing language in a uniform manner as well as develop standardized procedures that would afford clinicians with the ability to reliably predict a child’s language development. The ability to make such predictions would enable clinicians to target specific area of language development more rapidly thus saving valuable time. Identification of the development of each verbal operant or functional unit of language (e.g. imitation, receptive language, echo, requests, labels, conversation, etc.) throughout a course of behavioral therapy has not previously been researched. Such information will afford clinicians the opportunity to proactively manipulate treatment variables within the behaviorally-based intervention resulting in more rapid and functional language acquisition. The current paper will discuss research that seeks to identify the specific treatment variables/child characteristics that impact the development of each of the verbal operants. More specifically, this study is looking at the relationship between the development of each verbal operant and the child’s behavioral profile.
 
Developing a Clinician-Friendly Assessment Tool for a Naturalistic Behavioral Intervention.
SARAH A. DUFEK (University of California, San Diego), Marie L. Rocha (University of California, San Diego), Laura Schreibman (University of California, San Diego), Aubyn C. Stahmer (Children's Hospital, San Diego)
Abstract: The heterogeneity in treatment outcome for children with autism argues strongly for strategies to prescribe treatment based on child characteristics. Previous research in our laboratory has produced a predictive profile for children with autism identifying responders and nonresponders to a naturalistic behavioral treatment, Pivotal Response Training. This PRT profiles is based on six child behaviors found to be relevant to treatment response. The profile behaviors include Toy Contact, Approach, Avoidance, Verbal Self-Stimulation, and Nonverbal Self-Stimulation. Although previous research has shown this profile to be predictive, specific, and useful, the assessment of the profile requires time and coding that make it difficult to implement in applied settings. If evidence-based practices are to be translated into community settings, barriers to implementation, such as difficult assessment procedures must be addressed. The primary goal of the present study is to modify the original assessment designed for laboratory research into a “clinician-friendly” measure that is convenient to use in the natural environment. This clarification of the profile will allow a clinician to make more informed decisions regarding adding PRT to a child’s behavioral intervention program. Issues addressed are the importance of early and effective intervention for children with autism and dissemination of research based practice into applied settings.
 
 
Paper Session #111
International Paper Session - OBM Paper Series - Applications of Organizational Behavior Management in Industry
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Vancouver
Area: OBM
Chair: Howard John Lees (Hollin Consulting, Ltd.)
 
Application of OBM/PM in Pharmaceutical Manufacturing
Domain: Service Delivery
KEVIN J. MUNSON (Pfizer Global Manufacturing), Matthew L. Miller (Pfizer Global Manufacturing), Keith E. Ruckstuhl (Pfizer Global Manufacturing)
 
Abstract: The procedures and results of various onging and completed OBM projects will be reviewed.
 
Behavioural Management Techniques: Case Studies from the UK
Domain: Applied Research
HOWARD JOHN LEES (Hollin Consulting, Ltd.)
 
Abstract: Howard’s paper describes the use of behavioural techniques applied to business performance in a number of major companies in the UK over the last 5 years. He will describe the various problems encountered translating the tools into English culture and also cover a number of shaping steps which culminated into an effective working model for knowledge transfer.Howard has now set up a federation of like-minded engineers who have retrained in behavioural techniques and are successfully spreading knowledge via a train-the-trainer programme within each client organisation. Using an extranet he has gathered data on student output and business improvements and also uses a web based tool for ‘advocates’ to report on their business improvement plans. He will describe the reinforcing process which occurs as the ‘advocates’ receive R+ as and when they update their projects, he will also cover how behavioural dysfunctions threatened the new processes and how these were removed.
 
Behavioral Safety at Halliburton: How Many Observations are Enough?
Domain: Applied Research
PAULA MARIE WHITNEY (Halliburton), John Austin (Western Michigan University)
 
Abstract: Most companies today want hard measures to determine level of performance. This leads to a relentless focus on numbers. Number of observations is an obvious target for measurement in a behavior observation & feedback process. So how many observations are needed to change employee behavior? Is more always better when it comes to observations or is there a point reached when the law of diminishing returns applies? Are there cases where employee behavior isn’t changing and more observations won’t help? Data from over a dozen observation & feedback processes is analyzed in an effort to develop guidelines useful in answering these questions. Different cultures, leadership, and support systems are taken into account. Measures other than number of observations are suggested as an alternative or supplement. Information presented here may be used as a guide in setting meaningful targets and monitoring overall effectiveness of a behavior observation & feedback process.
 
 
 
Paper Session #112
International Paper Session - Precision Teaching and Academic Skills
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Auburn
Area: EDC
Chair: Marylorraine Spruill (Georgia ABA)
 
Brief Precision Teaching Interventions to Increase Reading Fluency of High Frequency Words in Problem Readers
Domain: Applied Research
J. CARL HUGHES (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, University of Wales, Bangor), Michael Beverley (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, University of Wales, Bangor), Juliet Whitehead (School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor)
 
Abstract: A 10-week brief intervention programme was designed to increase the reading fluency of high frequency English words in 5 pupils (age 11-12) whose reading age was considerably below their chronological age. Precision Teaching (PT) and fluency building procedures were used to count, record, chart, and make instructional decisions about each child’s progress. The study concentrated on building fluency in the most common English words using SAFMEDS and randomised practice sheets; children conducted practice runs followed by timings on days they normally received supportive studies for reading (3 x 20 minutes / week). Two children with similar reading difficulties acted as controls and received the standard reading support during the same periods. All pupils’ fluency was tested through the following outcome measures: retention, endurance, application, and stability. All 5 of the PT pupils increased their reading fluency on targeted words, while the control children made no such progress. The data demonstrate the effectiveness and practicality of a brief PT intervention, and that successful interventions need not be expensive or time-consuming.
 
Mastery Fluency of Math Facts in Two Learning Channels and Generalization to Written Tests
Domain: Basic Research
MARYLORRAINE SPRUILL (Georgia ABA), Sang Seok Nam (Albany State University)
 
Abstract: This study demonstrates that the learning channel intervention, utilizing a continuous assessment system, enabled 3 students with special needs to build and generalize fluency in multiplication facts. This study contrasts generalization of 2 learning channels- “see-say” and “hear-say”- to see if either of the 2 channels has an advantage over the other. The data from this study suggests that the particular learning channel was influential in generalization to application. The findings of this study indicate the “hear-say” learning channel has an advantage in the generalization of learning over the “see-say” learning channel. However, this preliminary finding suggests further studies employing a design in which 2 intervention modes can be alternated in 2 groups of participants.
 
Using SAFMEDS to Learn Welsh Vocabulary in 2nd Language Learners
Domain: Applied Research
J. CARL HUGHES (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, University of Wales, Bangor), Michael Beverley (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, University of Wales, Bangor)
 
Abstract: SAFMEDS cards were used to teach Welsh vocabulary to second language learners in four year 7 classes (12-year-olds). One class was randomly allocated to a waiting list control. 200 words were selected from the curriculum to be studied that term; to establish a baseline all classes were given a pre-test to determine the number of words already known. Children in the SAFMEDS intervention classes were given packs of Welsh-English cards and required to pair up with another pupil; both were instructed to conduct a practice run followed by a 1-minute timing at the start of each 50-minute lesson (3 lessons per week). They then scored their corrects and incorrects and charted their data on semi-log charts. The procedure took less than 5 minutes, after which the teacher continued with the scheduled lesson. The control class received their normal Welsh classes. The intervention spanned four weeks of the term and was followed with a post-test of the target words for all classes. The intervention children significantly out-performed the control children. The study demonstrates that, even with brief exposure, SAFMEDS are an efficient and effective method to enhance vocabulary learning within the context of second language learning classes.
 
 
 
Symposium #113
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Research in the Analysis and Treatment of Trichotillomania
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Baker
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University)
CE Instructor: Raymond G. Miltenberger, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium includes four papers describing recent research on trichotillomania (chronic hair pulling) with adults and children and represents the most recent behavior analysis research in this area. The first paper describes a treatment study evaluating habit reversal and adjunct treatments for hair pulling by adults. The second study describes factors, identified from a descriptive functional assessment, that are functionally related to hair pulling by adults and that may predict treatment success and relapse. The third study reports the types of comorbid mental health conditions experienced by children diagnosed with trichotillomania seen at a specialty clinic for children with chronic hair pulling. The fourth study evaluates the utility of different self-monitoring methods for chronic hair pulling by children.

 
Analysis of Habit Reversal and Adjunct Treatments in the Treatment of Trichotillomania.
CANDICE JOSTAD (Western Michigan University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Amy Mackner (North Dakota State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of habit reversal for treatment of chronic hair pulling in adults and to evaluate adjunct treatments if habit reversal was not entirely effective. Six women participated. We measured the number of hairs pulled daily through participant self-monitoring and the damage to the affected area through a rating scale of hair loss. Results showed that hair pulling was greatly diminished to near zero for three participants with habit reversal consisting of awareness training, competing response training, and social support. Adjunct treatments, consisting of relaxation training, a behavioral contract, and response prevention procedures, were needed for 3 participants. We discuss the need for individualized treatment planning when habit reversal is not effective.
 
Factors Contributing to Hair Pulling, Treatment Effectiveness, and Relapse.
PETER J. KNUDSON (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Candice Jostad (Western Michigan University), Amy Mackner (North Dakota State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to identify the antecedents and consequences functionally related to hair pulling and to discuss factors related to the effectiveness of treatment and relapse. We collected functional assessment information via interview for 10 individuals who engage in chronic hair pulling. The antecedents consist of negative emotional experiences, stress or tension, boredom, lack of activity, and being alone, with all participants’ experiences being slightly different. The self-reported consequences are consistent with an automatic negative reinforcement function for the behavior (relief from negative emotions, tension, or unpleasant sensations). Factors related to the effectiveness of treatment and relapse, identified for 6 individuals receiving habit reversal treatment, include the presence of a social support person, compliance with the treatment procedures, and stressful events or negative life experiences (e.g., marital conflict). The implications of these factors for successful treatment are discussed.
 
Children and Trichotillomania: Behavioral Problems and Comorbid Concerns.
CHRIS A. FLESSNER (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Christine A. Conelea (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Michael B. Himle (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Andrew Busch (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Chad Wetterneck (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee)
Abstract: This paper provides an overview of behavioral problems and comorbid mental health concerns found in children diagnosed with Trichotillomania (TTM). Participants include children assessed as part of the third author’s Tic Disorder and Trichotillomania Specialty Clinic or children assessed as part of ongoing research at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee’s department of psychology. Each child, the child’s parent(s), and the child’s teacher completed several self-report forms, while the child and child’s parent(s) also completed a clinical interview. Results indicated that children diagnosed with TTM may display average to above average intelligence, and may experience increased levels of anxiety, somatic symptoms, and may be increasingly more withdrawn from their peers. Conclusions, implications for treatments recommendations, limitations, and future areas of research are discussed.
 
The Assessment of Trichotillomania Severity in Children and Adolescents: An Examination of Several Self-Monitoring Procedures.
CHRIS A. FLESSNER (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Douglas W. Woods (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee)
Abstract: This paper provides an examination of several methods of self-monitoring for use in the assessment of hair pulling severity in children and adolescents diagnosed with TTM. Participants are currently being recruited through referrals to the second author’s Tic Disorder and Trichotillomania Specialty Clinic at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee’s department of psychology. The current study will follow an ABACA design and will examine three methods of self-monitoring; (1) use of a golf-counter, (2) golf-counter + frequent reminders from the participant’s parent(s), and (3) golf counter + reminders + daily reminders from the first author. This study is currently in progress, and data will be presented as to the method of assessment providing the most accurate and reliable data regarding the severity of an individual’s hair pulling problem. Conclusions, implications for the future assessment of hair pulling severity, limitations, and future areas of research will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #114
CE Offered: BACB
Research on Behavioral Characteristics of the Prader-Willi Syndrome
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Centennial Ballroom IV
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida)
CE Instructor: Brian A. Iwata, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium provides an overview of the Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS) and summarizes research related to three of its major behavioral characteristics: food preference (poor diet), exercise, and self-injurious behavior.

 
Overview of the Prader-Willi Syndrome.
STEVE DRAGO (Alachua County Association for Retarded Citizens)
Abstract: This presentation will provide a general description of the Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS) and the clinical context for the current research. PWS is a genetic disorder associated with mild mental retardation and a variety of clinical and behavioral features. The most striking behavioral characteristic of PWS is hyperphagia (overeating), which leads to extreme obesity and life-threatening complications, including hypertension, heart disease, and diabetes. The UF-ARC project provides residential and vocational services to approximately 50 individuals with PWS, making it one of the largest in the country. Two unique features of the program include its extensive use of behavioral technology across all aspects of service delivery and its emphasis on research as the basis for program development and revision.
 
Determinants of Food Preference in Individuals with Prader-Willi Syndrome.
JESSICA L. THOMASON (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Florida)
Abstract: Previous research has shown that several characteristics of reinforcers and their delivery, including quality, magnitude, delay, etc., may affect preference. We examined the influence of those characteristics on food preferences in individuals with Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS), a genetic disorder in which excessive food consumption is a major problem behavior. Preference assessments were conducted initially to identify foods that were of “high quality” (highly preferred). Next, baseline sessions were conducted to examine behavioral sensitivity to reinforcer quality, magnitude, and delay. Two response options were available; one response was associated with the optimum value of a characteristic; the second response was associated with a lower value of a characteristic (e.g., one response resulted in immediate reinforcer delivery; the other response resulted in delayed reinforcer delivery). The relative influence of each characteristic on responding was evaluated during a final phase, in which the values of two characteristics were simultaneously manipulated, and response allocation was measured. Results are discussed in terms of implications for the assessment and treatment of dietary management and food-related problem behaviors.
 
Descriptive and Experimental Research on Exercise in the Prader-Willi Syndrome.
CLAUDIA L. DOZIER (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Jessica L. Thomason (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida)
Abstract: Physical exercise is an important therapeutic intervention in the management of life-threatening obesity, a prominent clinical feature of Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS). To date, however, very few studies have been conducted on the occurrence of physical exercise in individuals with PWS. We conducted a descriptive study initially to identify types of physical activity (e.g., sitting, laying down, walking, running, cleaning) exhibited by individuals with and without PWS throughout their daily routines. We subsequently evaluated the effects of a reinforcement contingency to increase the frequency of exercise by individuals with PWS. Of particular interest was an assessment of the utility of conjugate reinforcement schedules as maintenance procedures. Access to preferred activities (music, television) was available under conjugate or more traditional ratio schedules, and both performance and preference were examined. Results of this comparison are discussed with respect to the use of non-food interventions to increase the occurrence of exercise for individuals diagnosed with PWS.
 
Prevalence and Functions of Self-injurious Behavior in the Prader-Willi Syndrome.
PAMELA L. NEIDERT (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Florida), Jessica L. Thomason (University of Florida)
Abstract: It has been noted that individuals with Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS) often engage in self-injurious behavior. The most commonly reported form of SIB is skin picking (Dykens & Shah, 2003). In the current study, we established the prevalence, frequency, and severity of SIB in individuals with PWS by way of a structured questionnaire sent to all providers registered with the National Prader-Willi Syndrome Association of the USA. Second, we conducted experimental analyses to identify the functional characteristics of SIB in a sample of PWS individuals. Results are discussed in terms of form and function of SIB in individuals with PWS, as well as the implications these findings have for treatment development.
 
 
Symposium #115
CE Offered: BACB
Some Current Research in the Application of the Verbal Behavior Approach to Teaching Children with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Learning Center
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic)
CE Instructor: Vincent Joseph Carbone, Ph.D.
Abstract:

B. F. Skinner (1957) provided a conceptual tool for analyzing the acquisition of language or verbal behavior. His conceptual analysis has encouraged research to emprirically verify his claims of the benefit of a natural science approach to the understanding and development of verbal behavior. During the past 25 years a body of empirical literature has emerged which has begun to provide support for the basic concepts he outlined in his theoretical analysis. The purpose of this symposium is to present four(4) data based research papers which apply Skinners conceptual analysis of verbal behavior to three (3) important topics in the treatment of children with autism, e.g. teaching the mand repertoire, use of alternative communication methods to develop vocal responding and methods to strengthen the echoic repertoire. The first two (2) papers will present data regarding methods to bring the mand repertoire under the control of motivational variables and methods to increase the number of items in the environment that will serve as a form of reinforcement. In the third paper the author will present data to support the use of sign language and other independent variables that successfully increased the frequency and variety of speech sounds produced by children with limited vocal repertoires. The last paper will provide data comparing the effects of two (2) different methods of teaching the echoic repertoire. Final comments will be offered regarding the application of these experimental findings to treatment programs for children with autism.

 
Transferring Control for the Mand Repertoire to the Motivating Operation in Children with Autism.
EMILY J. SWEENEY (Carbone Clinic), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Leigh Mariano O'Brien (Carbone Clinic), Gina Zecchin (Carbone Clinic), Marietta Nel Janecky (Carbone Clinic)
Abstract: The mand repertoire allows the speaker to effectively control the social environment. While the motivative operation is ultimately the controlling antecedent variable for the mand, clinical experience has demonstrated that many learners with autism fail to acquire mands exclusively under the control of the MO and a listener. The purpose of this study was to replicate the findings of previous studies related to mand training and to develop a modified time delay procedures in order transfer stimulus control of mands from the multiple control exerted by a discriminative stimulus such as presence of the item desired and motivation, to mands primarily under the control of MO and a listener. In addition, this study was designed to extend the previous findings to the treatment of children with autism and to develop procedures that could be easily implemented by teachers and instructors in educational settings.
 
Increasing the Mand Repertoire of Children with Autism Using the Transitive Establishing Operation.
DANIELLE DRAPER (Carbone Clinic), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Emily J. Sweeney (Carbone Clinic), Margaret Murdoch Hagerty (Carbone Clinic), Zachary T. Ikkanda (Carbone Clinic)
Abstract: The transitive conditioned establishing operation (CEO) appears to be most relevant to the conditioning of stimuli as reinforcers (Sundberg, 2005) and may play an important role in teaching language to children with autism who fail to acquire verbal behavior through typical means. The transitive establishing operation converts neutral stimuli to conditional conditioned reinforcers and therefore evokes all responses that have in the past been strengthened by their delivery. By contriving this type of situation a teacher could condition items or activities in the environment as reinforcers and use these now established reinforcers to teach language disordered persons to mand for them. Moreover, by using the transitive EO to condition items as reinforcers in a chain of responses, language disordered children can be taught to mand for items primarily under the control of the EO and therefore free their responses from the additional control exerted by the presence of the item. The purpose of this study transitive EO study was the replicate previous finding that have identified the transitive EO as an independent variable relevant to the teaching of the mand and to verify the effects of the repertoire with children with autism.
 
Increasing Vocalizations of Children with Autism Using Sign Language and Mand Training.
VIVIAN A. ATTANASIO (Independent Consultant), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Lisa Delaney (Hudson Valley Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Gina Zecchin (Carbone Clinic)
Abstract: Manual sign language has been shown to support the development of vocal verbal behavior in some individuals with autism and developmental disabilities (Mirenda & Erickson, 2000; Mirenda, 2003; Tincani, 2004). However, there is a subset of children with autism for whom sign language may not facilitate vocal production (Mirenda, 2003). In those cases it may be necessary to add other behavioral interventions to increase the development of vocal responding. Language training programs that manipulate motivative variables to teach manding have been shown to increase spontaneity (Shafer, 1994) and vocalizations (Charlop-Christy, Carpenter, LeBlanc & Kellett, 2002). In addition time delay procedures have also been effective in increasing vocal spontaneity and production when a vocal model was provided. Although demonstrated effective with participants who had a vocal repertoire, the time delay procedure has not been previously tested for its value in evoking novel vocal responses in children with autism who emitted very few vocalizations. The purpose of this study was to determine the effects of sign mand training combined with a time delay, vocal prompt, and differential reinforcement procedure on the development of vocalizations in children with autism for whom sign language mand training alone had not produced vocal responding.
 
Teaching the Echoic Repertoire.
GINA ZECCHIN (Carbone Clinic), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Emily J. Sweeney (Carbone Clinic)
Abstract: Vocal imitation training is the most commonly used method of improving articulation in children with deficient echoic repertoires. This technique involves presenting the final form of a targeted word and reinforcing the child’s increasingly closer approximations of the word. Difficulties arise, however, when children’s improvements in approximations cease and parity of the final form is never achieved. Alternative procedures to improving the echoic repertoire suggest, however, that by presenting successive approximations to the final form of the word and reinforcing parity of these approximations, word production may be better shaped. Therefore the purpose of this study was to compare the effects of two interventions designed to improve deficient echoic repertoire of children with autism. The interventions compared included traditional vocal imitation procedures in which the final form of the targeted words was presented and the Kaufman Speech Praxis Treatment Kit in which successive approximations to the final form of the targeted words was presented.
 
 
Symposium #117
Strategies for Enhancing Staff Training, Performance Monitoring, and Quality of Work Life
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
International Ballroom North
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.)
Discussant: David A. Rotholz (University of South Carolina (UCEDD))
Abstract: This symposium will present results of three behavior analytic studies providing new information relevant to monitoring, training, and motivating work performance of direct support staff in developmental disabilities, respectively. The first study demonstrates how targeted staff performance can be reactive to typical monitoring procedures used in staff management. Reactivity to monitoring was demonstrated using a reversal experimental design involving conditions of apparent and nonapparent observations of work behavior. This study also demonstrates how staff reactivity to monitoring can be used proactively to maintain performance through staff self-monitoring. The second study employed a repeated measures, between groups design to demonstrate how use of a video can expedite training staff to implement behavior support plans with individuals with challenging behavior relative to exclusive reliance on a traditional, live training method. The third study demonstrates how staff motivation in terms of reported enjoyment with work can be increased by making disliked work tasks more preferred for staff. Results of all three studies are discussed in terms of research-based findings for enhancing staff training and management practices.
 
Effects of Staff Reactivity to Observations on Evaluating and Promoting Performance Maintenance.
DENNIS H. REID (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.), Leah Brackett (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Carolyn W. Green (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Abstract: Reactivity of staff performance to a common observation process used to evaluate maintenance of behavior change was evaluated. Initially, the intent was to replicate an outcome management program for improving staff performance. The program was applied with 2 job coaches to decrease their completion of work-break activities for 4 supported workers with severe disabilities, and increase worker involvement in completing the activities themselves. Job coach completion of activities for the workers decreased when the management program was implemented, with effects appearing to maintain across a 16-week period. Subsequently, a comparison was made of job coach behavior during conditions of apparent versus nonapparent observations of their performance. Results indicated the coaches completed much less of the activities for the supported workers during the former condition, suggesting improved performance maintained only when it was apparent that observations were occurring. When job coaches then self-recorded their performance, their completion of break activities for the workers remained low while observations were not apparent. Results are discussed regarding implications of staff reactivity to follow-up observations in investigations reporting maintenance of staff behavior.
 
Preparing Staff to Implement Behavior Plans: Effectiveness and Efficiency of Live Versus Video Training.
NIAMH P. O'KANE (Arlington Developmental Center), Kenneth M. Macurik (Arlington Developmental Center), Paul Malanga (Arlington Developmental Center), Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.)
Abstract: A comparison was conducted of the efficiency and effectiveness of training staff to implement treatment plans for challenging behavior among people with developmental disabilities in a residential setting using live versus video training. During initial classroom-based training, a behavior analyst trained 8 staff in live meetings in which the plan was explained vocally and with written handouts. The same information was used to train 9 staff using a VHS video. Staff knowledge of the plan was assessed with a written quiz. Subsequently, staff knowledge and performance skills were assessed on the job (as part of on-the-job training). Results showed the two types of training were essentially equivalent regarding staff acquisition of verbal and performance skills. However, the video training required significantly less time per staff member and the behavior analyst (following development of the video) than live training. These results were then replicated with another group of staff and behavior analyst. Overall results are discussed regarding advantages and disadvantages of the two types of training regarding effectiveness, efficiency, and staff acceptance.
 
Enhancing Quality of Work Life: Strategies for Making Disliked Work Task More Preferred for Staff.
CAROLYN W. GREEN (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Susan Passante (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Vicki S. Canipe (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.), Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.)
Abstract: A supervisory/consultative strategy was evaluated for increasing the preferred nature of disliked work tasks among 3 support staff in a residential facility. Baseline measures of preferred and nonpreferred work tasks were initially obtained by staff repeatedly ranking and rating their most common work tasks. Next, a supervisory/consultative strategy was implemented in a multiple probe fashion across staff and work tasks. Tasks were selected for the intervention based on their rankings and ratings as being the least preferred by respective staff persons. The intervention strategy involved altering each task by including desired events and items as part of the task-completion process. Results indicated that the strategy was accompanied by changes in ratings of the targeted work tasks that indicated each respective task became more preferred by each staff person. Additionally, for 2 of the 3 staff, the target task was no longer ranked as the least preferred work task following the intervention. Results are discussed in regard to enhancing the preferred nature of disliked work tasks as a potential means of increasing the quality of staff work life.
 
 
Symposium #118
CE Offered: BACB
The Acquisition of Novel Operants through Observational Learning and Peer Tutoring
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Courtland
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Amy J. Davies Lackey (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Discussant: Amy J. Davies Lackey (Hawthorne Country Day School)
CE Instructor: Amy J. Davies Lackey, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Explanations of the phenomenon of observational learning as well as its operational definition have been a source of debate and research since the early 1960s (Bandura &Walters, 1963; Catania, 1998; Staats, 1975; Gewirtz, 1971; Metz, 1965). Individuals with developmental disabilities, such as those with a diagnosis of autism, share a common deficit in the area of social and academic skills (Bauminger, 2002). An example of these deficits includes the ability to learn through observation, a critical repertoire in succeeding in less restrictive environments. The research reported herein provide an expanded analysis of several tactics on the development of observational learning in children with autism who did not have such repertoires.

 
The Acquisition of Observational Learning via Yoked Peer Contingencies and Video Modeling.
AMY J. DAVIES LACKEY (Hawthorne Country Day School), Marisa Savard (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Abstract: The purpose of these experiments was to test the relationship between video modeling and yoked peer contingency and the acquisition of an observational learning repertoire. A multiple baseline design across participants and within participants across the two modeling conditions (video and in vivo) and across academic and social tasks was used. Each participant was presented two similar tasks from his or her curriculum; one task was used for the video condition, while the other was used for the in vivo condition and paired with the yoked peer contingency. The primary dependent variable in this experiment was the number of correct tacts that the Observer emitted in the initial probe for observational learning and post-yoked peer contingency probe for observational learning. This dependent variable was used to determine existence of an observational learning repertoire. The independent variable was the presentation and use of the yoked peer contingency, and the video modeling. Results are presented in terms acquisition of tasks for in vivo modeling, and video modeling and their efficiency in promoting generalization. Additional results are discussed in terms of video modeling and the yoked peer contingency’s motivating and attention maintaining qualities.
 
A Comparison of Video Modeling and Yoked Peer Contingencies on the Acquisition of Observational Learning.
SARAH NATARELLI (Shema Kolainu)
Abstract: The purpose of these experiments was to test the relationship between video modeling and yoked peer contingency and the acquisition of an observational learning repertoire across multiple school settings. A multiple baseline design across participants and within participants across the two modeling conditions (video and in vivo) and across academic and social tasks was used. Each participant was presented two similar tasks from his or her curriculum; one task was used for the video condition, while the other was used for the in vivo condition and paired with the yoked peer contingency. The primary dependent variable in this experiment was the number of correct tacts that the Observer emitted in the initial probe for observational learning and post-yoked peer contingency probe for observational learning. This dependent variable was used to determine existence of an observational learning repertoire. The independent variable was the presentation and use of the yoked peer contingency, and the video modeling. Results are presented in terms acquisition of tasks for in vivo modeling, and video modeling and their efficiency in promoting generalization. Additional results are discussed in terms of video modeling and the yoked peer contingency’s motivating and attention maintaining qualities.
 
The Role of Peer Tutoring in the Acquisition of Verbal Operants.
SUDHA RAMASWAMY (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Abstract: We present experiments with 3 children with developmental disabilities that identify how peer tutoring can function as a procedure to teach children to emit verbal operants with peers in play setting using a multiple baseline design. The dependent variable consisted of the number of verbal operants emitted in play settings (90-100% interobserver agreement). The results showed a change in level of the emission of verbal operants in comparing baseline to post-treatment sessions. In addition to the 3 target participants, 3 peers were taught to monitor the tutoring sessions and (correct and incorrect responses of their peers as well as to monitor the delivery of reinforcers by peers). The treatment consisted of the monitors completing a series of teaching sessions in which they learned to monitor their assigned peers correct and incorrect responses as well as to monitor the delivery of reinforcement during instruction. The results demonstrated a higher level of emission of verbal operants between the monitors and fellow peers in the classroom in post-treatment in comparison to baseline sessions. The results showed that the participants’ emission of verbal operants was not localized to the peers that were in direct instruction, but also to the monitors who were taught to observe peer tutoring sessions.
 
 
Symposium #119
CE Offered: BACB
The Effect of Precision Teaching with Frequency-Building of Component Skills on Application to Composite Skills
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Centennial Ballroom III
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sandra L. Harris (Rutgers University)
Discussant: Carl V. Binder (Binder Riha Associates)
CE Instructor: Marlene Cohen, Ed.D.
Abstract:

The Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center has been in the process of incorporating Precision Teaching with frequency building procedures over the past several years in an effort to answer a multitude of research questions regarding best practice for older learners with autism. The papers will address an overview of the research outcomes compiled over a one-year period utilizing a multiple probe across subjects design. The first paper will review the results of frequency building with an adult with autism and childhood hemiplegia. Data will be presented on the acquisition of a fluency target (free-grasp/place/release) and the generalized effects of this type of instruction on vocational performance. The second paper will focus on the implementation of frequency building procedures with an adult with autism and a genetic syndrome. The results of frequency-building of conversation topics (see-say topics, followed by free-say topics) and the generalized effects of instruction on spontaneous conversation throughout the work day. The third paper will discuss the results of fine motor skill frequency building (free-grasp/place/release) for an adult with autism and cerebral palsy. The effects of frequency building on the performance of activities of daily living will be discussed. The three subjects participated in a multiple probe design, with implementation of frequency-building procedures staggered in three-month periods.

 
The Effect of Precision Teaching of Fine Motor Skills on Application to Vocational Skills in an Adult with Autism.
DONNA L. SLOAN (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center), Marlene Cohen (Rutgers University)
Abstract: This paper will review the results of frequency building with an adult with autism and childhood hemiplegia. A multiple probe design was implemented. Data will be presented on the acquisition of a fluency target (free-grasp/place/release) and the generalized effects of this type of instruction on vocational performance (envelope stuffing, folder assembly and copying machine use).
 
The Effect of Precision Teaching of Component Skills on the Application to Conversation Skills in an Adult with Autism.
DONNA L. SLOAN (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center), Marlene Cohen (Rutgers University)
Abstract: This paper will focus on the implementation of frequency building procedures of see-say conversation topics with an adult with autism and a genetic syndrome. The results of frequency-building of conversation topics and the generalized effects of instruction on the number and content of conversation topics throughout the work day were examined. A multiple probe design was utilized.
 
The Effect of Precision Teaching of Fine Motor Skills on the Performance of Activities of Daily Living in an Adult with Autism and Cerebral Palsy.
MARLENE COHEN (Rutgers University), Donna L. Sloan (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center)
Abstract: This third paper will discuss the results of fine motor skill frequency building (free-grasp/place/release) for an adult with autism and cerebral palsy. The effects of frequency building on the performance of activities of daily living will be discussed. A multiple probe design was implemented. The effect of minimal opportunity to practice on application to composites was examined.
 
 
Symposium #120
CE Offered: BACB
International Symposium - The Induction and Prevalence of Naming and Related Higher Order Operants in Young Children
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Singapore
Area: DEV; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School)
CE Instructor: R. Douglas Greer, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Research on naming has traditionally investigated naming in terms of its relation to stimulus equivalence or relational frames. More recently naming has also been investigated as a verbal development capability related to Skinner speaker-as-own listener and the experimental identification of multiple exemplar experiences as a sufficient intervention to induce naming in children who were missing naming capabilities. We shall present experiments on the induction of naming, its prevalence in, and relations to functionally analyzed theory of mind tests, and tests of a role of verbal behavior in equivalence relations in children with and without language delay diagnoses.

 
Experiments on the Induction of Naming In Children With and Without Verbal Delays.
R. DOUGLAS GREER (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Lauren M. Stolfi (The Fred S. Keller School), Carol A. Fiorile (Private Consultant), Lina Gilic (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: We will review a series of experiments in the induction of naming as a function of multiple exemplar experience for children with autism or other language delays in which the naming capability was missing. We also induced naming in typically developing 2-year olds who were missing the capability at the time of assessment. In addition we assessed the prevalence of naming in a sample of typically developing 2 and 3-year olds.
 
Prevalence of Naming and Observational Learning in Pre-School and First Grade Children and Relations to Other Measures.
DENISE O'SULLIVAN (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Jeanne Marie Collins-Speckman (The Fred S. Keller School & Columbia University Te), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School)
Abstract: We assessed 50 typically developing First Graders and 50 preschoolers with and without language delays for the prevalence of naming, other related higher order verbal operants, and observational learning and their relations to other language assessments. Recent research suggests that these higher order verbal operants may in fact be empirically identified stages of verbal development. We shall describe the prevalence of these repertoires before and after interventions and their relations to other types of language assessments.
 
Perspective Taking Training: A Higher Order Verbal Operant.
INMACULADA GOMEZ BECERRA (Universidad Almerí­a, Spain), Maria Jesus Martin (Universidad Almerí­a, Spain), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Mapy Chavez-Brown (Wagner College)
Abstract: The objective of this study was to develop tests that, from a functional-contextual perspective, evaluate and train perspective taking perspective skills as well as those skills that previous studies have shown to be prerequisites or closely related (Gómez, Martín, Greer and Chávez-Brown, 2004, 2005, in review). The procedures used incorporate the verbal discriminations I/you/he-she, before/after, is/isn’t, here/there; they also incorporate the shared instructional history of the observer and the one being observed, protocols of reinforcement of listener behavior, and the repertoire of speaker-as-own listener, and prompts that allowed for discrimination of the relevant elements of perspective taking. The participants were 10 children between the ages of 4 and 5 years old.
 
The Emergence of Equivalence Relationships in Verbal Development.
INMACULADA GOMEZ BECERRA (Universidad Almerí­a, Spain), Rosa García Barranco Brranco (Universidad Almerí­a, Spain), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Mapy Chavez-Brown (Wagner College)
Abstract: The objective of the present study is to identify at what point in the normative development generalized equivalence responses emerge and to analyze the role of certain prerequisites and symbolic behaviors (Horne y Lowe, 1996; Luciano, Barnes-Holmes y Barnes-Holmes, 2001; Luciano, Gómez y Rodríguez Valverde, in review). A sequential design, with repeated measures during a six-month period was used. The participants were 15 preschoolers ranging in age from 15 to 24 months. The visual-visual and visual-auditory equivalences were evaluated through matching to the sample tasks. The “receptive” and “expressive” abilities were also evaluated utilizing diverse standardized tests shown to be effective in previous studies of equivalence with infants (Peláez, Gewirtz, Sánchez y Mahabir, 2000; Horne y Lowe, 2001); the repertoire of speaker-as-own listener (Greer y Keohane, 2005); the level of development of other operants (generalized imitation and spatial-temporal relations and abstractions); direct measured obtained in structured situations, as well as indirect measured obtained from parents and educators. The results are analyzed in terms of the role of naming and the need of multiple example experiences in future procedures.
 
 
Symposium #121
International Symposium - The Temporal Control of Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Hong Kong
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Kennon A. Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Recent empirical and theoretical developments related to better understanding how temporal events come to control behavior will be presented by four groups of investigators.
 
Resistance to Change of Temporal Discrimination.
RYAN D. WARD (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Recently, Nevin and colleagues reported that baseline accuracy and resistance to change of color matching was greater in a higher reinforcement probability component (.8) than in a lower reinforcement probability component (.2). This experiment examined whether a similar result would be obtained when the stimulus to be discriminated was the duration of a temporal sample. Five pigeons responded under a multiple schedule of temporal- discrimination procedures. In one component, correct categorization of short (2 s) and long (8 s) sample durations was reinforced with a high probability (.8), while in the other component correct sample categorization was reinforced with a lower probability (.2). Consistent with previous results, baseline accuracy was higher in the high-reinforcement probability component than in the low-reinforcement probability component. Resistance to change of temporal discrimination in the two components was assessed by disrupting with prefeeding, delays between samples and comparisons, intercomponent-interval food, and extinction.
 
Analysis of Reinforcement Duration Sequence and Temporal Tracking in Pigeons.
JENNIFER J. HIGA (Texas Christian University), D. Donahue (Texas Christian University), L. Madden (Texas Christian University)
Abstract: Previous studies show that under certain conditions temporal performance on fixed interval (FI) schedules depends on the duration of the reinforcer. For example, when different reinforcer durations are intermixed within a session, post-reinforcement pause (PRP) duration depends directly on reinforcer duration. The purpose of the present study was to investigate sequential dependencies between reinforcer duration and measures of the temporal control of behavior by presenting pigeons a brief transition in the duration of reinforcement. A program delivered reinforcers according to an FI 60s and all sessions began with reinforcer duration of four seconds (standard). Reinforcer duration changed from four to eight then back to four seconds for a group of birds and from four to two back to four seconds for another group. Within each group, the relatively longer or shorter reinforcer duration either occurred in succession or were separated by the standard reinforcer duration. We will present trial-by-trial and overall measures of temporal performance and discuss the implications of our results for models of timing.
 
Resistance of Temporally Controlled Behavior to Change.
MIRARI ELKORO (West Virginia University), Kennon A. Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Pigeons were trained on a modified peak-interval procedure. Sequences with the same stimuli consisted of a variable number of FI 30s trials (2, 3, 4 or 5) and 90s unreinforced trials, were separated by a 90s blackout. Three locations within the FI trials (first, random and last) were employed for delivery of response-independent food to examine the resistance to change of stabilized temporal control. Changes from baseline were observed through calculation of quarter-life values for the FI and peak trials, peak times, and peak rates. Definition of delay of disruption gradients, likened to delay of reinforcement gradients, was possible with the results obtained.
 
Time without a Clock: Biologicaly Plausible?
JEAN-CLAUDE DARCHEVILLE (University of Lille, France)
Abstract: The various models of temporal control of behavior without any explicit timing mechanism are based on implicit neurological mechanisms. We will try to clarify them and confront them with the current biological data.
 
 
Panel #122
CE Offered: BACB
The Treatment of Aggressive/Destructive Behavior: The State of the Art
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Regency VII
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Richard M. Foxx, Ph.D.
Chair: Richard M. Foxx (Pennsylvania State University)
JAMES NICHOLSON MEINDL (Pennsylvania State University, Harrisburg)
JEFFREY S. GARITO (Pennsylvania ABA)
RICHARD M. FOXX (Pennsylvania State University)
JONATHAN W. IVY (Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract:

The education and treatment of individuals with aggressive destructive behavior is complicated and confounded by controversies that exist within the disabilities field. These controversies relate to treatment approaches, philosophy, ethics and ideology. This panel discussion will include a review of the literature since the 1989 NIH conference on destructive behavior, presentation of an index for assessing severity, and discussion of two cases illustrating the state of the art.

 
 
Symposium #123
Toilet Training Children with Autism: Prerequisites, Protocols and Problem Solving
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Chicago A-F
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kimberly Ann Kroeger (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders)
Abstract: This symposium addresses toilet training issues for children with autism. Toilet training is a critical life skill; incontinence impedes on an individual’s quality of life by restricting socialization opportunities and educational, vocational and residential placements. Selected presentations include reevaluating the “necessary” prerequisites for beginning toilet training with children with autism, an intensive protocol for training, an intervention for teaching initiation training, and assessment and intervention for bowel movement training. All presentations are data driven, provide protocol explanation and include samples of applied case studies.
 
Reevaluating “Necessary” Prerequisites for Toilet Training Children with Autism.
RENE J. SORENSEN-BURNWORTH (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Kimberly Ann Kroeger (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Shannon L. Eidman-Sheahan (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Jamie M. Lentz (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders)
Abstract: Toilet training for children with autism is often delayed due to a lack of readiness as demonstrated by not meeting traditional prerequisite criteria (e.g., show interest in toileting, show discomfort when soiled). This can lead to more difficulty with training when it does occur given the longer history of incontinence. An intensive toilet training program was used with 6 children (aged 3 to 9 years) diagnosed with autism who did not meet the traditional prerequisite criteria for beginning toilet training. Five of the six children were successfully toilet trained within 7 days. One child withdrew from the program. The child who met the most number of recommended necessary prerequisites required the addition of a brief overcorrection procedure to completely train. Training success demonstrates that there are a number of skills considered prerequisite to begin toilet training that may not be necessary and rather acquired during the course of training.
 
A Reinforcement-Based Intensive Toileting Training Protocol for Children with Autism: A Model for Training Caregivers.
SHANNON L. EIDMAN-SHEAHAN (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Rene J. Sorensen-Burnworth (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Kimberly Ann Kroeger (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Jamie M. Lentz (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders)
Abstract: An intensive toileting training protocol was developed and modified from the existing empirically derived literature on toilet training individuals with developmental disabilities and applied to training in an outpatient setting. The toilet training program was composed of extended schedule sittings, hydration, graduated guidance, and positive reinforcement for voiding, as well as an educational component for training the primary caregivers of the to-be-trained children. The program has been used to successfully train over 15 children at a hospital affiliated outpatient autism treatment center. Training was initiated by the autism center staff in an intensive 6-hour block within the child’s home; continued training was implemented by the primary caregivers and follow-up consultation was provided via phone. Sample cases are highlighted from each of the training periods and components of the program.
 
Initiation Training: Decreasing Prompt Dependency for Initiating Voiding.
KIMBERLY ANN KROEGER (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Rene J. Sorensen-Burnworth (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders), Shannon L. Eidman-Sheahan (Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Kelly O'Leary Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders)
Abstract: Toilet training in an intensive model can sometimes lead to prompt dependency where the child waits for a cue in order to initiate the toileting routine. Often cues take the form of an adult providing a reminder, an auditory timer signaling time to void, or scheduled sitting times. A protocol for decreasing prompt dependency and increasing independent initiation of toileting was implemented and empirically evaluated. The protocol consists of scheduled sittings away from the toilet but within proximity to the bathroom and gradual fading of the proximity from the toileting area. Protocol explanation is provided and sample cases highlighted. Data for two children with autism are presented: one child was trained in an intensive training program (faded to initiation training within one day) and one child was schedule trained and maintained over the course of 3 months; both were successful in initiation training to independent toileting.
 
Functional Assessment and Treatment of Operant Bowel Movement Accidents in an Adolescent with Autism.
FRANK R. CICERO (Eden II Programs), Eileen Hopkins (Eden II Programs), Lorenz Neuwirth (Eden II Programs)
Abstract: The current presentation will describe and review an assessment procedure and function-based treatment protocol designed to reduce operant-based bowel movement accidents in an adolescent with autism living in a residential group home. Although the individual was trained successfully for urination, he continued to maintain a high level of bowel accidents. After medical issues were ruled out, a functional assessment procedure was designed to determine if the accidents were operant or due to a lack of generalized toilet training. It was determined that the accidents were operant and a function based treatment consisting of reinforcement, extinction and desensitization procedures was initiated. Bowel accidents reduced to near zero levels. Frequency data on accidents and successful toileting will be displayed and discussed. The presenter will stress the importance of assessing the function of bowel movement accidents before implementing a treatment protocol in individuals who are already urination trained.
 
 
Paper Session #124
Understanding and Implementing Cooperative Learning
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Inman
Area: EDC
Chair: Tim M. Barrett (The Ohio State University)
 
Cooperative Learning: What About a Behavioral Perspective?
Domain: Theory
TIM M. BARRETT (The Ohio State University), Shiri Ayvazo (The Ohio State University)
 
Abstract: Cooperative Learning (CL) has been well documented in the literature as an effective alternative teaching strategy to whole group instruction. Literally hundreds of studies have been conducted, including several meta-analyses. Interestingly, CL has been used both as an independent and a dependent variable, though rarely described in this behavioral way. Benefits include increased student academic performance and social skills, among others. Theoretically, cooperative learning has been described through cognitive, constructivist, and social interdependence orientations. In contrast, no attempt has been made to provide a thorough, behavioral description and explanation of CL. Therefore, the purpose of this paper is to discuss CL from a behavioral perspective, specifically describing the functional components of CL according to the three-term contingency. Furthermore, the two variables that account for the functional effectiveness of this instructional strategy (a) individual accountability and (b) group contingencies will be highlighted. Unfortunately, close to half of teachers who try cooperative learning give up, stating “it just doesn’t work in my classroom.” Challenges of implementing a new instructional strategy notwithstanding, we suggest that a behavioral understanding of cooperative learning might enable teachers to conduct a functional assessment and modify antecedents and consequences to achieve a more successful implementation.
 
Cooperative Learning at the College Level: Effects of Individual and Group Contingencies on Exam Performance
Domain: Applied Research
ERIN E. CARROLL (University of Tennessee), Briana L. Hautau (University of Tennessee), Robert Lee Williams (University of Tennessee)
 
Abstract: The current study follows up on previous research examining the effects of cooperative learning contingencies on the performance of high-, average- and low- performing undergraduate students. Students’ scores on consecutive multiple-choice exams served as the primary dependent measure. Additionally, scores on pre- and post-course assessments were compared. The independent variable consisted of three different cooperative-learning contingencies attached to exam performance. The contingencies were randomly assigned to three large (N=55) and three small (N=25) sections of an undergraduate course so that each contingency was applied to one large and one small section. Students were placed in 5- or 6- member heterogeneous learning teams. The first contingency awarded 7 points bonus credit on a group basis and 3 points on an individual basis. The second contingency awarded 3 points on a group basis and 7 points on an individual basis. The third contingency awarded 5 points for each dimension. Each of the contingencies was applied in a repeated-measures design, with baseline, treatment, and reversal phases. Student responses to a questionnaire provide information on several dimensions including the importance of bonus credit, group roles, likelihood of using cooperative learning in the future, and skills acquired as a result of cooperative learning.
 
 
 
Symposium #125
Within-session Changes in Responding
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:00 AM–10:20 AM
Montreal
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Benjamin L. Lawson (Washington State University)
Abstract: The topic of within-session changes in responding continues to receive much empirical and theoretical attention. Some of the more recent exploits from this productive research topic include examinations of within-session changes during sessions of drug self-administration, during pre-ratio pauses and wheel running. Examinations of drug self-administration suggest that variability and behavioral history are important factors that contribute to the regulation of drug taking. Analaysis of within-session changes in drug self-administration studies may also help clarify relationships between variables of behavioral economics. Investigations manipulating pre-ratio pauses suggest roles for predictable up-coming events in determining the relative value of current reinforcement. Investigations in wheel running propose sensitization and dishabituation are crucial process in understanding the within-session changes. The presentation of these investigations together will provide attendees with many ideas for future research and with a better understanding of the factors that contribute to within-session changes in responding.
 
Behavioral-Economic and Within-Session Analyses of the Effects of Brief Abstinence on Smoking.
BENJAMIN P. KOWAL (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Richard Yi (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Kristin M. Gatchalian (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Trent M. Trice (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Warren K. Bickel (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences)
Abstract: The relationship between nicotine deprivation and demand for cigarettes was examined in adult smokers. During 3-hour sessions, 3 puffs on a cigarette were available by completing a fixed number of pulls on a response plunger with requirements ranging from 3 to 6,000 responses. All participants completed the requirements in deprived conditions (i.e., asked not to smoke for 6 hours before the session and required to have a carbon monoxide level at least ½ of baseline) and under normal conditions (i.e., asked to smoke as normal, asked to smoke a cigarette under supervision before the experiment began, and with a carbon monoxide level similar to baseline). Rates of responding decreased rapidly following the first 20 minutes in the deprived conditions. Within-session changes in response rates were relatively flat in the normal conditions. Demand was more inelastic and intensity of demand for cigarettes was greater in deprived conditions than in normal conditions. These differences tended to be greater when only the first 20 minutes of the session were used to estimate elasticity and intensity of demand. Longer durations of abstinence have been reported to decrease demand for cigarettes. Analysis of within-session patterns may be useful in clarifying relationships between variables of behavioral economics (e.g., identifying the point at which abstinence begins to decrease rather than increase measures of demand).
 
A Parametric and Quantitative Analysis of Within-Session Changes in Ethanol-Reinforced Responding in Rats.
ERIC S. MURPHY (University of Alaska, Anchorage), Frances K. McSweeney (Washington State University), Zeljka Jutric (University of Alaska, Anchorage), Ann E. Baxter (University of Alaska, Anchorage)
Abstract: The experiment tested the hypothesis that habituation to the reinforcer occurs during sessions of ethanol-reinforced responding in Long-Evans rats. Eight rats responded for 3-s access to a 10% (v/v) ethanol solution during 30 min sessions. Reinforcers were delivered by variable interval schedules that provided programmed rates of reinforcement ranging from 60 to 480 reinforcers per hour. Rates of responding primarily decreased within sessions. The within-session pattern of responding changed with changes in the programmed rate of reinforcement. These response patterns were quantitatively evaluated by McSweeney, Hinson, and Cannon’s (1996) three-parameter sensitization-habituation equation. The parameters reflecting habituation (a & b) increased as a function of increases in the rate of reinforcement, indicating that habituation was higher at higher rates of reinforcement. No systematic changes in the sensitization parameter (c) were observed. These results are consistent with McSweeney, Murphy, and Kowal’s (2005) suggestion that habituation contributes to the regulation of drug-reinforced responding. However, these results are also consistent with alternative hypotheses, such as “satiation” to the reinforcer and motor impairment.
 
Within-session Changes in the Preratio Pause on Fixed-ratio Schedules of Reinforcement.
ADAM DERENNE (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: Within-session changes in performances under fixed-ratio schedules of reinforcement were examined in two experiments. In Experiment 1, sessions were of moderate duration (40 ratios), and in Experiment 2, sessions ended after the lesser of 2 hrs 30 min or 10 min without a response. Within-session changes were more evident in the latter case than the former. Marked changes in pause durations were observed during the session that suggest a brief period of initial sensitization to the reinforcer followed by a prolonged period of habituation. The results support the view that preratio pause durations are an index of the efficacy of the reinforcer. The findings are discussed also in relation to more general theories of schedule control.
 
Are Dishabituation and Sensitization Different Phenomenon?
ROBERTA V. WIEDIGER (Washington State University), Benjamin L. Lawson (Washington State University), Benjamin P. Kowal (University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences), Jan-Paul Sambataro (Washington State University), Frances K. McSweeney (Washington State University), Jay Wright (Washington State University)
Abstract: Several studies have used wheel running as a reinforcer. In these investigations, rats press a lever to gain access to a wheel for a short duration. One typical finding is that the rate of lever pressing decreases during the session. It is also frequently reported that stimuli presented during the session may increase the rate of lever pressing. These within-session changes in response rates may be explained by changes in the effectiveness of the reinforcer with its repeated presentation, (i.e., habituation and sensitization). However there is a dispute in the literature as to whether an increase in the effectiveness of wheel running is more accurately explained in terms of sensitization or a temporary interruption of habituation (i.e., dishabituation). This experiment tried to resolve this dispute, by introducing a tone at different points in time (i.e., at the beginning of the session, when habituation should be weak; towards the middle of the session, when habituation should be strong) during different wheel running sessions. If dishabituation and sensitization are indeed two different processes, then the tones should produce increases only when they are presented towards the middle of the session. If dishabituation and sensitization are the same phenomenon, then the tone should produce similar increases in responding regardless of when it is presented during the session.
 
 
Paper Session #126
Growth of ABA: Yin and Yang
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:30 AM–10:20 AM
Roswell
Area: TPC
Chair: Thomas P. Kitchen (Dr. Gertrude A. Barber National Institute)
 
The Growth of ABA: A Double-Edged Sword?
Domain: Theory
THOMAS P. KITCHEN (Dr. Gertrude A. Barber National Institute)
 
Abstract: Over the better part of the past decade, the ranks of professionals carrying the title "Behavior Analyst" and practicing within the field has grown considerably, as the Behavior Analyst Certification Board consistently grants professional credentials to a growing number of people pursuing careers in behavioral services. This growth has presented the field with both tremendous opportunity and tremendous challenge. This paper will describe the divergent progressions established by this growth. On one hand, growth has brought new leaders of the field who are forging ahead to push behavior analysis into levels of scope and precision never before realized. On the other hand, the spawning of a large new generation of behavior analysts has arguably had a "watering down" effect on the entire ABA field, as the fastest-growing group within the field includes those with the least amount of reverence for the scientific rigor and precision inherent in true behavior analysis. There is a growing majority of practitioners representing ABA who receive minimal training in advanced theoretical and scientific aspects of the field, and subsequently limit their work to inconsistent implementation of behavioral technology and behavioral philosophy, while failing to realize the importance of the data-based analytical hallmarks of the field.
 
The Rise of China and the Future of Behavior Analysis
Domain: Theory
MICHAEL C. CLAYTON (Youngstown State University), Jade Clayton (The Rich Center for Autism, Youngstown State University)
 
Abstract: The rise of China over the past two decades has produced spectacular changes at home and abroad. The effect of an emergent China on the United States is all around us, but as much as things have changed here, they have changed even more in China. A significant proportion of the population has seen a greatly increased standard of living and there is now a discernable middle class. This affluence has been keenly noted by foreign companies hoping to sell to a new market, but psychology has been slower to respond. Higher standards of living allow people to turn their attention to concerns other than simple survival and China is now in need of psychological services. Behavior analysis may be more ideally suited to Chinese culture than other branches of psychology. A historical/cultural predisposition towards pragmatism, empiricism, and environmental determinism are discussed, as well as the relative lack of obstacles to a behavior analytic approach. Finally, there are significant areas of need in China including educational reform, mental health/mental retardation, and organizational issues, that behavior analysts are well-equipped to address.
 
 
 
Symposium #127
Translational Research in Human Behavioral Pharmacology
Sunday, May 28, 2006
9:30 AM–10:50 AM
Piedmont
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Diana J. Walker (University of Chicago)
Discussant: Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract: Translational research involves studying socially significant problems in a rigorous laboratory environment with the eventual goal of improving clinical treatments. Human behavioral pharmacology is particularly amenable to such a laboratory investigation, and conducting such research can result in valuable information about the conditions affecting drug use, treatment efficacy, and relapse. The following symposium is intended to highlight methodological and conceptual approaches in translational behavioral pharmacology, ranging from self-administration to treatment. The first presentation (Kangas & Walker) will introduce a titration procedure for determining the optimal dose in human drug self-administration. The second presentation (Kelly et al.) will discuss how breakpoint on a progressive-ratio schedule of drug self-administration relates to high- and low-impulsive sensation seekers. Finally, the third presentation (Raiff & Dallery) will introduce a novel method for studying voucher-based reinforcement in a laboratory setting. Kenneth Silverman will conclude the symposium with a discussion.
 
A Titrating Dose Procedure to Identify the Optimal Reinforcing Dose of Nitrous Oxide with Humans.
BRIAN D. KANGAS (University of Florida), Diana J. Walker (University of Chicago)
Abstract: Despite a rise in the self-administration of nitrous oxide (N2O) for nonmedical purposes, its abuse has received much less attention from the scientific community relative to other abused drugs. The present study assessed the reinforcing effects of N2O under a choice procedure of adjusting doses. Human participants chose between an adjusting dose of N2O (started at 30% N2O in Condition 1, and 0% in Condition 2) and a fixed dose of 0% N2O. The adjusting dose titrated as a function of the participant’s choices. Sessions were divided into 4-trial blocks. During the 2 forced-choice trials, the participant sampled the adjusting and fixed dose of N2O. The participant then had two free-choice trials. If the adjusting dose was chosen on both free-choice trials, it was increased on the subsequent trial block. If the fixed dose was chosen on both free-choice trials, then the adjusting dose was decreased on the subsequent trial block. If the adjusting dose was chosen on one free-choice trial and the fixed on the other, the adjusting dose remained the same. Preliminary results suggest that N2O served as a reinforcer for some participants (observed titrated doses of 30 – 50% N2O), but not for others (preference for 0% N2O).
 
d-Amphetamine Self-Administration in High- and Low-Impulsive Sensation Seekers Using a Progressive-Ratio Procedure.
THOMAS KELLY (University of Kentucky), W. W. Stoops (University of Kentucky), G. Robbins (University of Kentucky), Carol A. Martin (University of Kentucky), Joshua Anthony Lile (University of Kentucky), Michael T. Bardo (University of Kentucky), Craig Roy Rush (University of Kentucky)
Abstract: Novelty- and sensation-seeking behavior is associated with individual differences in drug abuse vulnerability. This study examined d-amphetamine self-administration among high and low impulsive sensation seekers using a modified progressive-ratio procedure. It was hypothesized that break points on the progressive ratio task would be greater among high impulsive sensation seekers. Healthy volunteers scoring in the top and bottom quartiles of gender-adjusted population norms on the impulsive-sensation seeking scale of the Zuckerman-Kuhlman Personality Questionnaire (N=10/group) completed an 8-session study consisting of four 2-session test blocks. During the first session of each test block, subjects received 8 capsules, each containing 1/8th of a test dose. During the second session, subjects earned up to 8 test capsules by completing progressively increasing response requirements, such that 6,375 responses were required to earn all 8 capsules. Test doses (0, 8, 16 mg) were presented under randomized, double-blind conditions during the test blocks. Break points on the progressive ratio task increased as a function of dose and were greater among high sensation seekers at the 8 mg dose. This study was supported by DA-05312 and RR-15592.
 
Abstinence Reinforcement Therapy with and without a Nicotine Patch: A Laboratory Model.
BETHANY R. RAIFF (University of Florida), Jesse Dallery (University of Florida)
Abstract: We have developed a laboratory model to study key variables involved in contingency management, in the form of voucher reinforcement, with smokers. Heavy smokers attended three, 3 hr sessions in random order: 1) low voucher magnitude, 2) high voucher magnitude and 3) control, and were randomly assigned to an active patch (n = 15) or placebo patch (n = 15) group. Subjects were exposed to 4, 10-minute blocks, each separated by a 20-min cigarette free period. During the 10-min block, participants could earn money for each 30-second period that they did not take a puff from a cigarette. A standard ascending schedule of reinforcement, including a reset contingency, was used, with the value of the high magnitude condition 4 times the value of the low magnitude condition. During the control session, participants earned money regardless of whether they took a puff or not. Participants in both groups showed large reductions in the number of puffs taken when vouchers were introduced (62-89%). Active patch participants showed greater reductions in number of puffs taken than placebo patch participants across all three conditions, suggesting that combining the vouchers with a pharmacological agent may enhance smoking abstinence with the contingency management procedure.
 
 
Panel #128
CE Offered: BACB
Ethical Standards for Behavior Analysts: The Work of the Professional Affairs Committee
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Lenox
Area: CSE/TPC; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Zane, Ph.D.
Chair: Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center)
SAUL AXELROD (Temple University)
GERALD A SHOOK (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
KATHERINE A. JOHNSON (Advances Learning Center)
Abstract:

The mission of the Standards and Professional Affairs Committee (PAC) is to focus on the practice of behavior analysis, including certification, continuing education, codes of ethics, practice standards, legislation and public policy, and third party payments. This panel discussion will involve brief presentations of these topics of interest to behavior analysts who are researchers, academicians, and clinicians. The discussions and issues raised by the panel and audience will be considered by the PAC for possible presentation to the ABA Council.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #129
CE Offered: None

Operationalizing Mindfulness: Identifying Component Skills and their Relations to Mental Health Variables

Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Kelly G. Wilson, M.D.
Chair: Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
RUTH A. BAER (University of Kentucky)
Dr. Ruth Baer received her Bachelor’s degree from the University of Kansas and her doctorate in clinical psychology from West Virginia University. She is currently Associate Professor of Psychology at the University of Kentucky, where she is a member and former director of the doctoral program in clinical psychology. Her background includes training, research, and practice in applied behavior analysis, cognitive-behavioral interventions, and psychological assessment. She has served on the editorial boards of Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, The Behavior Analyst, and Education and Treatment of Children, and currently serves on the boards of Psychological Assessment, Journal of Personality Assessment and Assessment. She has completed professional training in several mindfulness-based interventions, including dialectical behavior therapy, mindfulness-based cognitive therapy, mindfulness-based stress reduction, and acceptance and commitment therapy. Her current research involves the assessment of mindfulness and related constructs, and the application of mindfulness-based treatment to disordered eating. She is editor of a forthcoming book entitled “Mindfulness-based treatment approaches: A clinician’s guide.”
Abstract:

Mindfulness is often described as paying attention to present-moment experience in a nonjudgmental or accepting way. It originates in Eastern spiritual traditions and has been adapted in a variety of ways for inclusion in several interventions that are now widely available in mental health settings. These interventions include acceptance and commitment therapy, dialectical behavior therapy, mindfulness-based cognitive therapy, and mindfulness-based stress reduction, among others. Although empirical support for these interventions is increasing rapidly, the assessment of mindfulness has received much less attention. Assessing mindfulness is critically important for understanding its relationships with other psychological variables and for investigating the processes by which mindfulness training leads to desirable outcomes. To date, most attempts to assess mindfulness use self-report methods. This talk will review the available mindfulness questionnaires and describe empirical studies of these instruments that examine components of mindfulness and their relationships to variables important to mental health. Implications for teaching mindfulness skills and for exploring the processes by which mindfulness training achieves beneficial effects will be discussed.

 
 
Paper Session #130
Spanish Track Presentation: On the Methodology of Radical Behaviorism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairlie
Area: TPC
Chair: Jose E. Burgos (Universidad de Guadalajara, Centro de Estudios e Investigaciones en Comportamiento)
 
Spanish Track Presentation: On the Methodology of Radical Behaviorism
Domain: Theory
JOSE E. BURGOS (Universidad de Guadalajara, Centro de Estudios e Investigaciones en Comportamiento)
 
Abstract: In this presentation I will argue that the methodology of radical behaviorism is outdated and must be revised. This methodology is marooned in the dichotomy between the hypothetico-deductive and the inductive method, which predominated in the heyday of logical positivism. This dichotomy, however, proved to be oversimplistic and has been largely superseded in post-positivistic philosophy of science by more elaborate and plausible methodologies. The major ones are Kuhn's disciplinary matrices (more ambiguously known as 'paradigms'), Lakatos' scientific research programmes, Feyerabend's epistemological anarchism, and Laudan's research traditions. All these methodologies have important implications for the radical-behavioristic project of scientific psychology and epistemology. A negative implication is that the rejection of the hypothetico-deductive method in behavior science becomes unattainable. A positive implication is that these methodologies lend themselves more to psychological linterpretations of scientific activity, although they favor no particular interpretation (i.e., behavior-analytic vs. cognitivistic).
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #131
CE Offered: None

The National Center for Special Education Research (NCSER) in the Institute of Education Sciences (IES): The Future of Special Education Research -- Mopping Up or Reloading the Matrix?

Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Timothy A. Slocum, J.D.
Chair: Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University)
EDWARD J. KAME'ENUI (U.S. Department of Education)
Dr. Edward J. Kame'enui was appointed the nation's first commissioner for special education research in May 2005, and assumed duties in July 2005. He is an international authority on learning problems and special education, and will lead the National Center for Special Education Research (NCSER), the fourth center established within the Institute of Education, as mandated in the 2004 reauthorization of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA). Prior to his appointment as Commissioner for NCSER, Dr. Kame’enui was Dean Knight Professor of Education at the University of Oregon, where he served as Director of the following projects: (a) The Center to Improve Reading Comprehension (Project CIRCUITS), (b) the Oregon Reading First Center (ORFC), (c) the Western Regional Reading First Technical Assistance Center (WRRFTAC), and (d) Project Vanguard: Leadership Preparation in Literacy and Positive Behavior Supports. Dr. Kame’enui’s areas of expertise include early literacy research, schoolwide reading improvement, the design of high quality educational tools, and design of instruction. Dr. Kame’enui served on the Committee on the Prevention of Reading Difficulties in Young Children of the National Research Council, and directed the Assessment Committee for the Reading First Initiative. He has published over 90 journal articles, 30 book chapters, and 14 textbooks.
Abstract:

In this presentation, Dr. Kameenui, Commissioner for the National Center for Special Education Research (NCSER), will discuss the statutory mission and requirements of the NCSER, its operation in the Institute of Education Sciences (IES), and its current activities. He will also explore the status and place of special education research in educational research writ large, and comment on the appropriate theoretical, historical, and conceptual evidentiary framework for special education research. Finally, he will describe a set of organizing principles for explicating, enhancing, and expanding special education research in the context of current federal and state initiatives, and discuss research topics that are of current importance to NCSER and IES.

 
 
Symposium #132
Biology As Destiny: The Moral, Evidential, and Conceptual Shortcomings of Evolutionary Psychology
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Dunwoody
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Ted Schoneberger (Stanislaus County Office of Education, Modesto, CA)
Discussant: Ted Schoneberger (Stanislaus County Office of Education, Modesto, CA)
Abstract: In The Mismeasure of Man, Gould (1981) defined "biological determinism" as the doctrine that "holds that shared behavioral norms, and the social and economic differences between groups . . . arise from inherited, inborn distinctions" (p. 52). A current, popular version of this doctrine is evolutionary psychology. Phillip Kitcher (1985) has criticized evolutionary psychology for offering insufficiently supported hypotheses which tend to fortify antecedently held, tradition-bound prejudices. In response, Janet Radcliffe Richards (2000) has examined Kitcher's arguments which she interprets as "left-leaning" and found them wanting. The first paper in this symposium examines how Richards' arguments fare. Steven Pinker has argued that intellectuals in our culture hold a theory of Blank Slate theory of human nature which denies that the human mind has an inherent structure. The second paper argues that the Blank Slate theory is a straw person, that there is a modern denial (or ignorance) of learning (not inheritance), and offers supporting evidence against evolutionary psychology. Finally, the third paper argues against the traditional nature/nurture dichotomy by providing a clearer conceptualization of environment at two levels of analysis, as well as examples of complex gene/environment interactions with respect to physical traits and behavior.
 
Logic, Method, and Morals in Evolutionary Psychology.
STUART SILVERS (Clemson University)
Abstract: Few disputes in science have exhibited such virulence and personal vilification as that generated by evolutionary psychology, nee sociobiology. Downright repugnance has marked some exchanges in the debate. The provocation is in the explicit claim that evolutionary psychology constitutes a scientific account of the intuitive concept of an innate human nature that, its critics argue, threatens to undermine other intuitive concepts of human well-being. Critics claim that by emphasizing evidence of natural inequalities, evolutionary psychology implies consequences that give aid and comfort to "right-wing" social agendas. Advocates reply that there is nothing in the theory which validates the purported unwelcome implications for the ideals of human well-being and that such objections are motivated by "left-wing" egalitarian ideologies presupposing the cogency of the Tabula Rasa concept. Philip Kitcher's (1982, 1985, and 2001) sustained, trenchant critique of the methodology and cultural reactions to evolutionary psychology has gone largely unanswered. Janet Radcliffe Richards (2000) has examined in detail Kitcher's methodological arguments which she interprets as "left-leaning" and found them wanting. This paper is about how her arguments fare.
 
Not So Fast Mr. Pinker: Making The Case for Human Nurture.
MATTHEW P. NORMAND (Florida Institute of Technology), Henry D. Schlinger (California State University, Los Angeles)
Abstract: Steven Pinker has argued that 1) the prevailing "theory of human nature" held by intellectuals in our culture is "the idea that the human mind has no inherent structure and can be inscribed at will by society or ourselves"--the so-called Blank Slate theory; 2) there is a corresponding denial of human nature; and 3) modern cognitive neuroscience and evolutionry psychology together are convincingly challenging the Blank Slate position. In the paper, we 1) describe this Blank Slate position as straw person; 2)argue that there is a modern denial (or ignorance) of learning, not inheritance; and then 3) describe some of the evidence against an evolutionary psychology account of human nature and in favor of a learning account, acknowledging that the development of behavior always results from the constant interaction between genes (evolution) and environment (learning).
 
Why Nature vs. Nurture Should Just Go Away.
MATTHEW P. NORMAND (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Nature or nurture? Most modern theorists stress the importance of both nature and nurture, preferring instead to question how much of a role each plays in the development of any given trait (physical or behavioral) rather than to question which is reponsible for a specific trait or which is responsible for traits in general. Although seemingly prudent, such a line of inquiry is as flawed as an either/or conceptualization of the debate. The present paper will discuss why this is so by 1) providing a clearer conceptualization of "environment" at two levels of analysis (macro-level and micro-level), 2) providing examples of the complex interaction of the environment and genes with respect to various physical traits, and 3) providing examples of the interaction of genes and the environment with respect to behavior.
 
 
Symposium #133
CE Offered: BACB
Training Echoic Repertoires in Autistic Children under Motivative and Joint Control
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:20 AM
Singapore
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Maricel Cigales (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Maricel Cigales, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Utilizing the language and theory outlined in Skinners Verbal Behavior (1957), language and learning interventions for children with autism will be explored. Empirical data from two experiments will be presented and analyzed with an emphasis on clinical first study demonstrates the effectiveness of combining motor echoic training and manipulating motivating operations to elicit generative and spontaneous verbal behavior across operant classes. The second study addresses the efficacy of training echoic rehearsal strategies to improve task performance and enable responding under joint control for autistic youth. Theoretical and process issues raised by each experiment will be addressed, particularly the superiority of topography-based, over selection-based language interventions. Additionally, the role of generalized imitation in higher order processes will be examined.

 
The Combined Effects of Motor Echoic Sign Language Training within the Context of a Motivating Operation.
KARELIX ALICEA (Florida International University)
Abstract: The significant effects that echoic, mand, and sign language training procedures have on the acquisition of verbal behavior have been widely demonstrated when employed individually. It still remains, however, that more efficient treatment strategies are still needed. The goal of this study was to combine all 3 treatment strategies into one treatment intervention in order to investigate the joint effects they may have on verbal behavior. A total of 6 subjects participated in the study, 5 whom received treatment and 1 who served as a control. Treatment intervention totaled 1 hour per day for 5 days per week until a mastery criterion for motor echoic behaviors was achieved. Despite the fact that motor echoic behaviors were the only ones targeted for skill acquisition, significant increases in spontaneous motor mands were noted in all treatment subjects. Additionally, 4 out of the 5 treatment subjects also demonstrated significant gains in vocal echoic and spontaneous vocal mand repertoires. No significant increases were noted in the responses of the control subject. This research suggests that, in comparison to conventional treatment strategies, motor echoic sign language training within a MO may provide more efficient results in teaching functional language repertoires to developmentally delayed children.
 
Training Echoic Rehearsal Strategies Improves Discriminated Responding Controlled Jointly by two Verbal Operants.
TARA M. SHEEHAN (Florida International University)
Abstract: To resolve the issue that stimulus control cannot explain generalized responding in selection-based behavior, Barry Lowenkron (1991) introduced the concept of joint control. Lownkron’s work on joint control explains the mechanism behind selection-based behavior utilizing operant principles rather than resorting to typically invoked cognitive or linguistic mechanisms. Lowenkron has demonstrated that without mediating verbal responses (echoic rehearsal), generalized responding is absent in matching to sample (1984), selection-based behavior (1991), and relational responding (1995, 2000). Examining the role of joint control in word-object relations obviates the need to rely on notions of semantics or symbolism, which are explanatory fictions characterized by circular reasoning. When two stimuli concurrently evoke a response of a single topography, that response is emitted under joint control. Typically, such a response is emitted under self-echoic/tact control jointly. This data-based presentation examines the strengthening of responding under joint control through an intervention in which young children with autism were taught to develop their own self-echoic repertoire. Participants were prompted to emit vocal echoic rehearsal responses that enabled them to complete complex discrimination tasks. The ability to use mediating verbal responses significantly improved participants’ receptive task performance.
 
BLANK
BLANK BLANK (Blank)
Abstract: BLANK
 
 
Symposium #134
A 37-year Case Study in the Design and Analysis of a Program That Survives Post-research
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Vancouver
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Deborah E. Altus (Washburn University)
Abstract: The symposium describes the step-by-step development and experimental analysis of a set of interlocking behavioral programs used to run a cooperative residence for university students. These programs were developed from 1969 to 1992 and have survived since 1992 when researchers discontinued their involvement with the cooperative. During the 23 years of involvement with the co-op, the research team developed a behavior analytic conceptual framework for designing long-lasting programs and a single subject methodology for experimentally analyzing program survival following the formal research period. This conceptual and empirical work has focused on the supports that researchers give their programs during development and analysis. A proper understanding of these supports permits simulation of post-research conditions and opens the door for direct observation and single subject experimentation. This understanding also helps researchers develop and test hypotheses about what factors may promote program survival post-research. Our method for analyzing program survival has been successfully replicated in several settings: a group of residents for people with dd, a middle school and a family. (Note: please schedule immediately preceding the panel titled "How Can Applied Behavior Analysts Develop and Experimentally Analyze Programs That Survive Post-research?")
 
The Design and Analysis of a Worksharing Program That Survives.
L. KEITH MILLER (University of Kansas)
Abstract: This paper describes the design and analysis of a token economy program for sharing the work of cleaning, food preparation and repair in a cooperative residence for university students. It reports the experimental analysis of the effectiveness of the program. It also describes the problem of promoting the survival of the program after completion of the research. Next it sets the context for the following papers each of which solved portions of the survival problem. After those papers, it reports on the ultimate survival of the program. Finally, it pulls the different papers together to draw lessons from them for how to identify, create and study the conditions that promote program survival.
 
The Development and Survival of Programs to Manage and Administer a Cooperative Residence.
TOM WELSH (Florida State University)
Abstract: This paper describes the design and analysis of two programs created to promote survival of the worksharing token economy ina student housing cooperative. The first program transferred management of the worksharing program to the residents. The second program created a democratic approach to meetings that allowed residents to adapt the token economy to changing conditions. Experimental analyses of the effectiveness of the programs include reports on their long term survival. These studies represent a first effort at simulating post-research conditions to evaluate program survival. Several lessons are proposed.
 
The Role of Member Education and Recognition in the Survival of a Student Housing Co-op.
DEBORAH E. ALTUS (Washburn University)
Abstract: This paper describes the development and analysis of two programs for promoting the health and survival of a student housing co-op using systems of member education and recognition. The education program, with a PSI (personalized system of instruction) approach, was designed to teach new members about the policies and practices of the co-op, which a focus on providing rationales for these features. The second program involved a system for members to recognize each other for outstanding participation in the co-op worksharing system. This paper describes an experimental analysis of these two programs, along with extensive follow-up data, and includes a discussion of the relationship between these programs and the long-term health and survival of the co-op.
 
Promoting Program Survival by Developing a Program to Modify Behavioral Technology.
THOMAS J. ZWICKER (Preusser Research Group)
Abstract: This paper describes the design and analysis of two programs designed to modify behavioral technology. The first program created an algorithm permitting residents to adapt a behavioral program to changing conditions. The paper reports an experimental analysis that showed the program was effective. Unfortunately the program did not survive post-research. The second program redesigned the prior program to promote its survival. The paper describes the experimental analysis of effectiveness of the program and reports on its long term survival. It ends by proposing lessons about program survival.
 
 
Symposium #135
CE Offered: BACB
An Application of Skinners Analysis of Verbal Behavior to Services for Children With Autism: Behavior Analysts, Inc. and the STARS Model
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom III
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: James W. Partington (James W. Partington, Ph.D., A Psychological Corporation)
Discussant: James W. Partington (James W. Partington, Ph.D., A Psychological Corporation)
CE Instructor: James W. Partington, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium will present information about the service delivery model based on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior to serve children with autism, their parents, and their teachers that is used at Behavior Analysts, Inc. The Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS), will be described as the focal assessment tool used in the Strategic Teaching and Reinforcement System (STARS) model classroom. Additionally, ABLLS-training opportunities are provided on an international level and will be described in the presentation. The service delivery methods used in the STARS classroom, the STARS Integrated Sites model classrooms, the Start Teaching and Reinforcing Today (START) program which provide in-clinic and in-home services to parents, and the training activities and processes used at Behavior Analysts, Inc. will be described. Exemplary data will be provided throughout the symposium to validate the models effectiveness.

 
ABLLS Training: What's New and What's Not?
JAMES W. PARTINGTON (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Stacy Apraez (Behavior Analysts, Inc.)
Abstract: This presentation will describe the focal assessment tool used throughout the service delivery applications at Behavior Analysts, Inc., the Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS) (Partington & Sundberg, 1998). Its use at the STARS model classroom, Integrated Sites, and by parents and professionals will be described.
 
STARS and START: Program Delivery Aimed at Generalized Responding.
LOLLY LEE (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Joel Vidovic (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Debbie Ramirez (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Darcy L. Bachrach (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Pamela G. Osnes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.)
Abstract: This presentation will describe the services provided at the Strategic Teaching and Reinforcement Systems (STARS) classroom of Behavior Analysts, Inc., a school that serves children with autism, and in the Start Teaching and Reinforcing Today (START) program. While STARS serves children with autism using Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior in a classroom setting, START serves the children's parents as well as parents from the community. In START, parents learn the same methods that the STARS staff use, thereby facilitating generalized responding across classroom to home for those children enrolled in STARS.
 
Integrated Sites (IS): STARS in the Community.
KATHLEEN MULCAHY (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Jamie Hughes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Joel Vidovic (Behavior Analysts, Inc.)
Abstract: This presentation will describe the services provided by the Integrated Sites (IS) component of Behavior Analysts, Inc. IS oversees STARS model classrooms in the San Francisco Bay area by providing consultation with classrooms in use of the ABLLS, behavior management, IEP development, and other related services. Additionally, IS provides assessment services on an as-needed basis to additional classrooms and schools.
 
 
Symposium #136
An Examination of Response Generalization and an Antecedent Manipulation on the Consumption of New Food Items with Children Exhibiting Food Selectivity
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Greenbriar
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Merrill J. Berkowitz (St. Joseph's Regional Medical Center)
Discussant: Mary Louise E. Kerwin (Rowan University)
Abstract: Food selectivity is a common problem encountered in the field of pediatrics (Archer, Rosenbaum, & Streiner, 1991). Several treatment procedures have been developed to increase the acceptance and consumption of a wider variety of foods in children exhibiting food selectivity (e.g., Ahearn 2002, Hoch et al., 1994). Most of these studies have examined consequence-based procedures, such as positive reinforcement and escape extinction (e.g., Ahearn et al., 1995; Hoch et al., 1994). Few studies have specifically examined antecedent based procedures and the effects that exposure has on the consumption of new food items. The following three studies examine some of those factors that influence the consumption of new food items during the treatment of food selectivity. The first study evaluates the carry-over effects of treatment on untreated food items during the acquisition of consumption for targeted food items. The second study examines the effects of treatment on response generalization across acquisition and repeated exposure of target foods. The third study examines the rate of acquisition of consumption of new foods when they are presented throughout the meal (interspersed) or consecutively. Interobserver agreement was obtained throughout each of these studies across all conditions.
 
Examining the Carry-Over Effects of Positive Reinforcement and Escape Extinction in the Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders.
ANNMARIE MARANDO (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Jaymie Barette (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Merrill J. Berkowitz (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Peggy S. Eicher (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital)
Abstract: Food selectivity is a common problem encountered in the fields of pediatrics and pediatric feeding disorders (e.g., Archer, Rosenbaum, & Streiner, 1991). Several treatment procedures, including positive reinforcement and escape extinction, have been found to be effective in increasing the consumption of new foods in children exhibiting food selectivity (e.g., Ahearn, 2002; Hoch et al., 1994). Most of these studies utilized a withdrawal design to demonstrate functional control of the procedures and the results suggest that without such procedures, consumption returns to baseline levels. The current study extends previous work by examining the possible carry-over effects of positive reinforcement and escape extinction procedures on the consumption of untreated target foods. Two children admitted to an intensive day treatment program for food selectivity participated in the study. They were presented with three groups of food each containing three target foods. Treatment procedures were systematically introduced and withdrawn within a multiple baseline across food groups design. Results of the evaluation and implications for treatment will be discussed.
 
Examining the Effects of Treatment for Pediatric Food Selectivity on Response Generalization.
JULIA LUEDEMANN (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Merrill J. Berkowitz (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Kristen Paladino (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Peggy S. Eicher (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital)
Abstract: In the area of applied behavior analysis response generalization exists when reinforced behaviors increase the occurrence of other similar but responses (Skinner, 1953). Food selectivity is one of the many different eating patterns exhibited by children with pediatric feeding disorders exhibit (Babbitt, Hoch, & Coe, 1994). Several treatment procedures, including positive reinforcement and escape extinction, have been found to be effective in increasing the consumption of new foods in children exhibiting food selectivity (e.g., Ahearn et al., 1996; Hoch et al., 1994). In examining the rates of acquisition between presenting a single food item versus multiple food items in children exhibiting food selectivity, Ahearn (2002) found that acceptance of untreated foods occurred more often when children were exposed to multiple foods. The current study extends the work of examines the effects of treatment on response generalization in two children exhibiting food selectivity admitted to an intensive day treatment program for the treatment of food selectivity. Treatment procedures were systematically introduced for increasing numbers of target foods. The consumption of 4 foods was assessed during generalization probes conducted daily throughout the admission. Results of the evaluation and implications for treatment are discussed.
 
An Examination of Two Methods for Introducing New Foods in the Treatment of Food Selectivity.
MERRILL J. BERKOWITZ (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Paula Tokar (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Lacie Edelstein (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital), Peggy S. Eicher (St. Joseph's Children's Hospital)
Abstract: Research has examined the rate of acquisition of unknown items when varying ratios of known to unknown items are presented. This research has indicated that as higher percentages of unknown items are presented, acquisition of these items will occur at higher rates (Roberts and Shapiro, 1996). One of the common difficulties reported by parents in the areas of pediatrics and pediatric feeding disorders is food selectivity (e.g., Archer, Rosenbaum, & Streiner, 1991). One study examined the effects of exposing children exhibiting food selectivity to either one or multiple foods at a time (Ahearn, 2002). Results suggested that acquisition of acceptance was faster when only one food item was presented. The current study extends that of Ahearn by examining the acquisition of consumption of new food items when presented consecutively (i.e., 100% new) as compared to interspersed (i.e., 50% new) to children exhibiting food selectivity. Two children admitted to an intensive day treatment program for the assessment and treatment of food selectivity participated in the current study. A multielement design embedded within a multiple baseline design was utilized to examine the differences in acquisition of consumption between the two conditions. Results of the evaluations, as well as implications for treatment are discussed.
 
 
Paper Session #137
Animal Behavior I
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Montreal
Area: EAB
Chair: Daniel T. Cerutti (Duke University)
 
Linking Cognition, Brain, and Genes in the Zebrafish, Danio rerio
Domain: Basic Research
DANIEL T. CERUTTI (Duke University)
 
Abstract: The zebrafish, a major developmental model of vertebrate ontogeny, provides unique access to the embryo throughout development. But most work with behavioral relevance, reviewed here, has been limited to the earliest stages and simple measures of neurological development. In recent experiments we found that zebrafish learn to time intervals at least as fast and as precisely as “higher” animals. These techniques may now be applied to the study of complex learning in these animals, providing another link between behavior analysis, neuroscience, and genetics.
 
Conditioned Reinforcer to Primary Reinforcer Schedule Effects in Basic and Applied Settings
Domain: Basic Research
JENNIFER L. SOBIE (Western Michigan University)
 
Abstract: Use of a conditioned reinforcer has become quite common in applied animal training situations, particularly in shaping novel behavior in pet and zoo environments. A common practice is to deliver the conditioned reinforcer after every response meeting criterion, and yet deliver the primary reinforcer only occasionally. However, a preliminary study in pet dogs by Wennmacher et al (2005), showed that presenting the conditioned reinforcer on a continuous schedule while presenting the primary reinforcer after every other click produced increased responding on the FR1 SR+ maintained response and both decreases in response rate and changes in response topography in the FR2 SR+ maintained response. The data presented here, generated in a basic study comparing response acquisition and maintenance in rats across groups exposed to a continuous CS with an FR1 primary reinforcer presentation or a continuous CS with a VR5 primary reinforcer presentation, extend the Wennmacher et al findings. Findings will be discussed relative to effect on behavior of continuous conditioned reinforcer/variable primary reinforcer presentation, mechanism of action of the conditioned reinforcer, and practical considerations in use of a conditioned reinforcer in applied settings.
 
Ecology and Cognition: A Comparative Analysis of Cichlid Fishes
Domain: Basic Research
DANIEL T. CERUTTI (Duke University), Jeremie Jozefowiez (Duke University), John E. R. Staddon (Duke University)
 
Abstract: Closely related Malawi cichlids, a wait-and-ambush predator (Nimbochromis livingstonii) and scatter-foraging omnivores (Pseudotropheus zebra, and Pseudotropheus elongatus), were tested in an appetitive Pavlovian delayed conditioning task. After an intertrial interval (ITI) of k*T s (k =11.25; T= 8, 16 or 32), a translucent vertical pole was illuminated (CS) for T s. Food was presented at T/2 s. Nibochromis withheld responses to the pole during the ITI, concentrating pole-biting response to the CS. By contrast, Pseudotropheus produced bouts of responses to the pole during the ITI, with few if any CS responses. These preliminary results clearly reveal the habitat-dependent behavioral phenotypes of these species; experiments are now exploring whether they show concomitant specialization in their timing functions.
 
 
 
Paper Session #138
International Paper Session - Behavioral Approaches to Health and Fitness
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Inman
Area: EDC
Chair: Matthew R. Martin (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
 
The Application of Precision Teaching to Sport
Domain: Applied Research
CHRIS SHIELDS (University of Ulster), Denis P. O'Hora (University of Ulster)
 
Abstract: The current paper discusses the possible role that precision teaching could play within the field of sport. While much of the precision teaching research has taken place within academic settings, a number of features of precision teaching make it highly suitable for the development and improvement of sports-related behaviors. First, a major aim of precision teaching is to increase behavioral fluency (accuracy +speed). Fluency has several products, such as retention, endurance and applicability, which may also prove advantageous within sport. Second, precision teaching provides an easy-to use and powerful measuring system that allows coaches and athletes to see improvement as it occurs and to evaluate the effectiveness of interventions based on data recorded on the standard celeration charts. Finally, the concentration of practice into shorter periods of time for greater benefits represents a convincingly cost effective approach.
 
Behavioral Principles for Effective Exercise, Fitness, and Wellness Service Delivery: Practice and Implications
Domain: Service Delivery
MATTHEW R. MARTIN (Illinois State University), Thomas L. Sharpe, Jr. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
 
Abstract: Despite recommendations from the health and fitness community, and a variety of medical and government organizations, approximately 60% of Americans are not meeting the recommended amount of physical activity for optimum health. Additionally challenging, current research suggests that about 50% of the people that begin an exercise program quit within three to six months (Dishman, 1988). The increasing incidence of sedentary life style choices that many Americans make has been shown as highly correlated with an increase in number of health-related diseases including obesity, cardiovascular disease, and diabetes (Helmrich, Ragland, Leung, & Paffenbarger, 1991). To this end, this presentation first describes in detail three behavioral approaches, public posting, individualized goal setting, and peer mediated mentoring, to the amelioration of participation adherence within structured exercise settings. Next, a variety of instructor- and client-based evaluation methods are explored, designed to further stimulate positive trends in exercise adherence. Last, recommendations toward the study of why adults tend to not participate, specifically in the areas of goal orientation (e.g., task or ego; Duda, et. al., 1995), motivation (Ames, 1992, and self-efficacy (Bandura, 1997), are explored. The important and integral role for applied behavior analysis in the structured exercise, fitness, and wellness professions are last discussed in the context of select data provided in support of presentation recommendations.
 
The Application of Positive Self-Talk and One-Minute Timings to a Dart-Throwing Task
Domain: Applied Research
CHRIS SHIELDS (University of Ulster), Denis P. O'Hora (University of Ulster)
 
Abstract: Within sport psychology, much research has supported the effectiveness of positive self-talk as an intervention for improving athletic performance. Within the educational setting, much research also supports the effectiveness of precision teaching as a package for improving performance. However, little research has examined the role of the different components of precision teaching and their role within the package as a whole. The current paper, therefore, looks at the effect of one component of precision teaching, namely, the use of one-minute timings, and their effect on a dart-throwing task. The role of positive self-talk on improving performance was also examined. The current study employed a multiple baseline design in which 10 participants were randomly assigned to one of five conditions, which included two positive self-talk conditions, two precision teaching conditions and a control group. Findings support the applicability of a holistic behavioral approach to the development of sports related behaviors.
 
 
 
Symposium #139
Clinical Behavior Analysis for Educators and Behavioral Educational Technology for Clinicians
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Kennesaw
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jonathan Weinstein (University of Mississippi)
Discussant: Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
Abstract: As “No Child Left Behind” has required schools to demonstrate the academic progress of students, one effect has been to increase the focus on under performing students. One current barrier to the successful remediation of academic difficulties seems to lie in a clear discrimination of skills deficits from motivational problems. While accurate assessment of each may be essential in the development of a comprehensive treatment plan, combined efforts to improve academic and social skills, as well as motivational deficits may provide for the most efficient use of school resources. Further, as one of the defining features of Clinical Behavior Analysis concerns an effort to influence behavior when control over direct contingencies belongs to a third party, the purpose of this symposium will be to describe and discuss efforts to meet the needs of children both within and outside the classroom.
 
When Tutor meets Therapist: A Case Presentation of Academic Skills Training in Concert with Acceptance and Commitment Therapy.
JONATHAN WEINSTEIN (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: Some barriers to academic performance may not be different in kind from barriers to valued-living. A case will be presented where the application of Direct Instruction, Precision Teaching and Acceptance and Commitment Therapy were utilized to leverage change across a variety of domains.
 
Adding a Clinical Component to a Middle School Curriculum: Problem-Solving Planning System.
ADAM G. STRETZ (Morningside Academy), Marianne Delgado (Morningside Academy), Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy)
Abstract: One of the goals of Morningside Academy is to equip their students with a problem-solving model through behavioral analysis. This will be shown using data gathered through a PSP form and student generated tracking plans. Transactional Analysis is introduced to the students as a Psychology class and this instruction teaches the students the language and background they will need to take part in PSPS sessions. The sessions focus on student participation and planning in solving their own problems. These ‘problems’ are varied and can include: issues at home, issues at school, interpersonal issues, repeated areas of difficulty, etc. Students explore what is going well and what their concerns are. Eventually, a particular concern is isolated and a goal to change or improve that concern is stated. The advocate helps the student consolidate and summarize until a specific plan of action is in affect that both the student and the advocate believe will potentially accomplish the student’s stated goal.
 
Psychological Flexibility: A Behavioral Framework for Studying and Teaching Critical Thinking.
ERIC J. FOX (Western Michigan University), Thorhallur O. Flosason (Western Michigan University), Bismarck J. Manes (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Educators and psychologists have long stressed the need for teaching sound critical thinking, reasoning, and problem solving skills to our students and citizens, but there has been little agreement on exactly what these skills are, how they should be taught, or how they should be measured. Much of the literature in this area has been dominated by cognitive approaches, and behavior analysts have offered few technical analyses or instructional solutions for this complex but important domain. Relational Frame Theory (RFT) and Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT), a modern behavior-analytic approach to verbal behavior and its applied extension, may offer guidance. In particular, the construct of psychological flexibility emphasized in ACT may provide a useful framework for both studying and teaching critical thinking. Psychological flexibility refers to contacting the present moment and, based on what the situation affords, acting in accordance with one’s chosen values. It shall be argued that psychological flexibility can be usefully extended to encompass what is traditionally meant by “critical thinking,” and that the strategies of ACT and other behavioral approaches to problem solving may lead to important new methods and measures in this area.
 
 
Symposium #140
Community-Based Applications of Functional Analysis and Matched Treatments for Young Children's Problem Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
International Ballroom North
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jay W. Harding (University of Iowa)
Discussant: Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas)
Abstract: In this symposium, applications of functional analysis and treatment procedures will be described for use in community settings such as homes and schools for children who display problem behaviors. The first presenter (David Wacker) will present summary data for 73 preschool-aged children who received functional analyses and functional communication training in their homes to reduce destructive behavior. The second presenter (Anjali Barretto) will describe in-home assessment and intervention procedures for treating a 2-year old boy’s food refusal. The third presenter (Stephanie Peterson) will summarize a project in which 2-way, web-based videoconference technology was used to provide ongoing training and consultation in functional analysis to educators in rural Idaho. The discussant (Gregory Hanley) will integrate the findings of the studies and provide suggestions for future applications.
 
In-home Assessment and Treatment of Young Children's Destructive Behavior.
DAVID P. WACKER (University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (University of Iowa), Jay W. Harding (University of Iowa)
Abstract: In this presentation, we will provide summary data for 73 children who received functional analyses and functional communication training in their homes. Participants were young children who had developmental disabilities and engaged in destructive behaviors, including self-injury and aggression. Parents were coached to first conduct functional analyses of destructive behavior and then to implement functional communication training within single-case designs. Weekly to monthly probes were videotaped to evaluate the results of assessment. A 6-s partial-interval recording system was used to code observations. Interobserver agreement was assessed on 30% of sessions and averaged 95%. Overall results showed that 75% of the children demonstrated at least a 90% decrease in destructive behavior over the course of treatment. Parents rated the procedures as acceptable.
 
An Examination of the Effects of Treatment of Food Refusal on Functional Analysis Outcomes.
ANJALI BARRETTO (Gonzaga University), Jennifer Neyman (Gonzaga University), Kristina Williams-Masibo (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: Research in the area of behavioral feeding disorders have shown escape extinction to be a necessary component in the treatment of food refusal (e.g., Cooper et al., 1995). The purpose of this study was to conduct a community-based assessment and treatment of food refusal. In addition we also wanted to address aberrant behavior displayed outside of meal times. We first examined the conditions under which positive reinforcement was effective for problem behaviors, hypothesized to be maintained by negative reinforcement. During the course of the treatment for food refusal we conducted brief functional analyses outside of mealtimes. The participant was a 2-year old boy who received all of his nutrition via a g-tube. All assessment and treatment sessions were conducted by the mother in the family’s home across a period of 2 years. Two independent observers achieved 90% agreement on over 33% of the sessions. Results showed that escape extinction was an active variable in the feeding treatment package. In addition functional analysis outcomes changed across baseline, treatment, and follow-up phases of the feeding treatment. Results will be discussed in terms of community-based intervention.
 
Web-based Teleconsultation for Community-based Applications of Functional Analysis Technology.
STEPHANIE M. PETERSON (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Jessica E. Frieder (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Renee Koehler Van Norman (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Keith Van Norman (Vespagraphics)
Abstract: Educators implementing functional analyses in their classrooms often encounter questions and problems regarding procedures, collecting data, and interpreting data. Some sort of on-site consultation is often needed. This on-site consultation can be difficult, if not impossible, when educators are located in rural areas, far from settings where such consultation is available. This presentation will summarize a project in which 2-way, web-based videoconference technology was used to provide ongoing training and consultation in functional analysis to educators in rural Idaho. This project involved initial training via a traditional teacher workshop. Following this, consultation was provided via the World-wide Web, where classroom teachers had video cameras mounted in their classrooms that broadcast the teachers conducting their functional analyses back to the first author’s office, located 90 miles from the classroom. Ongoing consultation and follow-up was provided via the World-wide Web for interventions developed based on these analyses. In this presentation, the initial training procedures and materials will be described. Then, the technology used to complete the web-based videoconferencing will be described and demonstrated (if Internet connections are available at the symposium). Results from the project, in terms of educator implementation of functional analysis procedures, will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #141
Current Advances in the Behavioral Analysis of Gambling: I
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Manila
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Ginger R. Wilson (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The present series of papers will describe various advances in the behavioral analysis of gambling. Each paper will highlight various areas of new exciting research on gambling behavior. Experimental and applied issues will be presented and implications for treatment of pathological gamblers willl be suggested.
 
Incorporating fMRI Technology Into the Study of Gambling Behavior.
HOLLY L. BIHLER (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Reza Habib (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The present paper will present a conceptual rationale and empirical data which support the inclusion of fMRI technology to supplement the behavioral analysis of pathological gambling. Non-treatment seeking problem gamblers and controls each completed extensive fMRI scans while viewing slot machine displays. During the experiment, the participants also had a 5-key, hand-operated key-pad strapped to their right hand. After each presentation of a slot machine display participants rated how close the previous display was to a win using the hand-operated key-pad by pressing the finger key that corresponded with the numbers 1-5 (not at all close to a win to very close to a win). Results indicated that near-misses were not only behaviorally different from total losses, but were also neurologically different. Brain regions activated by the near-miss appear similar to those activated by wins suggesting supplemental data to the behavioral observations. Differences between pathological and non-pathological gamblers were also observed. Implications for a comprehensive analysis of gambling are presented.
 
The Role of Experience on Video Poker Play.
JEFFREY N. WEATHERLY (University of North Dakota), Katie Farwell (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: The present study investigated the role previous experience plays on the behavior of video poker players. People who self identified as experienced or novice poker players were recruited to play three different video poker games. The games, bonus poker, jacks-or-better poker, and deuces wild, were selected because each differed in the strategy that would maximize reinforcement. Despite their “expertise,” experienced players did not always outperform novices on these games. Furthermore, experienced players made a significant number of mistakes in play. These results indicate that generalization of response strategies from one poker game to another may work against the gambler.
 
Do Slot Games Substitute for Poker?
CHARLES A. LYONS (Eastern Oregon University)
Abstract: In most of the United States, the legal public gambling environment began with limited state lottery games. In Oregon, the gaming menu quickly expanded to include scratch-off games and multi-state lotteries. In 1992, video poker was introduced, and it quickly became the largest source of legal gambling income in Oregon, accounting for 75% of gaming revenues. Although several other games were added to the Oregon gambling milieu between 1992 and 2004, none displaced video poker from its dominant position. In this context, the introduction of slot games in 2005 as an Oregon video lottery option is noteworthy, since slot games have been portrayed in the gambling literature as the “crack cocaine of gambling.” Players can now choose between slot games and poker games on the same video terminal. The extent to which slot games draw participants away from video poker in the public gaming environment offers important clues about the “commodity” of gambling and the structural characteristics of the most “addictive” games.
 
Can Relational Frame Theory Add to the Understanding of Pathological Gambling?
TAYLOR JOHNSON (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The present paper will discuss the conceptual analysis of Relational Frame Theory and how it might be applied to the growing social concern of pathological gambling. Relational Frame Theory has provided behavior analysts with a post-Skinnerian account of language, and has repeatedly demonstrated utility of the approach in basic and applied research for some time. An application of RFT to gambling has been lacking, and it appears that such an application could hold promise for the treatment of pathological gamblers. The present paper will present a RFT conceptualization of how an individual may develop problems with gambling and how such problems might be reduced. Data will also be presented illustrating empirical support for the conceptualization of problem gambling as relational responding.
 
 
Paper Session #142
International Paper Session - Developmental Disabilities: Reviews of Research
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom IV
Area: DDA
Chair: Sigmund Eldevik (Center for Early Intervention)
 
Effects of Behavioral Treatment for Children with Mental Retardation
Domain: Applied Research
SIGMUND ELDEVIK (Center for Early Intervention, Oslo, Norway), Erik Jahr (Akershus University Hospital, Norway)
 
Abstract: Archival data from public services in Norway were analyzed. Based on the treatment they had received children were divided to two groups. One group of children (n=8) received on average 10 hours per week of 1:1 behavioral treatment. The other group of children (n=8) was an eclectic treatment control group. All children had been assessed on intelligence and adaptive behavior pre treatment, and after approximately 1 year of treatment. At intake the two groups did not differ significantly on any of the variables measured. After 1 year of treatment the changes in intelligence scores were statistically significant in favor of the behavioral treatment group. Scores on adaptive behavior did not differ significantly between groups after one year of treatment. The average IQ gain for the behavioral treatment group was 21 points whereas the control group gained 1 point. These results suggest that behavioral treatment may be the treatment of choice also for children with mental retardation. Furthermore, children with mental retardation seem to profit more than groups traditionally targeted for behavioral treatment, such as children with autism/PDD.
 
A Review of Instructional Methods for Teaching Speech to Nonvocal Children with Developmental Disabilities
Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA HETLINGER FRANCO (University of Texas, Austin)
 
Abstract: This paper synthesizes the results of 22 studies on increasing vocalizations in children with developmental disabilities who lack spontaneous and imitative vocal responses. Five distinct teaching methodologies are derived from the literature: (1) antecedent stimulation, (2) shaping, (3) generalized imitation, (4) augmentative communication, and (5) assistive technology. The application and practicality of each of these methodologies is reviewed. Future research topics and considerations researchers must take in implementing and reviewing studies on speech development are also discussed.
 
 
 
Symposium #143
Effective Use of Video Modeling with Children with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Regency VII
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Stephen C. Luce (Melmark, Inc.)
Discussant: Stephen C. Luce (Melmark, Inc.)
Abstract: Video modeling involves a child watching a videotape of someone performing a behavior for the child to imitate (LeBlanc et al, 2003) . Some research has found video modeling to be an effective method of teaching for children with autism (Charlop-Christy et al., 2000; D’Ateno et al., 2003; Nikopoulos & Keenan, 2003; Taylor et al., 1999;), This symposium presents 3 studies in which video modeling was used to teach language and play skills to children with autism.
 
Teaching Observational Play Skills to Children with Autism via Video Modeling.
COURTNEY M. WELLS (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University), Eric Rudrud (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: Autism is a pervasive developmental disorder generally characterized by deficits in social interaction, language, imitation, and imaginative or symbolic play (American Psychiatric Association, 1994). This researcher examined the effectiveness of a video modeling procedure on improving appropriate social interactions and play in 2 children with autism. A multiple-probe design across toys was used with both participants. Participant 1 was trained to observe the social interactions of others and to maintain those interactions. Participant 2 was trained to play independently with 2 sets of toys. A variety of videos, settings, and models were used throughout the study. Generalization probes with a separate set of toys were taken during baseline and following the video modeling intervention. Maintenance probes were conducted one time per week for four weeks.
 
The Use of Video Modeling to Increase Play Skills in Children with Autism.
CORLEY D. MAGNUSSON (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University), Rossana Astacio (St. Amant Research Centre)
Abstract: The effect of video modeling on modeled and novel play responses was measured in a multiple baseline design replicated across subjects. In addition, modeled and novel play responses were measured in a discrete trial training (DTT) condition. Three children with autism participated in the study, which was conducted in the children’s homes. Video modeling was conducted in a manner to facilitate generalized and novel responding. Modeled play responses did not increase in the video modeling condition. However, novel play responses increased slightly for some children in this condition. Modeled play responses increased and novel play responses decreased in the DTT condition. Future research should evaluate video modeling with children who have multiple step imitation skills, and evaluate a modified procedure in which children manipulate the play materials as they watch the video.
 
A Comparison of In Vivo vs. Video Modeling in Teaching Children with Autism.
TERRI KIM (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: This study attempted to replicate Charlop-Christy, Le, and Freeman (2000), who found video modeling to be more effective than in vivo modeling in teaching nonverbal, verbal, and social skills to children with autism. Furthermore, only the skills acquired via video modeling generalized across stimuli, people, and settings. The present study compared the effectiveness of video modeling with in vivo modeling in three children with autism. Multiple baseline design was used across the children and within each child across the two modeling conditions. Target skills included coloring, tracing, labeling, and play-related language. One task was assigned in the video modeling condition and another in the in vivo modeling condition. In the video modeling condition, the children watched videotapes of models performing target behaviors, while they observed live models in the in vivo modeling condition. In this study, there were no significant differences in acquisition or generalization of the skills between the in vivo and video modeling conditions. Additional studies may be necessary to identify the most effective method of teaching for various skills.
 
 
Symposium #144
CE Offered: BACB
Expanding the Scope of Research on Treatment Integrity in Behavioral Interventions
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Regency VI
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: April S. Worsdell (Southern Illinois University)
CE Instructor: April S. Worsdell, Ph.D.
Abstract:

A central focus of applied behavior analysis is the demonstration of functional relationships between independent and dependent variables. The failure of an intervention to produce desired behavior change may be related to the incomplete application of the programmed independent variable. Conversely, an initially robust treatment outcome may be weakened when an intervention is not implemented will full procedural integrity. This symposium will present a series of experiments designed to explore the issue of treatment integrity in behavioral interventions. Specifically, these studies sought to determine: (1) the extent to which independent variable integrity is assessed and monitored in applied experiments, and (2) whether positive treatment outcomes maintain in the face of varying levels of procedural integrity.

 
Treatment Integrity Revisited: Do We Practice What We Preach?
APRIL S. WORSDELL (Southern Illinois University), Jennifer A. Benne (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: In applied experiments, a double-standard has been observed wherein operational definitions and reliability estimates are reported when the behavior serves as the dependent variable but are rarely reported when the behavior serves as the independent variable (Gresham, Gansle, & Noell, 1993; Peterson, Homer, & Wonderlich, 1982). The purpose of this study was to evaluate the degree to which behavioral experiments monitored the integrity of independent variables. The primary questions of interest were whether the studies included treatment integrity data, an operational definition of the intervention, and an indication that the therapist received training. A total of 188 articles published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis (JABA) between 1994 and 2004 were reviewed. A second rater coded 11.1% of the articles, and percentage agreement was above 83%. Results showed that 41.5% of the reviewed studies reported a numerical index of treatment integrity. In 29.8% of articles, a precise operational definition of the independent variable was included. Finally, 29.8% of the reviewed articles mentioned that the therapist received training in the implementation of the intervention. The results are discussed with regard to how to close the methodological gap between the observation and reporting of dependent and independent variables in applied experiments.
 
Sequence Effects in DRA Treatment Integrity Failures.
CLAIRE C ST. PETER (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: Applied behavior analysts commonly use differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) as a treatment for behavior disorders. Although a relatively straightforward treatment, DRA is sometimes implemented imperfectly by caregivers. Vollmer et al. (1999) evaluated the effects of treatment integrity failures on DRA treatments and found that DRA remained largely effective even when implemented imperfectly. One limitation of this study was the lack of control for potential sequence effects. We examined potential sequence effects by replicating one of Vollmer et al.’s integrity failure conditions (50/50) following both baseline and full treatment conditions, using a translational research model. Experiment I evaluated possible sequence effects using undergraduates responding on a computer. In experiment II, we replicated our procedures in a school setting. The results of both experiments showed that compromised DRA was generally not effective at reducing rates of problem behavior. Additionally, sequence effects were evident in both experiments, such that the rate of responding during integrity failure phases was different when those phases followed baseline than when they followed full treatment.
 
Effects of Varying Levels of Treatment Integrity During Treatment with a Three-Step Prompting Procedure.
DAVID A. WILDER (Florida Institute of Technology), Julie Atwell (Florida Institute of Technology), Byron J. Wine (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: The effects of three levels of treatment integrity (100%, 50%, 0%) on child compliance were evaluated in the context of the implementation of a three-step prompting procedure. Two typically developing preschool children participated in the study. After baseline data on compliance to one of three common demands were collected, a therapist implemented the three-step prompting procedure at three different integrity levels. One integrity level was associated with each demand. The effects of the integrity levels were examined using multielement designs. The results indicated that child compliance varied according to the level of treatment integrity which was in place.
 
Immediate and Subsequent Effects of Response Blocking on Self-Injury.
KATY ATCHESON (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas), Roxanne L. Wolf (University of North Texas), Heather A. Moore (University of North Texas), Amanda J. McAllister (University of North Texas), Curtis J. Harris (University of North Texas), V. White (University of North Texas)
Abstract: In many institutional settings, blocking, response restriction (e.g., restraint, protective equipment) and re-direction procedures are used extensively as interventions for SIB, but the effectiveness of these types of procedures has not yet been demonstrated. In the current study, a three component, multiple-schedule analysis was used to examine the immediate and subsequent effects of blocking on occurrences of SIB. The first and third component consisted of baseline sessions, in which the participant was in the room, alone, with no social consequences for SIB. The second component was the response restriction component, in which the therapist was sitting in the room with the participant and blocked occurrences of SIB. After the end of the second component, the therapist left the room and the third component, baseline began again, and no social consequences were given for occurrences of SIB. Results indicated that, although blocking was effective in decreasing SIB while it was in place, subsequent effects were idiosyncratic across participants. Evidence of increased levels of SIB following blocking was observed for some participants.
 
 
Symposium #145
International Symposium - Experimental Investigations of Equivalence Classes
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
International Ballroom South
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Jeffrey J. Everly (West Virginia University)
Abstract: The four papers in this symposium are experimental investigations of equivalence classes. The paper by Lobo et al. deals with effects of different types of instructions on class formation. Alligood and Chase examined the variability of responding to stimuli within established equivalence classes. Groskreutz et al. employed complex sample stimuli in pre-class-formation match-to-sample training. Finally, Sighvatsson and Sigurdardottir examined the relation between equivalence and naming in subjects with Broca's Aphasia.
 
Comparing Effects of Multiple-Exemplar Tactical Instructions and Referential Instructions on Equivalence-Class Formation.
HAROLD E. LOBO (West Virginia University), Philip N. Chase (West Virginia University), Chata A. Dickson (West Virginia University)
Abstract: This presentation deals with effects of two types of instructions on performance during tests for the properties of stimulus equivalence. Female undergraduate students completed a linear-series baseline training procedure that was expected to establish three equivalence classes of five members each. Subjects with deficient performance during tests for emergent relations were randomly presented with either one of two types of instructions. Half of the subjects were presented with an extended set of multiple-exemplar tactical instructions; whereas the remaining subjects were presented with referential instructions. Multiple-exemplar tactical instructions describe a pattern of responding that efficiently produces correct responses by presenting multiple exemplars of baseline conditional discriminations and emergent relations. Referential instructions impact correct responding by describing the relation between baseline and emergent conditional discriminations. Further testing on emergent relations followed instructional training. Results are discussed in the context of previous findings suggesting that equivalence-class formation is facilitated by presenting subjects with a strategy that describes the principle of equivalence. Implications of multiple-exemplar tactical and referential instructions for our understanding of concept learning and behavioral effects of specific instructions also are discussed.
 
Choice Among Stimuli in Equivalence Classes.
CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (West Virginia University), Philip N. Chase (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Variability in responding to stimuli within equivalence classes has been of interest to researchers for several years. One way of investigating variability is to test the effect of nodal number, or the number of nodes involved in a relation. Previous research suggests that nodal number is related to variability in responding to stimuli in equivalence classes such that subjects respond more quickly and more accurately on relations involving fewer nodes. The present research used post-class-formation tests of within-class preference to further test the parameters of this variability. Subjects more frequently chose comparisons related to the sample via fewer nodes than those related via more nodes. In addition, subjects chose comparisons related to the subject via symmetry as often or more often than those related via trained baseline relations. These results have implications for theory, including the substitutability of stimuli in equivalence classes, and for practice, including fluency-based instruction.
 
The Effects of Using Complex Auditory-Visual Samples on Equivalence Class Formation.
NICOLE GROSKREUTZ (New England Center for Children), Allen J. Karsina (New England Center for Children), Caio F. Miguel (New England Center for Children), Mark P. Groskreutz (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: When complex stimuli are presented together as samples in matching-to-sample training, it is possible that one element is more salient than the other. The purpose of Experiment 1 was to evaluate the effects of simultaneously presenting both an auditory and visual sample stimulus during matching-to-sample training. Participants were 6 individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. The complex samples consisted of an auditory stimulus in the form of spoken words (A) and a visual stimulus in the form of line drawings or pictures (B). A second set of visual stimuli in the form of written words (C) served as comparisons. Pre- and post-tests were conducted on AB, AC, BC, CB, and oral naming (BD, CD). All participants acquired the tested relations suggesting the absence of restricted stimulus control. Experiment 2 attempted to produce restricted stimulus control by exposing the participants to a visual-visual conditional discrimination prior to training with the complex sample. Participants were 2 of the individuals exposed to Exp 1. Preliminary results indicate, at least for 1 participant, that prior exposure to the visual-visual matching-to-sample prevented the establishment of control by the auditory component of the complex sample.
 
Establishing Stimulus-equivalence Classes in Patientswith chronic Broca’s aphasia: Does it improve naming?
MAGNUS SIGHVATSSON BLONDAHL (University of Iceland), Z. Gabriela Sigurdardottir (University of Iceland)
Abstract: For over 30 years the work of Sidman and colleagues (Sidman, 1971; Sidman, Stoddard, Mohr & Leicester, 1971; Mohr, Sidman, Stoddard, Leicester, & Rosenberger, 1973) has been known as the experiments that later resulted in the stimulus equivalence paradigm. Unfortunately, replications of those early experiments with Broca’s aphasia patients have been few or nonexistent. Based on the pre-experimental work from the early 1970s, the presence of several stimulus-stimulus relations were measured in four adults suffering from chronic Broca’s aphasia. In a four-choice, table-top, matching-to-sample task, our tests measured the following stimulus-stimulus relations: visual-visual, tactile-tactile, auditory-visual, auditory-tactile, tactile-visual and visual-tactile. Moreover, participants’ ability to name the correct comparison stimuli and to imitate an auditory sample in the presence or absense of its corresponding visual stimulus were tested. Experimental stimuli in this study were letters from the Icelandic alphabet, a total of 36 different stimuli. Results indicate that all subjects had trouble performing correctly in the auditory-visual matching task and some of them also had problems in the auditory-tactile matching task. Conditional discrimination training in auditory-visual matching is in progress in the hope of improving the participants’ performances in naming.
 
 
Paper Session #146
Explorations into Verbal Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Learning Center
Area: VBC
Chair: Sam Leigland (Gonzaga University)
 
A Functional Definition of Verbal Behavior from the Perspective of the Behaving Organism
Domain: Theory
GENAE HALL (Behavior Analysis & Intervention Services)
 
Abstract: Skinner (1957) defined verbal behavior as “behavior reinforced through the mediation of other persons” (p. 2). Further, “the ‘listener’ must be responding in ways which have been conditioned precisely in order to reinforce the behavior of the speaker” (p. 225). Some behavior analysts have taken issue with this definition. For instance, Hayes and Barnes-Homes (2001, pp. 12-13) argued that this definition is not functional from the perspective of the organism of interest because it reflects the perspective of an observer. If the behaving organism does not have contact with the precise conditioning received by the listener, how can that conditioning affect the organism’s behavior?This question was addressed by Leigland (1997), who noted that “a history of trained social mediation makes a functional difference with respect to behavior” (p.7). One might ask, then, how this history might be reflected in the controlling variables for an organism’s behavior. Perhaps the relevant functional element is audience control. As a result of a history of mediated reinforcement within specific verbal communities, 1) verbal behavior occurs only in the presence of an audience with certain characteristics, and 2) different subdivisions of verbal behavior occur in the presence of different audiences. Verbal behavior might therefore be defined as behavior under audience control.
 
Intraverbal Behavior and Grammar
Domain: Theory
JOHN H. MABRY (University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, Visiting Scholar)
 
Abstract: The way humans talk is often said to consist of ‘words’ which follow ‘rules’. Skinner’s treatment of verbal behavior challenged both assertions. He proposed that there were no standard units, such as words, sentences, etc. but that the size and composition of our speech and writing were in reality, more flexible. Traditional units, including morphemes, words, phrases, idioms, clauses, and so on “...which may have functional unity...” Under the title of intraverbal responding he proposed a ‘type of’ chaining or intraverbal collocations, which can serve to explain such phenomena as word order and concord (agreement) and other grammatical regularities/irregularities: “Garden Path” and similar difficulties with embedded clauses, phrases and the conservation of phrase structure in questions and active to passive ‘inversions’. Such ‘verbal operants’ acquired by the speaker as listener hold implications for the training of speech in autistic populations as well as second language learning.
 
Digital Epistemology: Observers' Statements of "knowing" Controlled by Simulated Operant Interactions
Domain: Basic Research
SAM LEIGLAND (Gonzaga University)
 
Abstract: Conditions affecting observers’ statement of “knowing” were investigated using a commercially-available operant simulation program. The program displays an animated rat pressing a lever and engaging in other behaviors in a simulated operant chamber under various contingencies of reinforcement. The conditions of observation involved the rat’s lever press response maintained on a FI 60-sec. schedule, with standard response patterning during the intervals (pause-acceleration with variations). Ten subjects were instructed to make statements, as often as they liked and whenever they liked during the tape-recorded session, about what the rat “knows” about the situation. All subjects were given information about the contingencies involved with the FI 60-sec. schedule, and were told that the rat was well-practiced on the schedule. For half of the subjects, the display included a realtime cumulative record (with a description of its operation provided before the session) located just below the simulated chamber, which included the patterning of several preceding FIs. As verbal events, statements of “knowing” were controlled primarily by post-reinforcement pauses. Statements were related to temporally-extended segments of observed (simulated) environment-behavior interaction involving discriminated operants. The results are discussed in terms of a molar analysis of verbal behavior.
 
 
 
Paper Session #147
Improving Learning at the Undergraduate Level
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Auburn
Area: EDC
Chair: Claudia E. McDade (Learning Services)
 
Precision Learning at Jacksonville State University: A DVD Presentation
Domain: Applied Research
CLAUDIA E. MCDADE (Learning Services), John M. Brown (Jacksonville State University)
 
Abstract: Learning Services, Jacksonville State University (AL), has been using precision teaching and other behavioral strategies to develop students skills since 1977. This DVD presentation of precision learning showcases JSU's summer bridge program, ExSEL (Experiencing Success in Education & Life), which assists poorly prepared entering students in college readiness. The DVD shows students developing their academic skills to high fluencies with faculty and student staff comments about the effectiveness of precision learning strategies.
 
Brief Daily Writing Activities and Exam Performance
Domain: Basic Research
HALEY CRISP TURNER (University of Tennessee), Briana L. Hautau (University of Tennessee), Robert Lee Williams (University of Tennessee)
 
Abstract: Over a two-semester period, students in an undergraduate human development course participated in a study designed to enhance student preparation for class discussion. The treatment involved administration of daily five-minute writing activities based on pairs of concepts embedded in instructor notes posted at the course website. Explicit criteria were developed for rating the students’ written responses, with inter-observer agreement (ranging from .86 to .91) computed for 40% of the students’ responses. The dependent variable was student performance on unit-exam items related to the instructor notes versus items based on the reading materials in the course. Student performance on the two types of items was contrasted across two semesters: one with the writing activities and one without. There were three major findings: (1) exam performance on the instructor-notes items was higher when the writing activities were used than when they were not used; (2) performance on the writing activities was more strongly related to performance on the exam items from the instructor notes than items from issues in the reading materials; and (3) performance on the daily writing activities was a stronger predictor of exam performance than other established predictors of course performance.
 
The Effect of Active Responding on Student Performance and Instructor Behavior in a University Setting
Domain: Applied Research
N. JOSEPH RODRIGUES (University of Nevada, Reno), Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Abstract: We examine the effects of active responding in a self-paced personalized system of instruction (PSI) for an undergraduate introductory psychology course. The active responding was prompted via review questions and the responses were delivered via a personal electronic voting system. Instructor behavior was also manipulated with the help of student performance on the review questions. Student performance on chapters with active responding was compared with performance on chapters without active responding.
 
 
 
Panel #148
New Racism and Related Issues: What We Know and What We Should Find Out
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Roswell
Area: TPC/CSE; Domain: Theory
Chair: James M. Kauffman (University of Virginia)
RALPH GARDNER III (The Ohio State University)
MAUREEN CONROY (University of Florida)
DONALD OSWALD (Medical College of Virginia)
JAMES M. KAUFFMAN (University of Virginia)
Abstract: The relationship of group membership to applied behavior analysis will be explored. The session will begin with introductory comments, including a summary of issues regarding group membership and ABA. Groups to be considered will include those defined by gender, color/ethnicity/ancestral origins, and religion, although other groups could be defined. Panel members will consider the full spectrum of possible differences in ABA (e.g., reinforcement histories, choice of procedures, basic behavior principles and operations) along one dimension of group membership (e.g., gender, ethnicity) and (a) summarize findings to date from ABA studies that find or do not find group differences and (b) propose research strategies for finding out how group membership affects ABA. Following introductory comments and three panel presentations, audience questions and comments will be encouraged.
 
 
Symposium #149
CE Offered: BACB
Precision Teaching with Very Challenging Learners: Case Studies in Benefits and Effects
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Regency V
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Discussant: Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
CE Instructor: Michael Fabrizio, M.A.
Abstract:

Given the increased interest in the role that Precision Teaching can play in behavior analytic intervention for children with autism, our discipline has seen increased numbers of presentations and publications addressing the matter. Relatively few of these, however, have demonstrated the ways in which Precision Teaching may benefit intervention programs for children with very severe autism and very low skills. This symposium will present three data-based case studies that outline such applications.

 
Precise Reading Instruction for Non-Vocal Students with Autism.
KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Teaching non-vocal students with autism to read presents many challenges to teachers and instructional designers. No published program adequately teaches both decoding skills as well as comprehension skills appropriate for non-vocal students without adaptation. We have paired the effective teaching strategies of discrimination training, Direct Instruction curricula, and instructional design techniques to create a precise reading instructional program. We will present student data on progress in Direct Instruction curricula and timed practice data on the Standard Celeration Chart. We will include suggested scope and sequence diagrams of pre-requisite skills required for students to be successful in the program sequence. The paper will include example programs of the reading comprehension programs.
 
Redefining Meaningful Outcomes: The Role of PT Data.
KRISTIN N. SCHIRMER (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Alison L. Moors (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: This paper will demonstrate how social validity and independence in daily living skills are important outcome measures. This pertains especially to teaching an older low skilled student with autism and mental retardation through Precision Teaching. Data will show component fine motor skills to composite functional living as well as social validity measures.
 
Precision Teaching Functional Communication Skills to a Young, Low-skilled Child with Autism.
SHELLEY MCINNIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Krista Zambolin (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Simon is a 5-year-old boy with severe Autism. He started receiving Fluency based intervention in June 2003 and continued until July 2005. At the start of his program, he was non-verbal and used physical gestures when manding to obtain or escape varying activities. This created a lot of frustration for Simon, resulting in episodes of crying, yelling and physical aggression towards his caregivers when he was not able to communicate his needs appropriately. We did a functional assessment to determine the antecedents of his outbursts, which generated a list of specific mands that Simon needed to learn in order to communicate more effectively in his home environment. We taught him a list of 15 adapted signs, but his limited fine motor abilities prevented him from learning anything too complex. We introduced the Picture Exchange Communication System to increase his repotoire of mands in his environment. Once the targets were mastered in smaller teaching sets, data was collected on the number of times he used his signs and PECS symbols to communicate during his in-home program and family time.
 
 
Panel #150
Professional Development Series: On Being a Postdoc
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Spring
Area: PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Shawn R. Charlton (University of California, San Diego)
ANDREA M. BEGOTKA (Neurobehavioral Outpatient Unit)
MARTA LEON (Morningside Academy)
ERIC BOELTER (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
SEAN T. SMITHAM (Girls and Boys Town)
Abstract: For many, the process of finding, being, and surviving a postdoc seems a mystery. This panel aims to demystify this process (at least somewhat) by allowing an open forum for the discussion of the role of a postdoc. The panel members for the discussion represent the majority of stages of the postdoc process. Drawing from this breadth of experience, panel members will discuss the major elements of this period of professional career development. This is a Student Committee-sponsored event.
 
 
Symposium #151
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Complex Social Responses to Individuals with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Chicago A-F
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement)
CE Instructor: Dawn B. Townsend, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Increased interest in the more complex social responses of individuals with autism has been evident recently. As a result, we have seen the advancement of behavioral accounts of the social deficits noted in individuals with autism and the development of teaching strategies to ameliorate such deficits. The papers in this symposium will address social deficits of individuals with autism with respect to joint attention, perspective taking, empathy, and sharing behavior. Through the use of single-subject experimental designs, the researchers have investigated strategies of teaching the above social responses to students with autism, ranging in age from pre-school to adolescence, and will demonstrate the effective use of such strategies to increase appropriate social responding in the presence of target discriminative stimuli. In addition, each presenter will define methods by which the generalization of these important social skills was targeted and the extent to which these responses were displayed under non-training conditions. Finally, each presenter will detail the acquisition and generalization of these responses through a learning-based account and comment on the importance of these skills in advancing the social repertoires of individuals with autism.

 
Using Scripts and Script-Fading to Promote Bids for Joint Attention.
JOYCE L. MACDUFF (Princeton Child Development Institute), Regina Ledo (Princeton Child Development Institute), Patricia J. Krantz (Princeton Child Development Institute), Lynn E. McClannahan (Princeton Child Development Institute)
Abstract: A multiple-probe design across subjects assessed the efficacy of using audio-taped scripts to promote the joint attention responses of young children with autism. A one-word script (“See”) was presented on a button-activated recorder, and separate recorders were attached to toys and photographs that were placed in areas of the school not typically used for instructional activities. Children were taught to activate the recorders, point to pictures and toys, orient toward a conversation partner, and comment about the objects or photographs. After they reliably made joint attending responses, scripts were removed from the recorders and finally, the recorders were removed. The results indicated that all three children learned joint attending responses and when the scripts were faded, bids for joint attention maintained and generalized to untrained materials and to settings in which no training had occurred.
 
Using Pretend Play to Teach Empathy Skills to Children with Autism.
JESSICA A. SCHRANDT (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City Unive), Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York)
Abstract: Many children with autism fail to display empathy skills. The purpose of this research was to assess the extent to which presentation of affective discriminative stimuli, graduated guidance, modeling through auditory scripts, and reinforcement were effective in teaching generalized empathy skills to 4 children with autism. A multiple-baseline-across-participants experimental design with an embedded multiple-baseline-across-response categories for one subject was used to evaluate effects of treatment. Instructors presented vignettes with dolls/puppets demonstrating various types of affect, and taught participants to perform pretend-play responses indicating a shared perspective (e.g., when a doll said “I’m sad,” to pat her arm and say “It’s okay”). The dependent measure was the number of empathy responses to affective discriminative stimuli per session. During baseline, the children responded infrequently to displays of affect. Increases in empathy responses occurred systematically with the introduction of treatment for each participant and response category. Furthermore, responding generalized from training to nontraining stimuli for all participants. For two participants, generalization occurred from dolls/puppets to people in a nontraining classroom. For the others, generalization was observed to the nontraining people and classroom, but subsequently decreased to baseline level. Brief introduction of treatment in the nontraining setting produced rapid acquisition of the target skills.
 
Increasing the Use of Empathy Statements in the Presence of Non-Verbal Affective Stimuli in Adolescence with Autism.
PAUL ARGOTT (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement), Peter Sturmey (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York)
Abstract: Previous studies have shown that children with autism do not show empathic responding, but that they do acquire social interaction skills with the aid of a script-fading procedure. This study included 3 adolescents with autism, 2 males and 1 female. A non-verbal affective stimulus was presented and students’ empathic responding was recorded. Data were collected on scripted and unscripted verbal statements of empathy in the presence of training discriminative stimuli. To assess generalization, data were collected on unscripted verbal statements of empathy in the presence of non-training discriminative stimuli. A multiple-baseline-across-participants experimental design was used to assess the effectiveness of a script-fading procedure on increasing verbal statements of empathy. With the successive introduction of scripts and a script-fading procedure across participants, the percentage of opportunities on which scripted and unscripted statements of empathy occurred, in the presence of the training stimuli, increased systematically. For two of the participants an increase in the percentage of opportunities on which an unscripted statement of empathy occurred, in the presence of the generalization stimuli, was observed. These data show that adolescents with autism can learn to differentiate non-verbal affective stimuli and display differential empathic responses via behavioral intervention.
 
Teaching a Generalized Sharing Repertoire to Children with Autism.
JAIME A. DEQUINZIO (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York)
Abstract: Children with autism have severe deficits in social interactions, as characterized in part by the failure to engage in sharing responses. In this study, four children with autism were taught a complex three-step sharing response chain (motor and verbal responses of showing, giving, and playing) derived from observations of children of typical development (Rheingold, Hay, & West, 1976). Using a multiple-baseline-across-participants-experimental design, the treatment package (manual guidance, auditory modeling, and contingent access to toy play with the recipient instructor) was introduced successively across all four participants. None of the participants engaged in the three-step sharing response chain during baseline. With the introduction of the treatment package, systematic increases in responding occurred for all four participants in the presence of training stimuli associated with the treatment package. In addition, generalization measures indicated that all of the participants learned to engage in the three-step sharing response chain in the presence of non-reinforced probe stimuli. Pre- and post-test measures indicated that the participants demonstrated this skill in the presence of peers, in a classroom containing non-trained toys. The results are discussed in terms of discriminative stimulus control of complex social behavior.
 
 
Symposium #152
CE Offered: BACB
Technology in Organizational Behavior Management (OBM): Providing Immediate Feedback and Proximate Goals
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Cairo
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University)
Discussant: W. Kent Anger (Oregon Health & Science University)
CE Instructor: Timothy D. Ludwig, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium includes three research papers focusing current technological trends in Organizational Behavior Management. Each paper includes reports of data-based research conducted in warehouse settings where performance variables of interest included productivity, measured in the number of cased picked per hour, and accuracy, measured by the average numbers of errors committed by employees. The first paper reports on research where an incentive program in a distribution warehouse was enhanced by the implementation of proximal performance goals and immediate feedback based on Engineered Labor Standards and delivered on handheld scanning devises. The second paper reports on the implementation of oral prompts and immediate feedback delivered by computer-voice headsets on selectors in a warehouse. The final paper, in a separate study, compares the impact of the handheld scanning devises, where feedback is delivered visually, versus the voice headsets, where feedback is delivered through an auditory devise, on both productivity and errors. The discussant for this session will review the merits and deficiencies of each study as well as comment on the growing impact of technology on OBM interventions.

 
Enhancing Incentive Programs with Proximal Goals and Immediate Feedback: Engineered Labor Standards and Technology Enhancements In Stocker Replenishment.
DAVID T. GOOMAS (Tarrant County College District), Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University)
Abstract: Common incentive programs can be ineffective in maintaining employee productivity. With the advent of Electronic Performance Monitoring (EPM) objective indicators of employee performance can be made immediately available and visible. As a result, work unit goals and performance feedback can be delivered to the employee immediately thereby enhancing incentive programs. Stocking performance was substantially improved in an auto-parts after-market distribution center when the incentive program was enhanced with an intervention package that included the depiction of proximal goal times and immediate performance feedback on wireless hand-held computers using newly implemented labor standards that took into account travel time, box cutting time, and stocking time of each stocking work-unit. A monthly bonus was given to the members of the stocking team if they maintained 100% performance average throughout the month. Upon the onset of the intervention, employee performance increased by an average of 4.46 cases stocked per hour per person, an increase of 24% over the baseline phase, and was maintained for the10-week duration of the study.
 
Voice Assisted Technology Providing Immediate Feedback to Reduce Employee Errors.
SAM BERGER (Appalachian State University), Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University)
Abstract: A foodservice distributor in the southeastern United States implemented a voice assisted selecting tool to reduce selector errors by providing immediate feedback when errors occur. An AB design with a non-equivalent control group was used to examine the effects of the voice technology on 132 selectors whose mispicks and shorts were collected over six weeks of baseline and eights weeks of the intervention phase. Selector errors were reduced from 2.44 errors per 1000 cases picked to 0.94 errors per 1000 cases when voice technology was implemented. Further analysis indicated that the immediate feedback provided by voice had a greater impact on employees who were making the most errors during baseline.
 
Voice Picking versus Bar Code Scanner: Providing Immediate Feedback to Increase Productivity and Reduce Errors.
TIMOTHY D. LUDWIG (Appalachian State University), David T. Goomas (Tarrant County College District)
Abstract: Warehouses are investing in voice technology to provide immediate and individualized feedback after each unit of work in an order selection task. However, another technology that uses handheld devices with screens that scan product bar codes can also be adapted to provide this type of feedback after each work unit. Two case studies reported in this study suggest that the implementation of voice technology had a substantial impact on productivity (number of items selected an hour) as did the implementation of handheld scanning devices. The voice system increased productivity an average of 18% more than did the handheld system. There were no differences between voice technology and handheld scanning associated with a reduction of errors presumably because of dependencies based on upstream events.
 
 
Symposium #153
Topics in Timing
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:30 AM–11:50 AM
Hong Kong
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Erin A. McClure (University of Florida)
Abstract: Behavior analysts have been exploring timing behavior since the field's earliest days. There are now several methods available for assessing how behavior is controlled by the passage of time, and how well different models of timing account for the obtained results. Stimulant and depressant drugs as well as purely behavioral techniques have been employed in this endeavor. This symposium will highlight significant topics within current timing research.
 
D-amphetamine’s Effects on Differential Reinforcement of Low Rates of Responding.
KATHRYN A. SAULSGIVER (University of Florida), Erin A. McClure (University of Florida), Eric Beecher (University of Florida), Clive D. L. Wynne (University of Florida)
Abstract: The sensitivity to the passage of time by animals in experimental research has been conceptualized as a behavior that is controlled by internal stimuli (Laties, 1966). Since there is a lack of external control it has been suggested that this type of behavior is more sensitive to drug effects. The present study examined the effects of d-amphetamine on a continuous DRL 8-sec discrete-trial DRL 8-sec schedule. When this schedule is examined more closely two types of timing behavior appear to be occurring: Timing from a stimulus and timing from the subjects own behavior. Essentially, these are two different types of stimulus control. In addition this experiment explored the influence of d-amphetamine on respondent and operant key pecks. This schedule allowed for the separation of responses that were externally controlled, those responses occurring after reinforcement in the continuous DRL and all responses in the discrete-trial DRL schedule, from those that were controlled by internal stimuli, responses that occurred after unreinforced responses in the continuous DRL schedule. In addition by analyzing the IRT distributions produced by these schedules this procedure allowed us to see the effects that d-amphetamine had on respondent and operant key pecks, if they exist.
 
Accounting for Cyclic Responding in Timing using Binary Counting.
FEDERICO SANABRIA (Arizona State University), Peter Killeen (Arizona State University)
Abstract: Strong and theoretically challenging effects deserve more attention, not less. Timing theories rarely deal with one such effect: the reoccurrence of responding near the end of probe trials--when responding has never been reinforced--in the peak procedure. Timing models that lack cyclic features can neither account for this effect, nor for its circumscription to specific training-to-probe trial duration ratios. Responding cyclicity and its dependency on experimental parameters is well accounted for by a timing model based on probabilistic binary counting.
 
Effects of d-amphetamine on Stimulus Control and Temporal Discrimination in Position and Color-matching Variants of the Interval-bisection Procedure.
RYAN D. WARD (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Recent research suggests that the effects of drugs on behavior maintained by temporal-discrimination procedures might be produced by a general disruption of stimulus control, rather than specific effects on timing. This experiment examined whether d-amphetamine would have different effects on temporal discrimination and stimulus control depending on the nature of the temporal-discrimination procedure. Four pigeons responded on a multiple schedule of interval-bisection procedures. In one component (position), responding to one key was reinforced following short samples, while responding to the other key was reinforced following long samples. In the other component (color), responding to one key color was reinforced following short samples, and responding to another key color was reinforced following long samples. Acute d-amphetamine administration decreased accuracy in both components, although more so in the color matching component. Analysis of the psychophysical functions showed that d-amphetamine produced decrements in accuracy in both components by decreasing stimulus control, rather than affecting timing. We are currently assessing the effects of d-amphetamine on both versions of the interval bisection procedure across conditions.
 
Analysis of Behavior Mediating Timing in Two Procedures used to Assess Temporal Discrimination in Pigeons.
ERIN A. MCCLURE (University of Florida), Kathryn A. Saulsgiver (University of Florida), Eric Beecher (University of Florida), Clive D. L. Wynne (University of Florida)
Abstract: When rats are trained on spatial procedures, which require responding on one lever after a short stimulus and responding on a different lever after a long stimulus, the introduction of amphetamine commonly causes a leftward shift in the psychophysical function for time. However when pigeons are trained on non-spatial procedures, with colored keys as response alternatives, the effect of the drug is mainly on stimulus control and not on 'timing'. The current study explored whether this difference between species could be attributable to procedural differences by comparing the performance of pigeons trained on a spatial task to pigeons trained on a non-spatial task. Effects of amphetamine on the pigeons' responses was more like that found in rats when the pigeons were tested with the spatial procedure. For pigeons tested on the non-spatial procedure, amphetamine administration led to disruption of behavior and decrease in stimulus control. Video analysis indicated that the different effects of the drug on the two procedures were due to different mediating behaviors that developed by the different arrangements of the choice alternatives.
 
 
Special Event #154
2006 ABA Tutorial: Measuring and Modulating the Reinforcing Efficacy of Drugs
Sunday, May 28, 2006
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: BPH
Chair: John M. Roll (Washington State University, Friends Research Institute)
 
2006 ABA Tutorial: Measuring and Modulating the Reinforcing Efficacy of Drugs
Abstract: This presentation will define relative reinforcing efficacy and describe the importance of the concept to behavioral pharmacology. Various procedures for measuring reinforcing efficacy and the pros and cons of using these procedures will be discussed. Similarly methods for modulating reinforcing efficacy, including both pharmacological and behavioral, will be explored. The role of individual differences in determining reinforcing efficacy will also be examined. The presentation will also address the applied significance of modulating reinforcing efficacy. Examples with both human and non-human participants will be used to demonstrate various points throughout the presentation.
 
CHRIS-ELLYN JOHANSON (Wayne State University)
 
Dr. Chris-Ellyn Johanson’s primary interest during her early career was in determining the influence of a broad spectrum of behavioral and pharmacological variables on the relative reinforcing efficacy of drugs of abuse and the development of sensitive approaches for assessing abuse liability of psychoactive drugs in rhesus monkeys. While still continuing her animal research at the University of Chicago, she also developed a human psychopharmacology program investigating the reinforcing effects of psychomotor stimulants and benzodiazepines in normal humans. When Dr. Johanson moved to USUHS, human behavioral pharmacology became her primary interest. At the ARC, her research interests broadened to include the epidemiology of drug abuse and the development of paradigms that would foster a biobehavioral understanding of vulnerability to substance abuse. Dr. Johanson has published more than 150 scientific articles, including several important reviews of the behavioral pharmacology of cocaine. She was also the editor of Drug and Alcohol Dependence from 1986 to 1998.
 
 
 
Paper Session #155
Maximizing Research and Clinical Gains: IRB 101, Interagency Collaboration and Behavioral Services under Medicaid Waivers
Sunday, May 28, 2006
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Lenox
Area: CSE
Chair: W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Professional Development Series: IRB 101 for Behavior Analysts
Domain: Service Delivery
W. LARRY WILLIAMS (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Abstract: Almost all Universities, research centers, and agencies involved in research or research-practitioner activities hold a waiver with the National Office for Human Research Protection in order to qualify for a vast number and types of federal grant funding. In order to protect potential subjects from situations where the risk of their participation in research exceeds the possible benefits to them, the waiver requires that each of these institutions maintains an Institutional Review Board (IRB) that approves any research, funded or not, that involves human subjects. This fundamental process is under discussed in the behavioral literature. This tutorial provided by a Chairperson of a current Social Behavioral Review Board, will review the basics of IRB objectives and regulations, provide informational materials, as well as criteria Behavior Analysts can use in order to comply with standard IRB considerations when conducting either basic or applied research. This information is crucial to Behavior Analysts as the empirical nature of our clinical assessment and intervention services and their typical dissemination, often qualify such activities as research that requires IRB approval.
 
The Effects of Number of Weekly Direct Contact Visits on Treatment Outcomes and Caregiver Compliance
Domain: Applied Research
DAVID GARCIA (Behavior Analysis Inc.), Stephen P. Starin (Behavior Analysis Inc.), Pamela A. Tibbetts (Behavior Analysis Inc.)
 
Abstract: Individuals approved for behavioral services under the Medicaid Waiver program are often provided with a weekly consultation visit with a behavior analyst for an extended period of time that may exceed a year. The current study examined the effects of increasing the number of weekly consultation visits on both caregiver implementation of treatment procedures and acquisition/reduction of target behaviors. Implications of our results with regards to the frequency of direct contact visits and its effect on treatment outcomes are discussed.
 
Putting Our Heads Together or Banging Heads? Effective Interagency Collaboration and Consultation-Teamwork Centered on Stabilizing Behavior, Family Systems and the Dynamics of Healthy Organizational..
Domain: Applied Research
KIMBERLY SALLS (Behavior Intervention Services), Julia Roscoe (Judevine Center for Autism)
 
Abstract: In any collaboration two or more organizations come together to form a relationship based on needs. Presenters will discuss the key elements to successful exchanges as they lead to effective planning and execution of intervention to stabilize the lives of persons with severe and challenging behavior. Variables which must be considered include evaluating the needs of the individual and their family, organizational approach and philosophy. Ongoing intervention includes defining not only target behaviors of the person to receive the direct support, but additional factors and target behaviors for the family as its own "organization". Effective intervention includes looking at the context of behavior within the family system and across environments. The anlaysis of intervention and ongoing evaluation, then, must target not only behavior change in the person identified needing support, but often requires changes in the context of behavior change including the immediate family, extended family and natural supports, school or work place and community at large.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #156
CE Offered: None

Positive Behavioral Supports Research: An Example of Large Scale Evaluation of Behavior Analytic Educational Practices

Sunday, May 28, 2006
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Robert E. O'Neill, M.A.
Chair: Robert E. O'Neill (University of Utah)
GEORGE SUGAI (University of Connecticut)
Dr. George Sugai is the Neag Endowed Professor in Special Education in the Neag School of Education at the University of Connecticut with expertise in behavior analysis, classroom and behavior management, school-wide discipline, function-based behavior support, positive behavior supports, and educating students with emotional and behavioral disorders. He has been a teacher in the public schools, treatment director in a residential program, and program administrator. Dr. Sugai conducts applied school and classroom research and works with schools to translate research into practice. He is currently co-director of the Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports at the University of Connecticut and University of Oregon.
Abstract:

The purpose of this session will be to describe how behavior analytic principles are being applied to the organizational implementation of school-wide behavior support practices and systems. Emphasis will be on a blueprint for establishing district/state level leadership teams and directing the development of action plans that emphasize building implementation capacity for coordination, coaching/facilitation, training, and evaluation. Efforts to establish durable use and controlled expansion of behavior analytic principles and practices will be summarized.

 
 
Paper Session #157
Teaching Language and Supporting Transition for Children with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
University
Area: EDC
Chair: Diane M. Sainato (The Ohio State University)
 
Project TASK: Transition for Children with Autism to School from Kindergarten
Domain: Applied Research
DIANE M. SAINATO (The Ohio State University), Sunhwa Jung (Oakstone Academy), Rebecca S. Morrison (Oakstone Academy), Mary D. Salmon (Oakstone Academy), Judah B. Axe (The Ohio State University), Nikki Kerns (Oakstone Academy)
 
Abstract: The purpose of the proposed model demonstration project is to develop, implement, and evaluate a program for kindergarten children with autism that is effective and addresses the transition from an inclusive kindergarten to a school-age program. In the first year a model kindergarten program was implemented with six children with autism and six typically developing children. A cohort of five children with autism and five typically developing index peers was also recruited from a local school district as a comparison group. In the Project TASK classroom a curriculum consisting of Direct Instruction Reading, peer mediated social skill interventions, behavioral interventions for challenging behavior and IEP objectives embedded into typical classroom activities was implemented. Pretest and post-test measures included standardized assessments for language, cognitive functioning, social and academic achievement. Behavioral observations were conducted twice a month for a total of 540 minutes of direct observation in classrooms. Outcomes from the model program were as follows: An increase on standardized assessments across all areas. . In addition, children from Project TASK demonstrated increased levels of appropriate engagement in observed classroom activities as compared to the comparison subjects. Interobserver agreement measures for the direct observations yielded a mean level of 90%.
 
Improving the Range of Vocal Skills and Decreasing Aberrant Behavior with a Child with Autism through the Use of a Functional Assessment and Component Analysis
Domain: Service Delivery
KIMBERLY P. WEBER (Gonzaga University), Katie Rice (Gonzaga University), K. Mark Derby (Gonzaga University)
 
Abstract: Developing interventions that improve language skills in children with Autism is a complex task requiring assessment techniques that evaluate the range of language needed for the child to begin generalizing skills without training. In addition, for those children who display aberrant behavior the assessment process must attempt to determine the function(s) of behavior in order to provide training in the most constructive environments. The goal of this study was to increase the range of language usage to include intraverbal or conversational language in a child diagnosed with Autism while also attempting to decrease aberrant behavior. The results of this study indicated that a component analysis indicated prompts with tangible reinforcement to be the most beneficial at increasing vocal responses while maintaining aberrant behavior at a fairly low level across functional settings. Implications will be discussed.
 
 
 
Poster Session #158
#158 International Poster Session - AUT
Sunday, May 28, 2006
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Grand Hall
1. Examining a Curricular Sequence Used to Teach Children with Autism to Initiate Joint Attention
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MELANIE PEREZ (Elwyn, Inc.), Helen C. Sykes (Elwyn, Inc.)
Abstract: Joint attention is demonstrated through the use of eye contact for the social purpose of sharing experiences with others. Previous research has repeatedly identified deficits in children with autism in both responding to and initiating joint attention. Furthermore, such deficits have been correlated with delays in early receptive and expressive language acquisition as well as impairments in socialization. These findings establish the need to teach the skills required for joint attention in early intervention to increase success in language development and socialization in children with autism. The majority of the research is largely focused on teaching children to respond to joint attention bids via eye gaze training. However, research is still needed to teach children with autism to initiate joint attention. The current study examined the effects of a curricular sequence used to teach children with autism to initiate joint attention. The sequence was used to teach increasingly complex joint attention skills. Initiating joint attention skills in preschool aged children with autism were compared between children who received joint attention training using this sequence and children who did not.
 
2. Play-Based Therapy for Toddlers with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
E. AMANDA AMANDA BOUTOT (DePaul University)
Abstract: Though typical children learn myriad developmental skills through play, children with autism often do not follow the typical pattern of play development. The impact of play deficits for children with are autism are great. First, given a lack of experience with and/or enjoyment of what is considered “typical” play, children with autism often show difficulty or an inability to make independent play choices, requiring someone to assist them if they are to play at all. Second, these deficits limit natural opportunities to learn or apply developmental skills (e.g., language or social skills) as typical peers do. Third, they limit opportunities to interact naturally with typically developing, same-aged peers. Finally, play deficits limit opportunities for developing motivation for and joy of play. These difficulties all provide evidence that teaching play skills to children with autism is a necessary and critical goal for their development. This poster will describe a model for ABA therapy for toddlers (<3 years) with autism and a case study showing its effectiveness for one child over a six-month period. A five step model is presented that can be implemented in home, school, or clinic settings. Implications for future research and practice will also be addressed.
 
3. “Friendship Group”: A Classroom Approach to Teaching Social Skills to Young Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
RINAMARIE S. LEON-GUERRERO (University of Washington)
Abstract: Social Skills are critical skills for young children with autism to develop as they enter school, form friendships and function in the social world. These critical skills are also very difficult skills to learn. Specifically, the complexity of seemingly simple skills and the rules of social interactions present many challenges for young children with autism. In order to target social skills for instruction, this study explored the use of the commercially available Skillstreaming Early Childhood curriculum for teaching social skills. In this study, four preschoolers with autism received explicit instruction on the social skills of greeting, sharing and playing with peers. Each preschooler received instruction in the context of small groups called “friendship group.” Friendships groups took place in the preschool classroom and included two typically developing peers. The three steps of instruction were presentation of the skill using a visual, teacher model with puppets and the student role play with teacher feedback. Findings of this study strongly suggest that children with autism could acquire critical social skills in the context of their classrooms when explicit instruction and visuals were utilized. However it is necessary to program for generalization to help children maintain and generalize these critical social skills.
 
4. Using Video Modeling to Teach Generative Play Skills
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SALLY N. ROBERTS (New England Center for Children), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Observational learning has been used as a tool to teach individuals with disabilities a variety of skills (Egel, Richman, & Koegel, 1981; Rehfeldt, Latimore, & Stromer, 2003). Video modeling, a form of observational learning, has been shown to be effective in teaching a variety of social skills such as conversation, reciprocal play, and independent play (Charlop et al., 1989; Clark et al., 2002; Cota et al., 2003; Taylor et al., 1999). In these studies, however, novel play has not been established via video modeling. The purpose of the present research was to examine an intervention to teach children to vary their play. Three children between the ages of five- and six-years-old participated. Three toys were targeted, one at a time, until mastery of play scripts occurred with each toy. Participants were shown a video with a substitutable loop in which different characters could be used to demonstrate scripted actions and vocalizations. It was found that with a shorter substitutable loop, characters that were both trained and untrained were used. With a longer substitutable loop, there was more behavior with trained characters than with untrained characters. Interobserver agreement was high on all behavioral measures. Implications of these data and directions for further research are discussed.
 
5. Assessment of Joint Attention Responding in Young Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
GRETCHEN VAILLANCOURT (New England Center for Children), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children), William V. Dube (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), Jennifer L. Klein (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: An assessment protocol with objective behavioral measures of joint attention responding is described. The assessment was conducted with 9 children with autism spectrum disorders and 3 typical children, aged 3 to 5 years. Sessions were conducted in both a discrete trial setting and a more naturalistic play setting. Opportunities to respond to an adult’s gaze shift alone, gaze shift paired with the verbal cue “look”, gaze shift paired with a point, and gaze shift paired with point and “look” were presented. Results showed deficits in joint attention responding for the children with autism as compared to the typically developing children. Results suggested that children with autism have the greatest deficits in responding to an adult’s gaze shift alone, and that the addition of a point or the verbal cue “look” increases the likelihood of responding. The children with autism demonstrated significantly higher levels of joint attention responding in the discrete trial setting as compared to the play setting. Levels of joint attention responding in children with autism co-varied with their performance on academic tasks. The results show that the assessment can be used reliably to assess joint attention responding in typically developing children and children with autism.
 
6. Imitation and its Reciprocity in the Treatment of Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ROXANA I. NEDELCU (City University of New York), Trevor F. Stokes (University of South Florida)
Abstract: The present study examined the development of generalized imitation and the effects of the imitation of the child by the therapist. The development of generalized imitative repertoires was investigated by teaching two children, who were siblings within triplets with autism, through shaping and prompting procedures, a number of imitative responses and by probing the imitation of novel, non trained models. In addition, by conducting imitation training in two different settings (clinic and home) and by involving multiple therapists, generalization of skills across people and settings was targeted. Once the participants reached a high and/or constant level of imitation of trained responses, the experimenters employed imitation of the child procedures to investigate the effects on children’s engagement with the environment. The data indicated that shaping and reinforcement procedures determined an increase in participants’ trained imitative responses but no corresponding increase in novel responses. Generalization of taught imitations across therapists and settings occurred. Imitation of the child by the therapist was employed for a small number of sessions. Notwithstanding, the results yielded an increase in participants’ engagement with therapists and toys.
 
7. Teaching Children with Autism to Follow an Adult Gaze
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER L. KLEIN (New England Center for Children), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children), William V. Dube (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), Gretchen O'Sullivan (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Research has demonstrated that children with autism have a deficit in the area of joint attention; however, few studies have focused on teaching joint attention skills to these children. Two preschool-aged children with autism who attended the New England Center for Children’s intensive instructional program participated in the present study. Both participants were selected because they demonstrated the ability to follow an adult’s point but not an adult’s gaze in an assessment conducted by O’Sullivan (2004). Remote controlled toys were used as both prompts and consequences during a delayed cue teaching procedure. Interobserver agreement on correct responses to experimenter gaze shifts ranged from 88.9% to 100% (M=97.7%). Following training, both participants were able to follow an adult’s gaze in a discrete trial setting. Participants demonstrated this skill during contingent probe sessions immediately after training, as well as during baseline sessions that followed. Gaze following is important because it is a crucial part of joint attention responding, and may be a prerequisite for initiating joint attention as well.
 
8. Social Skills Retention from a Summer Therapeutic Program into the Academic School Year
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
PAIGE E. KEETER (KidsPeace), Kimberly Steltz (KidsPeace), Gayatri Ray (KidsPeace), Emily C. Leayman (KidsPeace), John D. McElwee (n/a)
Abstract: There has been concern regarding the risk of regression for children with Autism who have been in structured academic programs during the school year when they are not provided an opportunity for structured programming to continue into the summer months. Sarah's Smile is a six week summer therapeutic activities program that addresses the global goals of socialization and communication for children with an autism spectrum disorder diagnosis. During the summer of 2005, Sarah's Smile featured a social skills curriculum that focused on individual skill development and generalization of mastered skills within a peer group. There were three skill areas featured in the curriculum - interactions, communication, and teamwork. Each of these three skill areas were then broken down into teachable core elements with specialized activities for each. During our study, we will be tracking participants through the first quarter of their academic school year to ascertain if they have retained social skills from the previous academic year to this school year, and further, if they have shown improvement in any of the targeted social skills areas.
 
9. Examining Factors that Affect Social Behavior Among Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ROSE F. EAGLE (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton), Raymond G. Romanczyk (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton)
Abstract: The current poster presents a study that examines individual and environmental factors that affect the social behavior of children with Autistic Disorder and Pervasive Developmental Disorder Not Otherwise Specified (also known as Autism Spectrum Disorders or ASDs). Information obtained about the interaction between the child with an ASD and the social environment may be critical to developing effective social skills interventions. The current study investigates the effect of two types of adult-initiated social behavior on interpersonal distance in two groups of children with ASDs. The two groups included in the current study are 1) children with a mean length of utterance of one(the “Syncretic Speech” group) and 2) children with a mean length of utterance of two or greater (the “Telegraphic Speech” group). The participants experience two conditions: 1) “Passive Behavior” in which an unfamiliar adult sits quietly without making any social initiations, and 2) “Social Behavior” in which an unfamiliar adult makes verbal social initiations and initiates brief physical contact with the child. The dependent variables are the child’s latency to move away from the adult, the mean distance between the child and the adult, and the child’s frequency of social initiations.
 
10. The Potential of Family Dinner: Examining the Social Interactions of Families with and without Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CHRISTOPHER JONES (University of Washington), Ilene S. Schwartz (University of Washington), Emily Silverstein (University of Washington), Mary Blaine-Buslon (University of Washington)
Abstract: The development of social and communication skills in children with autism is a fundamental goal of parents, teachers and applied behavior analysts who live and work with these children. Unfortunately, while there is a substantial research base examining the development of these skills in the classroom, we know very little about their development in the family context. This study examined the social interactions of families of children with and without autism during dinnertime. The family dinner is a naturalistic setting that functions similarly in most American families and serves a unique milieu for research purposes because while the structure remains similar across families, the implementation and progression of dinner varies. We videotaped 30 families (20 autism, 10 typical) during their dinner times and computer coded all communicative interactions either toward or from the target child. Children were matched (2 to 1 ratio) according to age, gender, and language abilities (all children with autism performed at or above average on a standardized language assessment). Preliminary analyses show that families of children with autism engage their child with autism more often than typical families. However, while the majority of initiations in typical families were either questions or comments, a significant proportion of communication in families with children with autism was directive (telling the child to do something) in nature. Additionally, typical families responded more by acknowledging each others’ initiations while families of children with autism gave no response or ignored initiations more often. Subsequent sequential analyses will be conducted to examine whether there are conditional patterns unique to families of children with autism that could be used to develop interventions for teaching families how to better interact with their child.
 
11. Using Written Scripts to Increase Spontaneous Conversation in Middle School Students with Autism Serviced in Public Schools
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
ALICIA N. FLORES (South Dakota State University), Shannen L. McKinney (South Dakota State University)
Abstract: Students with autism benefit from instruction in conversation. Written scripts were used with middle school students with autism, serviced in a public school setting, to increase spontaneous communication with peers and adults. Two students from different public school within the San Diego Unified School District were trained by paraprofessionals who received training from certified special education teachers. Prior to implementation of the teaching strategy, the students' social skills were assessed with the Vineland and the Brigance. Reliability was assessed using periodic interobserver agreement. Acquisition, maintenance, and generalization were measured using a multiple baseline single-subject design. Observation and analysis of the data revealed a functional relationship between the application of the training procedures and a change in the students' behaviors. Recommendations for written script training procedures and implications for implementation in applied settings are suggested.
 
12. Decreasing Attention-Motivated Problem Behavior by Teaching Alternative Attention-Seeking Skills
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LACIE GREGOIRE (BEACON Services), Robert K. Ross (BEACON Services), Harry A. Mackay (Northeastern University, Shriver Center)
Abstract: The participants in the present study were two 2-year old boys with Pervasive Developmental Disorder, Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, and Autism Spectrum Disorder. Both boys displayed frequent undesirable behavior (e.g. sudden interruptions) to gain adult attention. An analysis was conducted to determine the types and amount of undesirable behaviors that occurred during adult conversation in the presence of the children. Once this analysis was completed, the children were taught an appropriate way to interrupt the adult’s conversation, and thus gain attention or make a request. The results indicated that the undesirable behavior of both children decreased. In addition, both acquired the desirable social skills needed to properly interrupt adults who are conversing with one another in the child’s presence. This skill also showed generalization to at least one other setting.
 
13. Teaching a Child with Autism How to Take Breaks Independently in Order to Reduce the Occurrence of Misbehavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALEXIA STACK (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Krista Zambolin (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Shelley McInnis (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Magda Markiewicz (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Learning how to take breaks independently is a useful skill for learners with autism. It can prevent the occurrence of escape motivated problem behaviors by teaching a socially appropriate way to do so. Through the use of the standard celeration chart to track the student's progress, and making data based decisions, a student with autism was taught how to take breaks independently. Prior to intervention, the student would escape a difficult or new task by leaving the table, whining, or crying. The introduction of a "break bell", and increasing opportunities to use the bell led to the independent use of the bell. Once the data indicated that the student was taking breaks frequently and prior to misbehaving, an intervention was developed to limit the use of breaks. The student was taught to take breaks when he really needed them.
 
14. The Use of Visual and Textual Play Schedule to increase Engaged Time with Conditioned Reinforcers and to decrease Stereotype in Two Students with a Diagnosis of Autistic Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER MARY MCMULLEN (ABACAS Ireland), Juliet M. Quinlan (ABACAS Ireland), Marcia Ward (ABACAS Ireland)
Abstract: This study demonstrates the efficacy of using play schedules to decrease stereotypy and increase appropriate play across a wide range of conditioned reinforcers. The study involved two males with a diagnosis of autistic spectrum disorder who emitted high rates of stereotypy during free play. The students were placed in the play area with four conditioned reinforcers during the baseline condition of the experiment. Visual and textual play schedules and a timer were introduced during the intervention phase. Both students were placed once again in the play area with same four conditioned reinforcers. This study employed two ABAB reversal designs. The results illustrated a total elimination of stereotypy for both students during the second intervention phases of the experiment. Both students also demonstrated an increase in appropriate play across an expanding range of reinforcers.
 
15. Teaching Students with Autism to Make Verbal Initiations: Using a Tactile Prompt & Visual Script Program
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CHERI K. BENE (TERI, Inc.)
Abstract: This study examines the effects of a tactile prompting device incorporated with visual scripts, to increase verbal initiations in three children with autism during free-play activities. A multiple baseline design across participants was used to asses the effects of the device in prompting initiations toward an adult in free-play situations. During teaching, visual scripts were used to teach the children what to say and then faded systematically. During baseline, the children seldom initiated to peers or adults during play activities. When the scripts were introduced in combination with the tactile prompting device scripted responses increased with a familiar adult. After fading the visual scripts, scripted initiations continued with use of the tactile prompting device. The results suggest that the prompting device serves as an effective, unobtrusive prompt for verbal initiations.
 
16. Assessing the Relationship Between Play and Stereotypy Over Ten Years with Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ARIA ASH-RAFZEDEH (Claremont McKenna College), Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College), Loryana Wurzer (Claremont McKenna College), Alefiyah Zulfiqar Pishori (Claremont McKenna College), Sarah Kuriokose (Claremont McKenna College), Michelle Seffrood (Claremont McKenna College), Stephanie Buxton (Claremont McKenna College), Rohan Sabnis (Claremont Autism Center)
Abstract: It has long been thought that there is a relationship between stereotypy and play in children with autism in that as the child learns appropriate play, stereotypy decreases (c.f. Schreibman). However, there is little research exploring this phenomenon, and no research on measuring the relationship between these two variables long term. The present study presents data from the observations of play and stereotypy of 8 children with autism over a 10 year period of time. The children’s behavior was videotaped during free play sessions of five minutes with the child interacting with their parent, a clinic therapist, and a person unfamiliar to the child and to autism per se. These video-taped play sessions were later scored by several raters with an inter-rater reliability of 93%. The data showed that as expected at pre-treatment, the children displayed more stereotypy than play. However, once ABA treatment began, as each child increased in play, they also decreased in stereotypy. This trend continued throughout treatment for all 8 subjects. After treatment during follow-up probes, the gap between play and stereotypy grew a bit smaller, but the same trend was maintained. These results are discussed in terms of the importance of assessing treatment efficacy over the long term as well as the possibility of using play as a replacement behavior for stereotypy.
 
17. Using a Picture Activity Schedule and Bins to Increase Independent Play Skills of a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KIM K. TASKY (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University), Eric Rudrud (St. Cloud State University), Sarah E. Roberts (Behavioral Dimensions)
Abstract: A picture activity schedule in conjunction with activity bins was used to increase the independent play skills of a 5.8 year old child diagnosed with autism and cerebral palsy. Total task presentation of a 15 step task analysis for using the picture activity schedule along with graduated guidance was used to teach independent completion of activities within bins. Independent play was determined by measuring the duration of time spent engaged in activities and the percentage of steps performed independently. Independent play did not occur during baseline (0 min engaged and 0% steps performed per session) and increased to an average of 13.6 min (range 6-22 min) engaged and 65% (range 7-93%) of steps performed per session. The results indicated that the picture activity schedule with activity bins increased engagement in activities, decreased dependence on staff to remain engaged, and facilitated the completion of lengthy response chains.
 
18. Programming Generalization of Perspective-Taking Skills in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders Using Video Modeling
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
PAMELA D. KELSO (University of Manitoba), Stephen W. Holborn (University of Manitoba), Ashley deVries (University of Manitoba), Kerri L. Walters (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Perspective taking can be defined as accurately identifying another’s perspective and responding on that basis. Individuals with autism spectrum disorders often lack perspective-taking skills. Video modeling has been demonstrated as effective in teaching perspective taking skills, but with limited generalization to untrained tasks. In the current study, the general case model was used to enhance generalization of perspective-taking skills to untrained tasks using a video modeling procedure. For each participant a multiple baseline across tasks design with generalization probes was used to investigate the effectiveness of video modeling in teaching perspective-taking skills to five children diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder. Following baseline, children were taught perspective-taking skills using video modeling and reinforcement. Participants viewed brief videos depicting children correctly completing the various tasks. Participants were asked to respond to a perspective-taking question following the video and were reinforced for identifying the correct response. In the event of an incorrect response, the video was replayed until a correct response was obtained. Results indicated that video modeling was effective for all children in teaching perspective-taking skills as judged by three consecutive correct responses to the perspective taking questions. These skills also generalized to untrained tasks.
 
19. Using a Digital Camera to Track and Self-Manage Own Behaviors in Routines for Children with Asperger Disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SANG BOK LEE (Daegu University, South Korea), Jeongil Kim (Daegu University, South Korea), Soo Gyun Kang (Daegu University, South Korea), Eun Chung Lee (Daegu University, South Korea)
Abstract: This study examined the effect of tracking and self-managing own behaviors in routines, using a digital camera, for children with Asperger disorders. Five boys with Asperger's, 6-8 years old, and their mothers participated in the study. The subject and his mother were trained how to proceed the intervention based on the training manual. Using a multiple base design across subjects and environments, data on appropriate self-help behaviors and inappropriate behaviors were collected. The result showed self-help skills and appropriate daily life behaviors were improved with all the subject.
 
20. Teaching Unscripted Play to Children with Autism Using a Video Modeling Intervention
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KATE E. FISKE MASSEY (Rutgers University)
Abstract: Video modeling has been used to effectively teach a variety of academic and self-help skills to children with autism (Charlop-Christy, Le, & Freeman, 2000). The approach has also been used to teach play skills to children with autism (D’Ateno, Mangiapanello, & Taylor, 2003). While the use of video modeling in teaching thematic play often produces fast acquisition of play scripts, researchers report difficulty teaching children unscripted play (D’Ateno et al., 2003). This study programs for the generalization of scripted play to unscripted play by employing “sufficient exemplars” (Stokes & Baer, 1977, p. 355) within the video modeling intervention. Participants were shown three variations of a video model for one toy set, and stimulus and response generalization were measured by recording scripted and unscripted play exhibited with the training toy and two additional toy sets in the training setting and in a generalization setting. The results of this intervention will be discussed in terms of the acquisition of both scripted and unscripted play actions and vocalizations.
 
21. Assessing the Effects of Scripted Peer Tutoring and Programming Common Stimuli on Social Interactions of a Young Student with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ANNA-LIND PETURSDOTTIR (University of Minnesota), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota), Kristen McMaster (University of Minnesota), Kathy Horner (Minneapolis Public Schools)
Abstract: This study assessed the effects of scripted peer tutoring reading activities on social interactions between a high-functioning kindergartner with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and his typically developing peers in free-play. A withdrawal design with multiple baselines across peers showed no effects of peer tutoring on social interactions. Subsequently, the effects of programming play-related common stimuli into the peer tutoring activity on social interactions during free-play were assessed with a withdrawal design with one peer and continued baselines across the other two peers. With the introduction of common play stimuli, the average frequency of social interactions directed to a peer during free-play increased. In the absence of common play stimuli, social interactions directed to the peers decreased. Generalization to other peers was also observed. Implications for addressing social interaction deficits of students with ASD via peer tutoring are discussed. Inter-observer agreement on the dependent measure was calculated for 33% of all sessions and averaged 98.3% (range 75 to 100%).
 
22. Examining the Impact of a Mental Skills Package on Autistic Children's Competitive Performance in Soccer
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE KARREN (St. Cloud State University), Sharon E. Baxter (ABLE Clinic)
Abstract: There is little research on individuals with intellectual disabilities, particularly children with autism, and the effects of performance training in sports and leisure activities (Porretta and Moore, 1996/1997). The purpose of this study was to replicate and extend the mental skills package of Gregg, Hrycaiko, Mactavish and Martin (2004) to two sibling children with autism, ages 7 and 8, participating in soccer. A multiple baseline design across individuals was used to assess the effects of the intervention on off-task behaviours, work output and competition results. The Mental Skills Training package included “goal-setting, self-monitoring/self-evaluation, self-talk, feedback, and goal visualization, all of which have a solid research foundation in sport psychology” (Gregg, Hrycaiko, Mactavish and Martin (2004). This study applies the Gregg et al. approach in a family centered, home based ABA program. In addition to home practices focusing on skill acquisition, parents and ABA tutors collected data and implemented strategies at practices and weekly competitions.
 
23. The Effects of Two Trainers on the Generalization of a Greeting Response for Adolescents with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JOEL VIDOVIC (The Ohio State University), Gwen Dwiggins (The Ohio State University), Pamela G. Osnes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.)
Abstract: The use of multiple trainers was investigated as an intervention to program the generalization of a spontaneous greeting response with three adolescents with autism and a fourth with both autism and Down Syndrome. A multiple baseline design across participants was used to control the implementation of training sessions while monitoring occurred in a setting dissimilar to the training setting to assess the generalization of the greeting response across settings and people. Results showed that the use of multiple trainers alone was insufficient to obtain the generalization of a spontaneous greeting response.
 
24. Prompting Strategies to Increase Eye Contact in Children diagnosed with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MANGUM APHRODITE (Marcus Autism Center), Catherine Trapani (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), Tiffany Kodak (Louisiana State University)
Abstract: Previous research suggests that eye contact is a prerequisite for compliance during educational tasks (Hamlet, Axelrod, & Kuerschner, 1984). Children diagnosed with autism commonly exhibit deficits in social skills including sustained eye contact. Eye contact may be viewed as a necessary prerequisite to attending to instructional tasks. Thus, when educational training programs are implemented with children diagnosed with autism, eye contact is typically a targeted skill. Limited research has been conducted evaluating the effectiveness of procedures targeting acquisition of sustained eye contact. In the current investigation, multiple treatment procedures were evaluated to increase eye contact with four children diagnosed with autism. Treatment for eye contact in the form of a glance was implemented while baseline data on 2 seconds of eye contact (i.e., sustained eye contact) was collected. Following acquisition of the glance, treatment procedures were implemented for sustained eye contact. An additional treatment procedure evaluated with one participant involved holding a reinforcer near the therapist eye while prompting the participant to engage in eye contact with the therapist. Results indicated that participants consistently engaged in brief eye contact following the implementation of treatment. In addition, when sustained eye contact was differentially reinforced, two participants levels of sustained eye contact increased and remained high across multiple sessions.
 
25. Evaluating the Social Behavior of Preschool Children with Autism in an Inclusive Playground Setting
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
VICTORIA SOBRINO-SANCHEZ (Nova Southeastern University), Anibal Gutierrez Jr. (Nova Southeastern University), Melissa N. Hale (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: We conducted a descriptive study to evaluate the social behavior that children diagnosed with autism exhibit in an inclusive playground setting. The purpose of the study was to examine the extent to which children with autism interact with typically developing peers when placed in inclusive setting. Researchers observed and recorded the behavior of participants during inclusive playground time. Observations provide data on a variety of behavior including vocal and non-vocal behavior (gestures, signs, picture cards) towards other peers and adults on the playground, problem behavior (physical aggression, inappropriate vocalizations), repetitive behavior, and interaction with playground equipment. These data provide an opportunity to evaluate the effectiveness of the inclusive playground activity to promote appropriate behavior as well as develop social behavior with peers and staff.
 
26. Using Video Modeling to Teach Conversational Skills and Social Responsiveness to a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALEXIS HYDE-WASHMON (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project)
Abstract: The following study used an alternating treatments design to examine video modeling for teaching conversational skills and social responsiveness to a child with autism. The target child viewed a videotape of his typically developing brother and a peer engaged in simple conversation. The conversation consisted of responses to statements and questions previously mastered by the target child in therapy. The child mastered responding to adult therapists but did not generalize to peers. Data were collected on the child’s verbal initiations and responses during three conversational conditions: simple greetings, making statements, and reciprocal questions. Outcome was assessed in a controlled environment and in a natural setting. Following the intervention, the child’s verbal initiations and responses increased with his brother and peer across settings. Interrater agreement on verbal initiations and responses was 85%. The findings indicate that video modeling can be an effective method for generalizing conversational skills and social responsiveness to children with autism.
 
27. An Evaluation of Teaching Compliment-Giving using Video-Modeling in the Context of Games
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
RUTH M. DEBAR (The Ohio State University), Tracy L. Kettering (The Ohio State University), Jessica Hemmelgarn (The Ohio State University), Lindsay R. Sessor (The Ohio State University), Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Video-modeling has been shown to be an effective teaching technology in the context of teaching social interactions with individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) (Apple et al.,2005; Charlop & Millstein 1989; LeBlanc et al., 2003; Nikopoulos & Keenan 2004; Sherer at al., 2001; Wert & Neisworth 2003). In order to evaluate compliment-giving in the context of playing games, procedures similar to Apple et al. were employed with a fourth-grader who was dually diagnosed with fragile X and autism. A multiple baseline design across games was employed. This investigation extends the literature by examining compliment giving in the context of playing games and by using an adult as the model. Results are discussed in terms of increasing self-initiated compliments and compliments given in response to a peer’s comment.
 
28. A Components Analysis of Video-modeling and Reinforcement of Social Interaction during Game Playing of Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA HEMMELGARN (The Ohio State University), Ruth M. DeBar (The Ohio State University), Tracy L. Kettering (The Ohio State University), Lindsay R. Sessor (The Ohio State University), Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: The effectiveness of video-modeling has been demonstrated in teaching various play skills with individuals with autism spectrum disorders (D’Ateno et al., 2003; Taylor et al., 1999). In order to assess the comparative effects of video-modeling and video-modeling with reinforcement across acquisition and maintenance of scripted statements, novel statements and turn-taking exchanges, a multiple baseline design was employed in order to evaluate two procedures across two first graders diagnosed with autism and two board-games. Prior to the intervention, both participants could independently play the board-games, however, both needed continuous prompting in order to turn-take and to interact using contextually appropriate statements. Results are reviewed in terms of increasing the frequency of scripted statements, novel statements and turn-taking exchanges.
 
29. Teaching Social Skills to Children with Autism in a Group Setting
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SHELLEY MCINNIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Krista Zambolin (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Heidi Calverley (University of British Columbia & Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Cole, 9-years-old and Ryan, 11-years-old are cousins with mild Autism. They have been participating in an in-home group program that combines fluency based instruction and precision teaching since August 2005. Both boys experience difficulties with conversations, including straying off topic, losing the interest of their conversation partner and interrupting. The boys are now learning to exchange conversation volleys, comment and ask questions appropriately with all the data being collected on the Standard Celeration Chart.
 
30. Acquisition of Appropriate Play Skills in Children with Autism: Discrete Trials versus Video Modeling
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
TIFFANY HODGES (May South), Bradley S. Bezilla (May South), Amanda Tobias (May South), Ryan Schweck (May South)
Abstract: There are many behavioral teaching techniques that have been used with children with autism; two of the most widely researched are discrete trial training and video modeling (Stahmer, Ingersoll, & Carter, 2003). However, these two modalities of teaching have not been compared through research. This study looks at the differences in social play skill acquisition between discrete trial training and video modeling. Each child was taught appropriate play with toys that are developmentally appropriate. The purpose was to measure how quickly appropriate play skills are obtained. Each child was measured on levels of social initiation and reciprocal play. These two skills have been shown in previous studies to covary with the level of appropriate play (Nikopoulos & Keenan, 2004). Each child in the study was taught two similar skills, half with discrete trial training and half with video modeling. The hypothesis was that those children in the discrete trial group will learn appropriate play skills faster than those in the video modeling group.
 
31. Teaching Object Imitation as a Component Skill for Expressive Prosodic Skills
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTA ZAMBOLIN (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Heidi Calverley (University of British Columbia & Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Shelley McInnis (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Many children diagnosed with autism have unusual or odd-sounding prosody or intonation. This paper will demonstrate how teaching object imitation was directly related to the teaching of prosody in 2 children with autism.
 
33. Training Perspective Taking in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALEXIS ENGLOT (University of Manitoba), Jennifer Hailley (University of Manitoba), Leanne Wirch (University of Manitoba), Kerri L. Walters (University of Manitoba), Stephen W. Holborn (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders demonstrate deficits in perspective taking, that is, in identifying and taking the perspective of another individual. False-belief tasks are often used to assess perspective taking. In such tasks the individual whose perspective is to be taken is unaware of a change in location of a stimulus which occurred when they were not present. Using a multiple-baseline design, four children with autism spectrum disorders and with deficits in perspective taking in such tasks were trained in perspective-taking behavior using instruction, prompting, modeling, role playing and reinforcement procedures. A novel aspect of the training involved having the child take the place of the other child in the task before being asked to take the other child's perspective when the other child was engaged in the task in the present. Preliminary results indicate that the training package was effective in remediating the deficits in perspective taking.
 
34. Generality of Behavioral Assessments of Perspective-Taking in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder across Modalities and Tasks
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER HAILLEY (University of Manitoba), Leanne Wirch (University of Manitoba), Alexis Englot (University of Manitoba), Kerri L. Walters (University of Manitoba), Stephen W. Holborn (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Perspective-taking assessments measure skills at identifying another person’s perspective and responding on that basis. Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders often show deficits on such skills relative to other children with or without disabilities. In previous research assessments have always been conducted live using one of several different tasks: Sally-Anne, Smarties, or Hide-and-Seek. We examined live versus video assessments in 6 four-year old children with Autism Spectrum Disorders, and 6 four-year old children without disabilities. All children were assessed with live and video formats on all tasks. Format and task orders were counterbalanced across children within each participant group. Results show substantially lower perspective-taking skills in children with Autism Spectrum Disorders across both formats and across all tasks.
 
35. Group Based Social Skills Interventions for Children with Asperger's Syndrome
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DANIEL MARK FIENUP (Illinois State University), Kristal Shelvin (Illinois State University), Sara J. Burmeister (Illinois State University), Katherine Gioia (Illinois State University), Jennifer Wierzbicki (Illinois State University), Kristine Henning (Illinois State University), Karla J. Doepke (Illinois State University)
Abstract: Asperger’s Syndrome (AS) is primarily a social disorder characterized by qualitative, pervasive impairments in social interaction and narrow, repetitive patterns of interests and activities. While children with AS often cannot be distinguished from their peers in terms of academic progress, they can easily be spotted in social situations as “different.” To date, there is limited research on interventions that improve the social competence of children with AS and unfortunately, a growing body of evidence that many children with AS become adults with extreme social skills deficits, and concomitant problems with sustained employment and psychiatric difficulties (Gustein & Whitney, 2002). Given the impact that social skills deficits continue to impose on individuals with AS and the developmental nature of social competence, it is imperative that social interventions be identified that can be implemented during childhood. This investigation provides a systematic evaluation of the social skills needs of 8 elementary school-aged children with AS and the effectiveness of a group social skills intervention. Assessment, intervention and generalization results are presented in terms of individual and group data. Satisfaction data group members and their families are also presented. Results are discussed in terms of implications for further empirical investigations of social skills interventions.
 
36. Using a Scripting Procedure to Teach Conversational Skills to a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE S. GREENSPAN (University of North Texas), Jill Scarbro-McLaury (Private Practice), Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-ruiz (University of North Texas)
Abstract: This study is a case example of the effectiveness of teaching conversational skills using scripting, modeling and praise with an 8 year old boy on the autism spectrum. The study took place in the child’s home in typical play settings such as his bedroom and the family play room. Interaction partners included peers, a sibling, and parents. The child was taught to initiate conversation, take turns in a conversation, maintain a conversation topic, and to change a conversation topic appropriately. The procedures were a systematic replication of Yun Chin and Bernard-Opitz, 2000. The effects of the intervention procedure are being evaluated using a multiple probe design. Social validity of outcomes will also be assessed. Data collection and IOA are in progress.
 
37. Teaching Target Stimuli Individually Or In A Set On The Acquisition Of Conditional Discriminations In A Matching-To-Sample Format
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
COURTNEY MICHELLE MOODY (Behaviour Institute), Joel P. Hundert (Behaviour Institute), Nicole Walton-Allen (Behaviour Institute)
Abstract: Frequently, young children with autism are taught to make conditional discriminations in a matching-to-sample format (e.g., match one red object to a second red object from a number of comparison stimuli). A target stimulus (e.g., one red object) is presented and the child makes a motor response to one of the number of presented comparison stimuli. There is a question of the sequence of presenting the target stimuli. One possibility is to teach one item at a time from the instructional set of items (e.g., five objects of different colors) until mastery is achieved and then move to the second item in the same way. A second possibility is to teach the entire set of stimuli at the same time. Each item would be presented and then the next until individual target stimuli were mastered. This presentation will describe data comparing the acquisition and generalization of teaching conditional discriminations with target stimuli presented one at a time until mastery to teaching target stimuli as a set.
 
 
 
Poster Session #159
#159 International Poster Session - DDA
Sunday, May 28, 2006
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Grand Hall
39. Correspondence Between Partial and Full Functional Analysis Outcomes
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CAITLIN V. HERZINGER (University of Georgia), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), Jane Morton (University of Georgia)
Abstract: Experimental functional analysis methodology has been identified as the most valid method for assessment of problem behavior because it allows for the variables that maintain problem behavior to be identified. The advantages of functional analysis have been clearly established throughout the literature; however, certain issues such as necessary training, setting constraints, and time intensiveness have been highlighted as negative characteristics of the methodology. In this study, we assess the issue of time expenditures as they relate to the results of functional analyses. Specifically, we compared the results of over 20 separate multielement functional analyses with partial results of the same analyses to identify at what point clear response patterns emerged. For example, functional analyses that required 25 sessions (5 of each session type) were compared with the outcome results after only 6 (25%), 12 sessions (50%), and 19 sessions (75%). Results suggest that, in some cases, the variables maintaining problem behavior may be identified by conducting fewer sessions without impacting the overall interpretation of the analysis.
 
40. Electroconvulsive Therapy for the Treatment of Bipolar Disorder in a Woman with Developmental Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JAMES CLARK (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Abstract: A 35-year-old woman with severe mental retardation was admitted to the J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center in December 2003 for the evaluation and treatment of severe behavioral and psychiatric difficulties due to bipolar disorder. Prior to her admission to JIRDC, she was treated frequently at psychiatric facilities with little lasting effect on her condition. Because of her history of dangerous reactions or lack of response to psychotropic medications, initial efforts at stabilization after her admission were met with limited success. Electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) was initiated in March 2004, resulting in reduced severity of behavior during episodes, reduced number of target behaviors observed during episodes, and improvement in sleep. These initial improvements were not sustained, and the initial ECT treatment schedule was replicated in February 2005 in an effort both to repeat the initial success of the previous year and to evaluate a more effective long-term maintenance schedule. The replication and subsequent maintenance schedule has resulted in the reduction of severe manic episodes but has not reduced cyclical episodes of less severe behavior.
 
41. The Use of Descritive Analyses to Determine the Schedules of Reinforcement for Treating Food Refusal
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
AARON D. LESSER (Wesley College), Sean D. Casey (Pennsylvania State University), Christopher J. Perrin (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Cheryl L. Casey (New Jersey Department of Education), Stefanie Horvath (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Gregory K. Reed (Howard University)
Abstract: The feeding behaviors of a child diagnosed with failure to thrive were assessed in the child's home using descriptive analysis methodology to identify the schedules of reinforcement provided by the child's mother. This analysis revealed that the child’s appropriate feeding behaviors (i.e., bite acceptance, self-feeding) were on a lean schedule of positive reinforcement and that the child’s refusal behaviors (e.g., non-acceptance, batting, saying "No") were on a rich schedule of negative reinforcement. A treatment package consisting of differential positive reinforcement for bite acceptance with and without escape extinction was evaluated by manipulating the schedules of reinforcement that were identified to be used by the child’s mother. The results of treatment successfully reduced the child’s inappropriate mealtime behaviors and increased the child’s acceptance of offered food items.
 
42. Increasing Age Appropriate Leisure Preferences in Individuals with Severe or Profound Mental Retardation
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
AMANDA J. YOUNG BROTT (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Paula K. Davis (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Shannon R. Freeman Weiss (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: When offered an opportunity to express a preference, some individuals with mental retardation may choose age inappropriate leisure activities over those that are appropriate for their chronological age. One possible reason is a lack of skill. This study evaluated a simple training program to teach the use of age appropriate leisure items to 14 individuals with severe or profound mental retardation. Eighteen leisure items, categorized as appropriate for infants, children, or adults, were used. Prior to training, three successive choice preference assessments were conducted with each individual. After determining preferences, training using prompting plus reinforcement was provided for all items for a total of nine weeks with preference assessments conducted after each three weeks of training and at a one month follow-up. At pretest, 9 of 14 participants approached none of the six age appropriate items on the three successive choice preference assessment, 5 approached one. After training, 8 of 14 approached all six age appropriate items, 4 approached none, 1 approached one, and 1 approached five. One month follow-up responding was similar. These results show that individuals with severe or profound mental retardation can develop preferences for age appropriate leisure items with standard instructional training.
 
43. A Literature Review of Functional Communication Training
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA L. OLIVE (University of Texas, Austin), Berenice de la Cruz (University of Texas, Austin), Tonya Nichole Davis (University of Texas, Austin), Russell Lang (Lake Travis ISD)
Abstract: This paper reviews the literature on FCT. Over 100 articles were coded and analyzed. FCT has been successfully implemented with consumers between the ages of less than 2 years of age to adulthood. Participants were diagnosed with a range of disabilities. Functional Analysis was the most widely used type of assessment to determine the function of challenging behavior. Intervention was completed in a variety of settings. Participants were taught to use verbal language, sign language, picture requesting, and voice output communication aids. Generalization and Maintenance were rarely studied. Social Validity was studied even less.
 
44. Large-Scale Scatter Plot Analysis Using Microsoft Excel and Fixed-Width Fonts
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
PAUL REEDY (The May Institute), David Caolo (The May Institute), Priscilla Blew (The May Institute), Susan F. Thibadeau (The May Institute)
Abstract: Scatter plot analysis, first described by Touchette, MacDonald and & Langer (1985), is used to determine when behavior occurs and is well-suited for functional assessments (Miltenberger, 1998). One factor limiting the use of scatter plots from more general data analysis is the considerable effort required to construct and enter collected data on the graphic table. This obstacle can be addressed using commercial spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel with specific formatting including "fixed width" character fonts. This poster explains how behavior analysts with typical computing skills can develop these scatter plots and presents examples of their use as an every-day data analysis tool.
 
45. Does the Assessment of Basic Learning Abilities Test Predict Success at Everyday Tasks for Persons with Mental Retardation?
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER R. THORSTEINSSON (University of Manitoba), Garry L. Martin (University of Manitoba), Dickie C. T. Yu (University of Manitoba & St. Amant Research Centre), May S. Lee (University of Manitoba), Pamela D. Kelso (University of Manitoba), Sara M. Spevack (University of Manitoba), Toby L. Martin (University of Manitoba & St. Amant Research Centre)
Abstract: The Assessment of Basic Learning Abilities (ABLA) test measures the ease or difficulty with which an individual can readily learn the position, visual and auditory discriminations involved in many daily tasks. Standard prompting and reinforcement procedures are used to attempt to teach a simple imitation, a position discrimination, two visual discriminations, and an auditory-visual discrimination (referred to as levels). On each task, training continued until the pass criterion of 8 consecutive correct responses or the failure criterion of 8 cumulative errors was met. Twenty participants with severe or profound developmental delay were recruited, representing each of the levels of the ABLA. Three everyday predictive tasks were identified at each of the 5 ABLA levels for a total of 15 tasks. Predictive tasks included folding laundry, sorting socks into pairs, and responding appropriately to requests such as “pass the cup” at the dinner table. Staff were given written descriptions of the 15 tasks and asked to predict whether clients would pass or fail each task, using the ABLA pass/fail criterion mentioned above. Tasks were presented in random order. It was found that client performance on the ABLA test accurately predicted their performance on the everyday predictive tasks, and that the ABLA test had higher accuracy than staff on predicting clients’ performance.
 
46. The Aggression Trauma Scale (ATS): A MethodFor Quantifying Tissue Damage Caused By Aggression
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER L. LINK (The Vinfen Corporation), Michael F. Dorsey (The Vinfen Corporation/Simmons College), Mary Teresa Bolotin (The Vinfen Corporation)
Abstract: Observational methodologies utilized within the field of ABA are limited in that they only measure the temporal characteristics of the behavior(s) and not the physical result of the behavior of interest. While an aggressive behavior may be reduced to a very low frequency, the effects of a low frequency aggressive behavior may continue to pose a serious risk to peers or staff. Iwata, Pace, Kissel, Nau, and Farber (1990) developed the Self-Injury Trauma Scale (SIT) to measure the physical effects of SIB. The current project was designed as a replication and extension of the Iwata et al., (1990) study to individuals who have been the victim of physical aggressive behaviors. Interrater reliability scores (IOR) were evaluated, with a minimum IOR of 80% correct. Fifty individuals within one adult day program who had been the victim of physically aggressive behavior served as subjects. Results of the study were consistent with Iwata et al., (1990) in the demonstration of the ability to provide a reliable and objective measure of the degree of injury suffered as a result of aggressive behaviors. These results will allow for a more accurate evaluation of treatment interventions in the reduction of aggressive behavior.
 
47. Examination of the Potential Side Effects of Restraint Fading for Severe SIB
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE LYNN HAUSMAN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Sung Woo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer Rusak (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer Ernest (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Mechanical restraints are often used to minimize the physical risks resulting from severe self-injurious behavior (SIB). However, the use of mechanical restraints can result in restrictions in movement, which may reduce an individual’s ability to participate in daily activities. Recent research has addressed some of the side effects of using restraints and restraint fading in the treatment of individuals with severe SIB (Fisher, Piazza, Bowman, Hanley, & Adelinis, 1997). In the current investigation, canvas arm restraints were evaluated with a client exhibiting severe hand-to-head SIB. Canvas arm restraints with 0 (empty sleeves), 2, 4, or 6 thin metal stays were compared to a control condition in which the client wore no protective equipment. Data were collected on behavior that approximated hand-to-head SIB (i.e., eating highly preferred edible items) while evaluating the effectiveness of several levels of restraint on reducing rates of SIB. It was determined that canvas arm restraints with 2 stays adequately reduced rates of SIB while still allowing the client flexibility in his arms. Furthermore, as the rigidity of restraints was faded, the participant continued to engage in adaptive play behavior. Reliability data were collected for at least one third of sessions and averaged above 80%.
 
48. Comparing Manual and PDA Scoring on Integrity and Accuracy of All-Day Resident Life Quality Reports
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
GARY T. BARRETT (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Whitney Heavner (Lenoir-Rhyne College), Martin Thomas Ivancic (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Kimberly D. Willis (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Abstract: Data scored across intervals of the day by same staff using manual and two different Personal Device Assistants (PDAs) were compared for integrity (scoring the assigned intervals) and accuracy (scoring close near the assigned interval). Integrity was not different between all three devices producing between 70 and 80% of the possible scores. Accuracy of the data are impossible to determine for manual recording but informal observations indicated “catching up” of the data just prior to the end of the shift. Average discrepancy from the assigned interval could be calculated for each PDA score because the device “stamps” the record. Sixty-one percent of PDA scores occurred within the assigned scoring intervals. For scores occurring outside intervals, average discrepancy was 21.4 min with the PDA with the louder interval beep signal decreasing this discrepancy still further. Staff acceptability information show greater preference for taking PDA data even though there appears to be a demand to score within daily intervals from the beep signal that is not there with the manual recording.
 
49. The Effects of Utilizing Recorded Audio Messages to Decrease Target Behaviors for a Client with Visual Impairment and Mental Retardation
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
ZHANKUN CHENG (The Habilitation Corporation, Memphis, TN), Min Cheng (Shanghai University)
Abstract: A client with visual impairment and profound mental retardation was referred for behavioral services for engaging in physical aggression and self-injury behaviors (SIB). Functional assessment suggested that the variable that maintained the client's target behaviors was to gain access to talking to her niece on the phone. The A-B-A-B experimental design procedures were used to examine the effects of two reinforcement conditions with this client. One independent variable (A) was to let staff make calls to her niece whenever the client demands to do so (sometimes her niece was not available to talk with her). Whereas another condition is to play a pre-recorded messages (greetings, Scripture readings, bed time stories, etc) read by her niece from an audio cassette. Data collected by direct care staff and the Behavior Analyst's direct observations showed a substantial decrease on client's target behaviors when condition (B) was utilized.
 
50. An Examination of Collateral Changes in Affect During Behavioral Treatments with and without Punishment
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA M. SHULLEETA (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lynn G. Bowman (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: One method to determine the social acceptability of a behavioral treatment implemented with an individual who is nonverbal may be to measure the individual’s affect. Therefore, it may be especially important to monitor affect when a punishment procedure has been added to a behavioral treatment. To date, only a few studies have been conducted that examined collateral changes in affect with and without a punishment procedure. Linshcheid, Pejeau, Cohen, & Footo-Lenz (1994), and Toole, Bowman, Thomason, Hagopian, & Rush (2003) reported no robust changes in negative affect were observed when a punishment procedure was implemented. In the current study, a 10-year-old male diagnosed with profound MR, autism, and AD/HD was admitted to an inpatient unit for the assessment and treatment of a severe behavior disorder. A reversal design was used to evaluate a behavioral treatment that consisted of stimulus control, differential reinforcement, competing items, and a baskethold time-out procedure contingent upon problem behavior. In addition to achieving clinically significant reductions in problem behavior, there were no differences observed in the child’s negative affect upon implementation of the behavioral treatment when compared with baseline.
 
51. Using Outpatient Clinic Functional Behavioral Assessments for Developing Home-Based Behavioral Intervention Plans
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
NEALETTA HOUCHINS-JUAREZ (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Many children and adolescents with developmental disabilities engage in problem behavior that interfere with development or functioning. These problem behaviors may also interfere with the typical functioning of the families with whom these children and adolescents live. Without treatment for these behaviors, the quality of life for the child and family may be compromised. The Child and Adolescent Services program at the Vanderbilt Kennedy Center Behavior Analysis Clinic works with children and adolescents with developmental disabilities and their families to decrease problem behaviors occurring in home and community settings. Functional behavioral assessments conducted in the outpatient clinic include structured interviews with the caregivers, a brief analog functional analysis with the child, and record reviews. This information, collected in a 1.5 hr clinic visit, is then used to develop a behavioral intervention plan that is implemented in home and community settings by caregivers under the mentorship of clinic staff. We will present two cases using ABAB and combined N=1 designs to illustrate the types of behavior change that result from this process. Data will include results from assessments, as well as data representing effectiveness of intervention developed and implemented in home and community settings by caregivers.
 
52. A Preliminary Investigation of a Possible Establishing Operation for Diurnal Enuresis
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
SUSAN FASCIO (Oakland University), T. Steuart Watson (Miami University)
Abstract: This study investigated a possible establishing operation for diurnal enuresis in a nine-year-old African-American male with Down’s syndrome. The participant attended a summer enrichment program that included students with and without disabilities. Using an ABAB withdrawal design, the effect of not providing a change of clothing was evaluated. Results indicated that when a change of clothes was not available, the participant was continent. When a change of clothes was provided, enuresis returned. Discussion focuses on the possible function of the change of clothing on diurnal enuresis.
 
53. The Role of Overt and Covert Self-Rules in Establishing a Daily Living Skill in Adults with Mild Developmental Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
BRIDGET J. FALOON (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Ruth Anne Rehfeldt (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: Self-instructions may provide additional verbal discriminative stimuli during skill development. Self-instructions can function as rules or cues that set up direct-acting contingencies to control the individual’s behavior. Self-instruction procedures have shown to be effective in teaching individuals to control their own behavior without relying on external mechanisms for guidance to complete tasks. If demonstrated to be an effective technology, self-instructions could change the way many individuals perform their daily activities and providing them with a strategy for use on future tasks. Self-rules may provide individuals with developmental disabilities the skills necessary to exert control over their own behavior therefore allowing them to assert more independence. In order to develop this technology, there need to be further demonstrations of a functional relationship between the covert and overt behavior. In addition, the correspondence between the stated rule (either overtly or covertly) and the nonverbal behavior needs to be further examined in order to fully develop the self-rule technology into a useful training tool. The current study replicates and extends both the methodology and results of the Taylor and O’Reilly (1997) study as well as examine the say/do correspondence between the participants’ self-rules and nonverbal behavior.
 
54. Some Effects of Signals on Communication and Other Behaviors During Functional Communication Training
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KYLE MCKRANIE (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), Laura L. Grow (Marcus Autism Center), Robert-Ryan S. Pabico (Marcus Autism Center), Karen Myers (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Functional Communication Training (FCT) is a differential reinforcement procedure in which appropriate communicative behaviors are reinforced while a problem behavior is placed on extinction (Carr & Durand, 1985). One limitation of FCT is that levels of alternative behaviors may decrease over time if the response is exposed to delays to reinforcement (Fisher, et. al., 2000; Hanley et. al., 2001; Hagopian et al., 1998). Results of basic research suggest that introducing signals during delays to reinforcement may attenuate response decrements that may occur relative to conditions under which delays are not signaled (Schaal & Branch, 1988). The purpose of the current investigation was to evaluate the extent to which signaled and unsignalled delays to reinforcement may influence responding for both communication and problem behaviors during FCT. Results indicated that (1) communication behavior was more likely to persist during signaled delays to reinforcement for some participants, (2) communication behavior persisted in both unsignaled and signaled conditions for some participants, and (3) problem behavior was less likely to reemerge during signaled delayed reinforcement. Results suggest that signals may be helpful for both response maintenance and for suppressing maladaptive behaviors in the same response class as the communicative behavior.
 
55. Competitive Effects of Attention and Tangible Reinforcement in the Treatment of Multiply-Controlled Self-Injurious Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MATTHEW WEICK (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Christina M. Vorndran (Bancroft NeuroHealth)
Abstract: Many individuals with developmental disabilities engage in problem behavior maintained by positive reinforcement. However, caregivers may be unable or unwilling to completely withhold social attention when problem behavior is severe. Incorporating arbitrary reinforcers into treatment (toys, food) is a potentially effective intervention for avoiding treatment relapse due to continued or intermittent contingent attention. This approach may be especially successful when behavior is maintained by both forms of positive reinforcement (attention and tangibles) because another functional reinforcer can serve as the competing reinforcer. The present study evaluated the competitive effects of these two functional reinforcers on the self-injurious behavior of a 15-year-old male diagnosed with pervasive developmental disorder. Results indicated that access to noncontingent tangibles competed with contingent attention, but that noncontingent attention did not compete with contingent access to tangibles. Implications for effective long-term treatment will be discussed.
 
56. Preliminary Evaluation of Price Adjustment to Affect Change in Work Distribution
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
DAVID J. FISCHER (Marcus Autism Center), Robert LaRue (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Increasing functional skill development is particularly important for individuals with developmental disabilities. However, prompting older learners to engage in non-preferred activities (e.g., household chores) can be extremely difficult from a practical standpoint. One possibility to increase the rate at which non-preferred tasks occur is to adjust the “pay rate” of certain tasks and “cost” of specific reinforcers. Thus, an individual’s income can be affected by the specific tasks they complete. In the current investigation, each task was associated with a predetermined pay rate and each reinforcer had a predetermined cost. Initially, all tasks and reinforcers were set at $1. After baseline, the respective values were altered to increase the likelihood that the participant would engage in the less-preferred work activities. The manipulation increased the rate at which less preferred tasks and total tasks were performed by 113% and 25%, respectively. Throughout all phases, reliability data were collected on at least 20% of the observations and averaged over 80% for all dependent measures. The results are discussed in terms of the application of economic principles to the design and modification of reinforcement-based programs for individuals with developmental disabilities.
 
57. An Evaluation of Mood as a Covariate in Functional Analysis
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KATHERINE SOLBERG (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Environmental and/or physiological variables may alter the relative reinforcing value of the variables tested in an analog functional analysis, such as sleep deprivation (O'Reilly, 1995), pain (O'Reilly, 1997) and noise (O'Reilly, Lacey, & Lancioni, 2000). The current study demonstrates a possible relation between mood and aggression in a 9-year-old boy with diagnosed with autism. An initial functional analysis of aggression was characterized by an undifferentiated pattern of responding. However, in a subsequent assessment mood was treated as a separate variable, and clearer functional relations emerged. High levels of agitation were most consistently observed following demand situations; therefore, 10 minutes of demands preceded each functional analysis session, in order to increase the likelihood of agitation. Upon completion of the demands, but directly before the functional analysis sessions began, data were collected on the participant’s mood (e.g., positive, neutral, agitated, or highly agitated). When results from the functional analysis were correlated with mood, clearer functions for aggression were observed. Reliability data were collected on 27% of sessions and all sessions averaged over 80%.
 
58. Effects of Antecedent vs. Consequent Use of a High-p Instructional Sequence on Escape-Maintained Child Non-Compliance
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
THOMAS P. KITCHEN (Dr. Gertrude A. Barber National Institute), Phillip J. Belfiore (Mercyhurst College), Robert Gulick (Barber National Institute)
Abstract: There has been a line of research that supports the use of behavioral momentum, specifically the presentation of a high-p instructional sequence immediately prior to a low-p instructional request, as a means to increase instructional compliance. There has also been a line of research that attributes the effects attained through initial momentum research to other operant processes, including extinction. This second line of research is primarily concerned with non-compliance that operates under the function of obtainment of negative reinforcement, and has demonstrated that improvement effects may be due to extinction alone, or the combination of extinction and behavioral momentum. The troubling issue at hand, and the subject of this poster is that, in action in applied settings, the use of “momentum” often differs from the initial applications studied in the research. This deviation comes in the form of presentation of the high-p instructional sequence as a consequence to non-compliant behavior, rather than as an intervention at the antecedent level. If such is the case, basic principles of operant reinforcement are challenged, in that non-compliant behaviors may actually be negatively reinforced through the interruption and subsequent postponement of the low-p sequence. This poster represents a reversal design experiment exploring the issue.
 
 
 
Poster Session #160
#160 International Poster Session - EAB
Sunday, May 28, 2006
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Grand Hall
1. Using the Aurora Toolset and Engine to Study Human Choice
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ARELI MORANDO (CEIC - University of Guadalajara), Jose E. Burgos (CEIC - University of Guadalajara), Maria Antonia Padilla Vargas (University of Guadalajara), Ivette Rosa Vargas (University of Guadalajara), David Luna (CEIC - University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: This paper exemplifies the use of a proprietary computer role-playing game to study human choice. The game is Neverwinter Nights, developed by Bioware (2002) in the spirit of Dungeons & Dragons. The game includes the Aurora Toolset, which allows users to build and execute (through the Aurora Engine) modules that simulate a wide variety of situations. Twenty-four human participants were first trained in the game’s interface. Immediately after this training, they were given five consecutive trials. In the first three trials, participants were instructed to obtain five gold coins that were inside a locked chest behind a wooden door. The key to the chest was in possession of a monster. Participants thus had to vanquish the monster in order to obtain the reward. The monsters in these trials were sufficiently easy as to ensure victory. In the last two trials, participants faced a choice between the same kind of situation they had experienced in the first three trials and a larger reward (ten coins) for fighting a harder monster that was behind a metal door. Unbeknownst to the participants, the harder monster was impossible to vanquish. Half the participants (Group M) were told at the beginning that the coins earned in the game were going to be exchanged for real money at the end of the experiment. The other half (Group NM) were told they were not going to receive real money. In M, 41% chose the harder monster in both trials. In NM, 16% chose the harder monster in both trials. The implications of these results for the Law of Effect are discussed.
 
2. Positive Induction: Attempting to Separate Predictive from Relative Influences
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DAVID P. AUSTIN (University of North Dakota), Carol L. Wright (University of North Dakota), Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: The present study attempted to separate the influence of respondent conditioning (that promotes induction) from those of a comparative process (that promotes contrast) when rats responded for low-concentration sucrose reinforcers when food-pellet reinforcement was or was not upcoming within the session. Rats pressed a lever for 1% or 5% liquid sucrose in the first 15 min of the session, for the other type of sucrose in the second 15 min, and for either food pellets or nothing (i.e., extinction) in the final 15 min. After 20 such sessions, they were given the opportunity to freely consume either 1% or 5% sucrose. Results showed that upcoming food-pellet reinforcement increased rates of lever pressing in both 15-min periods. However, rates of consumption were differentially altered depending on the 15-min period in which that sucrose had been available. The results thus suggest that opposing processes may be at work within the induction procedure.
 
3. Choice and Work Performance in Mentally Retarded Adults
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
GIOVANA ESCOBAL (Federal University of Sao Carlos), Ana Celina Da Silva Escobal (Sao Carlos Public School System), A. Celso Goyos (Federal University of Sao Carlos)
Abstract: Choice was investigated with and without environmental work support. Also, work performance was assessed as a function of conditions chosen. Four mentally retarded adults learned a work task with and without environmental work support. The environmental support displayed containers to place its different components and was designed to provide immediate feedback, to increase or maintain the rate of work response and to prevent errors during the task routine. Following initial training the subjects worked individually either under multiple schedules or under concurrent-chain schedules according to a multiple-element design. When the multiple schedules condition was on, the components were either presence or absence of environment support, quasi-randomly distributed. In the concurrent-chain schedules condition it was used a FR-1, on the first link, and either one of the presence-absence of environmental support condition, on the second link. The results showed that when choice opportunities were given, the work support condition was chosen more often and time spent to task completion and average number of errors performing the task decreased. The results also suggested that the environmental work support yielded greater control over work and the opportunity to make choices engendered more motivation and work independence on the participants.
 
4. The Fixed-Interval Requirement for an Alternative Response Produces a Delay-of-Reinforcement Gradient
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DENNIS J. HAND (Central Michigan University), Robbie J. Baldus (Central Michigan University), Andrew T. Fox (Central Michigan University), A. Charles Catania (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University)
Abstract: In an experiment involving pigeons pecking two keys in a specific sequence for food, Catania (1971) found that the relative proximity of a response to food in the sequence influenced the total output for that operant such that the closer the response to food the more that response was emitted. Thus, responses not immediately preceding a reinforcer can be strengthened by it. The current experiment further examined this phenomenon by requiring time rather than alternative responses to fill the delay. Pigeons received food for completing a fixed-ratio requirement on the left key followed by a fixed-interval requirement on the center key, in that order. This tandem FR (left key), FI (center key) was reinforced according to a random-interval 60-s schedule. Across conditions, the FI value was increased from 0.25 to 4-s. As the fixed-interval schedule increased, response rates on the left key decreased. The results suggest that time per se as opposed to responses intervening during the delay is sufficient to produce the delay-of-reinforcement gradient.
 
5. Inter-Call-Interval and “Superstitious” Behavior in Northern Bobwhite Neonates
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CHRISTOPHER W. HARSHAW (Florida International University), Susan M. Schneider (Florida International University), Robert Lickliter (Florida International University)
Abstract: The interaction of species-typical patterns of behavior with arbitrarily chosen schedules of stimulus presentation is a topic of great importance to a wide range of researchers investigating animal behavior. The current study presents data showing a near linear relationship between length of inter-call-interval (ICI) and naïve preferences for variants of bobwhite maternal calls in 24 hour-old bobwhite chicks. Chicks were given 5-minute simultaneous choice tests between two variants of the same call, differing only in length of ICI. Calls with shorter ICIs were significantly preferred over calls with longer ICIs, the degree of preference being proportional to the difference in ICI between the two calls. Sequential analysis of a subset of this data demonstrated far higher probabilities of response/entry to a particular call approach area given a stimulus change (either onset or offset) occurring within that area during the terminal portion of a chick’s bout of distress vocalization than without such a stimulus change. This pattern appears to signify a “superstitious” connecting of the chick’s vocalization with stimulus changes occurring in the chick’s surround. These data are the first to our knowledge that demonstrate the influence of “superstition” on the auditory preferences of precocial neonates.
 
6. A Comparison of Methods to Investigate Domestic Hens’ Preferences for Sounds
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
AMY TANNAHILL (University of Waikato, New Zealand), Catherine E. Sumpter (University of Waikato, New Zealand), William Temple (University of Waikato, New Zealand), Therese Mary Foster (University of Waikato, New Zealand)
Abstract: In Experiment 1, six hens responded under equal independent multiple concurrent variable-interval schedules of reinforcement with an overlaid sound associated with one key. The key that the sound was associated with was alternated between components. In the first condition there was no sound, and the sound used over the following conditions was varied over conditions. In Experiment 2, hens responded under a modified concurrent-chain variable-interval schedule of reinforcement procedure with the various sounds turned on in only one of the two fixed-interval terminal links. Both procedures give measures of the bias resulting from the presence of the various sounds and so both should provide quantitative measures of preference. The preference measures resulting from the two methods will be compared and discussed in relation to their applicability in identifying sounds that can be used in field situations, such as in conservation and pest control effort.
 
7. Behavioral Momentum Theory, Generalization Gradients, and Prefeeding Disruptors
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
E. TERRY MUELLER (Temple University), Philip N. Hineline (Temple University)
Abstract: The partial reinforcement extinction effect (PREE) refers to the common observation that more intermittently reinforced responding is more resistant to extinction than is less intermittently reinforced responding (CRF responding being the limiting case). Behavioral momentum theory accounts for the potentially troublesome PREE by invoking a greater generalization decrement (a decrease in stimulus control) between training and testing (extinction) conditions for richer schedules compared to leaner schedules. The present data are from an experiment in which generalization decrements were created at the time of resistance to change tests of three types: extinction, and two varieties of prefeeding tests. During training, three reinforcement schedules were used in individual multiple schedule components: two VI 60” (a “target” and a “comparator”) and one VI 120”. During disruptor tests only, the VI 120” and target VI 60” schedules were combined into a concurrent schedule (creating a generalization decrement), and the second VI 60” schedule component was left unchanged, to serve as a comparison disrupted performance (absent a generalization decrement). For three of four pigeons, and across disruptor types, the resistance to change of the target VI 60” schedule performance was similar to that of its comparator, a result contrary to behavioral momentum theory.
 
8. Pigeons’ Temporal Tracking under Concurrent Cyclic-interval and Random-interval Schedules
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TAKU ISHII (Keio University, Japan), Takayuki Sakagami (Keio University, Japan)
Abstract: Previous studies have shown that postreinforcemet pauses of animals’ responding were proportional to duration of a just preceding interfood interval on many cyclic-interval schedules. We examined this temporal tracking behavior under a choice situation. First, pigeons' key-pecking was reinforced with concurrent fixed-interval (FI) 60-s and random-interval 60-s schedules in baseline sessions, each of which was terminated after 60 cycles of the FI schedule. Then, after the pigeons showed stable behavior, square-wave sessions were started, in which the duration of FI schedule was switched from 60 s to 15 s for the middle 20 of 60 FI cycles and then was switched back to 60 s. The results showed that the pigeons’ postreinforcement pauses of their key-pecking were shorter following the FI 15-s schedule than following the FI 60-s schedule. The differences of the postreinforcement pauses were evident immediately after the switch from the FI 60-s to FI 15-s schedule. Besides, the postreinforcement pauses following FI 60-s schedules in the square-wave sessions were shorter than those in the baseline sessions. This result means that the postreinforcement pauses in the choice situation were affected not only by a just preceding interfood interval but also by other interfood intervals in a session.
 
9. Transposition of Line Discrimination in African Penguins
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KAZUCHIKA MANABE (Nihon University, Japan), Takashi Kawashima (Nihon University, Japan), Minami Murata (Nihon University, Japan), Kiyoshi Asahina (Nihon University, Japan), Kenji Okutu (Yokohama Hakkeijima Sea Paradice)
Abstract: Penguin is a new experimental animal for operant experiment except for a conditioning of fast swimming response. We developed an experimental chamber for African penguin (Spheniscus demersus) and trained the subjects to discriminate line length. The operant response was pecking. The response was reinforced by a raw fish that was delivered by a turn-table activated by a stepping motor. Discriminative stimuli were presented on a monitor screen. A PC controlled experimental procedure and recorded response. Penguins well discriminated line length. The results show that penguin is a species that can be used for operant studies.
 
10. Habituation, Satiation, and Demand Elasticity
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MEGHAN E. MCGRADY (Illinois Wesleyan University), James D. Dougan (Illinois Wesleyan University)
Abstract: Demand elasticity is defined as a change in the consumption of a commodity as a function of the price of that commodity. As prices rise, consumption will generally fall. When substitutes are readily available, consumption will fall relatively quickly – that is, demand will be highly elastic. When substitutes are not available, consumption falls relatively slowly – that is, demand is inelastic. The present experiment examined the relative roles habituation and satiation in the demand elasticity for food when alternative (substitutable) food is offered. In the first phase of the experiment, rats responded for food on a series of Fixed Ratio (FR) schedules. In a second phase, rats were given pre-feedings prior to each session, with the caloric content of food equivalent to what they would have normally consumed during a session. The food used during these pre-feedings was either of the same type or of a different type than what was normally earned during the session. Differences in elasticity depending on food quality could be attributed to habituation, as opposed to satiation.
 
11. Descriptions, General Rule Formulations, and Performance in Children: A Functional Analysis
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DIANA L. MORENO (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México-FES Iztacala), Rosalinda Arroyo (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México-FES Iztacala), Maria Luisa Cepeda Islas (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México-FES Iztacala), Hortensia Hickman (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México-FES Iztacala), Patricia Anabel Plancarte Cansino (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México-FES Iztacala), Olivia Tena (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México-FES Iztacala)
Abstract: Effects of verbal descriptions of stimulus relations and matching response on matching to sample task were evaluated by arranging a sentence-completion requirement every third trials. Ten elementary school students (X=10 years) were assigned to one experimental or control group. Effects of verbal descriptions were evaluated on acquisition and transfer of matching. Experimental group was exposed to sentence completion format: descriptions of matching contingencies, relevant stimulus dimensions, choice performance, etc., the subject wrote the rule of their performance at the end of each session. Control group had no exposure to sentences. The subjects of both groups received the following conditions: Pretest-Postest, three training phases and three transference tests. Experimental group demonstrated higher accuracy during training and transfer tests. The rules reported of subjects were classified as implicit accurate rule, explicit accurate rule, implicit inaccurate rule, explicit inaccurate rule. Experimental group demonstrated higher accuracy during training and transfer tests. The findings are discussed in terms of the importance of explore the verbal behavior on the merge of general rules of performance. These findings are discussed in terms of the influence of verbal behavior on the acquisition and transfer of repertoires in humans.
 
12. Effects of Money Reserves and Rate of Monetary Reinforcement on Human Risky Choice
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CYNTHIA J. PIETRAS (Western Michigan University), Gabriel Daniel Searcy (Western Michigan University), Andrew E Brandt (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: An experiment with adult humans investigated risky choice as the economic context (earnings-budget) was manipulated. Unlike prior studies, earnings budget was varied in a manner similar to that used in nonhuman energy-budget research. Participants were given repeated choices between fixed and variable amounts of money in 5-trial choice blocks. Block earnings were added to the participant’s total earnings only if the amount exceeded an earnings requirement. The earnings budget was manipulated by varying earnings reserves, reinforcement rate, or both across conditions. Risk sensitivity varied across conditions and was generally consistent with prior research and with the predictions of static and dynamic optimization models. These results extend the range of conditions across which energy-budget models predict human risky choice.
 
13. Effects of Aging on Schedule Performance
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MICHIKO NAKAMURA (Komazawa University), Koichi Ono (Komazawa University)
Abstract: This study examined whether there are generation differences in instruction-following behavior. Twenty-one young persons and twenty aged persons participated in the experiment. The subjects worked on a computer and the stimuli and instructions were displayed on the monitor. The experiment was divided into two phases and each phase was composed of a three-components multiple schedule ( mult FI FI FI). In the first phase, all the components were FI 5 sec. The displayed discriminative stimuli and instructions were different in each component ; for example, red square with the instruction “Press the button after 5 sec”, blue square with “Press the button after 15 sec”, and yellow square with “Press the button after 30 sec”. In the second phase, all the components were FI 15 sec, keeping the combination of discriminative stimuli and instructions intact. The first and second phases ended after 4 sessions. Although the experiment is in progress, current results indicate that there seems to be no distinctive difference between young persons and aged persons.
 
14. Decision Making: Base Rate Neglect and Contextual Factors
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANA A. BAUMANN (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Base rate neglect is a well-known fallacy in decision making. This fallacy refers to the fact that when asked to judge the probability of future events, people usually neglect contextual (molar) information and overemphasize specific (molecular) information. The main explanation given is that the history of reinforcement with specific stimuli or events impairs the control of behavior by the global contingency. Although base rate neglect is a strong phenomenon, the result that most participants do not account for the global context can be questioned. Usually base rate neglect is evaluated by means of questionnaires in which two sources of information are given: the probabilities of accurate and inaccurate case cues (the molecular information) and the probabilities of the base rate (the molar information). The present research is evaluating three aspects that may affect base rate neglect: (a) the role of the verbal context; (b) the base rate information; and (c) the case cue information. Preliminary work has shown that (a) the verbal context may affect base rate and (b) when the base rates are constant, but the case cues varied, base rate neglect also varies. These results suggest that base rate neglect is affected by factors other than case cues.
 
15. An Analysis of Transitional Behavior in Fish Responding Under Concurrent Schedules of Reinforcement
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KELLY M. BANNA (Auburn University), M. Christopher Newland (Auburn University)
Abstract: Bluegill sunfish were trained to respond under concurrent schedules of reinforcement. The overall rate of reinforcement was held constant (RI 74.5s) while the reinforcement ratio varied among 16:1, 1:16, 8:1, 1:8, 4:1, and 1:4. Each condition was separated by several sessions during which the reinforcement ratio was 1:1. A logistic equation (Newland and Reile, 1999) was used to model behavior that occurred following a change in reinforcement ratios. The resulting functions were similar to those obtained in previous research using rats and non-human primates. These results demonstrate that learning in fish responding under concurrent schedules of reinforcement follows a pattern similar to that observed in more traditional laboratory species, and suggests a high degree of continuity across the phylogentic scale.
 
16. An Experimental Preparation for the Molar Analysis of Behavior
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ULISES VALDEZ (University of Guadalajara), Oscar Garcia Leal (University of Guadalajara), Emilio Ribes Iñesta (University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: A molar analysis of behavior requires of continuous measurement of the organism’s activity in time and space. A 1 x 1 m modular chamber has been designed to allow for changes in the location of stimuli and operanda, as well as for the continuous measurement of the spatial and temporal allocation of the organism every 0.25 s. Behavior can be analyzed according to several molar criteria: directionality (routs and trajectories), preference (permanence, stay’s duration), variability ( total number of visits, visits to different spatial locations), effort (traveled distance, average speed, effective speed, acceleration, frequency of responding), and precision (sequential trajectories, relative stay times, number of responses). A typical recording is shown with a sample of concurrent and sequential tracking of these measures.
 
17. Analysis of Texas Hold’em Players’ Decision Making in Hypothetical Game Play Situations
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JAMES W. JACKSON (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Matthew D. Stieg (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: The popularity of poker, specifically the game of Texas Hold’em, has risen exponentially in the last few years. To date very little to no research has examined this game from a behavioral perspective. The current study examined the responses of Texas Hold’em players to hypothetical situations they may face in actual game play. Subjects were asked to decide if they would continue in a hand or fold based on the amount of money they already had invested in the hand, the number of cards yet to come, and their possible chance of winning. Subjects deviations from ideal play based on game theory and the perspective of sunken costs were examined as well as subjects’ scores on indices of pathological gambling.
 
18. An Application of Matching Theory to Naturally-Occurring Human Behavior
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MARCIA LYNN CARON (Emory University), Jack J. McDowell (Emory University)
Abstract: A great deal of laboratory research demonstrates that the family of equations from matching theory provides an excellent mathematical description of choice behavior across a wide range of species, settings, behaviors, and reinforcers. However, the applicability of matching theory to natural behavior in natural settings has received little research attention. In this study, 210 pairs of 13- and 14-year old boys spent 25 minutes discussing a variety of assigned topics, and their videotaped interactions were coded on two mutually exclusive categories of verbal content (rule-break talk and normative talk) and on two mutually exclusive categories of social reactions (positive social reinforcement and non-positive social reinforcement). These data are the first to describe the impact of concurrent schedules of reinforcement (natural delivery of social reactions) on the selection of behavior (content of verbal statements) within the context of real-life human relationships (conversations between male adolescent friends). By assessing the degree of fit with response and time allocation matching equations, the results indicate that choice in undisturbed, non-engineered human environments seems to work in the same way that choice in the laboratory does.
 
19. Variability: Generalizations Across Stimuli and Contingencies
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
FRANCISCO MANUEL GOMEZ (Ideal Companion Canine Behavior), Jesus Rosales-ruiz (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Variability as an operant has been evidenced in the behavior analytic literature over the last thirty years. The present study was designed to evaluate the generalization effects of programming a variability contingency on a dog’s interaction with one object and generalization of variability across other objects and contingencies. A six-year-old Border Collie’s interactions with four different objects were measured under two different contingencies: ANY (where any physical contact with the object would be reinforced on an FR1) and VAR (where only the novel responses per trial would be reinforced). All four dog-object interactions were first studied under the ANY contingency. This contingency produced stereotyped responding of behavior with all objects. Then, one of the dog-object interactions was changed to VAR while the other three remained under the ANY contingency. The VAR contingencies yielded a marked decrease in stereotypic behavior and an increase in novel responses. Similar effects were also seen with the other object-dog interactions under ANY, where reinforcement criteria didn’t require variable behavior. An analysis of variability of interactions in both VAR and ANY clearly show that novel topographies generate from the adduction of already existing behavior. There were no novel responses that lacked topographical elements of already trained behavior.
 
20. IRT Structures in Variable-Ratio and Variable-Interval Schedules
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DANIEL R. SINGLETON (Jacksonville State University), Matthew Bowers (Jacksonville State University), William L. Palya (Jacksonville State University)
Abstract: The interresponse time structures in variable-ratio, variable-interval, and variable-interval plus linear feedback schedules were examined at each of several parameter values; the range included relatively extreme values. While the variable-ratio and variable-interval plus linear feedback schedules generally resulted in a burst of short interresponse times, the variable-interval schedules generally showed a relatively flat distribution of interresponse times. The results were taken to indicate that models of interresponse time structures will require a parameter for schedule effects even if the model is focused on molar rather than real-time effects.
 
21. A Parametric Analysis of Response-Dependent Shock Intensity and Duration on Food-Maintained Responding in Pigeons
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JAMES W. DILLER (West Virginia University), Karen G. Anderson (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Much behavior is governed by aversive control (e.g., punishment, negative reinforcement). Electric shock is a typical aversive event used in operant research with animal subjects. One difficulty associated with the use of electric shock is the all-or-none nature of response suppression. That is, at a given intensity and duration, shock may not have any suppressive effects on behavior; at a slightly higher intensity or longer duration, complete suppression may result. In many studies of behavior, moderate levels of suppression may be desirable. The data presented consist of a systematic analysis of shock intensity.
 
22. Effects of Pavlovian Contingency Procedures on Response Rates under Signalled-delayed Reinforcement Schedules
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
RAFAEL RUIZ (Universidad Central de Venezuela), Rocio Vegas (Universidad Central de Venezuela)
Abstract: The purpose of the present experiment was examine the relation between a signal during the delay of reinforcement interval and key pecking rates and to determine if this relation may be explained in terms of Pavlovian conditioning using Rescorla's contingency model. Four pigeons were trained on a two-component RI 90-s multiple schedule and 10-s food reinforcement delay. In one component, signalled delays were manipulated according to five Pavlovian contingency procedures: perfect positive [p(signal/delay-interval)=1.0 and p(signal/~delay-interval)=0.0]; imperfect positive [p(signal/delay-interval)=0.75 and p(signal/~delay-interval)=0.25]; zero [p(signal/delay-interval)=p(signal/~delay-interval)=0.5]; imperfect negative [p(signal/delay-interval)=0.25 and p(signal/~delay-interval)=0.75]; and perfect negative [p(signal/delay-interval)=0.0 and p(signal/~delay-interval)=1.0]. In the other component delay of reinforcement was unsignalled. The results showed that: 1) The perfect positive contingency produced response rates higher than those obtained under conditions of unsignalled delay; 2) The negative perfect contingency produced reduced response rates similar to those obtained under the unsignalled delay; and 3) No systematic relation were found between response rates and the other conditions of Pavlovian contingency. These results suggest that a delayed signal may serve as a conditioned reinforcer and the acquisition of this function may be interpreted in terms of Pavlovian conditioning
 
23. Speed Transfer and Class Mergers via Conditional Discriminations: Transfer Training with One Class Member
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ABDULRAZAQ A. IMAM (John Carroll University)
Abstract:

Four participants demonstrated two independent groups of three seven-member equivalence classes, one with and one without a speed contingency. Each participant then experienced transfer training and testing. During transfer training, only one A-stimulus from the speed classes served as sample for the A-stimuli from the non-speed classes. Transfer test involved all the remaining non-speed class members. Test results showed increases in the response speeds of the non-speed class members, with largest increases in classes 1 and 3 members. The results suggest better differentiation of class membership than previously observed, but has not resolved questions about the independence of class members.

 
 
 
Poster Session #161
#161 International Poster Session - EDC
Sunday, May 28, 2006
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Grand Hall
1. Academic Achievement and its relationship with Drug Abuse, Depression and Family Conflicts among Secondary Students
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
NORMA COFFIN (National Autonomous University of Mexico UNAM), Arturo Silva Rodríguez (National Autonomous University of Mexico UNAM)
Abstract: This study was developed in 2004 with 1894 Secondary students, ages 12-16 in several cities of Mexico; since scholar desertion and failure are major subjects in this country among adolescent students, it is important to determine the possible factors circumscribed to academic achievement. In this study, drug abuse, depression and family conflicts seem to be some of these related factors. Results show a clear relationship among them; data by geographic zones and grades show important differences. By gender, girls show significant drug abuse rates, as long as more family conflicts than boys.
 
2. Test Anxiety Reduction Test Gains with Fifth Grade Students
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
KAI A. DAVIS (University of Tennessee, Knoxville), Melanie Miller (Sweetwater School District), Jerome Morton (Little Tennessee Valley Educational Cooperative), Richard Driscoll (Westside Psychology)
Abstract: Thirty-six 5th grade students identified as having high test anxiety were randomly assigned to an intervention group or a non-participant control group. The students in the intervention group reviewed a 30-minute anxiety reduction protocol on 5 separate occasions during half of the school year. The protocol was recorded on compact disk and included tense–release sequences, suggestions, and imagined interest to each to go along with eight academic learning, review, and test-taking situations. Statewide achievement test scores were recorded from the year before the intervention and at the conclusion of the intervention. A multiple regression analysis showed substantial stability in these scores over the academic year and a 7-percentile point gain in test scores for the intervention group.
 
3. The Effects of Guided Notes on African American Males with Emotional and Behavioral Disorders
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
KAREN B. PATTERSON (University of North Florida), Susan Syverud (University of North Florida), Janice Seabrooks-Blackmore (University of North Florida)
Abstract: The use of appropriate interventions is a critical component of educating students, particularly African Americans in special education. The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of guided notes on the academic performance of 8 African American boys identified as having emotional or behavioral disorders (EBD) and learning disabilities (LD) in special education. Findings indicate that the use of guided notes could be an effective intervention strategy for improving academic performance and positive outcomes for students with EBD. This study supported earlier findings in which guided notes were used during class instruction.
 
4. To Read or Not Read? That is the Question in Museums: Changing the Choice
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
STEPHEN C. BITGOOD (Jacksonville State University), Stephany Dukes (Jacksonville State University), Layla Abby (Jacksonville State University)
Abstract: Museum visitors read very little text material in art museums. This project provides a simulated museum experience designed to examine choice of reading or not reading exhibit text. Purposes were to establish a relationship between reading behavior and ratings of interest and to increase interest ratings and choice of reading text. Participants were shown art prints and asked to rate each one on a scale of "1" to "10" with "10" indicating very high interest in obtaining information and "1" indicating no interest at all. After giving a rating, participants were given the choice of turning the print over to view text material. If they chose to turn the print over, they had the choice of reading no text, reading some text, or reading all the text. Ratings were highly correlated with reading. Ratings between 8 and 10 were almost always correlated with reading, while ratings of less than 5 were almost never associated with any reading. Two methods were used to increase reading: (1) modifying the text so that it was more reader friendly (add questions, change vocabulary, shorten); and (2) instructing participants to look carefully at the print and describe everything they see. Both procedures increased ratings of interest and amount of reading.
 
5. Using Repeated Readings Procedures and Precision Teaching Evaluation Procedures with Fourth-Grade General Education Students for Improving Students' Oral Reading Fluency and Retelling Comprehension...
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
WILLIAM J. SWEENEY (University of South Dakota), Susan R. Sweeney (Sioux City Community Schools)
Abstract: This demonstration project summarizes data related to the effectiveness of repeated reading techniques combined with daily goal setting to build oral reading fluency with fourth-grade students. This reading fluency demonstration project was a combined effort of a School of Education at The University of South Dakota with the Sioux City Community Schools to address some of the mandates of the federal governments 2001 amendments to the Elementary and Secondary School Act (i.e., No Child Left Behind or NCLB) as well as the reading performance of students enrolled in one of its elementary schools with a large population of academically at-risk students. Additionally, this demonstration project was designed to provide preservice special education teachers the opportunity to employ fluency-based procedures with Precision Teaching curriculum-based assessment techniques. Each year, approximately 60 to 65 fourth-grade students from three regular education classes work with 10 to 15 provide preservice special education teachers/tutors from the university. The preservice special education teachers/tutors worked with the students’ in-groups of 2 to 3 for roughly 45 minutes focusing on basic reading skills. The teacher/tutors met with their groups two days a week on average for approximately five weeks. The experimental design used is a behavioral dynamics (Cooper, 2004) approach that emphasizes an analysis of fluency celerations and learning pictures common to Precision Teaching programs. Precision Teaching measurement procedures are employed to evaluate the repeated readings procedures and assess the effectiveness of the teacher/tutor’s reading instruction. Results showed substantial fluency improvements with multiplying learning pictures for oral reading passages. The implementation of these procedures are effective at improving the student's reading fluency, are cost effective in terms of time and resources, and take little time to administer. Implications for classroom instruction and adoption of repeated reading procedures for both students academically at-risk and teacher training are discussed.
 
6. The Effects of Functional Analysis on Oral Reading Fluency Rates
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
DANA WAGNER (University of Minnesota), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota), Erin M. Holton (University of Minnesota)
Abstract: Children who fail to become fluent readers by the end of the primary grades are likely to achieve below same age peers throughout their school careers. Functional analysis procedures can be used to identify effective reading interventions for students achieving below expectations. The present study employed a multi-element design to analyze the effects of various supplemental reading interventions on the oral reading fluency rates of three third grade children. Inter-observer agreement was collected on 35% of sessions and averaged at least 90% for the dependent measure. Differential effects were shown across conditions, leading to an intervention recommendation for all participants. Generalized effects were shown over time in Reading-General Outcome Measures for all participants. Results are discussed in terms of the validity of using functional analysis procedures to select reading interventions for children who exhibit below expected levels of reading achievement on Reading-General Outcome Measures.
 
7. Reading to Read: An Examination of a Reading Intervention on Oral Reading Fluency and Comprehension
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
HOLLY V. ADKINS (Mississippi State University), Mary Cole (Mississippi State University), Lori E. Bain (Mississippi State University), Stacey L. Smith (Mississippi State University), Brad Dufrene (Mississippi State University), Richard Anthony Doggett (Mississippi State University), Carlen Henington (Mississippi State University), Kristin N. Johnson-Gros (Mississippi State University)
Abstract: The Response to Intervention model suggests that empirically supported interventions be used for students at risk. Several studies have been conducted to establish various academic interventions efficacy. However, researchers need to continue to develop interventions with empirical support. This study examined Reading-to-Read, a packaged reading program, to determine the effects on reading fluency and comprehension using a time series analysis. Children from a rural southeastern college town in second through fifth grades were assessed to determine current functioning level. The reading intervention package involves passage previewing, repeated practice, corrective feedback, and graphing of progress over time. The dependent variables were words read correct per minute, errors per minute, and comprehension of factual information calculated as a percentage. Progress for each student was monitored daily to track progress in skill acquisition and the individual’s functional level. Preliminary results indicate that students were able to move from instructional levels below their current grade placement to mastery. Many students were able to move to instructional levels at their grade placement for fall semester. Interobserver agreement and treatment integrity were performed and agreement was at least .85. Additionally, social validity data will be presented. The results, potential limitations, and future research will be discussed.
 
8. The Effects of a Story Fact Recall Quiz and Game On Off-Task Behavior During Sustained Silent Reading (SSR) and the Number of Story Facts Recalled Following SSR for Secondary Students with Disabilitie
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
NATALIE ALLEN-WILLIAMS (Weber State University), Amy DuBois (Westerville City Schools), William L. Heward (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Motivating students to read for pleasure challenges many educators. Sustained Silent Reading (SSR) is a strategy used by many teachers to provide children with a regular opportunity to read. One of the major concerns with SSR is that students are not held accountable for what they read during the SSR period and are often engaged in other tasks. The National Reading Panel (2000) reported there is insufficient research to support the use of SSR and that it has very little effect on student achievement and fluency. The purpose of this study was to replicate and extend previous research to secondary students with disabilities. This study evaluated a modified version of SSR using story recall quizzes, a story fact recall game, and the game with a bonus incentive on the off-task behavior and number of story facts recalled on 5-question quizzes by secondary students with disabilities. Twelve 11th grade special education students participated in this study. Six students were targeted for observation of off-task behavior. Over the course of the study all six target students reduced their levels of off-task behavior to near zero levels. Ten of the 12 students had higher mean scores on story fact quizzes during the game condition over the quiz-only condition.
 
9. Longitudinal Effects of a Direct Instruction Reading Program on School-Wide Performance in a Charter School
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
DANIEL E. PARKER (Kingston Hill Academy/Groden Center)
Abstract: Kingston Hill Academy is a public charter school located in South Kingstown Rhode Island. KHA has utilized a direct instruction reading program (Reading Mastery) to teach elementary aged students reading skills over the last four years. During that time, two major trends can be seen in reading behavior in relation to the direct instruction program. First, comparisons in reading abilities can be seen for transfer students who entered KHA after receiving more traditional reading instruction versus students that began their school career at KHA and who began reading instruction using the Reading Mastery program. Second, an upward trend in reading proficiency across a given school year can be seen for newly entered Kindergarten and First grade students across the four years that direct instruction has been utilized at KHA. Measures include three commonly used reading assessments in public schools.
 
10. Direct and Meaning-Based Reading Programs: Effects on Teachers’ Ratings of Student Performance
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
RHONDA L. WIZNIAK (University of Alberta), Amber L. Gear (University of Alberta), W. David Pierce (University of Alberta), Judy Cameron (University of Alberta)
Abstract: Proficiency in reading is crucial to success. Although research indicates that the most effective reading programs use direct instructional techniques and structured student-teacher interaction, these methods are not widely adopted. One possible reason for this is that direct instruction is viewed as controlling, thereby detracting from a student’s freedom and autonomy. The use of reward contingencies may amplify this response. The present study examined pre-service teachers’ verbal responses to direct versus meaning-based instruction and the use of rewards for performance. The pre-service teachers (N=149) read one of three scenarios describing a student in a reading program (direct program/token reward, direct program/praise, meaning-based program/praise). The scenarios were followed by a questionnaire that assessed teachers’ ratings of the program as controlling, competence and motivation of the reader, and the student’s performance in terms of internal or external causes. Results indicated that pre-service teachers who read the scenario describing a direct instruction program with token rewards rated the student as less autonomous, motivated, and competent than those who read the meaning-based scenario; they also attributed the students’ performance to external factors and gave the student less credit. Findings are discussed in terms of Skinner’s views as presented in Beyond Freedom and Dignity (1971).
 
11. Using Brief Experimental Analysis to Identify an Effective Reading Intervention: Exploring Decision-Making Consistency over Time
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JOHN C. BEGENY (North Carolina State University), Rachel J. Valleley (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Edward J. Daly III (University of Nebraska, Lincoln)
Abstract: An increasing amount of research has supported the use of brief experimental analysis (BEA) procedures for identifying effective academic interventions for students, particularly in the area of reading. However, previous research has not specifically addressed whether decisions made from one BEA would be consistent with the decisions made from a separately administered BEA. By administering an equivalent BEA once every two weeks over the course of two months for one participant, the primary purpose of this case study was to gather preliminary evidence regarding the consistency in BEA decision-making patterns across administrations. Findings suggested that results from each BEA were primarily consistent over time. However, results of the BEAs did not clearly identify one specific intervention that appeared most beneficial. Implications of these findings will be presented in terms of (a) the consistency of BEA results over time, (b) strategies for making educational decisions from a BEA when a single intervention does not appear most effective, and (c) the evidence supporting the use of a specific error-correction procedure (i.e., phrase-drill with error correction). Limitations to this study and future research directions will also be presented.
 
12. Using a Precision Teaching Software to Teach Letter Matching and Assocation Skills of Uppercase and Lowercase Letters
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE HARRINGTON (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Angela Galvin (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Ed Langford (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: This study examined the use of a computer curriculum, based on the tenets of precision teaching and its effectiveness in teaching the relationship between uppercase and lowercase letters of the alphabet. This program uses the see/touch or the see/click learning channel. Through a series of visual and audio prompts, the participant sees an uppercase letter and matches it to a lowercase letter. Letters are presented one at a time, and then as each letter is mastered at a set level of fluency, the letters are reviewed together. Data are collected and plotted on a standard celeration chart. We will be evaluating the effectiveness of this teaching method.
 
13. Comparison of Instructional Techniques for Teaching Phonemic Awareness Skills to Children with Reading Difficulties
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
SARA WHITE (Binghamton University), Jordan Freeman (Binghamton University), Brianna Friedman (Binghamton University), Elizabeth Geoghan (Binghamton University), Raymond G. Romanczyk (Institute for Child Development)
Abstract: Within the field of reading instruction there is debate over the appropriate criteria for mastery of phonemic awareness skills in children with reading difficulties. The present study focused on the differential efficacy of the accuracy-based versus fluency-based mastery criteria in improving phonemic awareness skills. This study involved instructing children with reading difficulties using the two different mastery criteria (i.e., accuracy and fluency), and measuring the effects of these methods of instruction on phonetic decoding scores. Results indicate that one method of instruction is not consistently more effective, suggesting that methods of instruction used to teach children with reading difficulties should be individualized for each student.
 
14. Errorless Training Procedures Teaching Basic Skills to Acquire Writing Abilities with Developmental Disabilities Children
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
FANNY ESTRELLA FRANCO-DÁVILA (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Gabriela De Guadalupe Téllez-Sánchez (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Alma Georgina Hernández-Mendoza (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Marco Raúl Campuzano-Rodriguez (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación), Jorge Luis González-Quijano (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: The institutions that work with children with developmental disabilities offer few programs to develop academic skills. The present work will show the errorless training procedure in 3 basic skills needed to acquire the ability to write. The skills are: copy, cut and color. The participant was a boy with developmental disabilities and a changing criteria design was applied, establishing a task analysis for the skills mentioned before and measuring the percentage of the steps done by the participant. The base line data was taken during 3 consecutive sessions and after this measurement the treatment started with a complete physical guide through each step of the chain giving reinforcement. This guide was faded during the phases of total and partial physical guide until the independence of the skill. During the sessions, randomly, the coordinator entered to obtain the reliability that was of 98% and changed phase when 80% of correct response was obtained during 3 consecutive sessions. The results show that errorless training is effective in the acquisition of the three behaviors.
 
15. An Evaluation of Copy, Cover, and Compare in a Middle School Resource Room: A Case Report
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
THOMAS FORD MCLAUGHLIN (Gonzaga University), Susan Poindexter (Gonzaga University), Gary Johnson (Spokane Public Schools)
Abstract: The purpose of this research project was to examine the effects of employing the copy, cover and compare method in spelling. The participant was a seventh grade male with learning disabilities. Data were collected on his correct and error rate across various lessons in the student’s resource room classroom. An ABAB single case design was employed to examine the effects of copy, cover, and compare. The overall outcomes indicated a gradual increase in corrects and also gradual decreases in errors. This replicates much of the previous research with copy, cover, and compare. In the present case report, we were able to further replicate out work with middle school aged students. The procedure was easy to implement and data collection was straightforward and fit into the classroom routine. The benefits of copy, cover, and compare are discussed.
 
16. Brief Experimental Analysis of Writing Interventions
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
MARK D. SHRIVER (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Valerie J. Gortmaker (Munroe-Meyer Institute), Casie Olsen (University of Nebraska, Omaha)
Abstract: Single-subject multi-element or alternating treatment designs have been used effectively to identify and develop effective interventions for children with reading fluency problems. The effectiveness of brief experimental analysis may be extended to address children’s difficulty with writing as well, but to date there as been minimal research on this subject. This poster presents three cases of children (two male and one female) presenting to an outpatient psychology clinic specializing in academic intervention. All three children demonstrated deficits in writing fluency. Two of the children had previous diagnoses of an Autism Spectrum Disorder and the other child had a learning disability in writing. Based on initial direct skills academic screening, hypotheses were formed regarding writing deficits and possible interventions. The interventions were administered to each child in 1 to 2 clinical sessions using an alternating treatments design. Potentially effective interventions were repeated with an intervening return to baseline condition. In all three cases, there were clear beneficial treatment conditions that led to development of interventions to improve writing. This poster presents procedures for the brief experimental analysis of writing interventions, as well as discussion of limitations, practical implications for clinicians and educators and directions for future research.
 
17. Reaching for Writing: Increasing the Writing Skills in Elementary-Aged Children
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
LAQUANTA MASHELL WATSON (Mississippi State University), Carlen Henington (Mississippi State University), Rhonda Brasfield (Mississippi State University)
Abstract: This study provides empirical validation of a brief intervention intended to increase writing skills (i.e., number of mnemonic parts, number of sentences, correct word sequences, and words written in 3 minutes). Participants included five elementary-aged children who were enrolled in a summer academic clinic to enhance academic performance. The intervention included direct instruction of complete sentences and mnemonic parts (e.g., factual and inferential information such as who, what, where, when, why), repeated practice with corrective feedback, and self-monitoring. Additionally, students were required to edit their written product. The daily progress of the students was monitored using Curriculum Based Measurement. Results showed an increase in words written per 3 minutes and correct word sequences, but no increase in the number of sentences written and number of mnemonic parts. These results indicate that, with this brief intervention (3 weeks), students’ quality of writing was enhanced, but the volume of their written products was not impacted. Additionally, students’ ratings for writing were evaluated at pre and post intervention. Students provided ratings indicating a greater appreciation for writing following the intervention.
 
18. The Effects of an Extended Prompt vs. a Typical Prompt on the Length and Quality of First Drafts Written by Urban Secondary Students with Mild Disabilities
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
TERRI HESSLER (The Ohio State University), Ralph Gardner III (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Students with mild disabilities write far less than their non-disabled counterparts and are less able to produce coherent, quality writing. Writing output is often so sparse that it is difficult for teachers to identify deficits for remediation. Research indicates that with strategic support, students with disabilities can increase both the quantity and the quality of their writing. Various supports have been explored in the research, including self-regulation (De La Paz, 1999), goal-setting (Page-Voth & Graham, 1999), and revision strategies (Wong, Butler, Ficzere, & Kuperis, 1996, 1997). This study proposed the use of an extended prompt containing supports for writing a 5-paragraph essay as a way to increase the length and quality of student writing.Eight urban high school students participated in this study which implemented a multiple baseline across subjects design. Results demonstrate that 7 of the 8 participants: a) averaged more words using the extended prompt than the typical prompt, b) demonstrated no important difference in percentage of correct word sequences between the two conditions, and c) were more likely to have higher holistic scores on essays written with the extended prompt.
 
19. The Use of a Flashcard System with Picture at Punctuation on Learning Vocabulary Terms with a High School Aged Male
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
SHANNON HAYTER (Gonzaga University), Jennifer Kaszewicz (Gonzaga University), Kimberly P. Weber (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to specifically evaluate the effectiveness of the Picture at Punctuation strategy designed by Davis (1994) using flashcards to increase comprehension of vocabulary terms. In addition, the authors sought to determine if this study technique would improve comprehension skills well enough that the participant could maintain skills using his own directed study strategy. The participant, John, was a high-school aged male with learning disabilities in math, reading and written language. The study took place in his resource room at his high-school in the Pacific Northwest. The dependent variable was the number of vocabulary terms correctly identified from the reading materials and flashcards. The outcome of the study clearly indicated an increase in vocabulary recognition through implementation of the Picture at Punctuation strategy. The discussion includes a review of skill maintenance, strengths and weaknesses of the study, as well as variables that might have impacted data. Suggestions for further assessment of flashcards with picture at punctuation are provided.
 
20. Teaching College Students to Ask Questions in the Non-Classroom Environment
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
JILL C. DARDIG (Ohio Dominican University)
Abstract:

College students in a course which involved weekly field trips to a variety of community organizations seldom asked questions of field hosts and presenters, limiting the students learning and engagement and creating an uncomfortable situation where the instructor had to ask most of the questions. The instructor, convinced that the problem was caused primarily by the students lack of question-asking skills rather than their shyness or lack of interest, used the ABC (Antecedent-Behavior-Consequence) model to develop and implement a training module to teach students how to ask pertinent and probing questions, modeled and prompted the behavior on site, and provided positive consequences for asking questions. As a result, there was a significant increase in appropriate and higher level questions asked by students at the community sites. (descriptive case study, not data-based)

 
 
 
Poster Session #162
#162 International Poster Session - OBM
Sunday, May 28, 2006
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Grand Hall
101. The Effects of Different Percentages of Incentive on Work Performance and Error Rate
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
SHEZEEN OAH (Chung Ang University)
Abstract: This study was a follow-up of Oah and Lee (2005) that examined three different percentages of incentive (0%, 10%, and 100%) on work performance. Oah and Lee attempted to solve several problems associated with unrealistic laboratory simulations. They increased the number and length of the experimental sessions and the opportunities to engage in off-task behaviors for the participants. They also adopted an alternating treatment design instead of a between subject design. The results indicated that the performance under the100% incentive condition was higher than that under the 10% condition and the performance under the10% and 0% conditions was comparable, which were quite different from those of the previous studies. Since the results were obtained from comparing rather extremely different percentages of incentive, the present study attempted to examine less extreme incentive percentages: 0%, 30%, and 50%. Four college students as participants were asked to work on a simulated work task for 21 experimental sessions, each session lasting for six hours. An alternating treatment design in which the three different conditions were randomly administered (7 sessions for each percentage) was adopted. The results indicated that the performance under the 30% and 50% incentive conditions was comparable, and higher than that under the 0% condition. On the other hand, the error rates under the three conditions were not different.
 
102. Durability of Knowledge following Training in US Born and immigrant Workers
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
W. KENT ANGER (Oregon Health & Science University), Diane S. Rohlman (Oregon Health & Science University), Tammara Ammerman (Oregon Health & Science University), Alys Tamulinas (Oregon Health & Science University), Lindsey Patterson (Willamette University)
Abstract: Respiratory protection training was taught to US-born participants who had completed 12 years of education, but who did not use respirators in their work. When tested immediately post-training, knowledge improved significantly; effect size (d) was above 6.0. However, d declined to 2.7 two months later. US-born food service workers were taught safety knowledge relevant to their work. Knowledge immediately post-training increased substantially (d = 2.3), however, the knowledge score difference declined to 0.8 six months later. Each of these studies employed cTRAIN software designed for those with limited education (Anger et al., 2004).Two groups of Hispanic immigrants completed Spanish-language training in cTRAIN. Hispanic workers (mean=5.0 years of education) from diverse industries took respiratory protection training 3 times, one week apart, and post test performance on two-answer questions increased minimally, from 86.1% to 91.4%, virtually a d=0. Conversely, immigrant Hispanic orchard workers (5.6 years of education) completed ladder safety training that was germane to their work performance. Performance improved between the pre and post test (d_gain = 1.45), close to that of the food service workers. Factors such as relevance to work or life, immigrant status and education need exploration for their impact on training and behavior analytic research.
 
103. Engineering an Exemplary Digital Library with Gilbert’s Performance Matrix
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
YUKA KOREMURA (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-ruiz (University of North Texas), Brian O'Connor (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Forms of libraries have changed over time and types of libraries have been subdivided into categories such as online libraries and digital art libraries. etc. In any form or type of library, a main concern is to provide service that meets patrons' needs. More specifically, turning data into knowledge. Patrick Wilson (1977), a philosopher in library information science, asked: "What have libraries to do with the utilization of knowledge?" (p. viii). His question is still relevant and of great concern to information scientists, and it signifies a change in goals and accomplishments of libraries. To know how and what needs to be changed, a performance analysis is needed. What are the models, measures, and methods? Gilbert's (1978) performance matrix provides useful vantage points to figure out what and how to change the library so that it can perform its new desired function. Many good ideas already exists (e.g., Patrick Wilson) but the problem still remains. The present poster shows the use of Gilbert's performance matrix to guide the design of libraries. As a case in point, the design of a digital library of Dr. Bea Barrett’s contributions will be shown.
 
104. Managing Performance Management: The Performance Matrix in a Small Business
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CATHERINE JAMESON BREWER (Georgetown University), Jeanine Plowman Stratton (Florida State University, BMC), Carolyn Schmid (Furman University)
Abstract: This study examined the effect of a progressive performance matrix on the cleaning behaviors of a group of employees working at an independently owned café and ice cream shop. The matrix was used to track, organize, and analyze cleaning data while providing subjects with regular group performance feedback and increasingly difficult goals. Participants included 22 employees ranging in age from 14-22, and the research design consisted of data collection (A), task clarification, the performance matrix, and performance contingent rewards for table cleaning behavior (B1), and the full intervention for countertops (B1). The results indicated that the intervention successfully improved the employees’ cleaning behavior, and further that the increasingly difficult goals correlated with increasingly improved cleanliness.
 
105. Process Improvement in a Clinic Setting: An Application of OBM
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CHELSEY A. SUTTON (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Emily J. Mack-Olson (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Karin L. Rasmussen (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Gregory J. Madden (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Research clearly indicates that the appropriate conveyance of expectations and goals is a necessary factor in the ability of an organization to perform at its highest level. The current study analyzed the influence of standardized forms and feedback on the improvements in work output, speed, and accuracy in a medical clinic setting. The goal of the study was to increase the speed with which lab orders were processed relative to the time in which they were ordered. The use of standardized lab order forms as well as regular feedback on progress made was utilized to determine their effects on the accuracy and speed of lab request processing. The effects of the intervention were evaluated using a multiple-baseline design across departments.
 
106. The Effectiveness of Programmed Opportunities to Decelerate the Frequency of Inappropriate Staff Interactions in the Workplace
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
THELMISHA VINCENT (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Kelly R. Ilsley (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Ed Langford (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Kamah Thomas (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Matthew L. Israel (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: The Judge Rotenberg Educational Center (www.judgerc.org) operates day and residential programs for children and adults with behavior problems, including conduct disorders, emotional problems, brain injury or psychosis, autism, and developmental disabilities. The basic approach taken at JRC is the use of behavioral psychology and its various technological applications, such as behavioral education, programmed instruction, precision teaching, behavior modification, behavior therapy, behavioral counseling, self-management of behavior, and chart-sharing. This study will report on implementation of programmed opportunities for staff members in order to address administrative concerns about inappropriate staff interactions observed by students in the work place. Frequent inappropriate interactions between staff members jeopardize the effectiveness of students’ treatment programs, and pose a potential simultaneous threat to staff members’ and students’ confidentiality and safety. We have set a minimum goal of conducting 25 randomly assigned programmed opportunities per day throughout our population of 900 staff members over a 12 week data collection period. Immediate verbal feedback, cumulative written evaluations, and a progressive disciplinary system will be used. Supplemental training tools may also be implemented. Data will be graphically presented to demonstrate to effect of our interventions to decrease inappropriate staff interactions, while simultaneously increasing appropriate interactions.
 
107. Improving the Performance of Trainers of Behavior Intervention Plans
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
MOLLIE J. HORNER-KING (Our Lady of Peace), Janice L. Marley (Our Lady of Peace), Kimberly Dwyer-Moore (Our Lady of Peace), Erin G. Moreschi (Our Lady of Peace), Beth A. Duncan (Our Lady of Peace), Katherine Miriam Johnson-Patagoc (Our Lady of Peace)
Abstract: A withdrawal design was utilized to assess the effects of a public posting procedure designed to increase training percentages of behavior support plans for 8 bachelor's level staff. Baseline data for percent of plans trained by each trainer were collected weekly however no public or verbal feedback was delivered. Intervention data were collected in the same manner as baseline data but were posted in graphical form in a public office area. The same graph posted in the public office area was sent out to each trainer via e-mail with delivery notification sent to the first author after each trainer opened the e-mail. A return to baseline phase was then implemented. Subsequently, a second intervention was introduced. Following this intervention a return to baseline phase was re-instated. Percentage of plans trained by each trainer throughout each phase will be reviewed. The advantages and disadvantages of public posting/feedback will be discussed.
 
108. Systematic Explicit Feedback for Increasing Recollection of Specific Positive Feedback with Residential Staff
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
MARTIN THOMAS IVANCIC (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Abstract: Twenty staff from a state residential facility were unable to recall specific positive feedback until it was provided in an explicit and systematic way. Data were permanent product reports and analyzed in a multiple baseline across shifts of 10 staff each. Recollection increases were 58% and 59% from first and second shift baselines. Data are discussed in terms of repetition of specific feedback as being important to subsequent recollection.
 
109. Integration of Token Economy and Levels Systems In A Forensic Mental Health Facility
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JACOB THOMAS SINGER (University of Nevada, Reno), W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: We examined the effects of integrating Levels System technology into an existing token economy in a forensic mental health facility. Comparisons were made among measures including rate of performance of desired behaviors (e.g., personal hygiene, participation in activities, etc.), reduction of aggressive behavior (e.g., assaults, threats, verbal altercations), and duration of stay at the facility.
 
110. A Laboratory Investigation of Behavioral Outcomes as a Measure of Staff Performance
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
NATHANIEL G. SMITH (University of Kansas), L. Keith Miller (University of Kansas), Hang Wu (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Under laboratory conditions, the current study investigated the effectiveness of a management procedure of performance incentives (extra credit points) contingent upon behavioral changes (behavioral outcomes) among analogue clientele (mice) on maintaining ongoing work performance among analogue staff (college students). Specifically, measurements of changes in client behavior were taken as an indicator of whether staff implemented correctly or incorrectly, consistently or inconsistently, an acquisition program (i.e., a progressive ratio procedure). This study found that performance incentives contingent upon behavioral outcomes among clientele maintained high levels of correct and consistent staff performance. Covert observations conducted in absence of experimenter presence and supervision verified the extent to which behavioral outcomes among clientele reflected the degree of program integrity and continuation among staff. These findings suggest that management by behavioral outcomes may be an effective and efficient supervisory system for maintaining ongoing work performances among staff. Future research regarding the generality of these findings is discussed and suggestions for field application within human services are provided.
 
111. Role of Announced Supervision on Treatment Fidelity in Autism Instruction
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
HOLLY LYNN KITCHEN (Dr. Gertrude A. Barber National Institute), Thomas P. Kitchen (Dr. Gertrude A. Barber National Institute), Phillip J. Belfiore (Mercyhurst College)
Abstract: Public and private agencies that provide educational intervention continue to struggle to provide "appropriate and effective" instruction to all students. Children who exhibit significant social, cognitive, and developmental needs require highly specialized and systematic instructional interventions if maximum efficacy and efficiency are to be realized. These interventions only attain peak effectiveness when they are carried out with consistency and fidelity to their design. As a result, those responsible for program and staff supervision within intervention facilities are faced with the challenge of assuring that intervention procedures and overall program protocols are maintained via staff fidelity. The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of announced supervision as an independent variable with regard to the dependent variable of staff fidelity to program policies and procedures, as defined by percentage of competencies met from a performance checklist. Subjects were observed under two conditions: announced and unannounced. Data indicate that during announced observations, rates of competency show increased level and stability, compared to unannounced observations. Future directions of this line of research include the design and management of contingencies that center upon performance under unannounced observation conditions, as a means to reinforce program fidelity and remediate problems with the same.
 
112. Effects of Schedule Changes on Staff Engagement in Residential School Classrooms
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
LAWRENCE L. LOCKWOOD (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Staff engagement with students is at the core of a productive school day. Time spent away from social activity and/or academic involvement may result in students straying from stimulus control and staff implementing more intrusive procedures. This study examined the rate of staff engagement throughout the school day. The independent variable was head teachers scheduling room staff to switch student groupings on a 2-hour basis throughout the day. Schedule changes were implemented in a multiple baseline design across four classrooms. Data show some increase in staff and student engagement associated with the implementation of the independent variable. Results will be discussed in terms of antecedent control of staff behavior.
 
113. Improving Management Systems in a Public School Autism Services Program
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
VICTORIA A. WHITE (University of North Texas), Cloyd Hyten (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Most research regarding staff training and supervision has been conducted in group home or treatment facility settings in which direct care staff are highly supervised throughout their shift (Green, Rollyson, Rassante & Reid, 2002). Neef (1995) calls for future research to address the maintenance of behavior management strategies in settings that are not as tightly controlled. An analysis of a public school’s autism services program has shown that staff performance, management supervision and management feedback are critical business issues in an environment which has limited supervision opportunities. The purpose of this study is three-fold: (a) assess the effects of a training package on the service delivery performance of in-home trainers, (b) examine how the Autism Coordinator’s interactions with in-home trainers (in terms of providing communications, constructive feedback and prioritizing trainer duties) affect the performance of the trainers, (c) assess the maintenance of the trained skills in a sporadically supervised environment. Data pertaining to staff performance as well as therapeutic outcomes will be shown.
 
114. The Effects of Team Building Training on the Results of Post - Team Building Training Survey Compared to Pre – Team Building Training Survey Results An Organizational Behavior Management Protocol to..
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
HAKAM M. KAIR (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Bilal Al – Fayoumi (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Najwan Assad (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Ammar Al – Tamimi (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Eman Yousef (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Eman El - Hajj (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Samir Hamdash (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs), Ragheda Zaghmoot (Shafallah Center for Children with Special Needs)
Abstract: This paper will present data comparing the responses of trainees on a pre and a post training survey asking questions about the success and the strength of a team. The pre survey was given to the trainees before the beginning of the training, it included ten questions asking the trainee to give "Yes" or "No" answers. The same questions were given to the trainees again at the end of the last day of training. This training project involved training the staff at all levels and in all departments on how to build and work as a team. It provided training on presenting groups as functional teams eighty participants were divided into ten groups. We focused on diversity among team members and cultural differences. The problems related to imposing personal values and cultural bias on planning for the team and for those served by the team.The results will show that an organizational behavior management training protocol will influence the results of a post - team building training survey compared to pre – team building training survey.
 
115. Implementing a Program Evaluation Procedure in a School Setting
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
UTAH W. NICKEL (New England Center for Children), Diana Ervin (New England Center for Children), Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: The viability of a sampling method, discussed by Reid and Parsons (1990), for reporting and monitoring student engagement was assessed in a school for children with autism and behavior disorders. Individual student behavior was sampled, using three 2-s observation periods, in the context of classroom work. Behavior emitted during each observation period was scored in mutuality exclusive categories: Purposeful, Aggressive/Disruptive, Self-Care, and Non-adaptive. Stereotypic behavior was scored in conjunction with these behaviors when it occurred. Observation sessions lasted about 5 minutes. A total of three observation sessions were conducted for each classroom. Results indicated that across all classrooms, students were found to be engaged in purposeful behaviors during 62.9 % of the observations. Non-adaptive and Stereotypic behaviors were observed in 32.9% and 43%, respectively. Data showed higher levels of purposeful engagement (70%) and lower levels of stereotypy (37%) when students were in a 1:1 teacher to student ratio. This is compared to lower levels of purposeful engagement (62%) and higher levels of stereotypy (45%) when in a group instruction setting. IOA was conducted in 33% of observations and averaged 97.6%. The sampling method proved to be a useful tool in assessing a large number of students in a natural environment.
 
116. A Behavioral Systems Analysis of Administration of Medication in a Human Services Setting
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
SONIA L. FORTIN (New England Center for Children), Robert Keller MacMath (New England Center for Children), Bethany L. McNamara (New England Center for Children), Caio F. Miguel (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Individuals working in human services may be required to administer medication to consumers/students. Proper administration involves delivering the medication to the right student at the right time with the correct medication and the proper dose via the appropriate route. These steps were defined as “the five rights.” A medication administration error consists of a violation of one of the five rights. Even though the rate of errors has been relatively low over the past year, a single error may have serious implications on students’ health. The purpose of the present study was to conduct a performance analysis to identify possible sources of errors. A process map was constructed based on interviews with all staff involved with the medication administration process. Disconnects were identified and included: lack of knowledge, lack of short term consequences for appropriate performance, and inconsistencies with communication across roles. The process map seemed to be an appropriate diagnostic tool, as well as a socially valid tool, to communicate the results within the organization. Based on the obtained results, an intervention package is being developed.
 
117. A Method for Collecting Interobserver Agreement Data in a Clinical Setting
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JILL MARIE HARPER (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: A procedure was evaluated for obtaining interobserver agreement (IOA) on daily data measures in a clinical setting. Staff at a residential program for individuals with developmental disabilities were trained on IOA procedures for frequency and momentary-time-sampling (MTS) measures. Interobserver agreement for frequency measures was initiated when aggression or environmental destruction by a student was observed and two staff were present. Each observer independently collected frequency of responses using tally counters and recorded cumulative frequency at the termination of the behavioral episode. IOA was collected on the occurrence and non-occurrence of motor and vocal stereotypy using a 5-min momentary-time-sampling procedure. Wrist watches with a repeat timer function signaled the end of an interval, two staff members observed the student(s), and recorded the occurrence or non-occurrence of motor and vocal stereotypy independently. These data were analyzed in terms of weekly mean percentage of responses/intervals with IOA, as well as mean percentage agreement across observers. The results showed that a low percentage of responses/intervals with IOA were collected, but that agreement was high across observers. These results may provide a baseline measure for intervention to increase the proportion of responses/intervals for which IOA is collected while maintaining a high percentage agreement.
 
118. Using Self-Monitoring to Improve On-Task Behaviors and Academic Performance of Elementary Students with Behavior Disorders
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
YI-WEI HSIN (The Ohio State University), Temple S Lovelace (The Ohio State University), Ralph Gardner III (The Ohio State University), Terri Hessler (The Ohio State University, Newark)
Abstract: How to work with children who have behavior disorders is an on-going challenge for school administrators and teachers. Their inappropriate behaviors sometimes lead to more problematic behaviors such as peer rejection, school dropout, school maladjustment and later delinquency. Because these children may frequently engage in inappropriate behaviors, teacher’s frequent supervision is always required but is time-consuming. Self-management strategies, including self-monitoring and self-evaluation, are a viable alternative to more traditional contingency management approaches. This study will be designed to examine the effects of self-monitoring to improve on-task behaviors and academic performance of elementary students with behavior disorders. To supplement the scarce of current studies, the study will be divided into 2 sections: Experiment 1 is conducted with audiotape in the resource room, and Experiment 2 is conducted in a mainstreamed classroom, using MotivAider as a less intrusive procedure. The generalization is also explored, and suggestions are made for future research.
 
119. Increasing “Quality” Interaction in a Daycare: A Behavioral Approach
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JONATHAN W. IVY (Pennsylvania State University), Kimberly A. Schreck (Pennsylvania State University, Harrisburg)
Abstract: The effects of training, individualized goal setting, and feedback were evaluated in seven direct-care daycare employees on adult/child interactions. Four target vocalizations associated with “quality” interactions were measured during free time. A multiple baseline across participants was used to evaluate the effects of training, goal setting, and feedback. The results showed that training generally increased levels of target vocalizations but was highly variable and susceptible to decay over time. Individualized goal setting and feedback produced high stable responding in most participants.
 
120. Using Basic Behavioral Principles to Improve High-School Swim Performance
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JOSEPH CHARLES DAGEN (University of Nevada, Reno), John Austin (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Graphic and verbal feedback coupled with self-talk and self-monitoring procedures were evaluated across three high-school swimmers. Results indicate these procedures can be effective at decreasing the time required to perform freestyle flip-turns
 
 
 
Poster Session #163
#163 International Poster Session - TBA
Sunday, May 28, 2006
12:00 PM–1:30 PM
Grand Hall
121. Behavior Analysis Training System
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
ALAINA CLARK (Western Michigan University), Allyson L. Heck (Western Michigan University), Krista Hinz (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Behavior Analysis Training System (BATS) is Dr. Richard W. Malott’s goal-directed psychology system, involving Undergraduate and M.A. Behavior Analysis students and Ph.D. Applied Behavior Analysis students. It is a new system that focuses on integrating first-year Master's students into the program and providing assistance in participation in professional activities and gaining professional skills. BATS supervises productivity in completion of Final Work Products as well as requires fluency in Advanced Study Objectives, the Three-Contingency Model of Performance Management, and Principles of Behavior key terms. BATS serves to continuously improve the quality of itself and its members through systems analysis.
 
122. The Behavioral Research Supervisory System: Helping Graduate and Undergraduate Students Prevent Procrastination
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
KENDRA S. PRIEST (Western Michigan University), Jennifer L. Skundrich (Western Michigan University), Kristin M. Hustyi (Western Michigan University), Abby Ferree (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Behavioral Research Supervisory System (BRSS) is part of a larger system known as the Behavioral Analysis Training System. BRSS was designed to help graduate and undergraduate students complete large projects in a timely manner. We are also in place to monitor undergraduate students working on departmental honor’s theses. The students in the system complete weekly tasks that contribute to the research and development of a particular project. Point contingencies are in place to ensure that the student completes tasks in a timely manner, but also to ensure a high quality product. The BRSS manager is responsible for keeping track of the student’s point values and to assign a grade at the end of the semester based on those accumulated point values. In addition to the compilation of point values, the BRSS manager is also responsible for holding a weekly research and development meeting where both graduate and undergraduate students come together to show proof that they completed their weekly tasks, discuss upcoming weekly tasks, as well as informing and distributing information that may be vital to the student’s task completion. The Behavioral Research Supervisory System provides structure as well as guidelines for the students to complete their research and development projects.
 
123. Behavioral Academic Career Counseling
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
DANIEL LEE SHAFTO (Western Michigan University), Erin Andres (Western Michigan University), Meredith Watkins (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The purpose of the BACC system is to address and inform under graduates of their possible goals for their future. May students have little to no knowledge of graduate schools, job in their desired field, how to graduate, what classes they need to take to get the degree they want, what minors that go well with their major, or the requirements for graduate school. The BACC system compiles this information and informs the students through way of “BACC appointments”. These appointments give the student the opportunity to ask questions dealing with their present and future academic goals and their ideal job choice, and help prepare the student for success with knowledge and helpful tips from graduate students. The belief is that many students do not realize their full academic potential without proper guidance, so we provide that guidance. All students deserve every opportunity that is out there, even if they do not know where to look for it, which is why the system was created.
 
124. Behavior Systems Analysis Project
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
WOAN TIAN CHOW (Western Michigan University), Andrea Juarez (Western Michigan University), Mark Klann (Western Michigan University), Melody Taylor (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Teach students the principles of behavior analysis in order to provide them with the skills and training necessary to analyze problems in real settings and increase their knowledge and fluency of those principles to improve the well-being and functioning of organizations and society
 
125. Self Management
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
BREANNE K. CROOKS (Western Michigan University), Jessica Norris (Western Michigan University), Brittany Leah Sheets (Western Michigan University), Andrea M. Rau (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The mission of the self-management system is to help undergraduates complete the assignments from their classes using behavioral technology, and ultimately, to help them learn the tools of self-management to generalize those behaviors to their every day life.
 
126. GRE and Grad School Prep Course
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
CALLIE AMANDA SIMMS (Western Michigan University), Jodylee M. Miller (Western Michigan University), Sarah Vanstelle (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The GRE course is designed to help students study for the Graduate Record Exam (GRE) and prepare for graduate school using performance management techniques. We monitor student performance, provide deadlines and specify point contingencies to help ensure students spend time studying for the GRE. Our goal is to provide guidance and relevant materials to inform students about the GRE and graduate school application.
 
127. Psych 360 Continuous Quality Improvement
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
ERIN CAREY (Western Michigan University), Jennifer L. Skundrich (Western Michigan University), Jeffrey S. Bye II (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The system manager is most concerned with the continuous quality improvement of the Psych 360 class. They use the information gathered by the TAs during error analysis and compared that with anonymous chapter evaluations that each student fills out after each homework chapter. The students write down what the most difficult part of the chapter was, what if anything was offensive and what are some suggestions for improvement. The system manager also requires that the TAs fill out their own evaluations after each class. The TAs document what the students thought they understood, but upon questioning they did not, what the TA spent the most time explaining from the book and what common mistakes were made on the student’s original examples from their homework. The system manager compiles a list of common topics that the TAs had to address in each class. The system manager supervises an undergraduate who compiles the chapter evaluations and lists the common answers and then averages the ratings the students gave them. The undergraduate also makes any necessary grammatical corrections or continuity corrections between homework, the text and the quizzes. The system manager in turn is the performance manager for the undergraduate as they write their Honor’s Thesis based on their work within and on the system.
 
128. Psychology 396 (Super A): Advanced Principles of Behavior
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
HOLLY WARNER (Western Michigan University), Allyson L. Heck (Western Michigan University), Lori Schroedter (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The purpose of Super A is to train undergraduate students in goal setting and attainment, graphing data, and self-management, in order to produce competent behavior analysts that future employers, clients, professors, and graduate programs can better benefits from their skills.
 
129. Intermediate Practicum
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
CHRISTINA JEAN VESTEVICH (Western Michigan University), Brittany Leah Sheets (Western Michigan University), Jordan P. Boudreau (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Intermediate Practicum is a supplemental course designed to enhance and fine tune discrete trial training skills. Students enrolled in this course have already completed the regular Practicum course and would like to continue their experience. However, they must enhance their DTT skills before moving on to the Advanced Practicum. These students will receive intensive trial-by-trial feedback and learn more specifically how the principles of behavior affect all aspects of discrete trial training through observing the performance of other technicians. They will be monitoring other practicum students and noting positive and negative skills displayed by the performing technician, without providing any direct feedback.
 
130. Advanced Autism Practicum
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
DAVID SLADE (Western Michigan University), Brittany Leah Sheets (Western Michigan University), Margaret M. Dickson Moore (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Advanced Autism Practicum, is to produce undergraduate students with higher level behavioral techniques and skills in working with children diagnosed with autism. The Advanced Autism Practicum is designed to produce students with an advanced level of techniques and skills in working with children diagnosed with autism. These students have completed the Special Population Practicum, in the pre-primary impaired classroom at Croyden Avenue School previously, and worked as a behavioral technician in a one-on-one discrete trial setting. The practicum was designed to allow students who excelled in the special populations practicum to continue their work, take on more responsibilities and become a better rounded behavioral technician. An Advanced Practicum student works in the classroom with an assigned autistic child and attends a regular seminar meeting. They are required to complete a project that involves developing a new procedure for an autistic child. They develop, implement, evaluate, and recycling a novel procedure, review relevant literature, and create a presentation about the procedure they produced. The also have to add sub-phases to procedures that have red dots. A procedure is red dotted when a child fails to meet criteria for change and cannot move onto the next phase in the procedure. Advanced students are required to attend to the problems in the procedure and write sub phases to try and correct the problem.
 
131. Professional Psychology Practicum
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
ZACHARIAH T. DUGGER (Western Michigan University), Jessica M. Norris (Western Michigan University), David Eisenhart (Western Michigan University), Lauren Frye (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The purpose of the Professional Psychology Practicum is to provide graduate students with the necessary training, supervision, and experience to become Board Certified Behavior Analysts and optionally to obtain their Temporary Limited License in Psychology so that they can disseminate their knowledge of behavior analysis and help those members of society who are in need.
 
132. Computer Based Programmed Instruction
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTEN L. GAISFORD (Western Michigan University), Conny M. Raaymakers (Western Michigan University), Amy Crane (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The mission of the CBPI system is to generate quality units of computer-based programmed instruction, and to continually improve existing products to be implemented in graduate courses. These units will improve the behavior analytic skills of undergraduate and graduate students and clarify concepts that are often difficult for students, to help them achieve the ultimate goal of “saving the world with behavior analysis”.
 
133. Behavioral Computer Workshop
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
HUI LING LOH (Western Michigan University), Millicent R. Bandeff (Western Michigan University), Katrina L. Miller (Western Michigan University), Blake Grider (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: To provide the education and training of software and computer programs necessary to develop skills for use in real world applications as well as a final thesis.
 
134. The Relationship Between Procrastination and Academic Performance in a Computer-Aided PSI Course
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
GABRIEL SCHNERCH (University of Manitoba), Kacey Dalzell (University of Manitoba), Joseph J. Pear (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Archived data gathered from an undergraduate course offered by computer-aided personalized system of instruction (CAPSI) at the University of Manitoba was analyzed to evaluate the relationship between student progress patterns and academic performance. The CAPSI system allows for students to complete each of ten unit tests at their own pace, only limited by the requirement that they demonstrate mastery on one unit before being allowed to attempt the next unit’s test. Student progress was quantified by assigning each successive day in the course a number based on the number of unit tests passed by that point, and adding up the total score. Those with lower scores thus requested the majority of their tests later in the semester, those with higher scores started earlier. Preliminary analyses of students’ progress scores and final exam scores reveal a Pearson correlation of .708, p < .001. Students requesting unit tests earlier tended to perform better than those who completed more tests late semester. Research is currently planned to follow-up this research using the new Web-based CAPSI system, and exploring the relationship further by introducing interventions aimed at reducing procrastination in CAPSI course students and examining its effect on the relationship suggested here.
 
135. Using a Single-Subject Design to Increase Peer-Review Accuracy in a Computer-Aided PSI Course: Part I
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
JODY M. LAMBERT (University of Manitoba), Dianne Miguel (University of Manitoba), Kirsten M. Wirth (University of Manitoba), Joseph J. Pear (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Data from a behavior modification principles course taught at the University of Manitoba using a computer-aided personalized system of instruction (CAPSI) will be analyzed. After a student peer-reviews four unit tests, the instructor will randomly analyze two of the four and provide feedback to the individual targeting peer-reviewer feedback and accuracy. This pattern will continue throughout the course so that after every four unit tests that a student peer-reviews, that student will receive individualized feedback from the instructor on two of his or her responses. Peer-reviewer feedback decisions on unit tests will be categorized as correct, mostly correct, or incorrect by independent raters to determine if there is an increase inaccuracy after receiving feedback from the instructor over the course of the semester. Reliability checks will also be performed. Previous research has shown that peer-review accuracy does not increase as a function of time and so it is hypothesized that feedback will improve steadily in both quality and quantity as a result of continuing feedback from the instructor. Implications for this research include developing better ways to train CAPSI peer-reviewers and test writers, and determining an effective way to improve peer-review feedback.
 
136. Using a Single-Subject Design to Increase Peer-Review Accuracy in a Computer-Aided PSI Course: Part II
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
KIRSTEN M. WIRTH (University of Manitoba), Jody M. Lambert (University of Manitoba), Dianne Miguel (University of Manitoba), Joseph J. Pear (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Data on peer-reviewers in two undergraduate behavior modification courses - Behaviour Modification Principles and its sequel, Behaviour Modification Applications - taught using computer-aided personalized system of instruction (CAPSI) were analyzed. In Behaviour Modification Principles, peer-reviewers received feedback on two randomly selected unit tests they had reviewed after reviewing four unit tests. Students who continued on to Behaviour Modification Applications received the same baseline and intervention (reversal-replication). Feedback targeted peer review accuracy and included positive or reinforcing statements and corrective information. Archived records of the students' responses will be assessed by independent raters, and reliability checks will be performed. It is expected that peer-review accuracy will increase and that peer feedback will increase in quality and quantity as a result of instructor feedback in both courses. This research has implications for developing ways to better train CAPSI peer-reviewers and test writers, and determine effective methods to gain stimulus control over students' peer-review behaviors.
 
 
 
Paper Session #164
Behavior Analysis of Psychological Problems
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Kennesaw
Area: CBM
Chair: Alisha M. Wray (University of New Mexico)
 
Effects of Self-Recording and Reinforcement on Therapeutic Exercise Participation
Domain: Applied Research
AMBER MAKI (St. Cloud State University), Eric Rudrud (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University), Floyd M. Hale (Minnesota Neurorehabilitation Hospital), Joel J. Christian (Minnesota Neurorehabilitation Hospital)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to utilize self-management and contingent reinforcement to increase therapeutic exercise group participation with adults with traumatic brain injury. Exercise participation was targeted and measured using a whole interval recording procedure. In an ABAB design, participants self-recorded their exercise participation using a momentary time sampling procedure. Additional data was collected on the accuracy of the participant's self-recorded participation. During the 45 minute exercise session, the participants were told to self-record their exercise participation for five momentary time sampling intervals at each of three exercise stations. When told to record, participants entered a + for exercising or a 0 for not exercising on their data sheet. At the conclusion of the exercise session, the participants chose a prize for receiving 12 to 15 pluses, or MNH drawing coupons for receiving 9 to 11 pluses. Self-recording and contingent reinforcement increased overall exercise participation for all participants at all three exercise stations. Further, all of the participants were able to accurately self-record their exercise participation. Future research should examine fading of self-recording, fading reinforcement, assessing generalization, and long-term maintenance of exercise behaviors.
 
A Behavior Analytic Account of Selective Attention and Memory in the Maintenance of Clinical Problems
Domain: Theory
ALISHA M. WRAY (University of New Mexico), Michael J. Dougher (University of New Mexico)
 
Abstract: It is well known that clinical populations (depression, anxiety, PTSD, substance abuse, etc.) selectively attend to and remember various events, and a body of literature exists that has tried to examine these characteristics (Teasdale & Taylor, 1981; Watkins, 1996). However, an attempt to explain how these phenomena may be contributing to the maintenance of clinical problems has not yet been explored from a behavior analytic account. This area of study can benefit from a behavior analytic account that emphasizes the importance of function and context over mentalistic and mediational explanations. The present paper examines how reinforcement history and social contingencies may influence selective memory (Loftus, 1972; Wixted, 2005). Also, attempts are made to investigate how establishing operations or motivational events may account for a more complete analysis (Michael 1993; Michael, 2000; Dougher & Hackbert 2000). These explanations, however, are insufficient alone. The case is made that the role of verbal processes must be incorporated in a more general account of this phenomenon. Clinical and research implications are also discussed.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #165
CE Offered: None

Gene-Environment Interactions In Rhesus-Monkey Behavior Development

Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: DEV; Domain: Basic Research
CE Instructor: Lewis P. Lipsitt, Ed.D.
Chair: Lewis P. Lipsitt (Brown University)
STEPHEN SUOMI (National Institute of Child Health & Human Development)
Dr. Stephen J. Suomi is Chief of the Laboratory of Comparative Ethology at the National Institute of Child Health & Human Development (NICHD), National Institutes of Health (NIH) in Bethesda, Maryland. He also holds appointments as Research Professor at the University of Virginia (Psychology), the University of Maryland, College Park (Human Development), and The Johns Hopkins University (Mental Hygiene), and is an Adjunct Professor at Georgetown University (Psychology), the Pennsylvania State University (Human Development) and the University of Maryland, Baltimore County (Psychology). Dr. Suomi studied Psychology as an undergraduate at Stanford University and continued his studies as a graduate student at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, receiving his Ph.D. in Psychology in 1971. Dr. Suomi then joined the Psychology faculty at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, where he eventually attained the rank of Professor. In 1983 he left Wisconsin to join the NICHD, when he began his present position. Dr. Suomi has received international recognition for his extensive research on biobehavioral development in rhesus monkeys and other primate species. His initial postdoctoral research successfully reversed the adverse effects of early social isolation, previous thought to be permanent, in rhesus monkeys. His subsequent research at Wisconsin led to his election as Fellow in the American Association for the Advancement of Science ‘for major contributions to the understanding of social factors that influence the psychological development of nonhuman primates.” Since joining the NICHD he has identified heritable and experiential factors that influence individual biobehavioral development, characterized both behavioral and physiological features of distinctive rhesus monkey phenotypes, and demonstrated the adaptive significance of these different phenotypes in naturalistic settings. His present research focuses on 3 general issues: the interaction between genetic and environmental factors in shaping individual developmental trajectories, the issue of continuity vs. change and the relative stability of individual differences throughout development, and the degree to which findings from monkeys studied in captivity generalize not only to monkeys living in the wild but also to humans living in different cultures. Throughout his professional career Dr. Suomi has been the recipient of numerous awards and honors. To date, he has authored or co-authored over 300 articles published in scientific journals and chapters in edited volumes. He has also delivered over 300 invited colloquia, symposium and workshop presentations, and convention papers in the U.S. and in 12 foreign countries.
Abstract:

Recent research has found marked individual differences in patterns of rhesus monkey biobehavioral development throughout the life span. Approximately 20% of monkeys growing up in naturalistic settings consistently display unusually fearful and anxious-like behavioral reactions to novel, mildly stressful social situations throughout development; another 5-10% are likely to exhibit impulsive and/or inappropriately aggressive responses under similar circumstances. These distinctive behavioral patterns and their biological correlates appear early in life and remain remarkably stable from infancy to adulthood. Both genetic and experiential mechanisms are implicated not only in the expression of these patterns but also in their transmission across successive generations of monkeys. For example, a specific polymorphism in the serotonin transporter gene is associated with deficits in infant neurobehavioral functioning and in juvenile and adolescent control of aggression and serotonin metabolism in monkeys who experienced insecure early attachments but not in monkeys who developed secure attachment relationships with their mothers during infancy (maternal buffering). Moreover, because the attachment style of a monkey mother is typically copied by her daughters when they grow up and become mothers themselves, similar buffering is likely to occur for the next generation of infants carrying that specific polymorphism.

 
 
Paper Session #166
Interventions for Preschoolers and Kindergartners
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Auburn
Area: EDC
Chair: Amanda L. Yurick (The Ohio State University)
 
Classroom Management Techniques in an Urban Kindergarten Setting
Domain: Service Delivery
AMANDA L. YURICK (The Ohio State University), Gwendolyn Cartledge (The Ohio State University)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to reduce kindergarten students’ disruptive behavior during reading instruction using either token economy (TE) alone or TE plus precision requests (PR). During the TE phase, the teacher was trained to contingently deliver tokens for rule-following behavior during discrete time periods. During the TE plus PR phase, she also delivered precision requests to redirect the students. Students were explicitly taught how to demonstrate the rules and these behaviors were reviewed each day. Data were collected on 8 target students’ total disruptive behavior (including noncompliance, off-task, and verbal/nonverbal aggression) and the teacher’s use of precision requests. Data were also collected on treatment integrity, interobserver agreement, and social validity of the goals, procedures, and effects of the intervention. Finally, the teacher completed the Social Skill Rating Scale form for each target student both before and after the study. Results indicate that disruptive behavior decreased from baseline levels. Particularly important features were the successful coaching of a general education teacher and the potential for reduction or prevention of later behavior problems. The results contribute to the knowledge base in special education by providing evidence that a multi-component approach to behavior management can successfully decrease students’ disruptive behavior.
 
Effectiveness of Social Reinforcement In Preschool Students
Domain: Basic Research
SEBASTIAN FIGUEROA RODRÍGUEZ (Universidad Veracruzana), Leticia Rivera (Universidad Cristobal Colon), Clara Olivia Romero Rodríguez (Universidad Cristobal Colon), Adriana Ordaz García (Universidad Cristobal Colon)
 
Abstract: This study objective is to establish the effectiveness of social reinforcement in the shape and increment of new behavior patterns in seventy preschool students with ages between two and six years old attending a private preschool in Veracruz; México. Students were divided in two groups for each behavior target,, one receiving manipulable reinforcers without any verbalization (candy, stars, etc.) contingent to the expected response, while the other received only social reinforcers such as approval, signs of affection, etc. Groups rotated in the reception of reinforcers (social or manipulable) for each target behavior. Preliminary results show that groups receiving social reinforcers developed behaviors just a little faster than the kids in the other groups, but behaviors in the social reinforcers groups seem more consistent and durable than the others.
 
 
 
Paper Session #167
OBM Paper Series - Evaluation of Observation and Feedback in Organizations
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Vancouver
Area: OBM
Chair: Julianne Gallinat (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
The Relationship Between the Number of Peer Safety Observations and Recordable Incidents
Domain: Applied Research
ANGELA R. LEBBON (Western Michigan University), Sigurdur Oli Sigurdsson (Western Michigan University), John Austin (Western Michigan University)
 
Abstract: During the course of a Behavior-Based Safety implementation in a food and drink industry site, data were collected on both the number of recordable incidents and peer observations. Employees were trained to discriminate between safe and unsafe behavior, conduct peer observations, and provide verbal feedback to peers. Two employees were selected each week to conduct safety observations on work surroundings and behavior that could potentially result in injury. Data collected from peer observations were utilized to deliver graphic feedback to employees on the percentage safe for work surroundings and behavior. On a weekly basis, managers reviewed graphic feedback with employees, praised employees for conducting observations, and reminded employees to conduct observations. In addition to safety observations and feedback, a safety committee composed of employees and managers identified, discussed, and addressed safety concerns. A correlational analysis was conducted to examine the relationship between conducting peer observations and the number of recordable incidents. Results suggest that when employees conduct peer observations more frequently, the number of recordable incidents decreases.
 
The Effects of Video Feedback of Staff’s Own vs. Others’ Performance on Discrete-Trial Training Skills
Domain: Applied Research
JULIANNE GALLINAT (University of Nevada, Reno), W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno)
 
Abstract: Many studies have been conducted evaluating the use of behavior analysis techniques in organizational settings and their use in staff training. Central to this literature has been the use of a variety of different forms of feedback, including videotaped feedback. Previous studies have indicated a possible positive training effect on staff skills from simply being exposed to relevant video taped performances of those skills without any other formal training. This study evaluated the effectiveness of two types of feedback: Videotape of one’s own and videotape of others’ performance, on staff’s discrete trial training skills. Results replicate earlier research on the effectiveness of video feedback used in training programs but does not suggest a difference between observing oneself to observing someone else.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #168
CE Offered: None

The End of Experimental Analysis?

Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: David C. Palmer, M.D.
Chair: David C. Palmer (Smith College)
JOHN W. DONAHOE (University of Massachusetts, Amherst)
Dr. John W. Donahoe is an Emeritus Professor in the Behavioral Neuroscience Division of the Department of Psychology at the University of Massachusetts/Amherst. Prof. Donahoe was previously a Special Postdoctoral Fellow at the Center for Brain Research at University of Rochester and a faculty member in the Psychology and Computer Science Departments of the University of Kentucky. His undergraduate work was in chemistry at Rutgers University and he received his doctorate from the University of Kentucky. His research focuses on experimental and theoretical analyses of reinforcement and stimulus control. He has proposed a unified theoretical treatment of conditioning in the Pavlovian and operant procedures. Recent experimental work using the Pavlovian procedure is consistent with the theory: The relation of the CS to the UR is the critical temporal relation, not the relation to the US as previously thought (Donahoe & Vegas, 2004). Other recent experimental work has shown that Skinner’s moment-to-moment analysis of reinforcement can accommodate the molar matching relation (Crowley & Donahoe, 2004). The theory has been implemented in a biologically informed neural-network model that has successfully simulated a number of conditioning phenomena including such complex findings as revaluation and the relations between molar variables (e.g., Donahoe, Burgos, & Palmer, 1993; Donahoe & Burgos, 2000, Burgos, 2005).
Abstract:

In 1990, Francis Fukuyama wrote an essay entitled The End of History? By that title, he raised the question of whether the final form of government had evolved, namely, Western liberal democracy. Although not as widely agreed upon, an argument can be made that our understanding of the fundamental processes that shape behavior is also approaching its final form. Our understanding of the reinforcement process and of its implications for stimulus control is quite advanced at the behavioral level of analysis. We have identified the conditions required for reinforcement and the processes that occur during stimulus discrimination and generalization. What remains for experimental analysis is an understanding of the biological processes that underlie these behavioral findings, but these are tasks for neuroscience not behavior analysis. Of course, many important unresolved problems remainfor example, reconciling the relations observed between molar-defined variables (reinforcement rate and response rate) with the molecular accounts advocated by Skinner. However, these problems will likely be addressed through interpretation rather than experimental analysis. Much more demanding tasks remain such as understanding complex human behavior, most notably verbal behavior. But these too are primarily subjects for interpretation, not experimental analysis. If it is indeed the end of the experimental analysis of behavior, it is not because we have failed but because we have succeeded. It is now time to move on to other matters whose understanding is informed by the fruits of the experimental analysis of behavior.

 
 
Paper Session #169
The National Center for Special Education Research: A New Source of Research Opportunities
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:20 PM
Courtland
Area: EDC
Chair: Patricia A. Gonzalez (National Center for Special Education Research)
 
The National Center for Special Education Research in IES: New Opportunities for Research
Domain: Theory
EDWARD J. KAME'ENUI (U.S. Department of Education), Patricia A. Gonzalez (U.S. Department of Education)
 
Abstract: In 2004, the National Center for Special Education Research (NCSER) was created within the Institute of Education Sciences of the U.S. Department of Education. The Center sponsors comprehensive programs of research designed explicitly and deliberately to: (a) improve educational outcomes and quality of life for infants, toddlers, and children with disabilities; (b) evaluate the implementation and effectiveness of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (P.L. 108-446); and (c) examine empirically the full range of issues facing children with disabilities, parents of children with disabilities, school personnel, and others. NCSER intends to fund rigorous research projects proposing a variety of methodologies, including single subject, in such areas as early intervention, reading and writing instruction, mathematics and science instruction, language development, and behavior interventions. The purpose of this session is to provide information to the membership of ABA on upcoming research grant competitions sponsored by NCSER, including a summary of projects funded in our first round of competitions in 2005. An overview of NCSER grant application requirements will be provided together with a brief description of the application submission and review processes. The Commissioner of NCSER and his staff will answer questions on the grants process and future plans for the Center.
 
The National Center for Special Education Research in IES: Questions and Answers
Domain: Theory
PATRICIA A. GONZALEZ (U.S. Department of Education)
 
Abstract: N/a
 
 
 
Symposium #170
Accelerating Skill Acquisition Among People with Severe Disabilities Who Have Been Difficult to Teach
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Regency VI
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Marsha B. Parsons (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Discussant: Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.)
Abstract: This symposium will present three studies on accelerating skill acquisition among people with severe disabilities who are difficult to teach (e.g., have histories of minimal progress on teaching programs). The first study evaluated preference-based teaching that involved incorporating learner preferences within the teaching process with learners with multiple disabilities. Results indicated that indices of unhappiness decreased for all 4 participating learners and that for 2 learners, enhanced skill acquisition accompanied reductions in unhappiness. The second study evaluated a modified intensive teaching protocol with 3 learners. The protocol, involving reduced distractions, increased teaching trials, and provision of preferred stimuli following teaching sessions, was accompanied by accelerated progress for each learner. The third study evaluated simulation training to enhance initial work performance of supported workers in a community job. Results indicated that initial job performance was enhanced significantly when workers received simulation training when beginning new work tasks. Overall results are discussed in light of social validity data indicating that lack of progress on teaching programs is a frequently occurring issue among personnel working with individuals with severe disabilities.
 
Effects of Preference-Based Teaching on Skill Acquisition.
CAROLYN W. GREEN (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.)
Abstract: Preference-based teaching was evaluated with 4 individuals with severe multiple disabilities who historically were resistive to teaching programs as indicated by indices of unhappiness and resistance during teaching sessions. The preference-based teaching approach involved incorporating individual learner preferences within the teaching process by providing brief access to preferences before, during, and after teaching sessions. All 4 learners showed reduced indices of unhappiness and resistance when the preference-based teaching strategy was applied. Although the focus of the new teaching strategy was on reducing indices of unhappiness and resistance during teaching, an evaluation was also conducted regarding effects of preference-based teaching on learner skill acquisition. Results indicated that 2 learners showed increased skill acquisition during preference-based teaching relative to the traditional teaching approach (there were no detrimental effects of preference-based teaching on skill acquisition among the other 2 learners, who continued their previous rates of skill acquisition). These results are discussed in regard to making participation in teaching programs more preferred among learners as one potential means of enhancing skill acquisition.
 
Practical Applications of Intensive Teaching to Accelerate Skill Acquisition.
MARSHA B. PARSONS (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Donna Towery (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Peggy England (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Dennis H. Reid (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.)
Abstract: A modified intensive teaching program was evaluated with 3 adults with severe disabilities who were making minimal or no progress on an existing teaching program. Intensive teaching involved reducing environmental distractions, increasing the number of teaching sessions per week (approximately three-fold), and providing a highly preferred item or activity immediately following each teaching session. Results indicated that progress was accelerated during the intensive teaching program relative to when the existing, baseline teaching program was in effect. Results also indicated that the intensive teaching approach did not adversely impact the participants in terms of indices of unhappiness or problem behavior (which was a reported concern with earlier applications of intensive teaching). The importance of the accelerated progress was highlighted in light of a social validity survey indicating the majority of respondents who teach people with severe disabilities have encountered situations in which their learners participated in teaching programs for over one year without making progress.
 
Enhancing Work Performance of Adults with Autism Beginning Community Jobs Through Simulation Training.
DENNIS H. REID (Carolina Behavior Analysis & Support Center, Ltd.), Lindsey P. Lattimore (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Marsha B. Parsons (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center)
Abstract: An evaluation was conducted of the effects of simulation training on the work performance of supported workers with autism beginning new work tasks in a community job. Following brief baseline observations of the independent performance of 3 supported workers with a newly assigned job in a publishing and consulting agency, simulation training on the job skills was provided in multiple baseline fashion across the workers. Simulation training involved teaching the skills to perform the jobs (preparing training notebooks and folders) away from the worksite in a classroom-based, adult education program. To potentially expedite skill acquisition, the simulation training involved multiple training sessions within and across days away from the work site. Results indicated that once each worker obtained mastery criterion on the job skills during simulation training (which was accomplished within a maximum two-week period), the skills quickly generalized to the work site. These results suggest that initial job performance of adults with autism when beginning a new community job can be enhanced if they receive simulation training on the new job skills when they are not at the work site.
 
 
Symposium #171
International Symposium - Advances in the Clinical Application of Motivating Operations
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
International Ballroom North
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Chaturi Edrisinha (University of Texas, Austin)
Discussant: Peter McGill (Tizard Centre, University of Kent)
Abstract: There has been a steady growth in interest in the influence of establishing or motivating operations on challenging behavior. In this symposium we present three research papers that examine the clinical utility and functional properties of motivating operations. In our first paper Craig Kennedy and colleague will examine the idiosyncratic influences of prior conditions on performance in subsequent functional analysis sessions. The importance of these findings for clinical assessment are discussed. In the second paper Mark O'Reilly and colleagues will describe recent examinations of the evocative effect of the motivating operation. Potential implications for clinical assessment and intervention are described. Finally, Jennifer McComas and colleagues examine the influence of intra-cranial pressure as a motibvating operation for self-injury for a child with developmental disabilities and hydrocephalus. The findings of these studies witll then be discussed by Peter McGill of the University of Kent at Canterbury.
 
A Paradoxical Effect of Presession Attention on Stereotypy: Antecedent Attention as an Establishing, Not an Abolishing, Operation.
CHRISTINA F. ROANTREE (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Research on motivating operations continues to reveal new insights into behavioral processes underling human behavior. Previous studies have shown that presession attention for problem behavior can serve as an abolishing operation when attention functions as a positive reinforcer. That is, attention prior to a functional analysis can decrease the positively reinforcing effects of attention during the experimental analysis. In the current study, we show that presession attention can function as an establishing operation for attention as a positive reinforcer. Initially, we obtained an undifferentiated pattern of stereotypy during standard analogue functional analysis conditions. However, when noncontingent presession attention was provided, stereotypy occurred for social attention as a positive reinforcer, suggesting that the antecedent manipulation functioned as an establishing operation. Our findings suggest that any particular stimulus functioning as a positive reinforcer needs to be assessed in terms of both establishing and abolishing operations in order to understand the motivational salience of the stimulus and its relation to possible antecedent manipulations.
 
Preliminary Examinations of the Evocative Effect of the Motivating Operation on Operant Responding.
MARK O'REILLY (University of Texas, Austin), Chaturi Edrisinha (University of Texas, Austin), Jeffrey S. Sigafoos (University of Tasmania)
Abstract: We describe the results of two related studies. In study 1 we attempted to isolate the evocative effects of the motivating operation (MO) for positively reinforced challenging behavior with two participants. The study consisted of three phases. First, functional analysis identified tangibles (participant 1) and attention (participant 2) as maintaining challenging behavior. Second, access to tangibles and attention was systematically controlled (continuous access versus no access) immediately prior to functional analysis sessions in which these consequences were delivered contingent on challenging behavior. Finally, prior access was again controlled but challenging behavior produced no consequences. Results of this final phase of the study indicated that challenging behavior occurred at higher levels during extinction sessions when participants did not have prior access to the reinforcers. These results seem to demonstrate the evocative effect of the MO. In the second study we attempted to identify one functional mechanism by which this evocative effect may occur, namely, that the MO can have a direct effect on the behavior itself. Positively reinforced challenging behavior was examined under functional analysis alone conditions while presession levels of these reinforcers were systematically controlled. In the alone condition both the SDs and consequences for challenging behavior are absent which therefore allowed us to isolate the direct effect of the MO on the behavior itself.
 
The Effects of Intra-Cranial Pressure on the Functional Analysis of Self-Injurious Behavior.
JENNIFER J. MCCOMAS (University of Minnesota), Ellie C. Hartman (University of Minnesota), Elizabeth Gilles (University of Minnesota), Stacy E. Danov (University of Minnesota), Frank J. Symons (University of Minnesota)
Abstract: The effects of intra-cranial pressure (ICP) on self-injurious behavior (SIB) were analyzed with a 12 year old girl with cognitive, communicative, and motor impairments. Congenital physical abnormalities included hydrocephalus for which she was a candidate for frontal bone advancement and anterior cranial vault remodeling. She had a ventriculoperioneal shunt that had required multiple revisions. The hydrocephalus and dysfunctional shunt resulted in intermittent periods of ICP, which was confirmed via visual inspection during the three phases of this analysis. The results of the initial FA, conducted when ICP was low, indicated that her SIB was maintained by positive reinforcement. In the subsequent phase, the FA was repeated when ICP was high, and showed elevated occurrences of SIB without respect to experimental manipulation. In the final phase, the FA was repeated when ICP was low and the occurrence of SIB was comparable to the first phase. Inter-observer agreement averaged above 80% across all sessions. Results are discussed in terms of the moderating effects of pain as an establishing operation on FA outcomes.
 
 
Symposium #172
Alternative Paradigms for Studying Equivalence Class Formation and its Neural Correlates
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
International Ballroom South
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: This symposium will consider alternative training paradigms and testing for studying the formation of equivalence classes that is more compatible with exploring the neural correlates of equivalence relations than a training and testing conducted in a typical MTS format. The alternative training paradigm, the stimulus pairing yes no procedure (SPYN), however, to date has not proven to be reliable. Two methods will be described that enhance class formation using the SPYN format for training and testing. In addition to its’ utility for studying the neural correlates of equivalence relations, it also extends demonstrations of equivalence class formation in different training and testing formats. A second study will describe a testing strategy that can be used to isolate the neural correlates of emergent relations in equivalence classes, nodal function, and the effects of nodal distance. In addition, the data obtained from this procedure also shows that equivalence relations are resistant to disruption by the intermixing of other conditional relations that are unrelated to each other. The last presentation is an fMRI study that describe refinements in the identification of the neural substrates of the baseline and emergent relations in equivalence classes.
 
Behavioral Designs for Identifying the Neural Correlates of Equivalence Relations.
LANNY FIELDS (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: The presentation will consider the advantages and disadvantages of using trials presented in a MTS format for the measurement of the neural correlates of equivalence class formation, an alternative to the MTS format studying the neural correlates of equivalence, and a testing strategy that can isolate the neural correlates of nodal function and nodal distance. One alternative to MTS trials that will be considered is the trace stimulus pairing yes no (SPYN) procedure in which one stimulus is presented at any time during training and testing. Thus, patterns of neural activation can be correlated with individual stimuli used during training and testing. These will be described in the presentation. When measuring the neural correlates of equivalence class formation, it is necessary to subtract the pattern of activation by an equivalence probe from a comparator task that matches the equivalence probe in all regards but the operation that characterizes equivalence. One strategy is to use pseudo-equivalence probes. Their construction and potential utility will be described in the presentation. The behavioral effects of testing with pseudo-equivalence probes has not yet been investigated. Procedures that produce reliable equivalence class formation with the stimulus pairing yes-no procedure have yet to be developed. The effects of these probes on the stability of equivalence classes on the behavioral level has not been explored. These matters require resolution at the level of behavior before the procedures can be used to investigate the neural correlates of equivalence class formation, nodal function and the effects of nodal distance.
 
Preliminary Training that Enhances Equivalence Class Formation with a Trace Stimulus Pairing Yes-No Procedure.
MICHAEL E. MARROQUIN (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: Equivalence classes are typically established using trials presented in a matching to sample format that contains a sample from one classes, one comparison from the same class and other comparisons from other classes. Equivalence classes, can also be established where training and testing are conducted in a stimulus pairing yes-no format. Subjects are presented with only one stimulus at a time during training and testing. In addition, reinforcement is presented for responding “YES” when the two stimuli on a trial are from the same potential class and “NO” when the stimuli are from different classes. Without preliminary training, 50% of subjects form 2-node 4-member equivalence classes. In most cases, the failure of class formation involve failures of transitivity. Thus, the induction of a generalized transitivity repertoire prior to equivalence class formation should enhance the percentage of subjects who form equivalence classes. We studied the effects of two transitiivty induction procedures on the subsequent formation of equivalence classes. All procedures were conducted in the trace SPYN format. In Multiple Exemplar Training (MET), many sets of nonsense syllables were used as A, B and C stimuli. For each set, AB and BC relations were trained, after which transitivity was assessed with AC probes. If passed, the cycle was repeated with a new set of stimuli. If failed, the AC relation was directly trained and then the cycle was repeated with a new set of stimuli. The cycle was repeated until transitivity tests were passed with three consecutive new stimulus sets. 6 of 34 subjects showed the emergence of the transitivity repertoire and all then formed new equivalence classes. The remaining 28 subjects did not complete transitivity induction in the allocated time: 2 hours. While effective, then, the MET approach was quite inefficient.In Programmed Trial Unique Training (PTUT), AB and BC were trained after which AC was also trained. AC probe trials were never presented. This cycle was repeated with new sets of stimuli that changed gradually from an initial set that consisted of semantically related terms to a final set that consisted on nonsense syllables. The content of each stimulus set changed gradually in 6 steps from semantically related stimuli to nonsense syllables. All 14 subjects completed this preliminary procedure in short time. All relations were acquired in a minimal number of trials, and subjects typically responded accurately on the initial AC
 
Effect of Pseudo-transitivity and Pseudo-equivalence Probes on the Stability of Equivalence Classes.
DANIELLE TITTELBACH (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: When exploring the neural correlates of equivalence class formation, the neural correlates of transitivity can be studied by measuring BOLD fMRI activations in the presence of transitivity probes and pseudo transitivity probes. After training AB and BC, AC is a true-transitivity probe. After training EF and GH, EH and GF are pseudo-transitivity probes. The match true transitivity probes because each contains a sample stimulus that was also a sample in training and a comparison that was also a comparison in training. They differ with regard to the in the presence and absence of a nodal stimulus that links the A and C stimuli in the true transitivity probe and the absence of such a nodal linkage between the stimuli in the pseudo transitivity probes. Thus, the neural correlates of transitivity ought to be adduced by the subtraction of the activation produced by WZ and YX from that produced by AC. To date, the behavioral effect of presentation of pseudo transitivity probes on the stability of true transitivity probes has not been explored. That will be described in this presentation. After training AB, and BC, AC emerged. That was followed by training EF and GH. Thereafter, pseudo transitivity probes are EH and GF were presented. Finally, EH and GF were presented along with AC. The transitivity indicative performances occasioned by AC trials remained stable when AC trials were intermixed with the EH and GF probes. These results showed that pseudo-transitivity probes do not disrupt transitive performances. A subsequent experiment explored the effects of intermixing pseudo-symmety, pseudo-transitivity, and pseudo-equivalence probes with test performances occasioned by the symmetry, transitivity, and equivalence probes used to document the presence of equivalence classes. Given the behavioral stability of performances occasioned by these probes, the used of pseudo probes can be used to measure the neural correlates of the emergent relations in equivalence classes. The behavioral data also show that equivalence classes resistant to disruption by the intermixing of conditional discriminations that are unrelated to each other.
 
Where Does Stimulus Equivalence Occur in the Brain? Some Methodological Determinants of ‘Where’.
MICHAEL W. SCHLUND (Kennedy Krieger Institute, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, and University of Pittsburgh), Michael F. Cataldo (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Matching-to-sample tasks (MTS) are commonly used to teach individuals with and without neurological dysfunction important skills. However, we have a limited understanding of the brain regions recruited during MTS tasks, especially when MTS involves stimulus equivalence (SE). Human neuroimaging and nonhuman neurophysiological studies on learning and memory suggest discriminating SE relations may recruit inferior frontal-subcortical and inferior parietal lobe regions. To investigate this issue, twelve adult subjects completed matching to sample (MTS) training designed to establish two three-member stimulus classes: A1®B1, B1®C1 and A2®B2, B2®C2. Next, conventional SE testing was performed while brain activation was measured using functional MRI. We will present results that show distinct activation patterns for each derived relation. However, we will emphasize that while such results highlight a potential role for frontal-subcortical and parietal regions in SE responding, activation attributable to MTS task variables (e.g., feedback, visuospatial features, saccadic eye movements, delayed stimulus control) cannot be disregarded. This point is illustrated by brain activation data showing how frontal and parietal activation is modulated by use of multiple comparison stimuli and the type of comparison condition used in imaging analyses.
 
 
Symposium #173
Behavior Analysis in Education: Improving Test Performance and Graphic Data Analysis in the Classroom
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Techwood
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer L. Austin (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: This symposium will present contemporary behavior-analytic research on two topics in education: improving university student test performance and improving the visual inspection performance of university students and schoolteachers. In the first study, Jennifer Simon will present data demonstrating that a rehearsal intervention can be effective in improving university students’ ability to correctly answer written test questions. In the second study, Kelise Stewart will present data demonstrating using the conservative dual-criterion visual inspection aid improves the ability of undergraduate students to visually detect behavior change. In the third study, David Richman will present data demonstrating that a treatment package consisting of lectures and written materials can increase the agreement between undergraduate student and expert ratings of behavior change. In the final study, Jennifer Austin will present data demonstrating that visual-inspection training incorporating graphic displays improves the ability of teachers to visually detect behavior change.
 
The Effects of a Written Rehearsal Procedure on Undergraduate Test Performance.
JENNIFER SIMON (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The effects of a written rehearsal procedure on test performance among 37 college students enrolled in an undergraduate, lecture-based course were investigated. The rehearsal procedure involved the students writing questions and answers related to lecture material until correct independent performance was achieved. This procedure resulted in improved scores on experimental questions in comparison to control questions when students rehearsed immediately following each lecture (daily task) and when rehearsal was programmed only just prior to each test (unit task). Students continued to implement the procedure when a point contingency for completion was eliminated. Interobserver agreement (IOA) was collected on 40% of the tests for all units. IOA for the unit tests was 97.7% (range, 96% to 99%). IOA was collected on 40% of all daily and unit tasks for completion and accuracy. IOA for the completion and procedural integrity of all daily and unit tasks was 100%.
 
Teaching College Students to use the Conservative Dual Criterion Method of Visual Inspection.
KELISE STEWART (Western Michigan University), James E. Carr (Western Michigan University), Charlie Brandt (Western Michigan University), Meade M. McHenry (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: We evaluated two interventions for improving the ability of undergraduate students to visually detect behavior change from A-B design graphs. Six students were first exposed to videotaped lecture that focused on evaluating between-changes in data paths by evaluating their trend, level, and variability. The lecture was ineffective in improving visual inspection performance above baseline/chance levels. Students were then exposed to a lecture on how to use the conservative dual-criterion (CDC) method, which involves superimposing the mean and regression lines from a data path onto the subsequent data path to assist with change detection. Results indicate that the CDC method improved the visual inspection of all students to near-100% accuracy. Interestingly, performance declined when the CDC lines were removed from graphs, suggesting a potential barrier to the maintenance of visual inspection performance under this method.
 
Teaching Visual Inspection of Reversal Designs to Undergraduate Students.
DAVID M. RICHMAN (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Sung Woo Kahng (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine & Kennedy Krieger Institute), Steven J. Pitts (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract: Level of agreement for interpreting 36 ABAB reversal design graphs was assessed between 45 Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis (JABA) editorial board members and 14 undergraduate students taking an upper-level psychology course on functional analysis and treatment of behavior disorders. The undergraduate students rated 36 graphs “yes” or “no” with regards to whether the graphs showed patterns of data demonstrating experimental control over the dependent variable (i.e., pre-instruction and post-instruction). The students then received two 75 minute lectures on interpreting ABAB reversal designs, and they were assigned readings on topics of measurement, design, and graphing direct observation data. The primary dependent variable was level of agreement between the two groups pre- and post-instruction. Results of the pre-instruction ratings showed that the 14 undergraduate students agreed with JABA board of editors at .345 Kappa (68% agreement), and agreement increased to .570 Kappa (80% agreement) after instruction. One interesting finding was that the majority of undergraduate students agreed with JABA board of editors pre-test and post-test when the JABA board of editors rated the graphs as indicative of experimental control. The gain in agreement was a substantial reduction in false positive ratings from the undergraduate students (from 40% to 24% error).
 
Using Graphic Displays to Improve Teachers’ Detection of Changes in Student Behavior.
JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (California State University, Fresno), Allana D. Luquette (Families First of Florida)
Abstract: Although the influence of graphic feedback on teacher and student behavior has been demonstrated repeatedly in the behavior analytic literature, little has been done to evaluate the influence of graphic feedback on teachers’ abilities to accurately identify behavior change. Accurate detection of change may prove crucial to a teacher’s willingness to maintain implementation of behavior programs, especially if changes in behavior are gradual. Typically, teachers rely strictly on their perceptions of behavior change, rather than actual changes, when evaluating the effects of an intervention. Access to graphed data on student behavior may improve their abilities to recognize actual treatment effects. This study assessed the effects of graphic displays and training in visual inspection of graphed data on the abilities of teachers to accurately identify changes in student behavior. In addition, we evaluated the effects of the independent variables on participant decisions to continue behavioral interventions. Results showed that for all three teachers who participated in the study, accuracy in detection of behavior changes improved when graphic displays were provided. Additional improvements were not observed with the introduction of training, possibly due to a ceiling effect. Treatment effects on teachers’ decisions to maintain interventions were variable across conditions.
 
 
Symposium #174
CE Offered: BACB
Clinical Application of A Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure for Increasing Verbal Behavior of Young Children with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Regency V
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Robert LaRue (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Discussant: Mary Jane Weiss (Rutgers University)
CE Instructor: Lara Delmolino, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Verbal behavior deficits are central to the communication impairments of individuals with autism. Development of a vocal verbal behavior repertoire can be challenging when a learner demonstrates a lack of spoken language. Previous research and clinical demonstrations have suggested the efficacy of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure to develop or expand the vocal repertoire of learners with absent or limited functional vocal behavior. This session reports the impact of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure for two young children with autism. In the first paper, procedural variations and comparison to previously documented strategies are highlighted. In the second paper, one learners development of a vocal echoic and mand repertoire are presented, along with a discussion of other generalized effects. The third paper reports the collateral effects of the procedure demonstrated in two learners who showed a significant decrease in stereotyped vocalizations. Clinical implications and future directions will be discussed.

 

Methodological Variations in the Clinical Application of a Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure to Increase Functional Speech in Children with Autism.

LARA M. DELMOLINO (Rutgers University), Joelle Lugo (Rutgers University), Jacqueline J. Wright (Rutgers University)
Abstract:

The literature regarding the efficacy of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure to increase the vocal verbal behavior of young children with autism has been promising but mixed. The current paper presents a model of implementation for use of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure to increase the verbal mand and echoic repertoires of two young learners with autism. Specifically, the current paper describes the impact of the stimulus pairing procedure within individual pairing sessions, and over the course of time, an aspect which has not been extensively explored in the literature. In addition, the current paper describes how the use of the pairing procedure was systematically transferred to a contingent reinforcement procedure over the course of its implementation, and presents data regarding the subsequent impact of this shift. Further, the current clinical application utilized a variety of stimuli in the pairing component of the procedure, rather than one specific stimulus paired with each target speech sound. The clinical utility of these procedural variations will be discussed.

 

Development of a Vocal Mand and Echoic Repertoire with a Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure: Acquisition and Generalized Effects.

JOELLE LUGO (Rutgers University), Lara M. Delmolino (Rutgers University), Karitssa Fernandez (Rutgers University), Stacy Leibross (Rutgers University)
Abstract:

The effects of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on the production of appropriate speech sounds in a six-year-old boy with autism are presented. The student presented with a limited repertoire of speech sounds and used a picture system to communicate. Sounds were identified that the student did not emit when asked and had never been heard to emit. Using a multiple baseline design across sounds, a pairing procedure was implemented in which the instructor repeatedly produced the target sound while delivering preferred items non-contingently. The student's production of the target sound was recorded before, during, and after pairing sessions. The pairing procedure produced a measurable increase in the students production of the sound during and immediately after pairing sessions. This improvement was augmented by adding contingent reinforcement for production of the target sound in the second phase of the procedure. Probe data indicated that during the course of the procedure, the student acquired the ability to produce the sound on request and began to utilize the sound communicatively in other settings. These data support the potential contribution of the stimulus pairing procedure for increasing the vocal repertoires of individuals with autism where other procedures have been ineffective

 

Collateral Changes in Stereotypic Vocal Behavior during a Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure: Effects in two Learners with Autism.

LARA M. DELMOLINO (Rutgers University), Joelle Lugo (Rutgers University), Karitssa Fernandez (Rutgers University), Stacey Leibross (Rutgers University)
Abstract:

While research and clinical case studies have demonstrated the impact of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on the development of vocal verbal behavior for learners with extremely limited or absent vocal speech, there is very little literature regarding the impact of such strategies on the rates of non-functional stereotyped vocal behavior. For two learners with autism exposed to a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure, targeted increases in functional vocalizations were accompanied by significant decreases in non-functional vocalizations and other stereotypic behavior. These changes occurred predictably during the periods immediately following the stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure, and the degree of reduction increased over time and exposure to the pairing procedure. Changes in stereotyped behavior were documented although these behaviors were not targeted specifically. Clinical and theoretical implications of these findings will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #175
Conceptual and Empirical Investigations on the Nature of Autism Spectrum Disorders
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Regency VII
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Jonathan J. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders)
Discussant: William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Autism remains a controversial disorder and continues to rise in prevalence, reaching near-epidemic proportions. While much is known about the details of the effective treatment of autism via applied behavior analysis, little is yet known about what makes autism distinct at the functional level. This symposium presents three papers which address varying areas relevant to autism, including basic processes such as habituation, “theory of mind” performances, and behaviors labeled as “executive function” by the larger psychological community. Each paper addresses potential similarities between autistic and non-autistic individuals, among other things, from the standpoint of behavior-environment interactions. The final segment of the symposium will consist of a critique of the papers by the discussant.
 
“Theory of Mind” in Autism: A Review and Critique from a Radical Behavioral Perspective.
JONATHAN J. TARBOX (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Doreen Granpeesheh (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Ryan Bergstrom (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract: “Theory of mind” refers to the ability to infer the mental states of others. That is, to know when someone else is sad, happy, annoyed, thinking, planning, intending, seeing, hearing, etc. This ability is said to be a critical prerequisite to human social interaction. Although this statement has not been empirically evaluated, it seems clear from casual observation that appropriate social behavior involves responding differentially depending on the “mental” states of others (e.g., one does not interact with another in the same manner when the other is happy versus sad). A significant amount of research has demonstrated that individuals with autism show a marked delay in the development of behavioral repertoires labeled “theory of mind” and the topic appears to be enjoying increasing popularity as a result. In a natural science of psychology, the term “mental states” cannot refer to events taking place in the “mind,” but rather must refer to events taking place in the physical world. According to Skinner (1957; 1974), “mental” events are to be dealt with just as overt psychological events and are called “private events.” Little behavior analytic research has been done on private events in general and even less on one person’s behavior with respect to the private events of others, as is involved in “theory of mind.” This conceptual paper will review and critique Baron-Cohen’s evolutionary developmental “theory of mind” causal mechanisms, review and critique behavioral accounts, and propose a program of empirical research on establishing “theory of mind” skills in children with autism.
 
Beyond Words: Reductionism and Executive Function in the Study of the Behavioral Features of Autism.
GREGORY A. LIEVING (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lisa M. Toole (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Heather Jennett (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Eric Boelter (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: The performance deficits displayed by individuals diagnosed with autism are characterized as symptoms of poor executive function in the fields of neuropsychology and cognitive developmental psychology. The concept of executive function, as it is used most often, is an explanatory mechanism that attempts to ascribe behavioral control to overriding highest-order processes and forebrain regions correlated with these assumed processes. In an attempt to recast the characterization of these performance deficits without reference to nebulous cognitive or physiological constructs, we have hypothesized that these performance deficits may be examined and explained more parsimoniously and precisely as quantitative differences in behavioral sensitivity to contingencies at the level of behavior-environment relations. Specifically, we are in the process of collecting data from several experiments that are designed to test hypotheses that individuals diagnosed with autism differ from control subjects in the areas of response persistence, behavioral variability, and behavioral sensitivity to current contingencies using operant conditioning tasks that do not rely on verbal control. This general approach to understanding the performance deficits displayed by individuals diagnosed with autism may lead to more refined and targeted remediation strategies, relative to a cognitive approach that does not lend itself well to the development of effective technology.
 
Responding to Repeating Auditory Stimuli: A Comparative Analysis of Children with Autism and their Typically Developing Siblings.
JANICE K. DONEY (University of Nevada, Reno), Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Nonassociative processes are viewed as necessary for the progression to associative processes. An absence or deficit in a nonassociative process can presumably retard the development of associative processes of the respondent and operant type. The relevance of nonassociative processes to the development of associative processes and the potential for impairments in nonassociative processes to lead to deficits in operant behavior bears directly on the problem that young children with autism have in the developing meaningful social and verbal behavior. Habituation, a nonassociative process, is defined by a response decrement that occurs following repeated presentation of a specific stimulus. Children with autism are often described as overly reactive and distracted by inconsequential stimuli in the physical environment, and therefore, habituation was selected as the starting point for an analysis of differences at the nonassociative level between typically developing children and children with autism. Children with autism and their typically developing siblings were exposed to varying intensities of auditory stimuli. The frequency of the OR and rate of an operant response in the presence and absence of the auditory stimulus were examined within-subject and within-triad in order to assess differences in children’s responding to the repeating stimulus.
 
 
Paper Session #176
EAB I
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Hong Kong
Area: EAB
Chair: Andrew T. Fox (Central Michigan University)
 
The Role of Remote Stimuli in the Control of Behavior
Domain: Basic Research
IVER H. IVERSEN (University of North Florida)
 
Abstract: Experiments with rats will illustrate how remote stimuli come to control behavior. Stimuli can be remote in the past as discriminative stimuli that appeared briefly a while back. Stimuli can also be remote into the future as delayed reinforcement. Using rats as subjects, several experiments explored and established the development of delayed stimulus control where the discriminative stimulus is presented briefly (for a few seconds) long before (up to 2 minutes) the response is to be made. Additional experiments established that such delayed stimulus control can be maintained when the reinforcer is remote into the future, (i.e., when it is delayed up to several minutes). The final stimulus-control performance is remarkable because the antecedent stimulus occurred far in the past and the consequence is located far into the future. Several instances of uncontrolled responding for long stretches of time occurred during early training. The experiments will be discussed in an applied context as a model for generating training conditions that can be use to establish desired control by remote stimuli; also, the discussion will illustrate some inadvertent training histories that may result in development of “inappropriate” behavior under control by remote stimuli.
 
Response Rate Viewed as Engagement Bouts: Effects of Differential Reinforcement of Response Duration
Domain: Basic Research
JAMES KOPP (University of Texas, Arlington), Christopher Andrews (University of Texas, Arlington)
 
Abstract: In a recent series of experiments, Shull, et al. analyzed inter-response time distributions from experiments in which food was used to reinforce leverpressing in rats. It was found that, for a variety of schedule conditions, the cumulative distributions of inter-response times tended to be discontinuous; there were uniformly high frequencies over a narrow range of shorter inter-response times which gave way suddenly to very low IRT frequencies over a broad swath of longer inter-response times. The present analysis looked at inter-response time distributions under two conditions: 1) differential reinforcement for lever press responses of short duration (400 ms and 500 ms) responses and 2) no lever press response duration requirement. The reinforcement schedule that prevailed during the differential reinforcement condition (VR2) was yoked to responding in the non-differential condition. The results were that the inter-response time distributions were more monotonically distributed for animals in which reinforcement was dependent upon response duration. They tended to be of the more common discontinuous form for the animals that were reinforced irregardless of the duration of their responses.
 
Response Acquisition with Delayed Reinforcement: The Effects of Delay Stimuli and Housing Conditions
Domain: Basic Research
ANDREW T. FOX (Central Michigan University), Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University)
 
Abstract: Research by Williams (1999) showed that houselight presentations occurring at the beginning of 30 s non-resetting delays to reinforcement facilitated acquisition of lever-press responding in naïve rats while houselight presentations occurring at the end of such intervals “blocked” response acquisition. The present research attempts to replicate Williams (1999) and to examine the effects of impoverished (hanging wire cage) versus enriched (social/polycarbonate tub with bedding) housing conditions on response acquisition with delayed reinforcement. Results indicate that 1) Williams’ blocking effect was not replicated and 2) Williams’ marking effect may be due to primary reinforcement provided by stimulus changes and not by “marking” per se. Slight procedural differences may account for the failure to replicate the blocking effect. The implications of finding differences between rats housed in different environments are discussed.
 
 
 
Symposium #177
CE Offered: BACB
Establishing Safety Skills in Children: Recent Empirical Investigations
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Baker
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Adel C. Najdowski (Center for Autism and Related Disorders)
Discussant: Patrick C. Friman (Father Flanagan's Girls and Boys' Town)
CE Instructor: Adel C. Najdowski, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Recent research has focused on a variety of methods to increase safety skills. However, given the on-going national growth in accidental injuries and deaths, there is a continued need for empirical investigations on the establishment of these vital skills. Three papers will be presented on teaching children safety skills. First, research will be presented on enhancing the effectiveness of behavioral skills training for teaching safety skills to prevent gun play across 45 6-7 year olds. Second, the results of implementing a group contingency to decrease dangerous playground behaviors among typically developing children will be presented. Finally, research on training safety skills to children diagnosed with autism will be presented in addition to the results of training caregivers of children from this population to decrease potential home safety hazards.

 
Enhancing the Effectiveness of Behavioral Skills Training for Teaching Safety Skills to Prevent Gun Play.
AMY C. MACKNER (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Candice Jostad (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Recently, researchers have shown that in situ training enhances the effectiveness of behavioral skills training (BST) for teaching safety skills to children. The purpose of this study was to compare BST and an enhanced BST procedure that incorporated simulated in situ training for teaching skills to prevent gun play. We randomly assigned 45 6- and 7-year olds to 3 groups (BST, enhanced BST, and control), assessed safety skills with in situ assessments, and evaluated the procedures in a posttest only, control group design. For participants who did not use the safety skills at posttest, an in situ training session was conducted. The results showed that both training groups were superior to control at posttest and that enhanced BST was superior to BST at posttest. In situ training resulted in an increase in safety skills for both training groups and for the control group. Finally, the safety skills generalized to a dyad assessment in which the participants were assessed when a peer (confederate) challenged them to play with the gun.
 
Decreasing Dangerous Playground Behaviors Utilizing a Group Contingency.
MICHELE D. WALLACE (University of Nevada), James Summers (University of Nevada)
Abstract: Playground injuries are currently the leading cause of death and injury in young children. Little research utilizing behavior analytic techniques to decrease risky playground behavior has been conducted. We evaluated a group reinforcement contingency to decrease risky playground behavior. Results demonstrated that dangerous playground behavior was reduced by over 80%. In an effort to add to the literature as well as give parents, teachers, and school administrators a tool to decrease risky behavior with low response effort, we provide a simple technique, the result of which is drastically reduced risky playground behavior. We utilized a group reinforcement contingency wherein the children could gain access to preferred stimuli contingent on a reduction in dangerous behavior relative to baseline measures.
 
Teaching Children with Autism Safety Skills.
JAMES SUMMERS (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Jonathan J. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Arthur E. Wilke (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), JiYeon H. Yoo (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.)
Abstract: Five percent of home accident fatalities involve children between birth and 4 years of age (National Safety Council, 2000). Explicit training of safety skills in children diagnosed with autism is of utmost importance due to the pervasive behavioral deficits commonly exhibited by these children. In an effort to add to the current research in household safety in young children with autism we sought to discover a practical method to teach these vital skills. A multiple-baseline design across participants was implemented to evaluate the effects of using rules, prompts and social praise to teach participants to respond appropriately to a doorbell as well as to the presence of dangerous household chemicals. Further, an assessment system that quantifies potential home safety hazards was implemented across several homes of children diagnosed with autism. Results of these analyses will be presented in addition to a review of the current behavioral literature on safety skills training.
 
 
Symposium #178
CE Offered: BACB
Improving Instructional Practices for Children and Adults with Disabilities
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Centennial Ballroom III
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Alan E. Harchik (The May Institute)
CE Instructor: Alan E. Harchik, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Many behavior analysts devote a considerable amount of time to teaching new skills to children and adults with developmental disabilities. The ongoing improvement of instructional procedures is likely to make teaching sessions more effective. In this symposium, papers are presented that address different aspects of instructional programming. In the first paper, the researchers compare the effectiveness of two different prompting procedures. In the second paper, the authors present a training process for special education undergraduate students to learn a range of instructional procedures that are often effective. The authors of the third paper utilized the ABLLS to guide curriculum for an adult with severe disabilities. The researchers then taught three of the identified skills and examined the results within an experimental design. Finally, in the fourth paper, the author describes a comprehensive approach to teach new skills while addressing a serious problem behavior.

 
Comparing Different Prompting Procedures on Teaching New Skills to Children with Autism.
JULIE A. ACKERLUND (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Sarah Tillman (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Britta L. Fiksdal (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Nicole Zeug (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Kevin P. Klatt (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire)
Abstract: Various procedures have been used to teach new communication, social, and play skills to children with autism. One of the most common procedures used in both analog and natural settings is the use of a prompt delay procedure. This procedure requires the teacher to give the child an instruction, followed by a prompt to help the child respond correctly, and then the prompt is faded across trials until the child responds independently. More recently, a simultaneous prompt procedure also has been used to teach new skills to children and adults with developmental disabilities. This procedure requires the teacher to provide an immediate prompt on all teaching trials. This procedure presumably prevents the child from making errors because the prompt is immediate. Although both procedures have been used successfully to teach new skills to persons with developmental disabilities, little research has been conducted comparing the two procedures or evaluating the effectiveness of either with young children with autism. The purpose of the first phase of this study was to investigate the effectiveness of two types of constant prompt delay and the simultaneous prompt procedure in teaching new skills to young children diagnosed with autism. This phase showed the constant prompt delay procedures to be more effective than the simultaneous prompting procedure. The second phase of this study is to investigate the effectiveness of the two types of constant prompt delay procedures.
 
Introducing Teachers to the Continuum of Instructional Formats in ABA.
SHANE D. ISLEY (University of North Texas), Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas), Kathleen S. Laino (University of North Texas), Jessica Leslie Broome (University of North Texas)
Abstract: A continuum of empirically based instructional formats is used in behavioral autism interventions. In order for practitioners to provide quality, individualized treatment for individuals with autism an understanding of the variety of formats is useful. This presentation describes a pilot introductory course designed to teach special education students about the common components of quality instruction and about three of the instructional formats found within ABA interventions. Formats include discrete trial, naturalistic, and precision teaching. At the beginning of the course, each student completed a three task assessment that included: (1) describing the instructional components, empirical basis, and applications of each instructional format; (2) identifying examples of each format; and (3) performing teaching role plays in each format. Based on their performance during assessment, recommendations were made to each student regarding which instructional format to focus on for the duration of the course. Following assessment, group teaching and individual tutoring were provided. At the end of the semester students completed an exit assessment, which was identical to the initial assessment except that only the designated format required the performance role-play. Pre and post data will be presented along with a discussion of the considerations involved in course design and implementation.
 
Using the ABLLS to Guide Instruction for an Adult with Disabilities.
ALAN E. HARCHIK (The May Institute), Jessica Day (University of Massachusetts), Rachel Fox (The May Institute)
Abstract: Typically, when an individual with developmental disabilities ages out of the public school system and enters the adult-service system, the intensity of instruction decreases. For example, the number of skill-training objectives might drop from 40 per year to 10 per year. The frequency of instruction is also greatly reduced. In addition, many older adults never received any type of quality educational services. Consequently, adults continue to have numerous skill deficits. The purpose of this study was to use a popular assessment tool, the Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS, Partington & Sundberg) that was developed for children with language delays and is often used for children with autism and other developmental disabilities. We utilized the ABLLS to help provide guidance in choosing appropriate skills for an adult with developmental disabilities. After choosing three skills based upon the assessment, instructional procedures were implemented and the effects were assessed via a multiple baseline design. Results showed that typical instructional procedures (shaping, prompting, fading, reinforcement, practice) resulted in skill acquisition. Reliability was assessed in all conditions. The findings provide an example of a way to increase the skill training opportunities available to adults with developmental disabilities.
 
Reducing a Child’s Physical and Environmental Aggression at School and Home.
SHANNON KAY (The May Institute)
Abstract: Physical aggression to other people and to the environment is dangerous and can lead to placement in a more restrictive setting. In this study, these behaviors were exhibited by a five-year-old boy with autism in all settings: school, play, home, and with other children as well as adults. A comprehensive intervention, consisting of positive reinforcement, interruption and redirection, and restitution were implemented in a multiple baseline fashion across settings and across the two types of aggression. Procedures were implemented by paraprofessionals at school and by the boy’s parents at home. Measures of treatment fidelity were taken. Results showed that when the comprehensive intervention was implemented, aggressive behaviors decreased.
 
 
Panel #179
CE Offered: BACB
Including Young Children with Autism in Less Restrictive Settings: Are Readiness Criteria Relevant?
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Chicago A-F
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: David A. Celiberti, Ph.D.
Chair: David A. Celiberti (Coyne & Associates, Inc.)
LEN LEVIN (Coyne & Associates, Inc.)
MARY ELLEN MCDONALD (Eden II Programs/The Genesis School)
AUDREY MEISSNER (New Haven Learning Centre)
MICHAEL J. MORRIER (Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract:

The goal of intensive, ABA-based, early intervention services for young children with autism is admission to typical kindergarten or first grade. Often, the initial intervention consists of highly structured, 1:1 teaching interactions, either in a home-based or a segregated, center-based program. At some point during this intervention process, decisions are made by relevant individuals (e.g., senior clinical staff, parents, other service providers) regarding the learners readiness to make the transition to a small group preschool or inclusion environment. Many professionals refer to readiness criteria (e.g., Johnson, Mayer, & Taylor, 1996) to help guide that decision-making process. Other researchers and clinicians de-emphasize prerequisite criteria for inclusion and, instead, integrate young children with autism with typical peers right from the outset of intensive intervention. Empirical data to guide the decision-making process, to include or not to include, has been limited. The purpose of the panel is to present the range of views and practices regarding readiness criteria and inclusion of young children with autism, and will attempt to answer the ultimate question: Under what conditions should a young child with autism participate in a more typical pre-school setting?

 
 
Symposium #180
Operants and “Instincts”: Mutually Exclusive or a Winning Combination?
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Montreal
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: William D. Timberlake (Indiana University)
Discussant: Paul Thomas Andronis (Northern Michigan University)
Abstract: Interactions between operant learning and classical conditioning are well-established. Operant and species-typical interactions are also well-established, and the known level of involvement continues to increase. How many behavior categories are there, anyway? To help address this question, this symposium will present recent empirical results on two aspects of operant/species-typical relations: operant involvement in species-typical “instincts” such as imprinting, and species-typical effects that occur on schedules of food delivery.
 
Superstition Re-revisited: An Examination of Niche-Related Mechanisms Underlying Schedule Produced Behavior in Pigeons.
EDUARDO J. FERNANDEZ (Indiana University), William D. Timberlake (Indiana University)
Abstract: In 1948, Skinner described as superstitious the responses of pigeons produced by fixed-time (FT) schedules, under which food is delivered at fixed times, independent of behavior. Skinner argued that responses accidentally occurring immediately prior to the delivery of food were reinforced, and therefore more likely to occur (and be rewarded) in the future. In support of his interpretation, Skinner described a number of presumably idiosyncratic response patterns that emerged in individual pigeons. Subsequently, both Staddon and Simmelhag (1971) and Timberlake and Lucas (1985) examined this phenomenon, and concluded that the behaviors were not idiosyncratic, but were closely related to the action of food in eliciting species-typical behavior. The following studies were conducted to further contrast superstitious versus functional interpretations of behavior under FT schedules. All six experiments reported support the Timberlake and Lucas (1985) hypothesis that the behavior of pigeons under FT schedules in the laboratory reflect species-related foraging behavior, rather than idiosyncratic responses produced by chance contingencies (Skinner, 1948), and the terminal response hypothesis of Staddon and Simmelhag (1971). How these data help better understand the underlying niche-related mechanisms involved in laboratory learning will be discussed, as well as future directions.
 
“Imprinting” and Operants in Quail 1: Imprinting Calls as Reinforcers.
SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (Florida International University), Robert Lickliter (Florida International University)
Abstract: Maternal “imprinting” calls can often act as operant reinforcers, and we were able to demonstrate that the northern bobwhite call was no exception. Based on research suggesting pitch as a critical element, we assessed the reinforcing value of two artificially generated sounds: the first containing several frequencies in the same high-pitched range as the maternal call, and the second a low-pitched pure tone. The higher-pitched sound was nearly as effective a primary reinforcer for hatchlings as the maternal call; the low-pitched tone was ineffective. These results suggest that acoustic frequency is a critical component of the preference for the maternal call in this precocial species, and add to the evidence for operant and species-typical behavior interactions.
 
“Imprinting” and Operants in Quail 2: The Power of Perinatal Contingency.
CHRISTOPHER W. HARSHAW (Florida International University), Robert Lickliter (Florida International University)
Abstract: 240 minutes of noncontingent stimulation with a species-typical maternal call is required for northern bobwhite neonates to prefer that call over an unfamiliar call 24 hours following exposure. We found greatly enhanced auditory learning in bobwhite chicks following just 5 minutes of contingent exposure to one of two individual variants (A or B) of a bobwhite maternal call 24 hours after hatching. Chicks that heard a maternal call contingent upon their own distress vocalizations showed significantly greater preferences for the familiar call when tested 24 hours later than chicks given noncontingent presentation of the same call. Chicks given noncontingent presentation to conspecific distress vocalizations as well as Call A, played as if contingent upon those vocalizations, also showed significantly greater preferences for the familiar call than chicks given noncontingent exposure. Previous findings of little or no differences in contingent vs. noncontingent learning in precocial chicks may have thus been a result of stimulus enhancement in chicks given yoked, noncontingent exposure in these studies. In nature, young organisms are exposed to contingent, vicarious, and completely noncontingent sources of stimulation. Studies utilizing only noncontingent exposure to stimulation thus likely do not represent the course and/or range of most learning during early development.
 
 
Symposium #181
Operants, Classes, Individuals, and Levels of Analysis
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Dunwoody
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Jose E. Burgos (Universidad de Guadalajara, Centro de Estudios e Investigaciones en Comportamiento)
Discussant: M. Jackson Marr (Georgia Tech)
Abstract: This symposium covers a number of conceptual reflections on the nature of operants (classes versus individuals) and its relationship with the issue of levels of analysis (molar versus molecular).
 
Ontology in Behavior Analysis: A Tangled Tale.
SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas)
Abstract: With some notable exceptions, behavior analysis has been slow to critically examine its own concepts and principles. In particular, behavior analytic ontology is a topic that has received little attention. The thesis of this paper is that the concept of “the operant”, as it has been historically defined and is currently used, raises numerous ontological questions. In this paper, the operant concept will be considered in the context of philosophical distinctions between individuals, taxa, classes, and categories – distinctions that have sometimes aided other sciences in clarifying their most fundamental concepts. The importance of these distinctions will be discussed as they pertain to the use and communication of scientific principles in general, and behavior analytic principles in particular. Possible ramifications of various ontological views of the nature of operant behavior will be suggested.
 
The Role of Selection in the Creation of Operant Classes.
PHILIP N. HINELINE (Temple University), A. Charles Catania (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract: Operant classes are defined by their functions, not by their forms. They are selected by operant contingencies (not merely by common consequences). Common contingencies create such classes, but a problem may arise when some classes have others nested within them. The contingencies that operate upon the overall class may not be consistent with those that operate on the classes that are contained within the overall class. When classes are nested, one question about the origins of classes is whether structural as well as functional relations can influence the lines of fracture along which classes and their subclasses can be differentiated. The articulating of behavioral principles to address this issue may entail a distinction between adduction and chaining.
 
Operants as Sets
JOSE E. BURGOS (Universidad de Guadalajara, Centro de Estudios e Investigaciones en Comportamiento)
Abstract: The view of operants as individuals is based on an interpretation of classes as universals. Universals are immutable, whereas operants change. Hence, operants cannot be universals. They must be particulars (i.e., individuals). However, classes need not be taken as universals. It is also customary to see them as sets. Can operants be sets? Yes, but not response sets, if operants are dynamical in nature. Central to this claim is the set-theoretic Axiom of Extensionality (AE), according to which the identity of a set is given by its elements, not their properties. Under AE, no response set can be dynamical, if “dynamical” means “change in the number of elements of the set through time”. Such a change results in multiple response sets, which precludes talk of one operant in reference to changes in response frequency. Operants can be either sets of response sets or relations, which are sets of ordered pairs. The details of these two alternative ontologies of operants remain to be elaborated, but four virtues are apparent. First, sets are purely extensional (as opposed to intensional) entities, so both interpretations avoid an essentialistic/universalistic view of operants. Second, both interpretations allow for talk of parts of operants. Third, both also allow for causal considerations as criteria for the identification of such parts. Finally, both capture the dynamical nature of operants, even if no set can be dynamic.
 
 
Symposium #182
Parkinson's and Pesticides: Impact on Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Piedmont
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Adam Derenne (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: Although much is known about Parkinson's Disease and compounds used as pesticides, little is known about the behavioral effects of either. The speakers in this symposium have launched research programs to do exactly that - to study how learning, motivation, and memory is influenced by the development of Parkinson's Disease or exposure to pesticides. Interestingly, these programs may ultimately merge, as Parkinson's Disease is potentially an outcome of pesticide exposure.
 
Parkinson's Disease I: Behavior of Weaver Mutant Mice under Progressive-ratio Schedules of Reinforcement.
DAVID P. AUSTIN (University of North Dakota), Adam Derenne (University of North Dakota), Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: The research compares homozygous weaver mutant (wv/wv) mice expressing point mutation (G156S) in G-protein-coupled inward rectifying potassium channel to control mice. The mutation produces progressive nigrostriatal neurodegeneration and results in symptoms that mimic Parkinson’s disease in humans. The research describes changes in learning and motivation that occur in these mice in conjunction with known changes on the physiological level. Learning was defined in terms of the rate of acquisition of an operant response (nose poke), and motivation was defined in terms of performances under a progressive-ratio schedule of reinforcement. Preliminary findings suggest decrements on both measures for the mutant mice.
 
Parkinson's Disease II: Longitudinal Changes in Learning and Memory in Weaver Mutant Mice.
ADAM DERENNE (University of North Dakota), Christine Wegner (University of North Dakota), Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: The research examines a strain of homozygous Weaver mutant mice that spontaneously shows progressive nigrostriatal neurodegeneration, beginning at approximately 14 days of age. Memory was measured using a variant of a radial arm maze procedure in which 0.20% saccharine solution reinforcement was available from four dippers, positioned at cardinal points in the chamber. On each trial, the first visit to a dipper produced the reinforcer, but return visits did not. A new trial began once all four locations were visited. Sessions ended after subjects completed 10 trials or 10 minutes elapsed without a response. Performance was assessed in terms of trial duration, trials completed, and the number of return visits (errors) on each trial. The results showed that the Weaver mutant mice, compared to controls, completed fewer trials, committed more errors, and required more time to complete each trial.
 
Pesticide I: The Effect of Exposure on the Acquisition of Operant and Respondent Behavior.
JASON W. DOUGLAS (University of North Dakota), Patrick A. Carr (University of North Dakota), Adam Derenne (University of North Dakota), Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: Very little is known about how pesticide exposure influences behavior. The present study monitored the acquisition of operant and respondent behavior of rats that were exposed to one of five different types of agricultural pesticides commonly used in the upper midwest region of the United States. Some of the treatment animals received an acute intra-peritoneal dose of the pesticide whereas others received chronic injections every two weeks. Results demonstrated that pesticide exposure sometimes, but not always, influenced rates of acquisition. Furthermore, that influence varied across procedures (i.e., operant vs. respondent). Implications for future research and human application are discussed.
 
Pesticide II: The Effect of Exposure on Timing and Reinforcer Efficacy.
JEFFREY N. WEATHERLY (University of North Dakota), Carol L. Wright (University of North Dakota), Patrick A. Carr (University of North Dakota), Adam Derenne (University of North Dakota)
Abstract: Rats were exposed to one of five different pesticides, either acutely or chronically. Afteracquisition training, they were responded in a multiple DRL 10-s FI 40-s schedule ofreinforcement for 5% liquid-sucrose reinforcers. They also responded in separate PR 5 sessionsfor food-pellet reinforcement. Results from the multiple schedule demonstrated that pesticideexposure altered rats’ responding in both components relative to controls, although pesticide-and/or administration-specific exceptions were observed. Significant differences in performancewere also observed on the PR schedule. The present results therefore suggest that pesticideexposure can alter timing behavior and change the efficacy of a reinforcer. Implications forhuman exposure are discussed.
 
 
Symposium #183
CE Offered: BACB
Preventing Child Maltreatment with Large-Scale Behavioral Programs
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Lenox
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer L. Crockett (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Discussant: John R. Lutzker (Marcus Autism Center)
CE Instructor: Jennifer L. Crockett, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Child Maltreatment Prevention is receiving increased attention in behavioral research and practice. Due to the associated long-term negative health and social consequences of Child Maltreatment, its prevention is also a priority for the CDC. This symposium examines the effectiveness of Parenting Programs implemented at agency and state levels. The first presentation focuses on a population-level evaluation of Triple P (Positive Parenting Program). Triple P is an evidenced-based program with five Levels of Intervention. The second presentation takes a closer look at one of the specific Levels of Intervention within Triple P (Primary Care Level 3), focusing on parents generalization of strategies across settings. The final presentation examines both Parent-Child Interaction Therapy (PCIT) and Project Safe Care. PCIT was implemented within a Child Welfare Services agency. Project SafeCare was implemented both within a Child Welfare Services agency for high-risk families as well as statewide for active Child Welfare cases. These presentations will include discussions of fidelity monitoring, the challenges with large-scale implementation, and program dissemination.

 
Conducting a Population-Level Trial to Enhance Parenting.
RON PRINZ (University of South Carolina), Matthew R. Sanders (University of Queensland)
Abstract: This presentation focuses on programming to strengthen parenting at a population-level, which is the approach being tested in the U.S. Triple P System Population Trial. The population trial is a systematic implementation of the entire multi-level Triple P (Positive Parenting Program) system, an evidenced-based approach to parenting and family support developed by Sanders and colleagues. The presentation highlights the differences between a population trial and a clinical trial, the components of population dissemination, the challenges of broad-scale implementation, and role of media and informational strategies in such an endeavor. Quality-assurance facets of the trial will be discussed particularly with respect to the training of service providers from a broad array of disciplines working in a variety of settings. Implications of the trial for program transfer and dissemination will be discussed.
 
Evaluating Programmed Generalization in a Brief In-Home Parent Training Program.
CYNTHIA L. BOYLE (Center for Disease Control & Prevention), John R. Lutzker (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Pursuant to its research agenda to prevent child maltreatment, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention funds a population-based effectiveness trial of the Positive Parenting Program (Triple P) in South Carolina. In a substudy of this trial in Columbia, South Carolina and Atlanta, Georgia, we focused on Primary Care Level 3 (of 5 possible levels), which consists of four consultation sessions for parents of children with common child behavior problems. Specifically, we investigated the ability of parents to generalize parenting strategies trained directly in one setting to another untrained setting using a multiple probe design across settings or siblings. This design was embedded within a multiple probe design across families. Direct observation revealed decreases in aversive child behavior posttreatment; however, booster sessions were required to maintain decreases and/or generalization effects. Rates of aversive child behavior remained low at 6-to 8-week follows-up. Inter-rater reliability ranged from 84.2% to 96.12%. Indirect measures showed dramatic intervention effects with some families indicating clinically significant change from baseline. Importantly, social validity measures suggested overall satisfaction with the program.
 
Implementing Behavioral Parent Training Models within Child Welfare Service Systems--Experiences with SafeCare and PCIT.
MARK CHAFFIN (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center), Jane Silovsky (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center), Debra Hecht (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center), Beverly Funderburk (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center)
Abstract: This talk will describe implementation experiences drawn from three ongoing randomized trials testing outcomes of behavioral parent training programs in child welfare service systems. The first trial isa single-agency implementation of PCIT. The second is a single agency implementation of the SafeCare model for a high-risk prevention population. The third trial is a multi-agency statewide implementation of the SafeCare model for active child welfare cases. The role ofongoing fidelity monitoring and direct service observation in determining downstream client outcomes will be discussed. Finally, a model for how behavioral parent training programs can be systematically developed, improved, and tested within large public sector service systems will be discussed.
 
 
Panel #184
Professional Development Series: Applying to Graduate School in Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Spring
Area: PRA; Domain: Theory
Chair: Berenice de la Cruz (University of Texas, Austin)
VENNESSA L. WALKER (West Virginia University)
KENNON A. LATTAL (West Virginia University)
MAUREEN THERESA ARO (University of North Carolina, Wilmington)
CAROL PILGRIM (University of North Carolina, Wilmington)
KENNETH MACALEESE (University of Nevada, Reno)
PATRICK M. GHEZZI (University of Nevada, Reno)
PAIGE M. MCKERCHAR (University of Kansas)
RACHEL H. THOMPSON (University of Kansas)
Abstract:

Faculty and students from four behavior analysis graduate programs will discuss issues relevant to the application process. Attendees will be welcome to ask questions and join the discussion.

 
 
Symposium #185
Project OFTEN: Observation Feedback to Ensure Pre-Service Teacher Success
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Inman
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Emma J. Martin (University of Oregon)
Discussant: Shanna Hagan-Burke (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: This symposium shares results from three different studies under Project OFTEN: Observation Feedback to Ensure Pre-Service Teacher Success. The studies are part of a project to develop an effective training package for elementary special education teachers. The first presentation describes a pilot study on the use of a performance feedback package in pre-service, special education teacher training. The second presentation describes a component analysis of the performance feedback package. The third presentation describes a descriptive study of the predictive utility of standards for effective instruction on student reading achievement. The findings from these three studies will hold implications for the use of performance feedback for pre-service teacher training, developing effective performance feedback packages, and determining standards of effecting teaching behaviors, teacher training, and instructional consultation.
 
Project OFTEN: A Pilot Study.
SARAH A. FAIRBANKS (University of Oregon)
Abstract: This pilot study examined the use of a performance feedback package on pre-service teachers’ instructional behaviors. Nine student teachers in the University of Oregon special education licensure program received a performance feedback package including verbal feedback, visual feedback, and a goal-setting worksheet on effective teaching behaviors, twice a week over the final term of their student teaching requirement. Performance feedback was based on twenty minute observations of small group (2-5 students) direct reading instruction for elementary students in special education. Descriptive statistics of the effective teaching behaviors will be discussed in relation to standards for effective instruction. In particular, standards regarding: a) pacing of instruction, b) correct academic responding, c) error correction, and d) use of praise and reprimand are examined. The findings hold implications for the use of performance feedback for pre-service teacher training.
 
Component Analysis of a Performance Feedback Package to Promote Effective Instructional Behaviors in Pre-service Teachers.
VIRGINIA REECE (University of Oregon)
Abstract: This study will examine what combination of components in a performance feedback package are most effective in promoting effective instructional behaviors in pre-service teachers during reading intervention groups. Four pre-service teachers will receive a performance feedback package over a 8 week period. Each pre-service teacher will be observed 20 minutes daily while teaching direct reading instruction to 4 third grade students. The independent variable will be the combination of components in the performance feedback package including: a) verbal and written feedback, graphic display of instructional behaviors and goal setting, b) verbal and written feedback and goal setting or c) verbal and written feedback, and graphic display of instructional behaviors. The effectiveness of the performance feedback packages will be measured by instructional behavior rates including: a) opportunities to respond, b) praise statements and c) corrective feedback. Student outcome measures will include: a) correct academic responses, b) student engagement time and c) DIBELS Oral Reading Fluency measures. Withdrawal designs will be used to determine which combination of components in a performance feedback package is most effective in promoting effective instructional behaviors. The results of this study could lead to findings with implications for developing future teacher training and instructional consultation models.
 
Utility of Effective Instructional Standards to Predict Student Reading Achievement.
KIRA FLORENCE (University of Oregon)
Abstract: This study will investigate the use of standards for effective instruction to predict student reading outcomes. In particular, standards regarding: a) pacing of instruction, b) correct academic responding, c) error correction, d) use of praise and reprimand, and e) progress monitoring will be examined. Pre-service teachers in the University of Oregon special education licensure program will be observed student teaching during small-group (2-5 student), direct instruction reading to third, fourth, and fifth grade students receiving instruction in second grade level material. Effective teaching behaviors will be coded. Student reading growth will be measured over 8 weeks using DIBELS-Oral Reading Fluency measures. Hierarchical linear modeling will be used to determine which standards for effective instruction predict student growth trajectories in reading fluency . The findings will hold implications for determining standards of effecting teaching behaviors, teacher training, and instructional consultation.
 
 
Symposium #186
CE Offered: BACB
Treating Problem Behavior with Functional Communication Training: Variables that Impact Response Selection and Stimulus Control
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Centennial Ballroom IV
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston, Clear Lake)
CE Instructor: Dorothea C. Lerman, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Functional communication training is commonly used to treat problem behavior. However, further research is needed on factors related to the selection and maintenance of communication responses, especially during periods of extinction. In the first paper, Laura Grow and colleagues demonstrate a methodology for identifying communication responses that are already in the individuals repertoire prior to treatment and for determining if the responses are in the same response class as problem behavior. In the second paper, Carrie Dempsey and colleagues examine the benefits of using signaled versus unsignaled reinforcement while maintaining communication responses on VI schedules. In the third paper, Jeffrey Tiger and colleagues present a study on the use of signaled reinforcement with preschool-aged children. The authors examine the effects of signaled reinforcement on childrens tolerance for periods of extinction and assess the children's preference for signaled versus unsignaled reinforcement. Finally, Anna and colleagues examine a strategy for teaching children with autism to discriminate between periods of reinforcement versus extinction under multiple, naturally occurring situations.

 
The Emergence of Mands During Extinction of Problem Behavior.
LAURA L. GROW (Marcus Autism Center and Georgia State University), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center, Kennedy Krieger Institute, and Emory University School of Medicine), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center, Kennedy Krieger Institute, and Emory University School of Medicine), M. Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center), Richard K. McCranie (Marcus Autism Center), Karen Myers (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Functional Communication Training (FCT) is a differential reinforcement procedure in which communication responses are reinforced while problem behavior is placed on extinction (Carr & Durand, 1985). Generally, a functional analysis is followed by training of an alternative behavior using the same consequences identified as the maintaining variable. Although previous studies have investigated the conditions under which appropriate behaviors may be acquired (e.g., Shirley et al., 1997) and maintained (e.g., Fisher et al., 1993), alternative responses in these and other studies are often arbitrarily selected. To date, no studies have examined the extent to which the application of extinction may evoke behaviors in the same response class as problem behavior as an aid for selecting an alternative response. The purpose of the current investigation was to determine whether exposing problem behavior to extinction would evoke appropriate behavior without explicit training. Results indicated that appropriate behaviors were (1) emitted during periods of extinction of problem behavior and (2) maintained by the consequence that maintained problem behavior. These findings are discussed in the context of both typical acquisition training procedures and the effects and side effects of extinction procedures.
 
Effects of Signals on Responding during Reinforcement-Schedule Thinning.
CARRIE M. DEMPSEY (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida), Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Florida), Jessica L. Thomason (University of Florida)
Abstract: Once a response is acquired through functional communication training (FCT), it is desirable to thin the reinforcement schedule to facilitate maintenance in the natural environment. Results of previous studies suggest that the inclusion of discriminative stimuli during schedule thinning may result in low rates of problem behavior and clinically desirable rates of communication. The purpose of this study was to examine patterns of responding when reinforcement was delivered according to a variable interval (VI) schedule and when the availability of reinforcement was signaled. Study 1 involved a basic demonstration of the effects of signaled and unsignaled reinforcement. Results showed that more moderate rates of responding were associated with signaled versus unsignaled reinforcement. Study 2 involved an evaluation of signaled reinforcement during VI schedule thinning following FCT for individuals who exhibited problem behavior. Results indicated that signaling reinforcement during VI schedule thinning resulted in low rates of problem behavior (e.g., self-injury) and moderate rates of communication.
 
Towards a Proactive Strategy to Teach Preschoolers Tolerance for Unavailable Reinforcement.
JEFFREY H. TIGER (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Kylie Larsen (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Tiger and Hanley (2004) arranged teacher attention into a multiple-schedule of reinforcement (i.e., periods of reinforcement and extinction were correlated with continuously presented discriminative stimuli and were rotated according to a time-based schedule) as a potential means of teaching children to tolerate periods in which attention was unavailable. The present study evaluated a potentially more practical variation of this multiple-schedule arrangement in which reinforcement and/or extinction components were signaled via a brief vocal signal for 4 preschool-aged children. Further, children's preferences for these arrangements were assessed via a concurrent-chains arrangement. Results showed that brief signals were effective discriminative stimuli, but for one child, continuously presented stimuli were found to be more effective than those presented briefly. All children preferred the multiple-schedule arrangement in which both reinforcement and extinction components were briefly signaled relative to arrangements in which either (a) extinction was not signaled or (b) both reinforcement and extinction components were not signaled. The results are described in terms of preventing the development of young children's problem behavior during conditions of non-reinforcement. Interobserver agreement was assessed during a minimum of 20% of sessions across participants and averaged above 85% for all dependent measures.
 
Teaching Individuals With Autism to Attend to Naturally Occurring Discriminative Stimuli During FCT.
ANNA E. CHIRIGHIN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Katrina Marie Zelenka (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Mandy M. Triggs (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Once latent problem associated with communication-based interventions is the potential for responding at extremely high rates. Fisher, Kuhn, and Thompson (1998) evaluated a multiple schedule arrangement using picture cards (discriminative stimuli) to reduce communications when reinforcement was not available (i.e., not signaled). The current study was designed to extend the findings of Fisher et al. by using naturally occurring discriminative stimuli (e.g., caregiver behavior), as opposed to arbitrary stimuli (e.g., picture cards). Two children diagnosed with Autism participated in this study. Following successful treatment evaluations with functional communication and extinction, each participant was taught to differentially request attention based on whether the caregiver was engaging in “busy” (e.g., talking on the phone) or “non-busy” (e.g., reading a magazine) behavior. Multiple busy and non-busy situations were taught. During training, each participant began allocating all communication responses to times when caregivers were engaged in non-busy behavior. Reliability data were collected during more than 33% of all sessions and interobserver agreement coefficients averaged above 80%. These results demonstrate a first step towards integrating a function-based treatment with social skills training.
 
 
Symposium #187
Using Self-Managed Low-Tech Interventions to Improve Academic Skills
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
University
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Christopher Skinner (University of Tennessee)
Discussant: Phillip J. Belfiore (Mercyhurst College)
Abstract: Preventing and remedying academic skill deficits requires effective and time-efficient interventions that enhance student learning rates. Interventions must often be conducted by teachers in their classrooms. Therefore, educators would prefer interventions requiring little time and resources. Researchers have developed various interventions that can be implemented across classes, individually, or by students themselves. One class of these interventions uses audiotapes to enhance rates of accurate academic responding. Reading and mathematics are two academic areas that have been targeted using these interventions. The current series of experiments extends this area of research by using low-tech interventions (e.g., with audiotapes) to enhance academic performance. The first study shows that the Taped-Words intervention can improve the sight-word recognition of a student learning English as a second language. A variation of the Taped-Words intervention is used in the second study, which describes a classwide application of the Taped-Problems intervention to mathematic fact fluency. The third study compared the effects of the Taped-Problems intervention with the Cover, Copy, Compare intervention on the mathematics performance of a student with mental retardation. Results from all studies demonstrate the effectiveness of using audiotapes to enhance learning. Discussion focuses on effective components of these interventions and future directions for research.
 
Effects of a Taped-Timed Intervention on Dolch Sight Word Recognition.
STACY L. BLISS FUDGE (University of Tennessee), Christopher Skinner (University of Tennessee), Regina Adams (Knox County Public Schools)
Abstract: A multiple baseline across tasks design was used to measure the effects of the taped-words intervention with a student who speaks English as a second language. Dolch words were divided into four mutually exclusive sets of words. Several tapes were created for each set of words, and each set of words was randomly ordered on each tape. The subject was given a cassette player, headphones, and one of the tapes. He was instructed to listen to the audiotape each day at a convenient time. As the student listened to the tape, he followed along in a corresponding packet. He attempted to beat the tape by correctly pronouncing the word before it was given on the tape. Assessments were conducted two to three times weekly to determine learning rate. Results show a significant increase in the learning of words when each list was targeted. Additionally, the subject maintained his recognition of words upon completion of one list and the initiation of another. He showed generalization of words within the context of classroom materials and displayed more willingness to read, as reported by his primary teacher
 
The Taped-Problems Intervention: Increasing Multiplication Fact Fluency Using a Low-Tech, Class-Wide, Time-Delay Intervention.
ELIZABETH MCCALLUM (University of Tennessee), Christopher Skinner (University of Tennessee), Haley Crisp Turner (University of Tennessee), Lee B. Saecker (University of Tennessee)
Abstract: Taped Problems is an audiotape-paced procedure that occasions high rates of AAA responding. A multiple-probes-across-tasks design was used to evaluate the effects of the Taped-Problems (TP) intervention on the multiplication fact fluency of 18 students from an intact general education third-grade classroom. During the classwide TP intervention, students were given lists of problems and instructed to attempt to complete each problem before an audiotape player provided the correct answer. Varying time-delay procedures were used as the intervals between problem and answer presentations were adjusted. Initially, there was a brief time delay between problems and answers. During each session, as the series of problems was repeated, the interval was first increased and then reduced. Across all three sets of problems, results showed immediate and sustained increases in multiplication fact fluency after the intervention was applied. Discussion focuses on future research related to the TP intervention and the need for the development and empirical validation of effective, efficient, and acceptable class-wide interventions.
 
Evaluating and Comparing Two Interventions to Enhance Mathematics Fluency in a Student with Mental Retardation: Cover, Copy, and Compare and Taped-Problems.
ERIN E. CARROLL (University of Tennessee), Christopher Skinner (University of Tennessee), Haley Crisp Turner (University of Tennessee), Elizabeth McCallum (University of Tennessee)
Abstract: An adapted alternating treatments design was used to evaluate and compare the effects of two interventions on the addition fact performance of a fifth-grade student with mild mental retardation. During cover, copy, compare (CCC) the student was given a packet of problems and answers and instructed to; read the problem and answer, cover the problem and answer, write the problem and answer, and check her response. During the Taped Problems (TP) intervention, the student received a packet of problems and was instructed to complete each problem before the answer was provided by an experimenter-constructed audiotape. A third set of problems served as the control set. Audiotapes were used for both interventions to hold time and conditions constant. Results showed that both interventions resulted in rapid increases in math performance, with TP yielding more rapid increases in skill development (e.g., accuracy and fluency). Discussion focuses on the importance of measuring learning rates and directions for future applied research.
 
 
Symposium #188
Current Advances in the Behavioral Analysis of Gambling: II
Sunday, May 28, 2006
1:30 PM–2:50 PM
Manila
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Laura L. Portera (Southern Illinois University)
Discussant: Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The present series of papers will describe various advances in the behavioral analysis of gambling. Each paper will highlight various areas of new exciting research on gambling behavior. Experimental and applied issues will be presented and implications for treatment of pathological gamblers will be suggested.
 
Wanting to Lose, But Only Certain Ways.
HOLLY L. BIHLER (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The present study examined the illogical preference of many gamblers to select one of two concurrently available slot machines that displayed a certain type of loss when wins across both games were equal. The type of loss preferred, is termed a near-miss, or a close approximation to a win. Nonetheless, the preference for this slot option can be altered indirectly via a transfer of stimulus functions. After obtaining baseline steady state performance on equal probability slot machines, conditional discrimination training and testing procedures were introduced in an attempt to alter the potential behavioral functions that accompanied the near-miss display. After such exposure to various stimuli and attempts to transfer functions, most players altered their response allocations to the concurrent slot machines, suggesting that preference is transient, and modifiable indirectly in the absence of direct contingency manipulations. These data illustrate the complex nature of what results in a gambler’s preference across games, and may suggest why certain people develop into pathological gamblers while others do not. Implications and future directions for research will be discussed.
 
The Illusion of Control and Exposure to Multiple Gambling Simulation Trials.
W. SCOTT WOOD (Drake University), Maria M. Clapham (Drake University)
Abstract: Wood and Clapham (2003) developed the Drake Beliefs about Chance (DBC) inventory to assess erroneous beliefs about games of chance and determine their association with gambling behavior. The DBC inventory provides an overall score and individual scores on two dimensions: Illusion of Control and Superstition. Survey research shows that scores on the DBC are positively correlated with several measures of gambling behavior (Wood & Clapham, in press). Further, these DBC belief factors are positively associated with certain measures of gambling behavior in laboratory simulations of slot machine play. Specifically, students with high DBC scores played longer and faster than students with lower scores as tested in a slot machine simulation session. (Wood, Clapham, Eigenberg, Kolker, & Murphy, 2005) The present investigation extends this research to examine the predictive relationship of the Illusion of Control factor to gambling performance patterns across multiple sessions of slot machine simulation play by student subjects, as well as determine whether or not there were changes in Illusion of Control scores as a result of this exposure. This investigation focused only on the Illusion of Control dimension of the DBC as a predictor variable. Previous research has demonstrated that the second factor, Superstition, adds little to the predictive validity of the first. Preliminary results indicate that high and low Illusion of Control scores continue to correlate with differing behavior patterns among students playing simulated slots, characterized principally by higher rates of play and larger wagers by the higher scorers. Additionally, students who initially obtained high and low Illusion of Control scores tended to display more moderate scores in post testing. High scorers came down in their measures of Illusion of Control following the five sessions of play while low scorers went up. Interestingly, these changes in Illusion of Control scores were not reflected in the students' patterns of play, which continued to differ systematically across all sessions.
 
Sensory Feedback in Maintaining Slot Machine Play.
BRADY J. PHELPS (South Dakota State University), Nathan Maas (South Dakota State University)
Abstract: Two Japanese-style slot machines that were disabled from accepting or dispensing coins but which provided tokens and various sights and sounds contingent upon playing were used to investigate theroles of sensory feedback in maintaining slot machine play. While the machines could be programmed to win at different percentages, winnings consisted of sensory events and tokens which were not exchangeable for any reinforcers. After a required number of plays, which machine if any would result in willingness to continue playing?
 
 
Invited Paper Session #36
CE Offered: None

Behavior Analysis: All Dressed Up and Nowhere To Go

Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: David C. Palmer, J.D.
Chair: David C. Palmer (Smith College)
HENRY D. SCHLINGER (California State University, Los Angeles)
Dr. Henry Schlinger earned his B.S. and M.A. in Psychology from Southern Methodist University and his Ph.D. in Psychology from Western Michigan University, where he also completed a two-year post-doctoral fellowship in behavioral pharmacology. Dr. Schlinger was a tenured, full-time faculty member in the Psychology Department at Western New England College in Springfield, Massachusetts, before moving to Los Angeles in 1999, in part to pursue his musical interests (see www.hankschlinger.com). Since then he has been a Lecturer in the Psychology Departments at California State University, Los Angeles and Northridge, and at the University of California, Los Angeles.
Abstract:

Everywhere you look nowadays all kinds of scientists and psychologists are prominently represented in the media, either writing books for the general public, articles in popular magazines, and op-ed pieces in major newspapers, or their research is featured in news articles. Except for behavior analysts. With rare exceptions behavior analysts are simply not part of the public debate about human behavior, despite the fact that behavior analysis represents essentially the only approach that can offer ultimate explanations of adaptive behavior based on decades of sound experimental research. In fact, many psychologists, scientists and science writers often take pot shots at behaviorism. In 1974, in the Introduction to About Behaviorism, Skinner wrote, Unfortunately, very little is known about this analysis outside the field. Its most active investigators seldom make any effort to explain themselves to nonspecialists. As a result, few people are familiar with the scientific underpinnings of the most cogent statement of the behavioristic position. Thirty years later, not much has changed. In this address, I take behavior analysts to task for our almost total lack of representation in both scientific and popular discussions of behavior and suggest that we begin to take steps to redress this situation. These include conducting basic research on topics that can be made interesting to the educated public; (re) establishing a public or media relations office within the Association for Behavior Analysis and/or the regional associations; writing articles, commentaries, book reviews, and letters to the editors in popular journals, magazines and newspapers; and writing books for the popular press. No behavior analysts have stepped up to fill the public relations void left when Skinner died, and, maybe not coincidentally, behaviorism, at least in the scientific and public perception, seems to have died with him. In this era of increasingly popular evolutionary and neurological explanations of human adaptive behavior, it is time to reassert our expertise.

 
 
Paper Session #189
Spanish Track Presentation: "Sources of Novel Behavior: Implications for the development of Verbal Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
Fairlie
Area: VBC
Chair: A. Charles Catania (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
 
Spanish Track Presentation: "Sources of Novel Behavior: Implications for the development of Verbal Behavior
Domain: Applied Research
A. CHARLES CATANIA (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
 
Abstract: Among the criticisms of B. F. Skinner’s analysis of verbal behavior is Noam Chomsky’s claim that it had nothing useful to say about productivity, the generation of novel grammatical utterances. Yet the behavior analytic armamentarium includes a variety of sources of novel behavior, including shaping, fading, adduction, the direct reinforcement of novelty, and the emergence of novel instances of higher order classes. This presentation considers the implications of such sources for the development of productive verbal behavior and addresses Chomskian critiques such as the argument from the poverty of the stimulus. In so doing, it examines semantic as well as syntactic novelty, as when verbal behavior allows the creation of novel entities such as angels and demons.
 
 
 
Symposium #190
Taking it to the Bank: Integrating Behavioral Principles at M&T Bank
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:00 PM–3:20 PM
Cairo
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Judy L. Agnew (Aubrey Daniels International)
Discussant: Aubrey C. Daniels (Aubrey Daniels International)
Abstract: This symposium will cover the implementation of OBM at a large bank. A history of the client and the client's needs will be presented as well as a description of the work done in the area of behavior analysis. The effectiveness of the intervention will be discussed. In addition, methods used to ensure maintenance of behavioral skills and knowledge will be outlined. The final paper will be presented by a representative of the bank and will outline the history and effectiveness of the intervention from the bank's perspective.
 
Partnering with M&T Bank: The history of a successful intervention.
JUDY L. AGNEW (Aubrey Daniels International)
Abstract: Aubrey Daniels International began working with M&T Bank in 2002. While the proposed work included coaching of leaders in addition to training in behavioral principles, the leadership chose training only. After two years of training only, the retail arm of M&T decided to engage ADI in coaching of its leaders. This paper will outline the history of the work done with M&T Bank. A brief client history and presenting issues will be discussed. Next, implementation tools and strategies will be outlined. Training, coaching, leadership surveys, partnering with internal consultants and trainers will all be discussed. This paper is designed to set the stage for the remaining papers in this symposium.
 
Dissemination and Integration of Behavioral Principles to Achieve Lasting Results.
KEN WAGNER (Aubrey Daniels International)
Abstract: Ultimately, a Behavior Analytic intervention is judged by it’s maintenance over time. Successful outcomes should not be defined by improvements in short term metrics, but rather by the organization’s ability to build the principles of the science of behavior into its leadership strategies and work processes. Given the speed and complexity of business today, improvements realized by the integration of behavioral technology must be sustained by the organization’s natural leadership structure. This paper will describe a systematic effort to build the Behavior Analytic skills of executive level leaders, to improve the methodology used to develop the coaching skills of mid-level managers, and to facilitate the dissemination of the principles of Behavioral Science throughout the organization. Impact on key business metrics, successful case studies, and lessons learned will be discussed.
 
Installing Behavior Principles into Retail Banking Leadership.
THOMAS D. EARLEY (M&T Bank)
Abstract: The financial services and banking industries are renowned for balance sheet precision. Yet, when considering sales leadership and performance management, precision is often sporadic at best. Leaders focus almost exclusively on results, with little thought to behaviors or their consequences. This paper will present one banks’ journey into Performance Management, working with Aubrey Daniels International. It will follow a retail sale organization as it defines metrics and critical behaviors that lead to organizational success. It will also follow bankers as they move from the training center to the sales center to execute clear behaviors and receive reinforcement through the use of Behavior Action Plans and observational coaching. The paper will describe the intervention from the client’s perspective. Obstacles to implementation will be discussed, in addition to areas of success.
 
 
Special Event #191
2006 ABA Tutorial: The Extension of Skinner's Verbal Operants to Interpretations of Complex Behavior: A Tutorial
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: VBC
Chair: William F. Potter (California State University, Stanislaus)
 
2006 ABA Tutorial: The Extension of Skinner's Verbal Operants to Interpretations of Complex Behavior: A Tutorial
Abstract: This tutorial will be aimed at the behavior analyst who has little or no familiarity with Skinner's Verbal Behavior. I will briefly outline Skinner's interpretive scheme and will then discuss two verbal operants, the intraverbal and the autoclitic, in greater depth. I will show the role these operants play, or might plausibly play, in our understanding of grammar, problem solving, and memory. In this exposition, I will have occasion to mention one of the remarkable assumptions of the book, namely that behavior that has not been emitted, either overtly or covertly, plays a role in our understanding of complex behavior.
 
DAVID C. PALMER (Smith College)
 
David C. Palmer discovered Skinner by reading Walden Two while on a caving trip to North Carolina, because he thought it must have had something to do with his hero, Thoreau. He spent the next decade on a soap box preaching about Walden Two and reading the rest of the Skinner canon. Eventually he realized that he was no Frazier, and he applied to graduate school in behavior analysis under John Donahoe. He was happy in grad school and would be there still if the University of Massachusetts hadn’t threatened to change the locks. He has spent the last 17 years as the token behaviorist at Smith College. During that time he co-authored, with Donahoe, Learning and Complex Behavior. He continues to puzzle over the interpretation of memory, problem-solving, and, particularly, verbal behavior. He once referred to himself, in a jocular vein, as a goose-stepping Skinnerian, but he found that the label fit, and he now wears it without apology
 
 
 
Special Event #192
2006 ABA Tutorial: Using Single Case Designs to Establish Evidence-Based Practice
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: EDC
Chair: Charles L. Salzberg (Utah State University)
 
2006 ABA Tutorial: Using Single Case Designs to Establish Evidence-Based Practice
Abstract: The session will focus on the need to extend behavioral theory and research methods to documentation of “evidence-based” practices. Federal policy is moving toward an emphasis on funding for, and scholarship about “evidence-based” practices. At this point, the primary way a practice can be documented as “evidence-based” is through randomized control group designs. The session will focus on (a) the need for behavior analysts to agree on the core features of single case designs, (b) the need for operational standards for synthesis of multiple single case studies, and (c) professional standards for defining when a body of single case research can be viewed as sufficient to document a practice as “evidence-based.”
 
ROBERT H. HORNER (University of Oregon)
 
Dr. Robert Horner is the Alumni-Knight Endowed Professor of Special Education at the University of Oregon. He has been the editor of JASH, an associate editor for JABA, JASH, JPBI and AJMR, and is currently co-editor of JPBI. His research interests have focused on stimulus control, generalization, positive behavior support, and the application of behavioral principles to whole-school behavioral interventions. He currently collaborates with Dr. George Sugai on school-wide behavior support efforts that are on-going in over 4300 schools. He is a member of the What Works Clearinghouse subcommittee examining the utility of single case research methods.
 
 
 
Panel #193
CE Offered: BACB
A Panel Discussion of the Invited Address by Stephen Suomi Titled: Gene-Environment Interactions In Rhesus-Monkey Behavior Development
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:30 PM–3:20 PM
Singapore
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Jacob L. Gewirtz, Ph.D.
Chair: Mark Lipsitt (Lipsitt Training Services)
STEPHEN SUOMI (National Institute of Child Health & Human Development)
MARK LIPSITT (Lipsitt Training Services)
Abstract:

This panel will include Stephen Suomi and will discuss and criticize his invited address which was given in the immediately-preceding time slot in the same room. Suomi will respond to questions raised by and comments of members of the panel.

 
 
Symposium #194
Examining Antecedent-based Assessment and Interventions for Application in Natural Settings
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:30 PM–3:50 PM
Auburn
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Janine Stichter (University of Missouri, Columbia)
Discussant: Lee Kern (Lehigh University)
Abstract: The influence of antecedents on behavior has been readily recognized since Skinner (1953), as a separate variable (i.e., a fourth variable) that can change the likelihood of the occurrence of behavior. Antecedents are understood to impact a given three-term contingency and future occurrences of behavior as well as alter the effectiveness of a stimulus to set the occasion for the availability of reinforcement and/or momentarily alter the value of the consequences (Bijou, 1995; Kantor, 1959; Michael, 1982; 1993). Yet, only more current research agendas have actively pursued assessment of the impact of antecedent events on child behaviors and the development of corresponding interventions, particularly in natural settings. (e.g., Conroy & Stichter, 2003;Kern, Childs, Dunlap, Clarke, & Falk, 1994; Peck, Sasso, & Jolivette, 1997; McComas, Wacker, Cooper, Asmus, 1996; Stichter, Hudson & Sasso, in press). The papers presented in this symposium will share the results from several examples of applied antecedent based research within natural settings.
 
Evocative Effects of Antecedent Contexts on the Peer-related Social Behavior of Children with Autism.
JENNIFER A. SELLERS (University of Florida), Maureen Conroy (University of Florida), Elizabeth Weeks McKinney (University of Florida), Glenn M. Sloman (University of Florida), Taketo Nakao (University of Florida), Gregory R. Mancil (University of Florida), Kristen Peters (University of Florida), Ann P. Daunic (University of Florida)
Abstract: A key defining feature of autism is deficits in the area of social skills (APA, 2004). Although a number of behavioral interventions have been demonstrated to effectively increase peer-related social skills in children with autism, often times these interventions fail to generalize across settings or lack maintenance over time. The use of antecedent-based interventions that can be used to evoke peer-related social behaviors across settings is a current area of interest in the field. This presentation will report findings from a federally funded research project investigating various types of antecedent contexts and their influence on target children’s peer-related social initiations and responses. Structural analysis methodology was used to demonstrate the evocative effects of the antecedent interventions across three children with autism on their social behavior with peers. Interobserver agreement was obtained for an average of 28% of the sessions and averaged 86%.
 
The Use of Negative Reinforcement within a Concurrent Operants Protocol to Increase the Social Responding of Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder.
GARY M. SASSO (University of Iowa)
Abstract: One of the distinguishing characteristics of Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) is a lack of social interaction. Lovaas, Schaeffer, & Simmons (1965) initially demonstrated the powerful effects of negative reinforcement and avoidance in training individuals with ASD to engage in social interactions. However, since that time few attempts have been made to develop a method of arranging environments in which a forced choice between social interaction and a less desirable activity is used to increase the social behavior of children and youth with ASD. It has been proposed by Mowrer (1954) that this avoidance mechanism can serve other functions. For example, persons or events directly associated with the reduction or cessation of a punishing contingency can, under certain circumstances, acquire secondary reinforcing properties. The purpose of this study was to: 1) present a rationale for the use of an antecedent choice protocol to extend the social behavior of children with ASD; 2) present the results of two related investigations that were designed to assess and treat social withdrawal across five individuals with ASD; and 3) discuss the use of negative reinforcement as an instructional procedure.
 
The Use of Structural Analysis to Identify Setting Events in Applied Settings for Students with Autism.
JANINE PECK STICHTER (University of Missouri), Denise Kay (University of Missouri)
Abstract: From the inception of behavior analysis, basic research in the field has always been concerned with the theoretical and empirical study of antecedent variables (Mostofsky, 1965; Skinner, 1938). However, the applied literature has tended historically to emphasize the role of consequences (Carr & Durand, 1985; Iwata, et al., 1982). Yet, research has long demonstrated clear effects of setting events such as teacher behavior, instructional practices, and environmental characteristics on prosocial and adaptive behaviors of students with disabilities (e.g., Kern, et al, 1994; Reynolds, 1992; Stichter, et al, in press). However, systemically assessing contextual variables within school settings by natural change agents continues to be an elusive process. This study investigated the use of practitioner-implemented structural analyses to determine setting events affecting the adaptive behavior of elementary age students with autism within their typical classroom settings. Descriptive measures including direct observation, as well as analogue probes were employed and contrasted. An ABA reversal design was used to compare intervention packages; maintenance and social validity data were also obtained. Findings indicate that structural analyses can be implemented by a practitioner and can lead to the development of successful interventions within educational settings. Interobserver agreement was obtained of 87% for 35% of sessions.
 
 
Paper Session #195
OBM Paper Series - Methodological Review of Organizational Behavior Management Techniques
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:30 PM–3:50 PM
Vancouver
Area: OBM
Chair: Charles R. Crowell (University of Notre Dame)
 
A Comparison of Partial, Whole, and Momentary Time Sampling ProceduresOn Ergonomic Safety Performance
Domain: Applied Research
KRISTEN STRUSS (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Alicia M. Alvero (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York)
 
Abstract: This study compares the accuracy of partial interval, whole interval, and momentary time sampling when observing and recording ergonomic safety behaviors performed while working on a simulated assembly line task. A comparison was completed by observing the participants on a 1-second continuous interval, which represents “true” safety performance. The data were then analyzed using partial interval, whole interval, and momentary time sampling in 15, 30, 45, 60, and 75 second intervals to examine a) which measurement procedure most accurately represents the true performance and b) the effects of interval length on the accuracy of observations.
 
OBM Research Using the PSI Classroom as an Analogue Work Environment
Domain: Applied Research
CHARLES R. CROWELL (University of Notre Dame), Paul D. Worland (Press Ganey Associates, Inc.), Amanda R. Matthews (University of Notre Dame), Elizabeth Hagen (University of Notre Dame)
 
Abstract: OBM researchers commonly use either real-world organizations or laboratory-based simulated work environments as the locus of their investigations. Simulated or analogue work environments afford researchers the advantages of being able to exercise greater control over the tasks or interventions employed than often is the case in real work settings. Also, extraneous factors are less likely to intrude upon analogue work situations. Potential disadvantages of laboratory-based OBM research include such factors as reliance on artificial tasks that may not emulate real jobs in terms of complexity or engagement. In addition, analogue studies usually are fairly short term in comparison to OBM research in real-world settings. Moreover, it is often difficult to formulate a realistic role for managers in a simulated work environment. In this paper we will argue that the PSI classroom may offer a useful setting within which to conduct OBM research. In this situation, student progress through the individual units may be viewed as the “work” that gets done, while ongoing proctor-student interactions may simulate a management component. We will describe some of our research showing that traditional OBM interventions like praise administered by proctors throughout the semester can indeed influence student progress and satisfaction in the course.
 
Behaviorally-Based Service Management: A 25 Year Review
Domain: Service Delivery
MICHAEL N. KEPHART (Central Michigan University), Amanda R. Rivard (Central Michigan University), Carl Merle Johnson (Central Michigan University)
 
Abstract: The service sector currently accounts for nearly 70% of the gross domestic product in the United States. Further, the service sector had the highest percentage gain in the fiscal years 2001-2004. As a result of this trend it is necessary for researchers and practitioners of organizational behavior management (OBM) to heed the service sector. This presentation is a review of the behaviorally-based service sector research published in the peer-reviewed journals, especially the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management and Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis. This review focused on research published between 1980 and 2005. To analyze trends and determine how OBM has been utilized, the following attributes were assessed: type of behavioral intervention, organization (private or public), outcome (behaviors or products), results of the intervention, and other key features such as the use of reliability checks and social validity measures. Future directions as well as a call for continued research and development are offered.
 
 
 
Symposium #196
International Symposium - Values in Behavior Analysis: Assessment and Clinical Implications
Sunday, May 28, 2006
2:30 PM–3:50 PM
Kennesaw
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ann Branstetter-Rost (Missouri State University)
Discussant: Ann Branstetter-Rost (Missouri State University)
Abstract: This symposium will focus on the utility and assessment of values in clinical behavior analysis. Our first paper will discuss issues of measurement and present data comparing two methods of values assessment. Papers two and three will be related to clinical implications, including a correlational presentation of the relationship between valued living and psychological distress and an experimental study of the role of values in pain tolerance.
 
Assessing Values in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy.
JOHN TANNER BLACKLEDGE (University of Nevada, Reno), Joseph Ciarrochi (University of Wollongong, Australia)
Abstract: Accurate assessment of client values, client effectiveness in moving toward values, and of client reasons for declaring values (e.g., social pliance vs. tracking-and augmental-based origins reflecting a client’s earnest and heartfelt endorsement of a value) is vital for the successful course of ACT treatment and empirical assessment of the treatment’s general effectiveness. The development of two new methods of assessing ACT-relevant values, the reasons behind them, and effective movement towards them (the Personal Values Questionnaire and the Social Values Survey) will be discussed. These instruments represent a substantial revision of Kennon Sheldon’s Personal Strivings questionnaire, and are currently being used in an experimental capacity in a growing number of studies.
 
Valued Living, Experiential Avoidance and Psychological Well-being.
JESSICA G. VAN DYKE (University of Mississippi), Leslie Rogers (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: In recent years, several psychotherapy interventions have focused on valued living. To date, little is known empirically about the relationship between valued living across multiple domains and psychological distress. The Valued living questionnaire is a self report measure of importance and consistency of values across life domains. Wilson and Murrell (2004) suggest that extreme responders in either direction have often been found to lack behavioral flexibility. The current study investigates the relationship between consistency scores with valued domains as indicated by participant ratings on the Valued Living questionnaire and their relationship to psychological well-being as indicated by the Outcome Questionnaire 45.2. In addition to investigating valued this relationship, we will also discuss how values living scores are related to experiential avoidance.
 
Pain Tolerance: Testing the Effects of Personal Values in the Context of Acceptance.
TANYA N. KIMBROUGH (University of Mississippi), Chris S. Lorance (University of Mississippi), Christopher C. Cushing (University of Mississippi), Ann Branstetter-Rost (University of Mississippi), Jonathan Weinstein (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: Acceptance has recently been empirically shown to increase individual’s pain tolerance in both acute and chronic pain situations. The primary difficulty with artificial pain paradigms in a college lab setting is in facilitating a sense of purpose, or value, for the participant to endure the pain stimuli. The current study attempts to remedy this impediment by specifically testing the effects of a value-based intervention, in conjunction with an acceptance intervention. Participants were randomly assigned to one of two conditions. Condition 1 was instructed them in principles of acceptance to utilize in coping with pain. Condition 2 rank ordered personal values, and were instructed in principles of acceptance, with an added values component. The component consisted of instructing the participant to focus on their valued life area and to imagine they are completing the pain task as a step in following through with their value. Following the intervention, participants completed a cold pressor task. The results indicate that personal values create a strong impact on an individual’s ability to endure acute pain. Such an intervention appears to be an effective method for empirically evaluating the effects of values as an entity apart from acceptance.
 
 
Paper Session #196a
International Paper Session - Spanish Track Presentation: Observational Learning: What it Is and Isn't and How to Induce It
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairlie
Area: VBC
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School)
 
Spanish Track Presentation: Observational Learning: What it Is and Isn't and How to Induce It
Domain: Applied Research
R. DOUGLAS GREER (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Mapy Chavez-Brown (Wagner College)
 
Abstract: Treatments of observational learning have lacked precision. New research has distinguished between performing existing repertoires as a function of indirect contact with contingencies and the learning of operants or higher order operants as a result of indirect contact with learn units. The latter work has identified new types of observational learning and how to induce it in children who are missing one or more components of observational learning. New work has also demonstrated observational learning of conditioned reinforcers in young children and the induction of higher order verbal operants as a function of observational experiences embedded in tutoring.
 
 
 
Paper Session #197
Behavioral Toxicology
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Piedmont
Area: BPH
Chair: Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University)
 
Effects of Gestational Methylmercury and Selenium Exposure on Behavioral Tasks.
Domain: Basic Research
MIRANDA REED (Auburn University), M. Christopher Newland (Auburn University)
 
Abstract: Previous studies of choice suggest methylmercury (MeHg) retards transition of responding when sources of reinforcement change in relative value, which could be contributable to either a change in reinforcement efficacy or the inability to discriminate between the spatial locations of these sources. Female rats were exposed, in utero, to 0, 0.5, or 5 ppm methylmercury and diet marginal or rich in selenium. The ability to discriminate spatial locations was evaluated using a spatial discrimination task with two levers. To assess the possible alteration of reinforcement efficacy, female littermates of these rats were tested using a peak interval procedure, which consists of a mixture of signaled, fixed-interval food trials and longer signaled extinction or nonfood trials. For the spatial discrimination task, rats exposed to low levels of selenium required more sessions to complete the first reversal (R1) and made more omissions during this reversal than high selenium animals, but did not differ on the original discrimination (OD) or the last two reversals. MeHg-exposed animals made more errors relative to controls on R1 and R3, but not during the OD or R2. For the peak procedure, both MeHg and low selenium animals maintained relatively higher response rates during extinction trials, suggesting alterations in reinforcement efficacy.
 
Irradiation Impairs Auditory Discrimination and Extinction in Rats
Domain: Basic Research
JOHN C. NEILL (Long Island University), Samual John Gatley (Northeastern University), Terry Aubele (State University of New York), Rachel Kristiansen (University of Mississippi), Onrae Rice (Brookhaven National Lab)
 
Abstract: The United States plans to send astronauts to Mars by 2020. Galactic radiation may cause neurological and learning impairments in astronauts who travel beyond the Earth’s magnetosphere to Mars. In order to assess possible changes in behavior and brain following irraditation, Adult Sprague-Dawley rats were exposed to whole brain radiation with 0, 120, or 240 cGy accelerated iron ions (56Fe) of 600 GeV/n at the National Space Radiation Laboratory, Brookhaven National Laboratory (n=10 per condition). Eight months following irradiation, animals were trained to press a lever for food reinforcement. They were then trained for 12 sessions to discriminate two sounds in a discrete trial successive discrimination using white noise as a cue for reinforcement and a 2 kHz pure tone as a cue for extinction. Then the discrimination was reversed for 12 sessions, followed by a replication of the baseline discrimination. Radiation impaired auditory discrimination and extinction in a dose-dependent manner.
 
The Effects of Methylmercury on the Critical Fusion Frequency of Rats
Domain: Basic Research
JOHN C. HEATH (Auburn University), M. Christopher Newland (Auburn University)
 
Abstract: The ingestion of methylmercury (MeHg) has been found to adversely affect primate and human visual fields and contrast sensitivity (Choi, Cho, & Lapham, 1981; Clarkson, 1989; Gilbert & Grant -Webster, 1995; Merigan, 1980; Rice, 1994; Rice & Gilbert, 1982). The frequency at which a flickering stimulus is perceived as a steady stimulus i.e., the Critical Fusion Frequency (CFF) has been related to both phenomena and to possible damage to the parvocellular or magnocellular visual neural systems. The rats visual system, although different from the human visual system contains parvocellular regions related to their visual perception. A series of experiments were conducted to develop a method for testing the rats visual perception to a flickering stimulus. A behavioral discrimination procedure was developed using four Long Evans male rats. Three testing methods were used. No significant difference was found between or within subjects or between and within methods for the CFF. The subjects were then exposed to 25 ppm of mercury (as MeHg) in drinking water using a multiple baseline experimental design, i.e., exposure onset occurred in a staggered fashion. In addition to the CFF running wheel activity, gait, hind-limb cross, and food consumption were also monitored. Approximately six to seven weeks of chronic exposure to methylmercury produced an elevated CFF as well as decreased response rate and running wheel activity. In at least one rat the CFF returned to baseline levels after MeHg exposure stopped.(Supported by NIH ES 10865)
 
 
 
Symposium #198
International Symposium - Behaviorism and Consciousness: Four Insights
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Dunwoody
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: John C. Malone (University of Tennessee)
Abstract: This symposium comprises four insightful discussions of the age-old question of the nature of consciousness. Hank Schlinger criticizes the usual vague and shaky descriptions of consciousness, coupled with the constant and misdirected search for neural correlates. He proposes a workable definition of consciousness and an account of its development. Gail Peterson considers the classic studies of split-brain humans and the apparent separation of behavior and conscious control. Though often cited as problems for behaviorism, Peterson shows that they are consonant with a behavioral analysis. For many years, Bob Wahler has trained parents in child-rearing and has recently found that those parents who can construct clear and coherent accounts of their pasts can better provide proper social environments for children. He now teaches parents to be conscious of their pasts and this increases the benefits of parent training. Finally, Francois Tonneau shows that the Neorealist philosophers, at Harvard early in the 20th Century, proposed that consciousness is not within us, but in the environment. This view solves thorny problems and emphasizes a new metaphysic of time and behavior that shares aspects of modern molar behaviorism.
 
Why Consciousness Hasn’t Been Explained…Until Now.
HENRY D. SCHLINGER (California State University, Los Angeles)
Abstract: In the past 15 years there has been an explosion of interest in consciousness among psychologists, philosophers and neuroscientists. In particular, cognitive neuroscientists have attempted to identify the so-called neural correlates of consciousness. Despite this flurry of activity, however, consciousness remains undefined and unexplained. I describe two reasons for this state of affairs. First, researchers cannot seem to shake free from the vague philosophical descriptions of consciousness that have plagued the topic for centuries. Second, there is an overemphasis on neuroreductionism (proximate causation) at the expense of a sound theory of behavior (ultimate causation). As an alternative, I define consciousness as the ability of individuals to talk (either publicly or privately) about the environment, their own overt and covert behavior, and the stimuli that cause it, and then describe how one learns to become conscious.
 
Split Brains and Behaviorism: A Needed Reconnection.
GAIL B. PETERSON (University of Minnesota)
Abstract: The classic studies of split-brain humans show that complex behavior that would normally seem to require conscious control can nevertheless be performed proficiently in the total absence of conscious awareness of the relevant stimuli or even of the behavior itself. Moreover, these studies strongly suggest that, when conscious awareness is reported, the neural structures subserving it are the same ones that subserve overt verbal behavior. It is argued that, instead of being problematic for Behaviorism, as they are often portrayed to be, these findings are completely consistent with Behaviorism’s traditional treatment of consciousness.
 
Parents’ Autobiographical Narratives: Setting Events For Contemplation?
ROBERT G. WAHLER (University of Tennessee)
Abstract: The research literature has repeatedly documented a modest positive correlation between the coherence of parents’ stories of their life experiences and their sensitivity in responding to their children. These findings suggest that parents who are able to construct personal accounts of the past in clear and credible manner may also have the ability to provide appropriate social contingencies when interacting with their children. Schwartzman and Wahler (in press) conducted an experimental test of this assumption by helping clinic-referred mothers to improve the coherence of their life stories. Results showed that these mothers increased their story coherence and they clearly benefited more from parent training than did a control group. We have reason to believe that enhanced conscious coherence in a parent’s life story promotes that adult’s mindful awareness of parenting issues. Our current work is focused on parents’ contemplation of changes in their parenting practices as a function of improvement in the coherence of their life stories.
 
Private, Yes. Covert, No.
FRANCOIS TONNEAU (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: In Skinner’s radical behaviorist framework, dreams, mental images, and hallucinations are conceived as covert behavioral events. I this talk, I argue that the radical-behaviorist view cannot be correct and that dreams, images, and the like are environmental instead of behavioral entities. This alternative view, derived from the early neorealism of Holt and Montague (and rooted in the notion of intrinsic physical property), supports four-dimensionalism as a metaphysics of time, and shares important commonalities with molar behaviorism as an explanation of psychological performance.
 
 
Symposium #199
International Symposium - Consumer Behavior Analysis: Empirical Extensions and the Marketing Environment of Choice
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Manila
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Gordon R. Foxall (Cardiff University)
Abstract: The behavioral economics of choice has recently been successfully extended to consideration of human consumers in natural settings. This symposium brings together detailed analyses of consumer brand choice which demonstrate the relevance to consumer behavior analysis of several additional dimensions of behavior analysis namely under-, over- and anti-matching, and interresponse intervals. In addition, it extends behavioral economics by presenting research derived from the Behavioral Perspective Model of consumer choice, namely the role of informational reinforcement in the determination of demand. Finally, the symposium draws upon that model to elucidate the environmental determinants of consumer choice by considering marketing influences in behavioral perspective.
 
Deviations from Matching in Consumer Choice.
GORDON R. FOXALL (Cardiff University), Sully Romero (Exeter University), Teresa C. Schrezenmaier (Cardiff Business School), Jorge Oliveira-Castro (Universidade de Brasília)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated that the matching law can be successfully applied to consumers’ patterns of choice with substitutable products at both individual and aggregated levels of analysis. This research aimed to clarify and generalize previous results found at an individual level using independent and complementary products. Aggregated results show that consumers behave according to the predictions of the matching law with qualitatively different reinforcers only when the data are considered on a weekly basis, i.e., as determined by a series of analogic FR schedules. For analogic VR schedules consumers showed matching independently of the degree of substitutability between the products. Further research is needed at an individual level for which the results were not conclusive, and with more extreme forms of complementarity between products.
 
Effects of Brand Informational Reinforcement Level upon Brand Performance.
JORGE OLIVEIRA-CASTRO (Universidade de Brasília), Roberta Pohl (Universidade de Brasília), Moema Dias (Universidade de Brasília)
Abstract: Although brand differentiation is often cited in marketing as essential to brand success, there is no theoretical agreement concerning its interpretation and measurement. The Behavior Perspective Model provides a theoretically consistent interpretation of brand differentiation. According to the model, consumer behavior is influenced by utilitarian and informational reinforcements. Utilitarian reinforcements are functional consequences intrinsic to the use of the product or service (e.g., a car provides door-to-door transportation), whereas informational reinforcements are social consequences (e.g., prestige and status) associated to the use of a product or service and are mediated by other persons (e.g., driving a Bentley provides social consequences not associated with driving a Fiat). Using a questionnaire to measure the level of informational reinforcement of different brands of supermarket products, two studies (Study 1, including 1509 observations for six products; Study 2, including 1447 observations for three products) investigated the influence of brand informational level upon market share and charged price. Regression analyses indicated that for eight of nine products increases in brand informational level were associated to increases in market share and revenue. This type of analysis may provide important information to decision makers concerning the financial returns of investing in brand differentiation within different product categories.
 
Post-reinforcement Pause in Grocery Shopping: Comparing Inter-purchase Time across Products and Consumers.
VICTORIA K. JAMES (Cardiff University), Jorge Oliveira-Castro (Universidade de Brasília), Gordon R. Foxall (Cardiff University)
Abstract: Reinforcement usually generates an immediate pause in responding, which is followed by an increase in response probability as time since the last reinforcement increases. Considering that human activities can be interpreted in the light of these findings, the present paper examined purchase probability as a function of inter-purchase time. Panel data, based on a sample of 80 consumers purchasing nine supermarket food products during 16 weeks, obtained from a commercial firm, were initially used. For each product category, inter-purchase time (across all consumers) was very similar for each shopping occasion and purchase probability increased as a direct function of the logarithm of time since the last purchase. A comparison (Anova) of inter-purchase times across products and consumers showed that average inter-purchase time differed across four subsets of products and across seven groups of consumers, showing also a significant interaction effect. A correlation (Pearson) between individual inter-purchase time and number of products bought on each shopping occasion indicated that consumers that shop more frequently buy larger number of products per occasion (r (76) = -.54, p < .000). The same analyses were also conducted with a larger data set. These results have several managerial implications and demonstrate the usefulness of a behavior-analytic framework to the interpretation of consumer behavior.
 
The Behavioral Economics of the Marketing Firm.
VALDIMAR SIGURDSSON (Cardiff University), Gordon R. Foxall (Cardiff University)
Abstract: Firms exist in order to market. Understanding their nature thus requires an account of consumer behavior as well as one of managerial response. Consumer and marketer behaviors are mutually reinforced and necessarily entail literal exchange. The marketing firm exists in order to reduce the transaction costs involved in finding and retaining consumers. The analysis portrays the complexity of the marketing firm and the marketing relationships which it facilitates. It uses behavioral economics to elucidate the ways in which behavior analytical concepts and techniques make sense of a central institution of modern economies.
 
 
Symposium #200
Discriminating and Attending
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Hong Kong
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: This symposium brings together recent research on discriminating and attending. Woods and colleagues will present data on the effects of quinpirole on cocaine-maintained responding and responding for cocaine-related stimuli. Shahan and Podlesnik will report on the effects of added free food on the persistence of observing. Vaidya and colleagues will show the effects of observing response requirements on the duration of the delay in a titrating delayed matching-to-sample procedure. Nevin and colleagues will present data on reinforcement contrast effects in response rate and accuracy of conditional discrimination.
 
Effects of the Dopamine D2/D3 Agonist Quinpirole on Responding Maintained by Cocaine and Cocaine-Associated Stimuli in Rhesus Monkeys.
JAMES H. WOODS (University of Michigan), Chad M. Galuska (University of Michigan), Gail Winger (University of Michigan)
Abstract: We investigated the effects of the dopamine D2/D3 agonist quinpirole on cocaine self-administration and responding maintained by cocaine-associated stimuli. Three rhesus monkeys produced cocaine (0.01 mg/kg/inj) on a multiple random-interval (RI) extinction (EXT) schedule. In some sessions, saline was substituted for cocaine. Pretreatments of quinpirole (0.0032-0.32 mg/kg) administered (i.v.) 30 min prior to sessions dose dependently decreased cocaine responding. Quinpirole also increased saline responding, but did not affect discrimination of the RI and EXT components. Subsequently, we investigated the effects of quinpirole on observing. Responses on one lever produced cocaine according to a mixed RI EXT schedule, and responses on two other levers intermittently produced stimuli correlated with the ongoing schedule component for 30 s (observing). Quinpirole dose dependently decreased both responding maintained by cocaine and observing responding without affecting discrimination of the two schedule components. In both experiments, reductions in response rates were observed at doses of quinpirole that were not selective for the dopamine D3 receptor; this rate suppression may reflect dopamine D2 receptor activity. Overall, the results provide little support for the contention that dopamine D3 selective compounds modulate the conditioned reinforcing functions of cocaine-associated stimuli. The finding that quinpirole increases saline self-administration, however, warrants further research.
 
Effects of Added Free-Food Presentations Uncorrelated with S+ on Observing Rates and Resistance to Change.
TIMOTHY A. SHAHAN (Utah State University), Christopher A Podlesnik (Utah State University)
Abstract: Observing responses may be considered analogous to attending to stimuli to be discriminated. Added response-independent reinforcers decrease baseline response rates but increase the persistence of responding maintained by primary reinforcement. We examined whether adding response-independent reinforcement to one component of a two-component multiple schedule of observing-response procedures would increase the persistence of observing. In both components, periods of a variable-interval (VI) 60-s schedule and extinction alternated on a center key with nondifferential stimuli (mixed schedule). Observing responses on a left key provided 15-s access to a stimulus correlated with the VI schedule. In the rich component, response-independent food was presented regardless of the schedule in effect (i.e., VI or extinction). Baseline observing, S+, and mixed food-key rates were either similar or lower in the rich component. There were no systematic differences in resistance to change during S+ periods, but resistance to change of observing and S+ mixed food-key responding was more persistent in the rich component. These results show that, despite producing likely decreases in the value of S+, added response-independent food increases the persistence of observing. These results suggest that, as with food-maintained behavior, the persistence of attending is governed by the overall rate of reinforcement in the context.
 
The Role of Extended Exposure to Sample Stimuli in a Titrating-delay-matching-to-sample Procedure with Pigeons.
MANISH VAIDYA (University of North Texas), Joshua A. Levine (University of North Texas), Brian D. Kangas (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Extending exposure to a sample stimulus facilitates the acquisition of conditional discriminations. Despite this knowledge and the consistent use of extended observing of the sample stimulus to facilitate conditional discrimination learning, there is little within subject parametric data available on the role of extended observing responses in the organization of conditional discrimination performances. This examined the role of extended observing on conditional discrimination by arranging a titrating-delay matching-to-sample procedure. Pigeons were exposed to a matching-to-sample procedure in which the delay between the offset of sample stimuli and the onset of comparison stimuli was continually adjusted as a function of the birds’ ongoing accuracy of performance. Specifically, two correct responses increased the delay between sample offset and comparison onset by 1 s whereas one incorrect response decreased the delay between sample offset and comparison onset by 1 s. Across conditions, the number of observing responses required to initiate the delay was increased systematically. Results showed that extended observing response requirements served to increase the adjusted delay value. These data suggest that extending the amount of exposure to sample stimuli attenuates the oft-reported delay-related decreases in accuracy. Implications for accounts involving attention and short-term remembering will be discussed.
 
Contrast Effects on Accuracy and Response Rate in Delayed Matching to Sample.
JOHN A. NEVIN (University of New Hampshire), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Four pigeons were trained in multiple schedules where key pecking produced delayed matching-to-sample (DMTS) trials on a variable-interval (VI) schedule. Reinforcer probability for correct matches was constant at .3 in one component and the conditions of reinforcement were varied in the second component. In Experiment 1, the varied component arranged DMTS trials with reinforcer probabilities of .9 or .1 across conditions. Both VI response rate and DMTS accuracy were directly related to reinforcer probability in the varied component, but in the constant component, contrast effects on VI response rate were unreliable and there was no evidence of contrast in accuracy of matching. In Experiment 2, the varied component was either VI with immediate food reinforcement or extinction. Reliable contrast effects were obtained in both VI response rate and DMTS accuracy in the constant component. These results join previous findings in demonstrating equivalent effects of reinforcement on free-operant responding and accuracy of discrimination.
 
 
Symposium #201
Fresh Out of the Box: Ecological Considerations in Conditioning Experiments With Pigeons
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Montreal
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Rachelle L. Yankelevitz (University of Florida)
Discussant: William D. Timberlake (Indiana University)
Abstract: Much has been discovered about the behavior of pigeons in operant labs over the last century, but as students of learning we sometimes overlook the “factory settings” of our subjects. How does the natural history of the pigeon interact with our experimental procedures? All manipulations act on a preexisting repertoire, and, as researchers, strengthening our abilities to behave with respect to this repertoire can only increase the power of our independent variables. Yankelevitz reviews the anatomy and physiology of pigeon sensory systems including color vision, olfaction, and visual and auditory acuity. Defulio and Hackenberg examine the features of drinking and present data on pigeons responding for water reinforcers in a token reinforcement context. Pinkston and Branch describe the locomotion of the pigeon and present data on locomotion with respect to feeding.
 
Making Sense of Pigeon Sensory Systems.
RACHELLE L. YANKELEVITZ (University of Florida)
Abstract: Experimental methodologies must make certain assumptions about the organism being studied. Among them are assumptions about perceptual capabilities with relation to the testing stimuli. This presentation is a brief survey of the literature on pigeon anatomy and physiology and its implications for basic behavioral research. Data are reviewed from psychophysical and operant procedures assessing the function of pigeon sensory systems. Topics emphasized include visual acuity, color perception, and olfactory and auditory discrimination. The talk addresses how the strengths and limitations of pigeon sensory systems influence our interpretations of our data and guide the questions about learning we can answer using pigeon subjects.
 
You Can Lead a Pigeon to Water AND Make Him Drink: Some Biological and Methodological Considerations in Using Water Reinforcers With Pigeons.
ANTHONY DEFULIO (University of Florida), Timothy D. Hackenberg (University of Florida)
Abstract: Pigeons are among the most commonly used subjects in behavioral research. The overwhelming majority of these experiments involve the reinforcement of subjects’ behavior through food presentation. An alternative that is not frequently explored is to reinforce pigeon’s behavior with water. Researchers may wish to use water delivery as a reinforcer for a variety of reasons. First, use of water as a reinforcer can serve as a convenient step for the assessment of the generality of behavioral relations. Perhaps more importantly, the use of water, either in isolation or concurrently with food, can open the door to kinds of question asking that is not possible with food alone. Topics such as conditioned reinforcement and choice are especially rife with opportunities for the use of water as a reinforcer with pigeon subjects. This presentation will cover many of the methodological and procedural issues that arise when pursuing a research program involving the use of water as a reinforcer. Issues concerning the delivery system and the establishing operations will receive special attention. Some empirical data related to these issues will also be presented.
 
Walk This Way: Recent Research on the Spontaneous Activity of Pigeons.
JONATHAN W. PINKSTON (University of Kansas), Marc N. Branch (University of Florida)
Abstract: Relatively little direct analysis on spontaneous locomotion and activity in birds exists, despite the importance of these measures for some theories, especially theories of motivation. The lack of measurement of locomotion is interesting given its necessary involvement in operant behavior, for example, it is generally required as the approach to operanda or reinforcing stimuli. Our lab has begun exploring locomotion of pigeons as a function of a variety of independent manipulations, examining the time course of habituation and alteration of activity by schedules of food delivery. The present report summarizes data from some of these studies, for example, in one experiment pigeons were exposed to a multiple fixed-ratio extinction schedule of food delivery. We found no evidence of spatial retreat or aversion to the signal correlated with extinction; a finding at odds with the available literature. The implications of such findings for current theories of schedule performance will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #202
Fulfilling the Mandate of Access to the General Education Curriculum for Students with Significant Disabilities
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Regency VI
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Fred Spooner (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Discussant: Fred Spooner (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Abstract: With current legislation (No Child Left Behind, 2002), alternate assessments must address : the domains of language arts/reading, math, and science and reflect access to the general curriculum. The purpose of this symposium is to extend the work we have done the last three years, and continue to explore the mandate of accessing the general curriculum for students with significant cognitive disabilities. The first study presented by investigators from UNC Charlotte will examine outcomes from a study designed to assess the acquisition of Algebra skills by high school students with moderate disabilities. A multiple baseline across three individuals design demonstrated the attainment of a nine step task analysis implemented via a constant time-delay to procedure to complete an algebraic equitation. In the second presentation, authors from Vanderbilt University examine the association between the level of maintenance of peer support programs for students with severe disabilities in secondary programs and selected special education teacher resources and the perspectives of special education teachers toward inclusion. The authors of the third presentation from the University of Illinois will examine the impact of universal design via a multiple baseline design across classes to evaluate student engagement and participation in high school health classes
 
Teaching Algebra to High School Students with Moderate Disabilities.
BREE JIMENEZ (University of North Carolina, Charlotte), Fred Spooner (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Abstract: Math instruction for students with moderate disabilities has typically been defined by skills such as money management, time telling, basic number identification, and one-to-one correspondence. For students with moderate developmental disabilities, there is emphasis on teaching math skills that are functional and promote lifelong independence (e.g., one-more than strategy). The expectation of high stakes testing has raised the standard of teaching academics skills to students with moderate and severe disabilities. The purpose of this study was to assess the effects of systematic instruction on the acquisition of algebraic problem-solving skills of high school students with moderate cognitive disabilities by extending what we already know about teaching math skills to include age-appropriate general curriculum instruction for high school students with moderate disabilities. Using a 9-step task analysis and a time-delay procedure, three students learned how to complete an algebraic equation in order to complete a functional task.
 
Variables Influencing the Sustainability of Peer Support Programs.
NITASHA M. CLARK (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: This study examines the association between the level of maintenance of peer support programs for students with severe disabilities in secondary programs and selected special education teacher resources and the perspectives of special education teachers toward inclusion. Study participants included 17 special education teachers from 8 middle school and high school programs implementing peer supports with Project Access. The primary dependent variable included the percentage of access to the general education curriculum (consistency and contact), the percentage of social interactions, and the quality of social interactions. Statistical test indicate selected special education teacher resources and the perspectives of special education teachers toward inclusion influence the maintenance of peer support programs. The results are discussed in terms of current educational practices for maintaining peer support program for secondary students with severe disabilities in inclusive settings.
 
Impact of Universally Designed High School Health Classes on Student Engagement and Participation.
STACY DYMOND (University of Illinois, Champaign), Adelle Renzaglia (University of Illinois, Champaign)
Abstract: This study investigated the use of universal design for learning (UDL) strategies to provide access to the general curriculum for students with severe intellectual disabilities in an inclusive, high school Health class. A multiple baseline across classes design was used to measure student outcomes in four sections of the class. Observations were conducted to determine student outcomes in the areas of engagement and participation. Reflections on the process of creating UDL classes at the high school level will be shared in light of the findings.
 
 
Symposium #203
Further Advances in the Assessment and Treatment of Feeding Problems
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Greenbriar
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Gregory K. Reed (Howard University)
Discussant: Linda J. Cooper-Brown (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Three recent studies on the assessment and treatment of feeding problems will be presented. In the first study, the food selectivity of two children is treated using a repeated taste exposure procedure. The second study describes a procedure for increasing bite acceptance using a demand-fading model associated with bite placement. The third study demonstrates the utility of home-based descriptive analyses for designing effective feeding interventions.
 
Using Exit Criterion for Repeated Taste Exposures in the Treatment of Food Selectivity.
KEITH E. WILLIAMS (Pennsylvania State Hershey Medical Center & Pennsylvania State College of Medicine), Bridget G. Gibbons (Pennsylvania State Hershey Medical Center & Pennsylvania State College of Medicine), Katherine Riegel (Pennsylvania State Hershey Medical Center & Pennsylvania State College of Medicine), Candace Paul (Pennsylvania State Hershey Medical Center & Pennsylvania State College of Medicine)
Abstract: Repeated taste exposure has been shown to increase preference and consumption of novel foods in non-clinical samples of children. The use of repeated taste exposures as a treatment of food selectivity in two children is described. The clinical applications of the taste exposure procedure will be discussed.
 
The Use of Demand Fading by Varying Bite Placements to Reduce Food Refusal in a Young Girl.
DANIELLE N. DOLEZAL (University of Iowa), Linda J. Cooper-Brown (University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa), Brenda J. Engebretson (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated the use of demand fading for increasing consumption of foods. In the current study, we evaluated the effectiveness of fading various bite placements within a treatment package on a young girls food refusal behavior. The participant was a 10-month old girl diagnosed with pulmonary hypertension, reflux, failure to thrive, and engaged in total food refusal. The primary independent variable examined was bite placement (different placements of the spoon with tastes of pureed food) within a demand fading treatment package that included escape extinction and noncontingent access to toys. Demand fading involved 3 successive bite placements (a) small tastes of puree swiped on a child’s upper and lower lips, (b) small tastes of puree presented just past the child’s lips, (c) small tastes of puree presented to the child’s tongue. A bite accepted with mouth closure includes all of the above responses (a-c) with the additional requirement of the child closing her or his mouth around the spoon resulting in the food being deposited in the child’s mouth. These successive bite placements were considered to reflect a hierarchy of effort required during each presentation. The child demonstrated differential food refusal behaviors when fading bite placement was implemented.
 
The Use of Descriptive Analysis to Identify and Manipulate Schedules of Reinforcement in the Treatment of Food Refusal.
CHRISTOPHER J. PERRIN (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Sean D. Casey (Pennsylvania State University), Stefanie Horvath (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Cheryl Merical (N/a)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated the utility of manipulating schedules of reinforcement for appropriate and inappropriate mealtime behaviors in order to decrease food refusal. The purpose of this study was (a) to use descriptive assessment methods to identify existing positive and negative reinforcement schedules for appropriate and inappropriate mealtime behaviors, and then, (B), to systematically manipulate those schedules to treat food refusal. Two children diagnosed with failure to thrive participated in the study. Data were collected during meals conducted by the child’s caregivers to identify current schedules of positive and negative reinforcement. The results indicated high rates of negative reinforcement for inappropriate behavior and low rates of positive reinforcement for appropriate behavior. Next, a reversal design was used to assess the efficacy of caregiver’s implementation of differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) and DRA plus escape extinction on rates of appropriate and inappropriate mealtime behaviors. Results indicated that for both participants, bite acceptance increased and refusal behaviors decreased under DRA and escape extinction contingencies. Reliability averaged above 80% across sessions for both participants.
 
 
Symposium #204
International Symposium - ISEECI®: A Model for the Creation of Unique Systems in the Support of Behavioral Analytic Interventions
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
International Ballroom North
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jorge Luis González-Quijano (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: The application of technology in different models of intervention has been used greatly on different areas like medicine, but psychology has not been impact as other areas of acknowledge. The application of the technology has been developed in two different ways. The first one is adopting hardware and software preexisting in the market to support the models of intervention. The second one is the creation of hardware and software designed especially for supporting a specific need of a project. This presentation is oriented in this way, trying to show the feasibility of creating specific systems avoiding the problems that present adaptations or adoptions of instrumental systems designed. The Integral System for the Evaluation of Educational and Clinical Interventions ISEECI®, is a software designed in Mexico to manage clinical and educational interventions giving support for the design, evaluation and application of rehabilitation programs based on Applied Behavior Analysis with a population with developmental disabilities, brain injury and behavioral resulting of the interventions. The purposes of this presentation is to share the experience of the way that ISEECI® was designed, and strengthening the creation of new and innovator systems on our field.
 
The Use of Technology to Establish Objectives of Intervention.
MARCO RAÚL CAMPUZANO-RODRIGUEZ (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación), Gabriela De Guadalupe Téllez-Sánchez (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Alma Georgina Hernández-Mendoza (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Jorge Luis González-Quijano (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: To evaluate developmental disabilities is necessary apply psychological tests, check lists, functional analysis, etc. ISEECI helps through electronic formats with the integrations of these elements. The software has psychological tests that in a quantitative way evaluate neuropsychological factors. The software also has a tool to design functional analysis applying observational methodology with the purpose to identify related variables to the specific problem. In this sense direct observation manuals are created and are applied in a virtual video recorder, collecting the registries data using reliability formulas and later the data is automatically graphed by the software giving a report to help in the therapeutic decisions of the intervention. The software has different check lists to evaluate several areas such as academic, behavior, communication, recreational, self care, domestic activities, vocational activities, etc. Finally the software makes an integration of all the results of the evaluation with graphs and descriptions to generate a written report for the family and for the specialists involved in the case. The software has the capacity to create data bases with some information of the evaluation and later can be statistically treated.
 
The Use of Technology to Develop Analytic Behavior Interventions.
ALMA GEORGINA HERNÁNDEZ-MENDOZA (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Gabriela De Guadalupe Téllez-Sánchez (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Marco Raúl Campuzano-Rodriguez (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación), Jorge Luis González-Quijano (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: SEECI has an Applied Behavior Analysis tool and was design with a principal page to help in the creation of different reinforcement programs, using strategies such as token economy, behavioral contract, differential reinforcement, etc. This tool has a spreadsheet to enter the collected data, date, reliability data, description of phases and observations and the data is automatically graphed. The software can show different types of graphs: multiple base line, single graph, different behaviors in one graph, etc. The software has a data analysis tool using the average of the different phases of the intervention to analyze level changes and the direction of the learning curve. ISEECI has the capacity to export the data to Excell or any other program that read text in order to make different type of data analysis.
 
The Use of Technology for the Creation and Evaluation of Individual Educational Plan (IEP).
GABRIELA DE GUADALUPE TÉLLEZ-SÁNCHEZ (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Alma Georgina Hernández-Mendoza (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Marco Raúl Campuzano-Rodriguez (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación), Jorge Luis González-Quijano (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: Mexico does not have as in USA the IDEA law that regulates the services in special education. Centro Educativo Neurocom is a school for children with developmental disabilities and behavioral problems that make an adaptation of the proposals of the Individual Educational Plan and Short Term Objectives integrating the formats into the software ISEECI. The software administrates the creation and application of the IEP and STO. In the educational program of SECCI there is a Behavior Analysis tool that evaluates the progress of the objectives proposed in the IEP and STO through the spreadsheet, automatic graphic and analysis of the different phases of the treatment. The software has a catalog with 80 thousand exercises (academic, learning, motor skills, etc.) divided in areas to help the teachers to administrate the application at the classroom. ISEECI also has a communication system that allows at the moment an interchange of information between the professionals involved in the case.
 
The Use of Technology to Train and Evaluate Professionals in Behavior Analysis.
JORGE LUIS GONZÁLEZ-QUIJANO (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación), Gabriela De Guadalupe Téllez-Sánchez (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Alma Georgina Hernández-Mendoza (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Marco Raúl Campuzano-Rodriguez (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: The specialized literature in Applied Behavior Analysis has shown a great number of strategies for the training and evaluation of professionals in the area, for example, the creation of direct observation instruments, the use of visual guides with professors and specialists, the use of bug in the ear with therapists, paper evaluations about the professionals achievement, the creation of social validity procedures, etc. The software ISEECI developed several tools of evaluation using and integrating the strategies mentioned above thus the software support de administration with the evaluation of the professionals with videotapes of their performance and applying the observational methodology for the feedback. The use of visual guides and bug in the ear are used to train the therapists. The software also has a performance evaluation where the software itself records the activities that the professionals have made when interacting with the software giving feedback to each professional comparing their performance with norms already established by the policies and procedures manual.
 
 
Panel #205
CE Offered: BACB
School-Wide Positive Behavior Support as an Application of Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
Roswell
Area: TPC/EDC; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Carie L. English, Ph.D.
Chair: Carie L. English (University of South Florida)
DONALD K. KINCAID (University of South Florida)
LAUREN A. LOVELL (School District of Lee County)
Abstract:

Baer, Wolf, and Risley (1968, 1987) described behavior analysis as applied, behavioral, analytic, conceptual, technological, effective, and displaying generality. Each of these characteristics defines behavior analysis as a field of research and application. School-wide positive behavior support (SWPBS) is an application of behavior analysis. SWPBS also can be defined within the context of these seven characteristics, meeting the criteria for applied behavior analysis established by Baer et al. This presentation will discuss school-wide positive behavior support within the context of the seven characteristics identified by Baer et al. to demonstrate that SWPBS applies behavior analytic principles and technology to non-clinical populations to demonstrate the utility (ecological validity) of behavior analysis.

 
 
Symposium #206
CE Offered: BACB
International Symposium - Stimulus Control and Verbal Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–4:20 PM
International Ballroom South
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Caio F. Miguel (New England Center for Children)
Discussant: Martha Hübner (USP Sao Paulo, Brazil)
CE Instructor: Caio F. Miguel, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Verbal behavior and stimulus control have evolved as separate areas within behavior analysis. However, attempts have been made to combine research traditions from these two areas in order to explain and teach complex behavior. Braga-Kenyon et. al. investigated whether defined responses can be included in equivalence relations. The results so far suggest that defined responses, along with the stimulus members of an analytic unit, participate in the equivalence relation. Andrade et al. compared the effectiveness of two teaching procedures to establish auditory-visual discrimination; progressive delay of point prompts and no-delay. Results suggest, so far, that prompt delay is a more effective way to teach conditional discriminations. Such results raise questions regarding the behavioral events that take place during the delay of the prompt. Perez-Gonzales et al., investigated whether teaching operants with the same response form as the intraverbal targeted to emerge would facilitate emergence. Results suggest that teaching tacts and intraverbals with the same response as the probed intraverbals facilitates the emergence of intraverbals.

 
Inclusion of Defined Responses in Equivalence Relations: A Systematic Replication of Manabe et al. (1995).
PAULA RIBEIRO BRAGA-KENYON (New England Center for Children), Maria Andrade (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children), Murray Sidman (N/a)
Abstract: The present study, with human subjects, provided systematic replication of a study reported by Manabe, Kawashima, and Staddon (1995), with budgerigars as subjects. In Experiment I, five adults were taught, during Phase 1, the relation visual stimuli (A1/A2) to defined responses (R1/R2), and then, during Phase 2, the relation visual stimuli (B1/B2) to visual stimuli (A1/A2). During Phase 2 trials, the samples were novel, and comparisons were the original discriminative stimuli (B1/A1 and B2/B2). When the sample stimuli appeared on the screen (B1/B2), any of the previously defined responses (R1/R2) produced the comparisons (A1/A2). In Experiment II two adults were exposed to the same procedures of Experiment I for 3 classes (A1/B1/R1; A2/B2/R2; and A3/B3/R3). Six of the seven participants came to respond to samples B during Phase 2 trials in the same way they responded to A, respectively, during Phase 1 trials. These results suggested that defined responses, along with the stimulus members of an analytic unit, participate in the equivalence relation.
 
Teaching Auditory-Visual Matching-To-Sample: A Comparison Between Prompt Delay And No Delay For Point Prompt Procedures.
MARIA ANDRADE (New England Center for Children), Paula Ribeiro Braga-Kenyon (New England Center for Children), Nicole Groskreutz (New England Center for Children), Caio F. Miguel (New England Center for Children), Shannon Trimmer (New England Center for Children), Erin C. McDermott (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to compare a time delay prompt procedure and a no delay prompt procedure in teaching auditory-visual matching-to-sample. A thirteen-year-old female with autism participated in this study. Prior to the experimental phases, the participant demonstrated differentiated performance given an auditory visual matching-to-sample task with known stimuli. The Prompt Delay (PD) procedure involved a 1 s progressive delay fading of a point prompt. The No Delay (ND) procedure consisted of a 0 s delay point prompt across all teaching sessions. Mastery was demonstrated during post-training probe trials. These probe trials were conducted at the end of each session, with the stimuli from each condition interspersed. Primary dependent variables included the percentage of correct independent responses emitted during post-session probes and the number of trials to criterion for each procedure. Results obtained with this participant indicated that auditory visual discriminations were more promptly acquired using the PD procedure than the ND procedure. Attempts to replicate these results with additional participants are currently in progress.
 
The Effect of Teaching the Response in the Emergence of Novel Intraverbals.
LUIS ANTONIO PEREZ-GONZALEZ (Universidad de Oviedo, Spain), Carlota Belloso-Diaz (Universidad de Oviedo, Spain), Gladys Williams (Applied Behavioral Consultant Services, NY)
Abstract: Previous studies have shown that children often do not demonstrate the emergence of intraverbals. We wondered whether teaching operants with the same response form as the intraverbal targeted to emerge would facilitate this emergence. First, we taught an intraverbal with two relevant stimuli and one response (e.g., we taught, “Name the tribe of Pakistan” –the correct response was, “The Kalash”) and then we probed the intraverbal with the stimulus/response functions of two relevant elements inverted (e.g., we reversed the functions of “Pakistan” and “Kalash” by asking “Name the country of the Kalash” –the correct response was “Pakistan”). Children did not show the emergence of the novel intraverbals. Subsequently we used either one of two conditions. In Condition 1, we taught participants to tact a picture with the same response as the probed intraverbal. When novel intraverbals were probed again, five of six children showed the emergence of the novel intraverbals. In Condition 2 we taught the children another intraverbal with the same response as the probed intraverbal. When novel intraverbals were probed again, all children showed emergence. Results suggest that teaching tacts and intraverbals with the same response as the probed intraverbals facilitates the emergence of intraverbals.
 
 
Paper Session #206a
International Paper Session - Developmental Disabilities: Simultaneous Prompting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Centennial Ballroom IV
Area: DDA
Chair: Elif Tekin-Iftar (Anadolu University, Turkey)
 
Effectiveness of Simultaneous Prompting in Small Group: The Opportunity of Acquiring Non-target Skills through Observational Learning and Instructive Feedback.
Domain: Applied Research
FUNDA BOZKURT (Anadolu University, Turkey), Oguz Gursel (Anadolu University, Turkey), Elif Tekin-Iftar (Anadolu University, Turkey)
 
Abstract: A multiple probe study across behaviors, replicated across students, assessed the effectiveness of simultaneous prompting (SP) in a small group teaching arrangement on teaching (a) to show the provinces, rivers, and border countries of Turkey on a map and (b) to expressively identify the names of the symbols which are usually used in math. Subjects of the study were five middle school age students with developmental disabilities. Maintenance and generalization effects of SP were investigated in the study as well. Moreover, acquisition of non-target skills was also assessed through instructive feedback and observational learning. Results show that SP was effective. Students generalized and maintained the acquired behaviors. Assessment of observational learning and instructive feedback data showed that students acquired non-target skills to certain extents. Implications and future research needs will be discussed in the session.
 
Parent-Delivered Community-Based Instruction with Simultaneous Prompting on Teaching Chained Skills to Children with Developmental Disabilities
Domain: Applied Research
ELIF TEKIN-IFTAR (Anadolu University, Turkey)
 
Abstract: The importance of parents involvement in the education of the children with developmental disabilities are well documented in the literature. The present study was designed to examine the effects of parent-delivered community-based instruction with simultaneous prompting on teaching purchasing skills at different stores. A multiple probe design across behaviors are used. Community based instruction was provided at a convinient store, at a pastry shop, and at a cafe. There were daily probe, instruction and maintenance probe sessions in the study. The results and future research needs will be shared with the audience during the session.
 
The Effectiveness of Simultaneous Prompting in Teaching Car Washing to Children with Mental Retardation with Error Corrections
Domain: Applied Research
AYTEN UYSAL (Anadolu University, Turkey), Mehmet Topsakal (Anadolu University, Turkey)
 
Abstract: In this study, the effectiveness of simultaneous prompoting in teachingg car washing to children with mental retardation with error correctrons. Furthermore, the generalization effect of simultaneous prompting across settings, time, and materials was examined, and a follow-up observation 1, 2, and 3 weeks after the termination of the instruction was conducted. Multiple-probe across subjects—one of the models of single-subject research design—was conducted to determine the effectiveness of simultaneous probe instruction in this study. Three male students (16-20 years of age) with mental retardation attending the preparation course for reading and writing in Eskisehir participated the study. Sessions of full probe, daily probe, instruction, observation and generalization were carried out to assess the effectiveness of simultaneous promoting carried out through error correction on teaching how to wash a car to children with mental retardation. All sessions occured in one-to-one teaching setting. Verbal probe and modeling were used simultaneously for the instruction, and physical probe was included as error correction. The skill was taught through teaching all the steps involved at the same time. Both inter-observer and procedural reliability data were collected for the study, and the effectiveness of simultaneous prompting was determined on graphic analysis. The findings of the study revealed that simultaneous prompting instruction carried out with error correction in teaching how to wash a car to children with mental retardation was effective, and the learned skill was still persistent 1, 2, and 3 weeks after the application. The results of generalization sessions done across three different settings, time, and materials showed that all students displayed the correct response with 100% consistency.
 
 
 
Special Event #207
CE Offered: BACB
2006 ABA Tutorial: Behavior Analysis: History and Historiography
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom I
Area: DEV
Chair: Alexandra Rutherford (York University)
CE Instructor: Edward K. Morris, Ph.D.
 

2006 ABA Tutorial: Behavior Analysis: History and Historiography

Abstract:

Notwithstanding B. F. Skinners comment that Historical research can take the place of scientific inquiry and give one time out for an honorable snooze, while pretending to carry on, historical research in behavior analysis directly engages the fields basic and applied science, as well as it science education. Just as behavior analysis is forward-looking, so too is historical research. With this as background, this tutorial describes the foreground -- the fields history and historiography. That is, it (a) relates the evolution of behavior analysis as a science, discipline, and profession and (b) delves into methodological considerations relevant to conducting historical research and the interpretation of its findings. The main topics I address are the value history inquiry (e.g., predicting current function), the historical subject matter (e.g., events, individuals, institutions), approaches to historical analysis (e.g., qualitative, quantitative), and the methodological considerations (e.g., zeitgeist vs. great person history). Throughout the tutorial, I interweave a history of behavior analysis that is informed by these values, areas, and methods, as well as by other considerations (e.g., origin myths; viz. the cognitive revolution). I also present historical puzzles and problems that vary widely enough to suit the interests and abilities of junior colleagues and senior scholars alike, as they seek to advance behavior analysis as a cultural practice. Finally, I describe a variety of resources that can promote effective historical inquiry. I close with some comments on what it is like to be an historian of behavior analysis.

 
EDWARD K. MORRIS (University of Kansas)
 
Dr. Edward K. Morris received a B.S. in psychology from Denison University and a Ph.D. in psychology from the University of Illinois, with Sidney Bijou and William Redd as his mentors. His sole academic position has been in the Department of Human Development and Family Life (HDFL) at the University of Kansas. Although he has published studies of empirical research, a latent interest in conceptual issues led him to the history of behavior analysis. He has edited books on its seminal figures (e.g., Watson, Skinner), written on the field’s history (e.g., behavior analysis in the 1950s), and analyzed the meaning of relevant terms (e.g., radical behaviorism). Lately, he has been pursuing the integration of like-minded perspectives in the behavioral, social, and cognitive sciences (e.g., theories of direct action), which have histories, too. Dr. Morris has been president of ABA and APA Division 25, and KansABA. He has served as editor of The Behavior Analyst and the Division 25 Recorder. He is a Fellow of APA, a Founding Fellow of APS, and a BCBA. As the Department’s chairperson, he has overseen its recent evolution -- red in tooth and claw -- from HDFL to the Department of Applied Behavioral Science.
 
 
 
Special Event #208
CE Offered: BACB
2006 ABA Tutorial: Incidental Teaching and Students with Autism: How to Do It and How to Appreciate the Research
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: AUT
Chair: Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University)
CE Instructor: Gail G. McGee, Ph.D.
 

2006 ABA Tutorial: Incidental Teaching and Students with Autism: How to Do It and How to Appreciate the Research

Abstract:

Incidental teaching is a behavior analytic technique that can be especially useful for teaching new behaviors. Incidental teaching calls for arranging the environment so that highly reinforcing materials or activities are available to the child. But the key to incidental teaching is that the child is obligated to interact with the teacher or other adults in the environment in order to gain access to the materials or some aspect of the activity. Typically arrays of incidental teaching opportunities are arranged. In this way, naturally reinforcing interaction with teachers is optimized, as are opportunities for reinforcement. Incidental teaching has a long history of use with children with autism and it continues to be an efficient and effective teaching technique. In this invited tutorial Dr McGee will feature a review of the literature on the use of incidental teaching and offer a series of recommendations for incorporating incidental teaching in any intervention program for children with autism.

 
GAIL G. MCGEE (Emory University School of Medicine), Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University)
 
 
 
 
Paper Session #210
Analyzing and Treating Undesirable Behavior
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:30 PM–4:50 PM
University
Area: EDC
Chair: Benjamin W. Smith (University of Texas, Austin)
 
Use of Time-Based Schedules of Reinforcement to Reduce Disruptive Behaviors of Students with Emotional/Behavioral Disorders in a Classroom Setting
Domain: Applied Research
ROBERT E. O'NEILL (University of Utah), Karina Rasmussen (University Neuropsychiatric Institute)
 
Abstract: Three students with various mental health diagnoses who attended a special classroom program in a day treatment facility participated. Functional assessment indicated that their disruptive behavior was motivated by seeking attention. Time-based schedules of reinforcement were implemented in which attention was provided on a "noncontingent" basis. The results indicated that the procedure was effective in reducing disruptive behavior, and it was possible to thin the schedules to make implementation easier for the classroom staff. The study adds to and extends the research base on the use of time-based schedules of reinforcement in more typical applied settings.
 
Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Non-Exclusionary Time-Out Behavior Reduction Procedure with Children with Autism
Domain: Applied Research
AMY M. BOSSICK (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism), Erin Cahill (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism), Travis Haycook (Cleveland Clinic Center for Autism)
 
Abstract: This case study will describe the implementation and outcome data of a non-exclusionary time-out procedure applied to a child with autism spectrum disorder in a classroom setting within a specialized school for children with autism. During baseline condition, the student displayed the defined behavior targeted for reduction at a rate of 2124.72 per day. Through the systematic use of a non-exclusionary time-out design, the rate of the behavior was reduced to 63 per day, representing a 97.03% reduction in behavior. The behavior rate was maintained over time, within multiple settings and teachers through the continued use of a systematically applied reinforcement design.This presentation will outline and describe the use of a non-exclusionary time-out procedure and reinforcement system to address the specific behavior of a student. Functional assessment of behavior will be described. Data will be presented demonstrating rate of reduction, generalization effect and maintenance.
 
Using Sequential Analyses as a Functional Assessment Process in Applied Contexts
Domain: Applied Research
BENJAMIN W. SMITH (University of Texas, Austin)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this data-based presentation is to discuss and show examples of how sequential analysis procedures can be used to document the functional contingencies present in applied contexts. The application of sequential analyses to support hypothesis development for behaviors whose intensity is such that functional analyses procedures may raise ethical concerns is discussed. In addition the ability of sequential analysis procedures to better document relationships between immediate and more distal variables is provided.
 
 
 
Symposium #211
CE Offered: BACB
Expanding Applications of Behavior Analysis in Schools
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:30 PM–4:20 PM
Courtland
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: John A. Northup (University of Iowa)
CE Instructor: Cynthia M. Anderson, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The field of behavior analysis has much to offer schools and, in recent years the number of behavior analysts working with schools has increased markedly. In this symposium we present state of the art, data-based methods of assessment and intervention that (a) illustrate how behavior analytic principles and technology can affect meaningful and positive changes in schools, and (b) demonstrate how specific strategies might be applied to assist individual students or groups of students in a school.

 
An Analysis of Imperative Statements and Preference for Control with Elementary School Children.
JASON M. STRICKER (University of Iowa), John A. Northup (University of Iowa), Terry S. Falcomata (University of Iowa), Kelly M. Vinquist (University of Iowa), Brenda J. Engebretson (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Functional analyses were conducted with three children who made excessive imperative statements in a classroom setting. Results for each child suggested that contingent access to control of a leisure activity increased rates of imperative statements compared to noncontingent control and free play conditions. We then conducted a series of concurrent operants assessments using procedures similar to Harding et al. (1999) that varied the availability of therapist attention and access to high or low preferred toys. All three children chose therapist directed play with high preferred toys over directing the therapist to play with low preferred toys. However, three patterns of allocation were observed when only low preferred toys were available. Matt chose therapist directed play with high preferred toys, but chose to play alone when low preferred toys were available. Jeff chose therapist directed play over playing alone with high or low preferred toys. Paul chose to play alone regardless of preference and only selected the therapist directed play choice when the alternative was to sit alone. These data will be discussed in terms of control as a reinforcing consequence and social stimuli such as attention and access to high preferred activities as abolishing operations for behaviors maintained by control.
 
Classroom Based Functional Analysis:A Model for Assessing Challenging Behaviors within the Classroom Environment.
MARK J. PALMIERI (Rutgers University), Karen L. Lenard (Temple University), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University), Aurelie Welterlin (Rutgers University), Diane Antinoro (Rutgers University), Robert LaRue (Rutgers University), Sandra L. Harris (Rutgers University)
Abstract: The utility of functional assessment has been well established in the research literature. Over the last 30 years, a number of functional assessment methodologies have emerged (i.e., indirect methods, descriptive analysis, analogue functional analysis). Analogue functional analyses (e.g., Iwata et al., 1982/1994) are considered to be the most precise functional assessment methods, yet these procedures are rarely used outside of highly controlled clinical settings. The purpose of the current investigation was to: a) evaluate the use of a brief classroom-based model of functional analysis using teachers as therapists; and b) evaluate the degree of correspondence between the different methods of functional assessment (e.g., descriptive analysis, classroom-based FA, analogue FA). The results indicate that teachers can be effectively trained to implement functional analysis procedures with high levels of integrity in the classroom. In addition, the results also indicate that the correspondence between functional assessment techniques was relatively high, although DA tended to over-identify functions of behavior.
 
Check-in Check-out: Evaluation of a Targeted Group Intervention in Elementary Schools.
AMY KAUFMAN (University of Oregon), Sarah A. Fairbanks (University of Oregon), Anne Wonderly Todd (University of Oregon), David Guardino (N/a)
Abstract: N/a
 
An Analysis of the Effectiveness of the Behavior Education Program.
KATHERINE SANDRA MACLEOD (University of Utah), Leanne Hawken (University of Utah)
Abstract: The Behavior Education Program (BEP) is a modified check-in, check-out, targeted intervention implemented school-wide with students at risk for increasing occurences and intensity of behavior problems. Until recently, research documenting the effectiveness of targeted or secondary level interventions has been limited. This presentation will present two analyses of the effectiveness of the BEP in an elementary school setting. The first analyses will report the effects of the BEP on office discipline referrals for students participating in the intervention. These results indicate that the BEP was effective with 9 out of 12 students or 75% of the students who received the BEP. The second analysis used functional behavioral assessment to evaluate the relationship between the function of the student's problem behavior and the effectiveness of the BEP. Results support the use of functional behavioral assessment in determining appropriateness of the BEP for individual students and when individualized intervention is necessary. Program implementation fidelity and social validity ratings for the BEP will also be presented.
 
 
Paper Session #212
Teacher Education to Promote Effective Practices
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:30 PM–4:50 PM
Inman
Area: EDC
Chair: Daniel E. Hursh (West Virginia University)
 
Helping Teachers Develop Evidence-Based Practices
Domain: Service Delivery
DANIEL E. HURSH (West Virginia University), Reagan P. Curtis (West Virginia University), Terence Ahern (West Virginia University)
 
Abstract: Teachers and teacher education students are required to use evidence-based practices when teaching. One way to assure that this happens is to guide them in identifying the evidence and translating it into practices and monitoring plans useful in their classrooms. This address will describe the use of a graduate course in Educational Psychology as the means for having teachers and teacher education students develop their own evidence-based practices by relying on what they can find in research reports in ERIC to describe practices and plans for monitoring the impact of those practices. When feasible the teachers have actually implemented the practices, recorded the results, and made instructional decisions based on those results.
 
Teaching Teachers to Internalize Senstive Measures of Student Accuracy
Domain: Service Delivery
STEVEN J. WARD (Whole Child Consulting), Teresa A. Grimes (Whole Child Consulting)
 
Abstract: It is important to integrate children with special needs into typical classrooms, to the greatest practical degree. One of the many challenges faced during this process is curricular modification. One way to address this issue is to present a teacher with a variety of ways to modify curricula (e.g., add visual support for expressive tasks). First, though, teachers need to know WHEN to modify curricula. Two sides must be balanced against each other: maintaining sufficient student success and providing opportunities to respond to challenging material. Modifications need to occur in between consultant visits in order to provide this balance. Many teachers struggle to identify student failure, especially during group instruction. A typical pattern involves a teacher asking a question in 5 different ways before a student is correct, making the student 20% successful. This paper documents a data collection procedure that quickly helped one teacher develop sensitivity to student failure and modify tasks in a timely manner. This is a data based presentation.
 
More than Looking the Part
Domain: Service Delivery
RODNEY A. CAVANAUGH (State University of New York, Plattsburgh)
 
Abstract: When a parent, teacher, or administrator passes an open classroom door and observes a neatly attired adult addressing a large group, sitting with a small group, or working side by side with an individual, the initial impression may be that the adult is a teacher teaching because she conforms to the image one expects to see in a classroom.. A casual and momentary observation, however is not sufficient to judge whether or not learning is taking place. Do students demonstrate a specified outcome as a result of her instruction? If they do, she is teaching. The passers by were right. Should any of the casual observers ask, “How do you know your students are learning?” or “Can you demonstrate a relationship between what you do and what your students achieve?” are questions that require a teacher to do more than look the part. An important component of teachers’ initial training should teach them the skills to answer, with confidence, these questions.This session will present a strategy for setting the occasion for beginning teachers to do more than look the part.
 
 
 
Symposium #213
Terrorism: How Can Behavior Analysts Help?
Sunday, May 28, 2006
3:30 PM–4:50 PM
Lenox
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Roger W. McIntire (University of Maryland)
Abstract: Terrorism presents an urgent challenge to our civilization. Does behavior analysis know enough to help in the struggle against this threat? While the nature of threats can take many forms, the presentations here will focus on behavioral applications that illustrate strategies in selected problem areas. Dr. Donald K. Pumroy's presentation examines three sources of influence on the behavior of suicide bombers and how beneficial modifications of these sources could be accomplished. Dr. Leo Walder will address the setting conditions that might restrict the efforts of behavior analysts in investigating alternative strategies. He examines the language of patriotism as a limiting factor in our creative approach to the broader problem. Dr. Judy G. Blumenthal will discuss how the emotional effect a terrorist creates can extend to a large population of persons who do not directly experience or witness the terrorist events. She identifies possible physiological changes and perceptual processes that may mediate the broader effect. In addition to the impact of media policies, Dr. Roger McIntire will address personal freedom issues involved in home security policies and how, even with a large margin for individual freedoms, the behavior analytic approach may still improve the identification of terrorists and influence their intentions.
 
Suicide Bombers and Their Mentors.
DONALD K. PUMROY (University of Maryland)
Abstract: The author would be quick to admit that his only knowledge of terrorism comes from the media and he is in no way connected with government. However, the suicide bombers are people and as such their threatening behaviors are controlled by familiar behavior principles. As in any people problem, one looks for the reinforcers for these young men and the factors involved in their learning. Three groups of key people can be identified that have taught and reinforced the behaviors leading to the crucial suicidal behavior of blowing themselves up near a target. The first is the clerics who may inadvertently shape and encourage misguided religious interpretations of these young men. Another powerful influence and one that might have an opposite and positive effect on the crucial behavior would be mothers and family who may have not attended important developments in religious interpretations. The last group and a powerful one would be their peers. Each of these groups will be discussed and analyzed from a behavioral view that suggests how the behaviors of these three groups might be changed so that they in turn could reduce the suicide behavior of their potential terrorists.
 
Terrorism: Emotion and How Behavior Analysis Can Help.
JUDY G. BLUMENTHAL (Associates for Behavior Change)
Abstract: Emotion is the relationship between mind and body in which physiological reactions influence perceptual events that result in further physiological reactions. The way an individual perceives an event can cause the body to subsequently respond in certain ways, such as elevating blood pressure and increasing perspiration. Through this process variables perceived as terrorist events or threatening behaviors can cause fear, terror, anger, panic, anxiety, long after the circumstances of the original event. These responses increase stress level, producing short-term and potentially long-term negative consequences to the body. Since emotions are intertwined with thoughts and behavior, responding with appropriate behavior to a perceived negative event can neutralize, reduce, or reduce that particular emotion, thus reducing the overall stress on the body. This paper will present methods and exercises using principles of applied behavior analysis that facilitate the restructuring of specific perceptual reactions that in turn can reduce the emotional reaction to terrorist-like events and behaviors.
 
Patriotism and the Behavior Analysis of Terrorism.
LEOPOLD O. WALDER (Behavior Service Consultants, Inc.)
Abstract: In our struggle with Terrorism we all need well-designed and properly implemented behavior analyses that will reduce the dangers from surprise attacks and will increase safety. My purpose in this presentation is to identify some events that are likely to lower the quality of the design of such behavior analyses or of their implementation. This paper examines the negative effects of patriotism upon our collective safety. In 1755 Samuel Johnson defined patriotism as the last refuge of scoundrels. In times of danger there are those who tell us what is patriotic behavior. They lay out prescriptions for behaviors to be rewarded and proscriptions for behaviors to be punished. Calling these pronouncements Patriotism wraps it all in a flag to make their words sacred and not subject to challenge.Given such edicts, we all can become less able to cope with the real dangers of terrorism because the officially defined thinking stifles our ability to devise creative solutions to the problem of terrorism. We shall examine the current effects of patriotism in an historical context extending back to Pericles in ancient Athens.
 
Homeland Security, Behavioral Profiling and the Media Viewpoint.
ROGER W. MCINTIRE (University of Maryland)
Abstract: This paper addresses the challenge to homeland security in areas of personal freedoms and other practical restraints needed to identify potential terrorists and prevent dangerous terrorist acts. The extent and nature of profiling is examined as an example of the personal freedom issue in improving public safety. In airline passenger screening, employment, and immigration, the use of profiling may be very effective, even under restrictions that differ for citizens and non-citizens. Dr. McIntire also explores the media's impact on the balance of personal freedom and safety in these times of terrorist threat. While media coverage may facilitate fear of terrorists, examples concerning the media policies presented in this paper show that the media may also encourage viewers, listeners, and readers that some aspects of the threat are under personal control. These aspects include individual travel and vacation habits, daily commuting routines and alert attitudes in public places. The feeling of personal control provided by the media viewpoint may also highlight the predictable aspects of the terrorist event and thereby reduce its terrorizing effect.
 
 
Paper Session #214
Analyses of Reinforcement and Intervention with Individuals with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Regency V
Area: AUT
Chair: Teresa A. Grimes (Whole Child Consulting)
 
Task as Reinforcer, for Reducing Task Avoidant Behavior
Domain: Service Delivery
TERESA A. GRIMES (Whole Child Consulting), Steven J. Ward (Whole Child Consulting)
 
Abstract: Service providers frequently encounter problem behaviors maintained by task escape or task avoidance. Sometimes, these problem behaviors are subtle, like self-stimulatory behavior or providing insufficient effort. The "default" treatment of these behaviors involves a type of escape extinction (e.g., physical prompts) for obvious problem behaviors, such as swiping instructional materials. For less-obvious escape/avoidance behaviors, such as insufficient attending, instructors usually increase the intrusiveness of the prompt and, if relatively skilled, differentially reinforce more-independent responses. Unfortunately, instructors sometimes end up reinforcing task responses and mild escape behaviors (e.g, whining) at the same time. Another alternative is to withold reinforcement until the task is calmly completed, which also has some unfortunate ramifications. Alternatively, instructors may be able to wait for the termination of the problem behavior while preventing access to reinforcers. Most children treated in this way learn to request access to the tasks they were previously trying to escape or avoid.
 
Social Interactions for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders Reinforcing?
Domain: Applied Research
YASEMIN TURAN (San Diego State University), James W. Halle (University of Illinois)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this presentation is to provide a theoretical framework for an intervention approach to establish “social responsiveness.” We also will share selected research findings and their implications. According to Halle, Chadsey-Rusch, Collet-Klingenberg, and Reinoehl (1995), social responsiveness is a continuous, not dichotomous concept. At one end of continuum, children are socially responsive: they readily initiate interactions and respond to others’ initiations. At the other end of continuum, children may actively avoid interacting and even proximity to others. From this perspective, children who lack responsiveness may move along the continuum depending on their level of skill and motivation. Possessing the requisite skill by itself is not sufficient to move along this continuum. Some children might acquire these skills, yet might not interact with others because these encounters are not reinforcing. For them, social partners are stimuli to be avoided. If children lack the motivation to be with others, they will have limited opportunities to learn any new skills. How does one enhance the reinforcing value of other people? Borrowing from Bijou and Baer (1965), people might acquire reinforcing properties in two ways: by association with either the presentation of positive reinforcers or by the removal of negative reinforcers.
 
 
 
Panel #215
Behavioral Treatment Special Cigarette Smokers Populations: Some Theoretical and Procedure Considerations
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Baker
Area: CBM/CSE; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sherman Yen (Asian American Anti-Smoking Foundation)
DAVID W. WESCH (Behavioral Ecology Consulting)
ROBERT M. STEIN (Lancaster, Pennsylvania)
ALLISON Y. LORD (Tobacco Outreach Technology, Inc.)
SHERMAN YEN (Asian American Anti-Smoking Foundation)
Abstract: Tobacco use remains a most devastating health issue worldwide. For decades, behavioral analysts have engaged in both basic research and clinical intervention in battling this problem from many different ways. Since tobacco addiction has both physiological and behavioral components, the present proposed panel discussion is aimed (1) to discuss diffusion of behavioral innovations of integrity in smoking cessation program development related issues. From theoretical prospective, as many innovative solutions to human problems have been developed and validated in the field of Applied Behavior Analysis. These innovations have spread into the general human service treatment world without attribution and often with significant drift from the original validated protocol. This process of adoption and only partial compliance to the integrity of the independent variable will be examined in the case of smoking cessation programs. Suggestions will be discussed relative to improving the integrity of any disseminated independent variable (2) to examine and share information treatment /prevention information on special smoking populations, these include the area of prevention/treatment of teen smoking, language limited new immigrant smoking and substance abuse smokers.By limited each discussant to 10 minutes for his (her) opening remarks of their own work, it will provide the base for sufficient time for ideal exchanges between the panelists and the audience.
 
 
Symposium #216
Empirical Measures of Pre-Service and In-Service Teacher Performance
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Auburn
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Lloyd D. Peterson (Idaho State University)
Abstract: This symposium will consist of four presentations that describe measures of pre-service based outcome measures of pre-service teacher candidates. Next, Larry Maheady will discuss how teacher work samples may generate credible evidence of teacher effectiveness. Then, Benjamin Lignugaris/Kraft will present descriptive data on special education teachers’ pedagogical skills from student teaching through their second year of teaching. Finally, Sheila R. Alber-Morgan will present data on measuring teacher performance based on their student’s performance.
 
Empirical Measures of Pre-Service Teachers: Measures of Standard’s Based Outcomes.
LLOYD D. PETERSON (Idaho State University), Stephanie M. Peterson (Idaho State University), Gail Coulter (Idaho State University)
Abstract: Since the enactment of No Child Left Behind (NCLB) there has been an increase in states attempting to measure students’ ability to meet criterion standards. This is not only true for students in K-12, but increasingly so for students in institutes of higher education. In this presentation, data will be presented that represents an effort to utilize a more empirical behavioral methodology to measure special education teacher candidates’ ability to meet state and Council for Exceptional Children (CEC) standards. Sample assignments that are required of teacher candidates to demonstrate their knowledge and skills will be shown, along with behavioral-based scoring rubrics for evaluating the candidate’s assignment. Pilot data on the extent to which observers can obtain interobserver agreement on these high-stakes measures will be provided. Results will be discussed in terms of the need for more behavioral measures of teacher candidates’ performance, as well as research on how to design and develop such measures.
 
Using Teacher Work Samples to Assess Pre-service Teachers’ Instructional Practice and Their Effects on Student Learning.
LAWRENCE J. MAHEADY (State University of New York, Fredonia), Gregory F. Harper (State University of New York, Fredonia), Michael Jabot (State University of New York, Fredonia)
Abstract: Teacher educators are under increasing political and scientific scrutiny to show that they improve teaching practice and student learning. Teacher Work Samples (TWS) have emerged as promising tools for assessing both practice and learning. This session shows how TWS can be used to generate credible evidence to support teacher effectiveness.
 
The Development of Special Education Teachers’ Pedagogical Skills: Student Teaching through the Second Teaching Year.
BENJAMIN LIGNUGARIS/KRAFT (Utah State University), Donald M. Stenhoff (University of Kentucky), Bryan J. Davey (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.)
Abstract: While there is a great deal of empirical knowledge about effective teaching practices, there is little information available about how these skills develop after teacher education candidates enter the workforce. When teachers enter the workforce local school districts provide differing amounts and types of professional development. Understanding what professional development is provided and how teachers’ effective teaching repertoires develop will help teacher education programs that supply teachers to local school districts focus teachers’ foundation preparation. In this presentation descriptive data on special education teachers’ pedagogical skills from student teaching through their second teaching year will be presented. The implications of this development for teacher preparation programs and teachers’ professional development will be discussed.
 
Assessing Student Performance As An Indicator of Effective Instruction.
SHEILA R. ALBER-MORGAN (The Ohio State University), Moira Konrad (The Ohio State University), Terri Hessler (The Ohio State University), James H. Cowardin (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: One possible measure of teacher performance and/or teaching methodologies/materials is the outcome skill/knowledge demonstrated by the students. In this presentation data will be present that reflect the effects of a teacher delivered program of instruction. Adventures in Language is a direct instruction program designed to accelerate the development of critical writing skills in the primary and intermediate grades. Using various curriculum-based measures, we examined the effects of this program on the quality and accuracy of written expression of fourth graders with and without disabilities attending an urban direct instruction charter school.
 
 
Panel #217
How Can Applied Behavior Analysts Develop and Experimentally Analyze Programs That Survive Post-research?
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Cairo
Area: OBM/TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Tom Welsh (Florida State University)
SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas)
BILL L. HOPKINS (Emeritus Auburn)
RICHARD W. MALOTT (Western Michigan University)
L. KEITH MILLER (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Panel members will discuss the innovative research described in the ABA symposium titled "A 37-year case study in the design and experimental analysis of a program that survives post-research." The goal is to better understand conceptual and methodological strategies that behavior analysts can use to develop and analyze behavior analytic programs that survive post-research. They will consider a variety of strategies including: (a) defining program survival as continued implementation by non-research staff under post-research conditions, (b) simulating post-research conditions by terminating researcher supervision and other services, (c) minimizing effort to implement and supervise programs, (d) using client-advocates as supervisors, (e) designing experiments when programs rely on natural consequences, (f) using behavioral and physical outcomes to supervise implementation of behavioral programs, (g) testing usability of programs implemented by non-research staff, (h) minimizing staff reactivity to research observations, (i) establishing program outcomes as reinforcers for implementers, supervisors and advocates and (j) targeting program outcomes that meet meta-contingencies. Panel members will examine possible strategies in terms of their implications for behavior analytic concepts and methodological practices. The panel will encourage participation by the audience.
 
 
Panel #218
Impoverished Environments and The Development of "Self": Implications for Clinical Interventions
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Kennesaw
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Leslie Rogers (University of Mississippi)
KELLY G. WILSON (University of Mississippi)
PATRICIA BACH (Illinois Institute of Technology)
CATHERINE H. ADAMS (University of Mississippi)
AMY MURRELL (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Much research has been conducted on the effect of impoverished environment on behavior patterns. With few exceptions, the animal literature supports that being reared in a depleted environment leads to lessened flexibility in learning and decreased behavioral activity. The parallel literature with humans is less clear; a body of evidence (i.e., resilience literature) supports the idea that some individuals flourish in less-than-ideal settings. The behavioral repertoire of some humans raised in impoverished environments is impoverished. However, many exhibit rich behavioral repertoires. Perhaps, the difference is that it is clearer what animals need. The definition of an impoverished environment for a rat is little or no access to socialization and essential tangibles. The term “impoverished environment” for a human may refer to the environment of a child who is raised in a poor family or who attends a poverty-stricken school, or to the group home for mentally disabled adults where sensory stimulation is minimal. Perhaps, it refers to a setting with all of these qualities but lacking in meaningful connections among people. This panel will discuss various definitions of impoverished environment and how these are related to the development of narrow and inflexible behavioral repertoires as well as the treatment implications.
 
 
Paper Session #219
Intervention to Develop Skills of Daily Living for Individuals with Autism
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Centennial Ballroom III
Area: AUT
Chair: Kari Jibotian (Devereux Foundation - Kanner Center)
 
Implementation of a Toothbrushing Training Program for Children with Autism in a Residential Setting
Domain: Applied Research
KARI JIBOTIAN (Devereux Foundation - Kanner Center)
 
Abstract: Reports have indicated that the need for dental hygiene among mentally retarded individuals is greater than that among individuals without retardation (Miller, 1965; Nickol, 1973). Few studies dealing with toothbrushing behaviors have been reported in the research literature. Of the studies reported, many have minimal utility due to the ambiguous nature of the reported results. This experiment investigated the relationship between implementation of a toothbrushing training program (based on applied behavior analysis principles) for staff in a residential treatment facility and improvements in independent toothbrushing behavior by the children. A sample composed of eight children diagnosed with Autistic Disorder as well as with Mental Retardation and living in a residential facility participated in the study. Half of the children began treatment immediately, and half were assigned to a wait-list control group. The main prediction was that the implementation of the toothbrushing training program would result in an increase in independent toothbrushing behavior by the children. Independent toothbrushing behavior was not expected to improve for children in the wait-list control group until after they began the treatment. Results were significant, showing that implementation of the toothbrushing training program resulted in improvements in independent toothbrushing behavior by the children.
 
Increasing Duration, Proximity to, and Acceptance of New Foods with a Child with Autism
Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA L. JOHANSEN (University of North Texas), Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-ruiz (University of North Texas)
 
Abstract: The effects of two positive reinforcement procedures to increase the duration, proximity to, and acceptance of new foods were evaluated with a young child with autism. During baseline, two groups of six food items each were presented to the child. Two of the foods on each plate were preferred foods, and four were non-preferred foods. One of the groups had slightly less contact and acceptance. This group of six foods was chosen for intervention. The other group remained in baseline as a comparison. The first experimental condition involved social attention contingent on closer and closer contacts to the food items. The second experimental condition involved a looser shaping contingency and access to short video clips as a consequence. The number of different types of contact the child engaged in with the food, the amount of time the child spent contacting the food, and the number of happy and rejecting episodes were measured. IOA ranged between 80% to 100% for all sessions. The second procedure resulted in increased duration of contact, increased variety of contact and increased happy and rejecting episodes. The results are discussed in the context of EIBI programming goals and balancing intervention efficacy and restrictiveness.
 
 
 
Paper Session #220
International Paper Session - Outcome Data from Established Autism Intervention Programs
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Regency VII
Area: AUT
Chair: Jay S. Birnbrauer (Murdoch University)
 
The Murdoch Early Intervention Program at 10 Years
Domain: Service Delivery
JAY S. BIRNBRAUER (Murdoch University), David J. Leach (Murdoch University)
 
Abstract: In 1993, we reported the results of our home-based intervention program for preschool children with autism. Although the Murdoch Intervention Program (MEIP) was intended to be a replication of the work of Lovaas, MEIP included about 20 hrs /week of 1:1 instruction rather than the 40hrs advocated by Lovaas. It differed in other respects such as more parental involvement and use of volunteers trained on-the-job. Nevertheless it appeared that 4 of the 9 children in the experimental group were showing signs of achieving normal levels of functioning after 2 years. These results were especially encouraging given the less intensity and thus reduced costs of MEIP. However, due to lack of resources MEIP had to be discontinued and the children were transitioned into the local school system before they had attained ‘graduation’ criteria. The 10 year follow-up showed that although none of the children regressed, none had maintained the rate of gain obtained during the intervention. All were attending educational settings for children with developmental disability. The long term results clearly indicate that if achieving normalcy is the goal then intensity of programming and the duration of the interventions should not be compromised.
 
Prediction of Outcome of Early Behavioral Treatment for Children with Autism; A Meta-Analysis
Domain: Applied Research
SIGMUND ELDEVIK (Center for Early Intervention, Oslo, Norway), Scott C. Cross (Florida State University & Lovaas Institute), Erik Jahr (Akershus University Hospital, Norway)
 
Abstract: Weekly treatment hours, age and IQ at intake are often said to be related to outcome of early behavioral treatment for children with autism. These variables were correlated against the IQ-change reported after ca 2 years of behavioral treatment. Data from 14 studies with a total of 168 children were included in the analysis. On a group level the results from this analysis suggests that treatment hours was by far the most powerful variable for predicting IQ-change. IQ at intake seem to have moderate predictive power, but no relationship between age at intake and IQ-change was found. No significant correlations where found when using individual data in the analysis.
 
Outcome in a Large-Scale Community-Based Intensive Behavioral Intervention for Preschool Children with Autism
Domain: Service Delivery
NANCY FREEMAN (Surrey Place Centre), Adrienne M. Perry (York University), Elizabeth Scott (Surrey Place Centre)
 
Abstract: The Ontario government launched a province-wide early intensive behavioral intervention (IBI) initiative in 1999, one of the largest programs of its kind. The purpose of the present study was to examine the outcomes for children at the Toronto Preschool Autism Service, the largest of the 9 Ontario regional IBI programs. All children (N=89) for whom intake and exit assessment data were available were included. Following treatment symptoms of autism were reduced significantly on the Childhood Autism Rating Scale. Children also gained significantly in developmental skills, doubling the initial rate of learning that they had shown prior to IBI. There was a complex pattern of results, taking into account children's initial functioning, age, and duration of treatment, such that there were 7 different outcome subgroups. For those children who were below age four at intake and moderate or above in developmental level, the outcomes were particularly impressive. This subgroup of children had a similar pattern of results to the model demonstration projects in the published literature, with a substantial proportion showing average cognitive and diagnostic profiles. The results of this program evaluation are significant, as they demonstrate that IBI can indeed be very effective in a community setting, under less-than-ideal conditions.
 
ABA Services for Autism: Affordable, Effective and Accessible to any Community.
Domain: Applied Research
MARK ADAMS (San Diego State University)
 
Abstract: Service provision for children and adults with A.S.D. diagnosis are typically expensive. This paper will present empirical data on both acquisition of targeted skills and reduction in behavior excesses for children diagnosed on the autism spectrum involved in an "after-school program" that is affordable, effective, accessible, and viable for any and every community with at least two children with autism or related disorders. BEST Consulting is a young agency (4 years young) and is committed to the dissemination of information beneficial to effective behavioral service provision. The specific data that will be presented consists of the following: -Acquisition of specific targeted skills will be presented in terms of the number of treatment hours completed before reaching targets -Targeted skills are typical of Autism ABA programs (imitation skills, vocal speech production, daily living skills, letter and number skills, object identification, discrimination skills, etc...) -Behavior Excess data. More specifically, data relevant to the reduction of behavior excesses will also be presented. Excesses include self-stimulatory behavior, mild aggression, running/eloping, vocal excesses such as screaming. -The Fiscal Costs of the program/per hour/per child. This data is perhaps the most relevant to the title and goal of the paper, which is to demonstrate than an AFFORDABLE and EFFECTIVE discrete-trial treatment program can be established for children within any community with needs for services.
 
 
 
Panel #221
CE Offered: BACB
Quality Assurance within Autism Service Programs
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Chicago A-F
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Mary Ellen McDonald, Ph.D.
Chair: Joanne Gerenser (Eden II Programs)
SHIRLEY DUNN (Eden II Programs)
EILEEN HOPKINS (Eden II Programs)
RANDY I. HOROWITZ (Eden II Programs)
Abstract:

Autism is a complex and challenging disorder. Agencies providing services to individuals with autism and their families are faced with meeting these complex challenges in a variety of different ways across many different settings. In order to insure that these services are provided in a safe and effective way and achieve the best possible outcomes, a comprehensive quality assurance program should be in place. The quality assurance program should provide oversight to areas such as student and consumer outcomes, incidence management, program compliance, consumer and staff safety to name a few. This panel will provide an overview of a comprehensive data based quality assurance program applied within a multi-program autism service delivery agency. Specifically, strategies employed within a childrens school program, an adult services program, in-home family support programs as well as residential group homes will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #222
Raising the Bar, an OBM Approach to Customer Service
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Vancouver
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Heather M. McGee (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Heather M. McGee (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Customer service is becoming increasingly important to organizations, with more than half of the gross domestic product in the United States being accounted for in the service industry, according to the US Department of Commerce (1997). Competitive advantage for companies often exists in their ability to serve and satisfy their customers. In the emerging information-based economy, it is often the case that the same technology and materials are available to all; therefore, many organizations are looking for ways to improve human performance in the area of customer service. The Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) literature has demonstrated the effectiveness of many techniques for changing human performance that could be useful in the customer service setting. The following three studies focused on improving customer service in various settings: a large retail chain store, a medical clinic waiting room, and a hospital pharmacy. An analysis of the results and limitations of each study will be discussed, along with the implications of the use of OBM techniques in these settings and suggestions for future research.
 
The Effects of Graphic Feedback, Goal Setting, and Positive Reinforcement on Customer Service Behaviors.
SHANNON M. LOEWY (Western Michigan University), Jon S. Bailey (Florida State University)
Abstract: The current study utilized a multiple baseline design to investigate the effects of graphic feedback, goal setting, and positive reinforcement on customer service behaviors in a large retail setting. The study took place in two locations of a large home improvement warehouse, both in Tallahassee, FL. Direct observation techniques were used to gather data on the dependent variables of customer greeting, eye contact, and smiling. After baseline data was collected, the first intervention phase, consisting of graphic feedback, was implemented. The feedback graphs were posted twice each week in the employee break room. The next phase included goal setting and positive reinforcement. Goals were developed based on current performance and were posted on the graphs. Managers delivered immediate, verbal reinforcement to employees after going through a manager training session administered by the experimenters. Modest results were seen for both interventions across all behaviors in both stores. Further analysis of the results, along with the implications of these results, will be discussed.
 
The Use of a Package Intervention to Improve the Customer Service Behaviors of a Medical Clinic Staff.
KRYSTYNA ORIZONDO-KOROTKO (Western Michigan University), Jon S. Bailey (Florida State University)
Abstract: With the rise of an increasingly competitive business market, customer service is becoming more important to organizations. The purpose of this study was to improve the customer service behaviors of a medical clinic staff using a package intervention. The waiting rooms of two medical clinics, owned by the same company, served as the setting and the participants were all of the receptionists working at both locations. Overall customer service was the main concern for improvement, pinpointed into five specific behaviors: greeting, smiling, use of the patient’s name, patient check-in, and small talk. An ABC multiple baseline across settings design was utilized in order to display experimental control. The first intervention was a combination of task clarification, in the form of a memo, and graphic feedback, so the employees would know their performance level. The second intervention consisted of goal setting and positive reinforcement. The findings showed that the biggest improvements in all behaviors occurred during the first intervention phase. All behaviors increased during both interventions, with smiling increasing to the highest mean occurrence (83%). Limitations and suggestions for future research will be discussed.
 
Reducing Wait Times in a Hospital Pharmacy to Promote Customer Service.
JULIE M. SLOWIAK (Western Michigan University), Bradley E. Huitema (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The quality of service received by a customer affects their satisfaction with the organization. To increase the probability that customers will return to an organization, it is critical that customers are satisfied with the organization's services. The amount of time customers spend waiting in line can affect their satisfaction with an organization's services (Gail & Lucey, 1997). This study examined the effects of a single intervention versus a combined intervention package to reduce wait times in a hospital's outpatient pharmacy. Customer satisfaction ratings were collected to determine the effect of a reduction in wait time on customer service satisfaction with wait time. An ABCB within-subjects design was used to assess both wait time and customers' levels of satisfaction with their wait time, where A = Baseline (no feedback and no goal setting), B = Customer Satisfaction Feedback, and C = Customer Satisfaction Feedback, Wait TimeFeedback, and Goal Setting for Wait Time Reduction. Results showed small to moderate reductions in wait time during intervention phases. Reduction in wait time had little effect on customers' levels of satisfaction with wait time. Limitations and suggestions for future research will be discussed,focusing on highly-variable environments.
 
 
Symposium #223
CE Offered: BACB
Skinners Analysis of Verbal Behavior: Applications for Multiple Operants, Environments, and Populations
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Learning Center
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: David W. Sidener (Lafayette College)
CE Instructor: William A. Flood, M.A.
Abstract:

Four papers will discuss basic and applied issues relative to the assessment and treatment of various verbal operants using Skinners analysis of Verbal Behavior. The first paper (Sidener) examines stimulus control over word usage of college students during interviews. The second paper (Flood) discusses how Skinners analysis of Verbal Behavior was used to increase manding of a child with autism when a discrete trial format was ineffective. The third paper (Barker) found discrete trial instruction to be highly effective in teaching tacts to children with developmental delays when this format was embedded into everyday activities at a preschool. Finally, the fourth paper (Firth, Sidener, and Carr) examined the effects of interspersing mands and tacts during acquisition training with preschool children.

 
Evidence for Stimulus Control of Word Usage in Semi-Structured Interviews.
DAVID W. SIDENER (Lafayette College)
Abstract: Thirty-seven college students were interviewed twice each and prompted to talk about issues commonly of interest to students. Interview questions in each of two sets contained one of a pair of matched target words. Students tended to answer questions in each session using target words that were embedded in that session’s questions. That is, when asked a question, participants’ answers tended to include target words embedded into that question rather than comparable, synonymous words from the corresponding questions. Findings are discussed in terms of Skinner’s description of the echoic and stimulus control over word.
 
A Case Study Comparison of Discrete Trial Training and Skinner’s Analysis of Verbal Behavior.
WILLIAM A. FLOOD (May South)
Abstract: The present study evaluated the effects of the Discrete Trial Training (DTT) and Verbal Behavior (VB) formats on daily rates of manding of a three-year old girl diagnosed with autism. The participant was enrolled in a home-based program based upon a model of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) for thirty hours a week. The participant emitted very little functional speech upon admission. Initially, a DTT format used to teach all skills, including mands. After four months of enrollment in the program, her rate of manding did not increase and her manding program was switched a VB format. Shortly after this transition, the total numbers of mands emitted per session increased dramatically. Results indicate that the VB format was superior in evoking mands for this participant. Implications of these results upon intensive behavioral program development and future research will be discussed.
 
Expanding the Tact Repertoire of Preschool Studentswith Developmental Disabilities by Embedding Direct Instruction into Everyday Classroom Activities.
MAE R. BARKER (Florida State University)
Abstract: The present study evaluated the effectiveness of using discrete-trial based embedded instruction for increasing the tact repertoires of four preschoolers with developmental delays and expressive language deficits. All four participants acquired tacts for common classroom items following the implementation of embedded instruction by teaching assistants. Students demonstrated acquired tacts to variable degrees during post-intervention probes. Based on student performances on probes, better learning outcomes resulted from embedding instruction into “planning” and “recall” times (small group instructional activities) than during the “worktime” (free play) period. Average percent correct on 1 wk post-intervention probes was 98% for planning items, 86% for recall items, and 63% for worktime items. Students obtained few, if any, of the control items that were not exposed to the intervention. Following training (task clarification, video modeling and criterion-based role-play), teaching assistants implemented instructional procedures with a high degree of fidelity (assistants averaged 94% correct implementation). Assistants later reported that they felt the instructional procedures were effective, easy to implement, and beneficial for this population of students. The results obtained have implications for early skill assessment, instructional design of preschool curriculums, and the professional development of educators.
 
Effects of Single Versus Multiple Verbal Operant Arrangements on the Acquisition of Mands and Tacts in Preschool Children.
AMANDA M. FIRTH (Western Michigan University), Tina Sidener (Western Michigan University), James E. Carr (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Treatment programs based on Skinner’s analysis of verbal behavior often teach language targets by interspersing novel and acquired exemplars across verbal operant categories. For example, “cookie” might be concurrently taught as a mand and a tact/intraverbal by arranging a situation in which the trainer prevents access to the cookie when the child is hungry, alternated with opportunities for the child to respond to the question, “What is this?” in the presence of the cookie. Previous research has demonstrated that mixed mand and tact sessions result in faster acquisition of tacts than tact-only sessions. However, further research is warranted to address limitations of these studies and extend this procedure to other verbal operants. The purpose of the current investigation was to replicate and extend previous research by evaluating effects of tact-only, mand-only, and mand-tact arrangements on the acquisition of mands and tacts in preschool children. When minimal differences in acquisition were observed during a systematic replication (Study 1), a direct replication of previous research was conducted (Study 2).
 
 
Symposium #223a
CE Offered: BACB
Extensions of Functional Behavior Analysis Strategies at a Residential Treatment Facility
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:00 PM–5:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom IV
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center)
Discussant: Jennifer R. Zarcone (University of Rochester Medical Center)
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Zane, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Functional Analysis has provided excellent tools to clinicians to help solve behavior problems more effectively. Research on functional analysis procedures has focused on expanding our knowledge of variables related to this assessment strategy. For example, researchers have investigated brief versus extended analyses, analogue versus in-vivo settings, and the utility of such procedures on subjects varying in age, abilities, and competence. The purpose of this symposium is to describe three studies extending functional analysis in different ways. In these papers, experimenters empirically tested the application of functional analysis to dually diagnosed subjects, focusing on transient tic disorders, and on precursors to dangerous behaviors.

 
The Use of Precursors of Dangerous Behaviors to Determine Operant Function.
ALICE I. SYMMES (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Functional Analysis methodologies have provided caregivers with excellent diagnostic tools with which to confidently determine the function of problem behaviors and to design more effective treatments. Students with severe disabilities often engage in self-stimulatory or self-injurious behaviors that can cause damage to themselves or others. It is reasonable to conduct functional analyses to determine the function of these behaviors, but to do so might result in more tissue damage, since the intent of systematic functional analysis is to manipulate variables in the hope of detecting an increase in behavior rate in one or more conditions. However, often times behaviors that are precursors to the targeted problem behavior might be observed. Since precursors are less likely to cause tissue damage, it is important to determine whether determining the operant function of these behaviors would provide treatment recommendations to successfully solve the targeted dangerous behaviors. The purpose of this study was to determine a systematic procedure for determining the precursors of specific dangerous behaviors, and the extent to which staff could successfully identify precursors that reliably preceded the targeted problem behavior.
 
Extending Functional Analysis Procedures to the Assessment of Transient Tic Disorders.
TARA-LYNN BURBEE (Evergreen Center), Lawrence L. Lockwood (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Tic disorders are defined as involuntary, recurrent vocal or body movements that regularly occur. The etiology of tics is not yet proven, but there is a belief that they are neurologically based, with some influence of the external environment. Functional analysis procedures would help determine whether tics are influenced by social environmental factors, and - if so – would suggest treatment alternatives. The purpose of this study was to apply functional analysis methodology to tic disorders of patients with Tourettes and Transient Tic Disorder. Two subjects with these diagnoses were observed in analogue contexts and the rate of tics was recorded to assess the traditional behavioral functions. Two different functional analysis sessions were conducted per subject. Results were undifferentiated, suggesting either a non-social or multiple functions of tics.
 
The Consistency of Functional Analysis Results Across Different Stimulus Conditions.
LAWRENCE L. LOCKWOOD (Evergreen Center), Tara-Lynn Burbee (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to determine whether the results of functional analysis would vary across different stimulus conditions. Two subjects who were dually diagnosed (with at least one diagnosis being Tourette’s Syndrome or Transient Tic Disorder) and who exhibited either motor or vocal tics served as subjects. Experimenters conducted a series of brief functional analyses in different locations, such as analogue settings, natural classroom, lunchroom, and gymnasium. Results were compared across these different conditions, showing that the function often changed due to a change in location. Discussion focused on the need for multiple assessments to be more confident n the function before developing treatment strategies to deal with targeted behaviors.
 
 
Paper Session #224
International Paper Session - Animal Behavior II
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Montreal
Area: EAB
Chair: Matthew Parker (University of Southampton)
 
Aggressive Behaviour in Dogs, the Role of Learning
Domain: Applied Research
ED REDHEAD (University of Southampton), Elizabeth Anne McBride (University of Southampton), Lewis A. Bizo (Southern Cross University)
 
Abstract: Aggressive Behaviour in dogs has become a major topic of scientific research in Northern Europe and USA. It ranks among the top problems presented to animal behaviour therapists. Research into the influence of owner/dog interactions on the development of aggression has yielded contradictory results. However in Animal Behaviour Therapy the influence of the owner’s behaviour has proved to be a major factor in changing the animal’s aggressive behaviour. In principal, aggressive behaviour in dogs can be considered normal, species-specific behaviour, essential for survival. Learning and genotype both play a role in its development. The principles of learning are relatively unknown to the general public and so are rarely applied systematically in everyday dog training. Typical training procedures and have been found to reinforce aggressive behaviour in dogs. The aim of the paper will be to illustrate this using various case studies from animal behaviour therapy sessions and how problematic aggressive behaviour within dogs can be modified.
 
Application and Analysis of Concurrent Chain Schedules in Large Mammals: Initial Findings and Future Directions
Domain: Basic Research
MATTHEW PARKER (University of Southampton), Ed Redhead (University of Southampton), Deborah Goodwin (University of Southampton)
 
Abstract: Stabled horses often present with abnormal repetitive behaviors (ARBs). Recent research has examined the possiblity that ARBs may be the result of neurological change, brought about by environmentally induced, chronic understimulation. The studies have typically correlated behavoural data from affected species with existing lesion studies and neuropsychological data. Results from these studies have shown that ARB animals appear to show signs of reduced response inhibition and perseveration, similar to animals with lesions on the striatum (putamen and caudate nucleus of basal ganglia). Many of the studies supporting this have used extinction procedures as measures of perseveration. However, many are methodologically weak. In view of this we are currently exploring ARB horses using concurrent chain schedules. Concurrent chains procedures will many benefits to furthering the evaluation of ARBs, including analysis of perseveration and disinhibition, and self-control and choice. Initial findings have been pleasing. Horses perform well on concurrent chain procedures with the data fitting mathematical models of concurrent chain performance (CCM; Grace, 1994). In addition, it seems from initial analysis that horses displaying ARBs show abnormal response patterns on the concurrent chains.
 
 
 
Paper Session #225
International Paper Session - Developmental Disabilities: Social Contingencies
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Regency VI
Area: DDA
Chair: Siri Morris Ming (Redwood Coast Regional Center)
 
Regional Resource Development: Importing and Growing Our Own
Domain: Service Delivery
SIRI MORRIS MING (Redwood Coast Regional Center)
 
Abstract: Like many areas of the world, the rural region of Northern California has historically had few behavioral resources for serving individuals with developmental disabilities. Over the last four years, a program combining internship placements and behavioral clinics staffed by out-of-area consultants has resulted in a significant increase in the quantity and quality of behavioral services, and has resulted in a small but growing local community of board certified behavior analysts and associate behavior analysts. Strategies for “growing” behavior analysts in underserved regions, both in rural regions of North America and internationally, will be discussed.
 
Observational Learning: A Contingency Analysis
Domain: Basic Research
A. CELSO GOYOS (Federal University of Sao Carlos), Ana Carolina Sella (Federal University of Sao Carlos)
 
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to present a contingency analysis of observational learning (OL). The provenance of OL has been suggested to be philogenetically determined as a fixed pattern of behavior, but it has also been understood as operant behavior. Furthermore, it has been treated differently from imitation. OL still bears important practical implications, and is considered an effective teaching strategy, mainly to quickly install simple social and linguistic repertoire. In OL, the child behavior may formally resemble the behavior of the model, but not necessarily, or may generate the same results, or still, may or may not be reinforced for that particular behavior. Learning a conditional discrimination task via OL is quite complex. The context in which learning takes place usually involves the presence of an adult and maybe of other children. The task itself may allow the child to respond directly, or to emit an observing response. The analysis put forward describes evocative and reinforcer-establishing effects of antecedent events, people or stimuli, discriminative and conditioned reinforcing functions of stimuli generated by model behavior, and generalized or conditioned reinforcers that may maintain OL behavior. OL may involve many operant classes. Practical applications of the present analysis are discussed.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #226
CE Offered: None

EAHB-SIG Distinguished Career Award: Joseph V. Brady, Ph.D.

Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom I
Domain: Basic Research
CE Instructor: Eric A. Jacobs, Psy.D.
Chair: Eric A. Jacobs (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
JOSEPH V. BRADY (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Dr. Joseph V. Brady is Professor of Behavioral Biology and Professor of Neuroscience at the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine where he has served on the faculty for the past 40 years as Founder and Director of the Behavioral Biology Research Center. He is also the Founder, President, and Chairman of the Board of Trustees of the Institutes for Behavior Resources in Baltimore, Md. Dr. Brady received his Ph. D. from the University of Chicago in 1951 and directed research programs in the experimental analysis of behavior and behavioral pharmacology at the Walter Reed Institute for Research in Washington, D.C. and the University of Maryland in College Park until his move to Johns Hopkins. He served as the first President of APA Division 25, President of the Society of Behavioral Medicine, the Behavioral Pharmacology Society and the College of Problems on Drug Dependence (CPDD). He was the Associate Chairman of the National Commission on the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral Research and a member of the Space Medicine Committee, National Academy of Sciences. He received both Basic and Applied Research Awards from the APA, the Cambridge Center Award for Distinguished Contributions to the Scientific Study of Behavior, and the Space Biomedical Research Award from National Space Biomedical Research Institute in 2005.
Abstract:

The experimental analysis of human behavior presents a range of methodological and substantive problems focusing upon research settings that usually require trade-offs between ecological richness and precision of environmental control. An approach to the study of more complete repertoires of behavior and the methodological rationale for combining the conceptual framework of experimental analysis with the naturalistic goals of ethological observation can be seen to have originated with the first JEAB monograph by J.D. Findley in 1962. The procedural approach involved primates in preparation for spaceflight experiments living continuously in research chambers and obtaining all their sustenance as components of a scheduled program. Extensions to human studies followed the animal pretest flights of NASAs Project Mercury and the commitment to a human presence in extraterrestrial environments. Over the past several decades, a range of investigative initiatives including the experimental analysis of motivational processes, work productivity, and drug-behavior interactions, among others have used the continuously programmed environment approach as a point of departure. Studies of confined microsocieties in preparation for long-duration exploration spaceflight missions beyond Earth orbit present new challenges and opportunities for the experimental analysis of human behavior.

 
 
Paper Session #228
International Paper Session - Observing Responses
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Hong Kong
Area: EAB
Chair: Gerson Yukio Tomanari (University of Sao Paulo)
 
Observing Responses: The Reinforcing Properties of the “S-“ Determined By Its Temporal Relation With The Reinforcement Component
Domain: Basic Research
ROGELIO ESCOBAR (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Carlos A. Bruner (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
 
Abstract: The function as conditioned reinforcers of stimuli associated with successive periods of an extinction component in an observing-response procedure was determined. Three rats were exposed to a mixed schedule of reinforcement in which an extinction component averaging 60 s alternated with a 20-s reinforcement component. Lever pressing randomly produced one food delivery during each reinforcement component. Concurrently, each press on a second lever produced for 5 s a light during the reinforcement component (S+) and an added clock consisting of different tones during successive subintervals of the extinction component. The number of observing responses increased from the beginning to the end of the extinction component showing multiple control of the “S-“ on observing responses. In a following condition, as the temporal location of the food reinforcer was varied from the beginning to the end of the reinforcer component the number of observing responses markedly increased. It was concluded that due to chaining between the “S-“, the S+ and the reinforcer, the S+ must function as a conditioned reinforcer for the “S-“ to acquire reinforcing properties. These results allowed to explain previous findings using added clocks in observing procedures and questioned the classification of extinction-correlated stimuli as “S-“.
 
Discriminative Stimulus of Extinction Produced by Pigeon's Observing Responses
Domain: Basic Research
GERSON YUKIO TOMANARI (University of Sao Paulo)
 
Abstract: Food-deprived pigeons were given a series of 50-s discrete trials. Half of the trials ended with response-independent food presentation and half without food presentation; the sequence of food and no-food trials was random. At the beginning of each trial, the single response key available in the operant chamber wa11s illuminated with white light. During a trial, pecking the key could change the key color from white to red or green, depending on whether food or no food was programmed. Once produced, the key remained red or green until the end of the trial. Baseline and experimental conditions alternated. In baseline conditions, pecks produced both stimuli on a 15-s variable-interval schedule. In two different conditions, maximum interresponse intervals were required after the completion of the VI (tand VI DRH) in order to produce one of the stimuli. Results showed that the introduction of the tandem contingency resulted in a general decrease in the overall stimulus production. However, the decrease markedly happened when the tandem contingency was applied to the production of S+, and not so much when it was applied to the production of S-.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #229
CE Offered: BACB

On Extinction

Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Centennial Ballroom II
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Brian A. Iwata, Ph.D.
Chair: Gary M. Pace (The May Institute)
BRIAN A. IWATA (University of Florida)
Dr. Brian Iwata received his Ph.D. in Clinical and School Psychology from Florida State University as a student of Jon Bailey. He subsequently held faculty appointments at Western Michigan University and at the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, and he is currently Professor of Psychology and Psychiatry at the University of Florida, where he directs research programs on self-injurious behavior, the Prader-Willi syndrome, and autism. Brian’s primary areas of interest are research methodology, developmental disabilities, functional analysis of severe behavior disorders, and program evaluation. He has published over 200 articles and chapters on these topics and has received over $5 million in research grants to support that work. Brian is the former editor of JABA and past president of ABA, APA Division 33, FABA, SABA, and SEAB. He has chaired study sections for both NIH and NIMH and is a fellow in AAMR, ABA, APA, and APS. Brian has received a number of significant awards for his work, including the D.F. Hake Award for Contributions to Basic and Applied Research as well as the Award for Applied Research from APA, the Award for Distinguished Contributions to Service from ABA, and the R. B. Dillard Award for Excellence in Research from AAMR. Brian is just as much a teacher of researchers as he is a researcher: Half of the recipients of the B. F. Skinner Award (APA Division 25) have been his former Ph.D. students.
Abstract:

Extinction is the most direct method for reducing the frequency of behavior. Nevertheless, the procedure is prone to misapplication, may produce undesirable effects, and can be difficult to implement. This presentation will consider some limitations associated with the use of extinction and will suggest alternative strategies.

 
 
Paper Session #230
Philosophical Issues I
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Manila
Area: EAB
Chair: Charles E. Blair (University of Texas Medical Branch)
 
A Comparison of Neorealism and Behavior Analysis
Domain: Basic Research
BRIAN J. COWLEY (Park University)
 
Abstract: Neorealism is a philosophy of consciousness being a cross-section of the environment. It implies that conscious experience exists outside of the brain independent of being perceived. This paper will be a comparison of neorealims and behavior analysis.
 
Integrating Orem's Nursing Theory and Skinner's Behavioral Theory: Effect on Nursing Home Resident’s ADLs
Domain: Theory
CHARLES E. BLAIR (University of Texas Health Center, Tyler)
 
Abstract: Among nursing home residents for whom nurses provide care are those who are both cognitively and physical intact and able to practice self-care in ADLs. Nursing staff strive to maintain residents self-care abilities. Orem’s Self-Care theory identifies three systems to guide nursing actions: (1) a wholly compensatory system (2) a partly compensatory system, (3) an educative-supportive-system (ESSC). Choosing the Educative-Supportive System when caring for intact residents indicates recognition of the intactness of residents’ self-care agency. But Orem’s theory gives no guidance on strategies for fostering self-care in residents. It is a descriptive theory. Skinner’s Operant learning theory, a prescriptive theory, concentrates on voluntary, observable, and measurable behaviors. The basic paradigm reflects a functional relationship between behavior and environmental events. It suggests that most behaviors are learned and maintained by the environment. Practical application of operant learning theory—Applied Behavioral Analysis (ABA)— provides a systematic way for nurses to promote and maintain desired behaviors in intact residents. Education and training in a combination of Orem’s theory and ABA can provide nursing staff with both the knowledge and methods to promote and sustain self-care in ADLs by intact residents. This outcome will be discussed in individual cases and group research.
 
 
 
Panel #231
Professional Development Series: How to Give Effective Oral Presentations and Posters
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
Spring
Area: PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Judah B. Axe (The Ohio State University)
MICHAEL PERONE (West Virginia University)
PETER GIROLAMI (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

Panelists will give their advice on delivering effective presentations. Attendees will be welcome to ask questions and to discuss the presentations.

 
 
Paper Session #232
Stimulus Equivalence I
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
International Ballroom South
Area: EAB
Chair: Marta Leon (West Virginia University)
 
The Study of Learning History Variables
Domain: Basic Research
FRANCIS MECHNER (The Mechner Foundation), Laurilyn Dianne Jones (The Mechner Foundation)
 
Abstract: Single-subject studies of the effects of learning history variables on characteristics of operant classes requires the comparison of matched sets of equivalent operant classes that have received different learning histories and were learned by the same individual. Studies were conducted to determine the degree of equivalence of the matched sets of operant classes learned by the same subject, and the possible role of pre-experimental preferences among them that could constitute confounding variables. One important history variable is the number of repetitions of an operant class during learning. The operant classes used were sets of magnified operant units consisting of short keystroke sequences executed on a computer keyboard. When the characteristics of the learned operant classes were examined under subsequent test conditions, it was found that the observed effects depended on a threshold number of repetitions having been exceeded. Another magnified operant unit studied consisted of lines drawn on a touch-sensitive graphics tablet. Each line’s length, slope, duration, speed, and pressure applied to the stylus were recorded and analyzed. Using this technique, various types of history variables were examined.
 
Stimulus Class Strength and Effects of Reversing the Baseline Conditional Discriminations
Domain: Basic Research
MARTA LEON (West Virginia University), Philip N. Chase (West Virginia University)
 
Abstract: This paper examines how stimulus classes trained with different reinforcement rates were altered when baseline conditional discriminations were reversed. After baseline training with a rich or a lean schedule, equivalence tests were conducted. Then, baseline reversals were introduced and equivalence tests readministered. A differential effect of reinforcement rate was present in only a few subjects. Subjects for whom an effect was found had a behavioral pattern characterized by partial class reversals and retention of the reversed classes. These findings are discussed in terms of the unity or relative independence of the relations involved in the formation of stimulus classes.
 
 
 
Panel #232a
CE Offered: BACB
History and Historiography of Behavior Analysis: A Panel Discussion of Morriss Invited Tutorial
Sunday, May 28, 2006
4:30 PM–5:20 PM
International Ballroom North
Area: DEV/TPC; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Edward K. Morris, Ph.D.
Chair: Alexandra Rutherford (York University)
JAY MOORE (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee)
JOHN C. MALONE (University of Tennessee)
EDWARD K. MORRIS (University of Kansas)
Abstract:

This panel discussion addresses Dr. Edward K. Morriss invited tutorial on the history and historiography of behavior analysis. The panelists will comment on his main topics (e.g., the value history inquiry, approaches to historical analysis, the methodological considerations), the history of behavior analysis that he interwove among them, and related historiographic concerns (e.g., origin myths). They will address the puzzles and problems he presented and suggest how to solve them. And, they will relate what they think it is to be an historian.

 
 
Poster Session #233
#233 International Poster Session - AUT
Sunday, May 28, 2006
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Grand Hall
1. An Examination of the Variables Contributing to the Treatment of Eye Stereotopy
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ARTHUR E. WILKE (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (University of Nevada, Reno), Adel C. Najdowski (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Ginger R. Wilson (University of Nevada, Reno), Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Individuals with autism and related disabilities often display stereotypic behavior. Stereotypy is typically defined as repetitive or invariant behavior that serves no apparent social function (e.g., Lovaas, Newsom & Hickman, 1987). Previous research has been conducted using non-contingent reinforcement (NCR) as a treatment for stereotypical behavior, but the results of these investigations have been mixed. Other treatment components are often necessary, such as response blocking, protective equipment, or punishment. The purpose of the current investigation was to examine some of the variables that may contribute to the treatment of stereotypy displayed by a young child with autism. A reversal design was used to evaluate the effects of NCR, time-out and corrective feedback on rates of eye stereotypy, which was defined as bearing the eyes in the corner of the eye socket so that the iris of the eye was against the far corner (i.e. no white was showing at the corner of the eye). Interobserver agreement (IOA) was assessed for 35% of sessions and the mean percentage of agreement of 92%. Results suggest that a combination of NCR, non-exclusionary time-out and corrective feedback may have been responsible for the reduction in stereotypy.
 
2. Effects of DRL and DRO Schedules of Reinforcement on the Frequency and Amount of Interfering Behaviors
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER RODZINAK (Allegheny College), Rodney D. Clark (Allegheny College)
Abstract: Two males between the ages of 16 and 18 both of whom have been diagnosed with Autism. Both participants are non-verbal and exhibit various types of interfering behaviors. Data were collected in both educational and residential settings. Baselind data were collected for each interfering behavior one month prior to the implementation of either the DRL or DRO procedure. Following either schedule implimentation, data were recorded and plotted. The rates of interfering behavior markedly decreased under DRL conditions but not under the DRO schedule.
 
3. Differential Reinforcement With Response Marking to Decrease Attentioned Maintained Behaviors
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
RICK SHAW (Behavior Issues)
Abstract: A differential reinforcement of low rates (DRL) procedure was implemented with the use of response marking to reduce screaming behaviors of two adolescent males, and profanity of another adolescent male. The males ranged in age from 9 to 13 years and they were with moderate to severe mental retardation. Narrative Antecedent Behavior Consequence (NABC) data was measured and showed that the behaviors were maintained for attention. Through response marking the initial instance of the target behavior resulted in a warning from the teacher and the presentation of a special token. The next instance of the behavior the token was shown to the student, the teacher gave a statement, and placed the token on the student’s behavior board. The DRL procedure combined with response marking was successful in decreasing the behaviors of the students.
 
4. A Comparison of Three Intervention Strategies to Decrease Hand Stereotypy
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER FULLER (The May Institute), Allison Stubits (The May Institute), Sara McCollum (The May Institute), Meredith L. Cochran (The May Institute)
Abstract: Stereotypy, defined by Baumeister (1978), is repetitive and excessive behavior that does not appear to serve any function. Many individuals with developmental disabilities exhibit stereotyped behaviors, and these idiosyncratic and repetitive movements are listed in DSM-IV as one of the diagnostic criteria for autistic disorder (American Psychiatric Association, 1994). Hand stereotypy is one form of idiosyncratic behaviors that can interfere with skill acquisition, and is often socially stigmatizing. Automatically reinforced stereotypy is difficult to treat because the reinforcing characteristics of the behavior are difficult to determine and control, and the behavior itself can be exhibited at any time (Piazza, C. C., Adelinis, J. D., Hanley, G. P., Goh, H., & Delia, M. D., 2000). This study demonstrates the effects of three different contingencies – ignore, interruption, and response blocking, to decrease rates of automatically reinforced hand stereotypy. Data indicate that response blocking - in which the participant’s hands were placed on the table for three seconds contingent on stereotypy, decreased rates of hand stereotypy from an average of 62% in the ignore condition to an average of 11%. Interobserver agreement averaged 100% accuracy.
 
5. Using Matched and Non-Matched Sensory Stimuli to Decrease Self-Stimulatory Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA L. CHERNE (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University), Eric Rudrud (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to reduce self-stimulatory behavior in two children with autism. Procedures involved sensory sessions that provided stimulation which matched the function of the self-stimulatory behavior and sessions which did not match the function of the self-stimulatory behavior. An alternating treatment design was used to assess matched sessions and non-matched sessions. Following matched and non-matched sensory sessions, observation periods were conducted to assess effects on self-stimulatory behavior. These procedures were not effective in decreasing self-stimulatory behavior but may help guide further attempts at decreasing the behaviors.
 
6. Replication of a Procedure Utilizing Contingent Effort as a De-escalation Procedure
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KAZUNARI HASHIMOTO (Integrated Behavior Technologies), Linda S. Heitzman-Powell (Integrated Behavior Technologies), Rachel L. White (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The present study examined the effectiveness of a de-escalation procedure on the aggressive behavior of an 11 year-old boy diagnosed with Autism. This procedure modified an existing procedure (Melmark, 2005)for use in the home. On the first occurrence of aggression, staff or parents prompted the child to move to a designated room. The child was then instructed to sit down and engage in a repetitive task (e.g., stacking rings). The student was required to complete the task calmly (no incidents of aggression) for a period of two minutes. If any incidents of aggression occurred, the task was re-presented until he completed the task with no aggressive incidents for two minutes. Following the intervention, the student was directed back to the interrupted activity. Results showed that aggressive incidents decreased from an average of 5 per day (range 0-7) with an average duration of 30 minutes (range 5-90) to an average of .25 per day (range 0-2) with an average duration of 7 minutes (range 1-20) following the implementation of the de-escalation procedure. Results also showed that similar results were found when the procedure was implemented in the classroom setting.
 
7. Decreasing Elopement Through Increasing Response Effort and an S-Delta
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SCOTT W. HARRINGTON (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Jillian White (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Jennifer MacDonald (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Donald A. Wachelka (Quality Behavioral Outcomes)
Abstract: Elopement, or leaving from a supervised to unsupervised area without permission, is a common issue for care providers of persons with disabilities. This investigation evaluated the effects of increasing response effort in a 7 year-old boy diagnosed with Autism who would elope from a playground to modular classrooms (outside-to-inside) and from inside his classroom to outside (inside-to-outside). An FBA indicated the elopement was maintained by attention, hence attention was also provided contingent upon remaining in a supervised area.
 
8. Effectiveness of a Visual Cue in Decreasing Aggression During Mealtimes
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JILLIAN WHITE (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Jennifer MacDonald (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Donald A. Wachelka (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Scott W. Harrington (Quality Behavioral Outcomes)
Abstract: This investigation evaluated the effectiveness of a visual cue (i.e., More food pass) to treat aberrant behaviors during mealtime for an adolescent diagnosed with autism. A competing behavior model was used to identify meal restrictions as a common antecedent for problem behavior. The intervention increased predictability of meal cessation for the participant, and decreased frequency of problem behaviors to near zero levels.
 
9. Reduction of Self-Injurious Behaviors in an Adolescent with Autism using Positive Behavior Support and ABA
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
JANET A. BUTZ (CARE, LLC), Chris Holcomb (Odyssey Charter School)
Abstract: Students with serious self-injurious behaviors are often excluded from the least restrictive environments in public school settings because staff are not trained to work with students exhibiting such dangerous behaviors. In addition, families do not feel adequately equipped to address their child's self-injurious behaviors in the home setting. As a result the child may end up being removed from the home and school setting and placed in a more restrictive setting. This research project focuses on an adolescent with severe self-injurious behaviors that resulted in removal from the public school and home setting with placement into a hospital setting.The authors will describe how the Positive Behavior Support Process was used to form a team of individuals interested in decreasing the self-injurious behaviors exhibited by the student as well as improving the student's overall quality of life. The poster presentation will outline the steps used in process which included: identifying goals, gathering information, developing a hypothesis, designing a behavior support plan as well as detailing how the plan was implemented and monitored. The authors will share how they combined the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis and Positive Behavior Support into the process and brought team members together from a variety of disciplines which ultimately resulted in a significant decrease of the severe self-injurious behaviors and an increase in the positive prosocial behaviors of the student when he returned to a less restrictive environment.
 
10. Decreasing Attention-Maintained Aggression with a DRO Schedule
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SCOTT W. HARRINGTON (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Donald A. Wachelka (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Ralph N. Pampino (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Marco Sidella (n/a)
Abstract: This investigation decreased the frequency of attention maintained aggression in a 14 year-old boy diagnosed with autism. The participant was hitting the walls in his home with his forehead forcefully enough to break through the drywall; baseline rates indicated the behavior occurred up to 10 times a day. A functional assessment suggested the behavior was maintained by attention from the participant’s mother. A DRO was implemented on a 60-second VI schedule and the behavior decreased to zero rates. Because of effort, the schedule was rapidly faded to 180-seconds, 300-seconds, 900-seconds combined with a relaxation procedure. The behavior was maintained at near-zero rates.
 
11. Decreasing Inappropriate Vocalizations By Increasing Alternative Behaviors
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE KARREN (St. Cloud State University), Sharon E. Baxter (ABLE Clinic)
Abstract: This study investigated the effects of differential reinforcement on vocal stereotypy in a 10 year old subject with Autism Spectrum Disorder and history of habitualized self-injurious acts and self-restraint. The subject exhibited vocal stereotypy that involved forced air expulsion, with a straining of the abdominal muscles. Functional analysis revealed that the behavior was maintained by automatic reinforcement. The study utilized a multiple baseline design. Differential reinforcement was used to increase the number of intervals that the subject worked without demonstrating vocal stereotypy on mastered task completion projects. Stimulus control was achieved by pairing an elastic wristband with the expectation of an absence of vocal stereotypy while working. Results indicated a significant improvement in the frequency of intervals where the subject worked without demonstrating vocal stereotypy. Baseline measures indicated that the subject was able to work for a 3 second interval with an absence of vocal stereotypy an average of 17.78% of the time. Within 12 sittings the subject was demonstrating an absence of vocal stereotypy for 3 seconds or longer for an average 95% of intervals. The duration of time was increased progressively from the initial 3 seconds to 11 seconds during the course of this study.
 
12. Splint Use: Decreasing hand-clapping in a child with Rett's Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SUSAN WILCZYNSKI (MMI; UNMC), Howard Needelman (MMI; UNMC), Laura Patterson (USM), Joshua Needelman (USM), Kathryn Menousek (MMI; UNMC)
Abstract: Rett's Disorder is a genetic disorder falling on the Autism Spectrum. It is characterized by stereotyped hand-to-hand movements. Traditional behavioral and medication interventions have produced little reduction in this stereotypic behavior. Splints have been suggested by some physicians but no data have been forwarded to support the use of splints in reducing stereotypic hand movements in individuals with Rett’s Disorder. Splints have successfully reduced problem behavior associated with other populations though (e.g., thumb-sucking). An alternating treatments design (splint use versus no splint use) was used to assess the impact of splints on rate of hand-clapping during discrete trial training occurring at a table. Stereotypic hand-clapping was significantly lower when splints were used. Reductions in stereotypic movements were not associated with increased rates of skill acquisition however. Interobserver agreement fell within acceptable levels (IOA>.90).
 
13. The Use of a Premack Principle Procedure to increase Food Consumption in Three Participants with Autistic Spectrum Disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CAROLANNNE MART (The Jigsaw CABAS School), Jackie Charnock (The Jigsaw CABAS School), Emma L. Hawkins (The Jigsaw CABAS School)
Abstract: This study examined the effect of a Premack principle procedure on increasing food consumption of unpreferred edible items for three children diagnosed with Autistic Spectrum Disorder. The participants were three boys, two aged 6 and one aged 9. Participant 1 was a six yr old male with listener, speaker, and emergent reader/writer levels of verbal behaviour. Participant 2 was also a 6 yr old male with listener and emergent speaker/reader/writer levels of verbal behaviour. Participant 3 was a 9 yr old male with emergent listener/speaker/writer levels of verbal behaviour. All attended a CABAS® school for children with ASD, which operated individualized instruction on academic programmes throughout the school day. The 1:1 instruction was delivered in the form of learn units. A multiple baseline across participants design was used and the results demonstrated a functional relationship between the Premack procedure and the increase in food consumption.
 
14. Increasing Adaptive Skills and Decreasing Challenging Behaviors with a 14-year old student with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KIMBERLY L. MAYER (Melmark New England)
Abstract: The effects of a multi-component treatment package on the challenging behaviors of a 14-year old boy diagnosed with autism were assessed in this study. Functional communication training and a relaxation program were introduced, using an A-B experimental design, in order to decrease challenging behaviors including aggression, negative statements (not directed at others), antecedent behavior, and tantrum behavior. Strategies were selected based on descriptive analysis. Antecedent behavior included suicidal statements, negative statements (towards others), stomping and screaming. Tantrum behavior included antecedent behavior combined with property destruction. Inter-observer agreement (IOA) data was collected on a weekly basis, which was 100% for each observation. Results indicated that following the implementation of the treatment package, tantrum behavior, aggression, and negative statements decreased when compared to baseline levels. Additionally, adaptive strategies including self-initiated relaxation and functional communicative responses increased. This study demonstrates the efficacy of a multi-component treatment package to decrease challenging behaviors and to increase adaptive skills in a child with autism. Data displayed will demonstrate maintenance of low rates of targeted challenging behaviors across one year.
 
15. Assessment of Aggression Across School and Home Evironments Using Caregivers as Therapists
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DEBORAH L. BORDEN-KARASACK (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Gregory Breznican (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Julia T. O'Connor (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Recently, the standard analogue functional analyses methodology (Iwata, et al., 1982/1994) has been extended outside the highly structured clinical settings into the natural environment. This research has demonstrated the utility of teacher implemented functional analyses in the school setting (Moore, et al., 2002; Wallace, Doney, Mintz-Resudek, & Tarbox, 2004) and caregiver implemented functional analyses in the home setting (Wacker, et al., 1998). However, limited data are available comparing the outcomes of functional analyses across the two settings with familiar caregivers. In the current study, a 13 year old boy diagnosed with autism who exhibited severe aggression at home and school participated in an analogue functional analysis with a teacher and in-home support caregiver acting as therapists. The results of the analogue functional analysis showed clear tangible and demand functions in both settings. Inter-rater reliability was completed 100% of sessions at school with an average of 99% agreement and 20% of sessions at home with an average of 100% agreement. These results suggest that caregivers can be trained to act as therapists to complete an analogue functional analysis and that for this client similar results were documented.
 
16. Implementation of Activity Schedules to Increase On-Task Behavior during Recess
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DIANA M. ZITELLI (EPIC), Lori E. Bechner (EPIC), Gina Rosa-Tahmoosh (EPIC)
Abstract: Four learners diagnosed with autism (ages 12-14) participated in the study. On-Task behavior was measured using a 30-second momentary time sample for a randomly selected five-minute period during recess. Baseline measures of on-task behavior ranged from 0%-60% (mean=25%). Following implementation of individual activity schedules, on-task behavior ranged from 90%-100%. All participants showed significant increases in on-task behavior following the implementation of the schedules. When treatment was reversed (ABAB design), results were replicated.
 
17. Reducing Severe Self Injury in a School Setting
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
BARBARA POTTER (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group), Hannah Hoch (Alpine Learning Group), Kristin Calman (Alpine Learning Group), Nina Cohen (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: The participant was a seven year old boy with autism who attended a behaviorally based school. He had a history of severe self injurious behavior (i.e., slapping his face) that occurred at a high rate throughout the school day. The student displayed the behavior across many conditions and a descriptive analysis indicated that it served multiple functions, including escape from demands. The present study addressed the escape function of the self injury via functional communication training. Training was conducted during half hour sessions outside of the student’s typical classroom routine. A demand condition was arranged during which the student was taught to request a break using augmentative communication (i.e., a Voice Over device containing the recording, “break”). The break consisted of a free access condition which included the opportunity to engage in stereotypic behavior. Self injurious behavior that occurred within training sessions was consequated with contingent application of protective equipment. The duration of training sessions was gradually increased as rates of self injury decreased. Data indicate a reduction in the target behavior during demand conditions. Results are discussed in terms of directions for future research for reducing severe self injurious behavior in a school setting.
 
18. Reducing High Rate Disruptive Behavior, in a Two Year Old with Autism: Using a Differential Reinforcement of Other Behavior Procedure
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ANGIE CHRISTINE QUERIM (Northeastern University)
Abstract: Research in Differential Reinforcement of Other behavior (DRO) and extinction (EXT) suggest these two procedures are effective in decreasing problem behavior. In the present study, results of a functional analysis, for a two year old with Autism, indicated disruptive behavior was maintained by attention. Baseline and treatment conditions were compared in a reversal design. Baseline conditions were similar to those in the attention condition in the functional analysis. During treatment conditions a 15 second interval of social praise was delivered contingent on the absence of disruptive behavior, while disruptive behavior received no reinforcement (EXT). The DRO with EXT procedure was successful in decreasing disruptive behavior, and its affects were generalized across settings and maintained over time.
 
19. Increasing the Latency to Consume Meals in Teenagers with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA ANGLESEA (Alpine Learning Group), Hannah Hoch (The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group), Lauren Delgado (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: Individuals with autism may consume meals rapidly which can be socially stigmatizing and result in gastrointestinal problems. The purpose of this study was to investigate the effects of using a time-based vibrating pager that signaled consumption of bites. The participants were three teenagers with autism with a history of rapid food consumption. The participants were taught using graduated guidance to wait to take a bite of food until the pager signaled them to do so. Once participants were reliably waiting to consume bites until the pager signaled, a reversal design was used to compare total seconds to consume meals with and without the pager. The results indicated that seconds to consumption increased when the pager was used during mealtime. IOA data were calculated for 24% of the sessions at 100%. Results are discussed in terms of interventions to improve healthy eating habits in students with autism.
 
20. An Evaluation of the Effects of Wearing a Diaper During Toilet Training for a Young Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MELODY NABIZADEH (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), James Summers (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Doreen Granpeesheh (Center for Autism and Related Disorders)
Abstract: Urinary incontinence has been shown to be a pervasive problem in children with autism. Incontinence can affect a child both socially and in terms of risk of infectious diseases transmitted through bodily waste (Berk & Friman, 1990). Surveys have reported that anywhere from 50 -70% of all children with autism have difficulties with toileting (Whitely, 2004; Horvath, Papadimitriou, Rabsztyn, Drachenberg & Tildon, 1999). Recent research conducted with an adult with developmental disabilities demonstrated that wearing diapers may occasion urinary accidents (Tarbox, Williams & Friman, 2004). In the current investigation a reversal design was used to evaluate the effects of wearing a diaper during toilet training for a young child diagnosed with autism. Results suggest that wearing a diaper may increase the likelihood of urinary incontinence. Moreover, successful voids increased during the course of evaluation. Treatment, follow-up, reliability and integrity data will be presented.
 
21. Eliminating Transition Related Tantrums by Manipulating Establishing Operations
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JULIE WALSH (BEACON Services), Robert K. Ross (BEACON Services), Harry A. Mackay (Northeastern University, Shriver Center)
Abstract: Many children with Autism transition from one activity to the next only with difficulty. The subject in the present study frequently engaged in tantrums, when given verbal cues to end preferred activities and begin other, often less preferred activities. In contrast, the child had a history in which other environmental cues, like a picture of the next activity, controlled transitions. Observational data indicated that attention was provided to the child when tantrums occurred, thus suggesting that verbal cues to transition served as an Establishing Operation for access to reinforcement. The authors hypothesized that they could eliminate the tantrums that accompanied transitions by establishing a new history of responding to an alternative non-verbal auditory cue (the sound of a timer). This was achieved via an errorless teaching procedure which used physical guidance during the transitions and immediate reinforcement upon arrival. No verbal cues (correction or instruction) were provided until successful arrival. The results showed that the student performed transitions to other activities without engaging in tantrum behavior tantrums after 13 teaching sessions.
 
22. Training and Implementation of Extinction Protocol for Aggression in a Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
R. JADE FRAISER (May South), Bradley S. Bezilla (May South), Tiffany Allen (May South), John Mortensen (May South)
Abstract: Many children with Autism and other developmental delays display one or more maladaptive behaviors. A more serious maladaptive behavior is aggression functioning as communication. In this study, the team developed an intensive treatment protocol to extinguish severe aggression in a 13-year-old child with Autism. Several weeks of observation and parent interviews were conducted by the team to determine the function of the child's behavior. The extinction protocol was then implemented and the parents of the child were trained in the implemenation. Data will be presented on the extinction protocol, including baseline and treatment data.
 
23. Behavioral Persistence of Children with and without Autism Responding on Progressive-Ratio Schedules
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
KEITH MACWHORTER (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lisa M. Toole (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Gregory A. Lieving (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Heather Jennett (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Eric Boelter (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Individuals diagnosed with autism display behavior patterns that are ritualistic, persistent, and resistant to treatment. In the current study, we investigated the extent to which children with and without autism differ in behavioral persistence as indexed by performance on progressive-ratio (PR) schedules. PR schedules were implemented following a baseline in which responses to a touch-screen computer were reinforced on random-ratio schedules. Persistence was measured by break points, highest completed ratio, and running response rates across PR values. Sessions were limited to 10 min each, and the PR values were increased across sessions until subjects reliably stopped responding within sessions. To account for potential differences in reinforcer efficacy and response rates across subjects, persistence measures were normalized by expressing the measures as a proportion of baseline response rates. Subjects diagnosed with autism displayed greater behavioral persistence relative to matched control subjects.
 
24. Contingent Effort to Reduce Aggressive Behavior of Two Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CATHERINE K. MARTINEZ (Beaumont Hospitals), Nicole M Carlisle (Beaumont Hospitals), Ivy M. Chong Crane (Beaumont Hospitals)
Abstract: Results of functional assessments indicted that the aggressive behavior (i.e., pinching, slapping) of two preschoolers diagnosed with autism was maintained by multiple sources of control (attention, escape). However, direct observation in the classroom indicated that attention was not delivered contingent upon aggressive behavior for either student. Additionally, escape extinction was not successful in reducing rates of aggression. Subsequently, contingent effort (stringing beads, picking up chips) was successful in reducing aggressive behaviors in both students. These findings are discussed in relation to the literature on function-based treatment and punishment. The implications for use of punishment in a preschool classroom are also discussed.
 
25. Helping Parents Keep Their Child with Autism Engaged
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
TAWNYA Y. CRIDER (Behavior Solutions, Inc.), Colin Peeler (Behavior Solutions, Inc.)
Abstract: Children with autism often have a limited number of activities they will stay engaged in for any period of time and some of these activities are not feasible for parents to provide on a continuous basis (in this case, van rides). An 11-year old boy with autism would engage in escalating behaviors (i.e., tantrums) in an attempt to get these items, and his parents would give in once the behaviors became severe enough. A combination of time-out and shaping procedures were used to decrease tantrums and increase his independent play. During baseline independent play averaged 2 minutes per activity and tantrums 34 minutes. A shaping procedure increased independent play to an average of 11 minutes per activity with the behavior analyst and with his mother during generalization sessions. Time out was used to decrease tantrums, to near zero levels. However, inconsistent use of time-out by the parents produced variability in these results. Results of this study support previous research showing that children with autism can be taught to stay engaged in meaningful activities and the need for further research in the area of parental adherence to treatment procedures.
 
26. The Effectiveness of Two Pairing Procedures for Conditioning Music as a Reinforcer for Reducing Stereotypy
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DARCY M. WALSH (Columbia University Teachers College), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Claire S. Cahill (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to investigate the effectiveness of two pairing procedures for conditioning music on the number of stereotypy emitted by students diagnosed with autism. Three students who emitted stereotypy when listening to music were selected as participants in this study. During baseline conditions, the participants listened to music without receiving any reinforcement. During intervention, a continuous paring procedure was used with Participant A, and a pair and test procedure was used with Participants B and C. For both baseline and intervention, data were collected on the stereotypy emitted and the participation in the activity for 5 second intervals for 5 minutes. A multiple baseline design across subjects was used. The independent variable consisted of the two pairing procedures. The number of stereotypy emitted significantly decreased and activity significantly increased for all of the participants. The results for this study showed a functional relation. Both the continuous pairing procedure and the pair and test procedure were effective methods for conditioning music as a reinforcer.
 
27. Rapid Toilet Training for a Five Year Old Autistic Male
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LAUREN KATZ (Columbia University Teachers College), Denise O'Sullivan (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Jennifer Longano (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: This study was conducted to test the effects of a rapid toilet training procedure. The participant was a five year old male diagnosed with autism. He functioned on the emergent listener/prespeaker level of verbal behavior. An intensive toilet training procedure was introduced. This procedure involves a dry pant check schedule and having the participant sit on the toilet until a void occurred. Prior to the implementation of this procedure the participant only wore diaper and never voided in the toilet. Previously he was on a 15 minute bathroom schedule. Even with frequently trips to the bathroom his diaper had to be constantly changed. After the implementation of rapid toilet training the participant had multiple voids in the toilet and no accidents per day.
 
28. The Use of Self-Monitoring Bracelets to Decrease Stereotypy in Two Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTINA VERA YOUNG (Columbia University Teachers College), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Jennifer Longano (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: This study is an addition to a study done by Keohane, Nuzzolo-Gomez, Solorzano, & Greer (unpublished manuscript, 2004). Self-monitoring bracelets were implemented to teach the students to self-manage their stereotypy. During baseline conditions Student A emitted high levels of stereotypy in the play area. Student B emitted high levels of stereotypy during one-to-one instruction. During intervention in the target setting, each student was given a blue bracelet and an instruction stating that stereotypy was permitted. When the teacher replaced the blue bracelet with an orange bracelet they were told to refrain from emitting stereotypy. The study employed a multiple baseline design across participants. Probes were conducted in 3 settings during baseline. Intervention occurred in the setting in which each participant emitted the highest levels of stereotypy. The resutls showed that this self-monitoring tactic was successful for both students to significantly decrease stereotypy in the targeted settings at school and the effects for Student A generalized to the home setting.
 
29. Further Evaluation of Problem Behavior Evoked by Noise
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE M. TROSCLAIR-LASSERRE (Louisiana State University), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Few studies have systematically evaluated noise as a potential establishing operation for problem behavior (e.g., McCord, Iwata, Galensky, Ellingson, & Thomson, 2001). The current investigation used a latency-based assessment to determine a hierarchy of aversive noises for one individual with developmental delays and autism. The effects of mere exposure of noises on problem behavior (i.e., in the absence of extinction) were subsequently evaluated. Mean interobserver agreement data were collected for an average of 54% of sessions in each assessment across targeted behaviors and the average agreement coefficient was 96%. These results replicate those of McCord et al. by further demonstrating that noise can function as an establishing operation (EO) for problem Behavior for some individuals and that escape from noise is one possible reinforcer. In addition, the current investigation extends McCord et al. by providing an alternative methodology for determining the aversiveness of noise (i.e., latency based assessment). These results also extend previous research by demonstrating that exposure to various noises (without extinction) may be sufficient in reducing the occurrence of problem behavior evoked by noise and maintained, at lease in part, by escape from noise.KEY WORDS: establishing operations, escape behavior, noise.
 
30. The Treatment of Chronic Food Refusal in a Young Boy with PDD/NOS
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTIN PRIOR (Melmark New England), John Demanche (Melmark New England), Frank L. Bird (Melmark New England)
Abstract: Eating disorders in children and adolescents represent potentially life threatening, debilitating conditions that impede physical, emotional, and behavioral growth and development. Escape extinction, which includes the non-removal of the spoon and physical guidance have been demonstrated to establish and maintain food acceptance. Both these interventions involve preventing escape from the feeding situation until the presented food has been accepted (Ahearn, et. al., 1996). In this study, an escape extinction procedure was implemented with an 8-year old boy diagnosed with PDD/NOS., with food type selectivity and refusal. Initial results indicate an increase in acceptance of bites during baseline, with an initial rate of 44%, an increase within the non-removal condition with an initial rate of 66%, and a decrease in the rate of acceptance during physical condition with an initial rate of 49%. With the introduction of novel foods, rates of food acceptance continue on an increasing trend with an overall average of 85% acceptance. Rates of expulsion indicate a decreasing trend with an overall average of 3%. IOA was conducted during 100% of conditions and averaged 100%.
 
31. Using Postural Relaxation with Students on the Autism Spectrum
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
D. REED REED BECHTEL (Bechtel Behavioral Services), Susan J. Heatter (Sue Heatter & Associates)
Abstract: Poppen’s (1988) development of procedural relaxation allows a powerful technology to be applied with individuals who may have severe limitations in verbal abilities that preclude more traditional forms of relaxation procedures. The poster presents information regarding the application of the postural relaxation procedure with children and adolescents from 3 to 19 who function on the Autism Spectrum. Students were taught the procedure via video modeling, live modeling, visual support prompting, and/or reinforcement. The procedure then was utilized in a variety of environments including home, school, community settings, and in the car to support appropriate behavior and as a intervention plan component to help manage numerous inappropriate behaviors. Issues regarding acquisition and generalization of the procedure will be provided as well as information regarding the use of the procedure in self management packages.
 
32. Application and Removal of Protective Equipment in the Assessment of Mulitply-Controlled Finger Biting
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE M CARLISLE (William Beaumont Hospital), Ivy M. Chong Crane (William Beaumont Hospital), Nicole Romero (William Beaumont Hospital)
Abstract: The use of protective equipment is often suggested for self-injurious behavior that could cause tissue damage (Dorsey, Iwata, Reid, & Davis, 1982). We evaluated the effects of systematic application and removal of gloves on two topographies of multiply-controlled self-injury exhibited by a boy who had been diagnosed with autism. Results showed that the use of gloves decreased SIB to near zero levels.
 
33. Effect of Performance Feedback on Instructor's Correct Implementation of Behavior Intervention Plans
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ANNA M. YOUNG ZALESKA (The Faison School for Autism), Laura Harmon (The Faison School for Autism), Scott Nugent (The Faison School for Autism), Lana Swartz (The Faison School for Autism)
Abstract: The current study employed a multiple baseline across four instructor-student dyads to measure percent of 30 one-minute intervals with correct implementation of a student’s written behavior plan. Baseline consisted of observations of each instructor’s implementation of student’s behavior plan after the plan was reviewed with the instructor during a 30 minute didactic session. After a stable or decreasing trend in correct implementation, an intervention consisting of performance feedback was implemented within 24 hours of a weekly observation session and consisted of a 15-minute 1:1 meeting with each instructor. The performance feedback incorporated verbal praise for components of the plan implemented correctly and correction for components that were implemented incorrectly, or not at all. Weekly performance feedback continued until 90% of the 30 one- minute intervals were implemented correctly as measured across five consecutive observation sessions. A follow up observation session was implemented five weeks after the last observation and performance feedback was delivered to assess maintenance of correct behavior plan implementation by the instructors.
 
34. The Effect of Reduction of Problem Behavior on Skill Acquisition in a Young Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JANE I. CARLSON (The May Center for Child Development)
Abstract: Rate of skill acquisition is an important variable associated with outcome in Early intensive Behavioral Intervention programs. This case study examines the impact of suspending DTT to implement an intensive behavior support plan to address severe tantrum behavior in a 4 year old with autism. The child was initially acquiring skills at an extremely low rate and displaying multiple interfering behaviors. Functional assessment data indicated escape and tangible seeking as primary functions of the behavior. An intensive FCT training procedure was initiated and problem behavior was reduced to low rates. DTT was reintroduced and the child's rate of skill acquisition improved significantly.
 
35. An Analysis of the Positive and Negative Consequence Components of a DRO Treatment Package to Reduce Challenging Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JULIET M. QUINLAN (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland), Marcia D. Ward (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland), Jennifer Mary McMullen (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland), Sharon O'Sullivan (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland)
Abstract: This study was undertaken with the aim of decreasing the aberrant behaviours of an 11-year-old boy with a diagnosis of autism and early-speaker level of verbal behaviour. An ABACDA reversal design was employed to manipulate the consequence component of a DRO treatment package targeting escape-maintained stereotypy and Person Assault for decrease. Results indicate that escape-extinction was more successful than response cost as a contingent consequence in decreasing stereotypy and Person Assault. Escape extinction also yielded more success than a DRO procedure without an additional reductive tactic. These findings are discussed with reference to relevant literature.
 
36. Evaluating the Use of Positive and Negative Reinforcement for the Treatment of Escape- Maintained Problem Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JEB JONES (Marcus Autism Center), Ashley C. Glover (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), April N. Kisamore (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Previous research (Piazza et al., 1997; Lalli et al., 1999) has shown that providing a combination of positive and negative reinforcement contingent upon compliance can increase compliance to high levels and subsequently decrease problem behavior to low levels. Piazza et al. also found that when the participant earned positive or negative reinforcement contingent upon compliance and problem behavior was placed on extinction, compliance remained high and problem behavior remained low throughout the analysis. In the current investigation, we evaluated the use of combined positive and negative reinforcement for compliance while problem behavior produced negative reinforcement. A component analysis using extinction for problem behavior was conducted to analyze the separate contributions of positive and negative reinforcement to the treatment package. Reliability data were collected with two independent observers for over 30% of sessions and was over 90%. Results suggested that using a combination of positive and negative reinforcement decreased problem behavior to zero levels and increased compliance to high rates. The component analysis with extinction suggested the participant showed that compliance increased to higher levels for the positive reinforcer and than for the negative reinforcement component.
 
37. Assessment and Treatment of Escape-Maintained Aggression: The Use of Self-Monitoring Techniques for Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA ORTEGA (Rutgers University), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University), Alexandra M. Vlahogiannis (Rutgers University), Robert LaRue (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Abstract: Self-monitoring has been used to decrease aberrant behavior and increase on-task behavior in both typical children and children with developmental disabilities (Koegel & Koegel, 1990: Mithaug & Mithaug, 2003: Shabani, Wilder, & Flood, 2001). However, assessment methods for determining the appropriateness of self-monitoring protocols are lacking. In the current investigation, a 12-year-old female with autism was referred for treatment of her aggressive behavior. A functional analysis revealed that she exhibited increased rates of aggression during work sessions in which demands were externally-imposed (e.g., by a teacher), while she exhibited zero rates of aggression during work sessions in which demands were self-imposed. To decrease staff demands and increase the student’s independence in work sessions, a self-monitoring system that allowed her to monitor both her academic skills and her aggressive behavior was implemented and evaluated using a reversal design. Results are discussed in terms of effective assessment for behavior likely to respond to an intervention using self-monitoring.
 
38. An Intervention for Stereotypic Toe-Walking in a Young Girl with Autism: Self-Monitoring and Differential Reinforcement of Incompatible Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
AMANDA J. BEVER (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Britta L. Fiksdal (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Karen Renee Norman (ABIS, LLC), Kevin P. Klatt (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire)
Abstract: Stereotypic toe-walking has been observed in normally developing children as well as children with developmental disabilities including autism. Relatively few studies have investigated the treatment of stereotypic toe-walking in children with autism, and no studies have explored the use of a self-monitoring device or differential reinforcement of incompatible behavior (DRI) as a treatment for toe-walking. The present study investigated the efficacy of a DRI procedure used in conjunction with a self-monitoring device to reduce stereotypic toe-walking in a 6 year-old girl with autism. A multiple-probe design across settings was used to demonstrate the effectiveness of the two procedures. The results showed a decrease in toe walking across both settings.
 
39. Descriptive Analyses in a Classroom Setting: Assessment of High Intensity Self-Injurious Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HANNAH HOCH (The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group), Barbara Potter (Alpine Learning Group), Kristin Calman (Alpine Learning Group), Nina Cohen (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: This study presents a methodology for collecting detailed naturalistic data on self-injurious and tantrum behavior. The participant was a young boy with autism who attended a behaviorally-based school program for students with autism. A descriptive analysis of variables related to the occurrence and intensity of SIB and tantrum behavior was conducted. The student was observed in his school across a variety of classroom activities (i.e., task demands, transitions, free time, and leisure activities). Data were collected on the frequency, intensity and latency to engage in problem behavior. IOA data were also collected. Results are discussed in terms of future directions for descriptive analysis research.
 
 
 
Poster Session #234
#234 International Poster Session - BPH
Sunday, May 28, 2006
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Grand Hall
40. Pre-Natal Methylmercury Exposed Offspring Rats on a High or Low Selenium Diet Respond Differently Under a Multiple Low or High Percentile 20:0.75 (DRH) 8:4 Schedule Of Reinforcement
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
JOHN C. HEATH (Auburn University), Joshua Johnson (Auburn University), M. Christopher Newland (Auburn University)
Abstract: Pre-natal exposure to methylmercury (MeHg)has been associated with sensory-motor deficits. Selenium is thought to possibly ameliorate some of the effects of MeHg. Schedules of reinforcement that produce high rates of responding are sensitive to MeHg exposure. Female long Evans rats were chronically exposed to MeHg at levels of 0, 0.5, OR 5 PPM in their drinking water and also fed a diet that contained 0.06 PPM selenium or 0.6 PPM selenium. Forty-eight female offspring, which were exposed to MeHg in-eutro, were separated in to 6 groups according to the dams MeHg exposure and diet. The offspring were fed the same diet as their respective dams after weaning. A multiple percentile 20:0.75 differential reinforcement of high rates (DRH) 8:4 was implemented with lever pressing as the appropriate response. The percentile schedule reinforces responses if the interresponse times (IRTs) were shorter than 75% of the last 20 IRTs. This maintains a high rates of behavior while adjusting reinforcement criterion to the subject’s own performance, under a variable interval 30 second schedule, The DRH schedule delivers a reinforcer if the lever is pressed eight times in four seconds. The subjects were also exposed to a multiple percentile schedule, such that a response qualified for reinforcement if the IRT was slower than 75% of the last 20 IRT’s The DRH 8:4 schedule was still maintained. Preliminary results indicate response rate on the DRH schedule was separated by diet, with high selenium diet group having a lower response rate than the low selenium group. On the high rate percentile schedule there was no difference in response rates between the diet groups. However, in the high selenium diet group the low MeHg animals appeared to have a lower response rate. On the low rate percentile schedule there appeared to be no difference between the diet groups but in the high selenium group the high MeHg group had higher response rates than the other groups. In the low selenium groups the MeHg control group had the lowest response rate. (Supported by NIH ES 10865)
 
41. Changes in Response Topography may Explain Changes in Reward Sensitivity during Exposure to DA D1, D2, and D3 Receptor Agonists
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
VALERI FARMER-DOUGAN (Illinois State University), Seshanand Chandrashekar (Illinois State University), Michelle Toelle (Illinois State University), Rachel Knight (Illinois State University), David Martinez (Illinois State University), Clint Boyle (Illinois State University)
Abstract: Dopamine D1, D2 and D3 receptors have differential effects on sensitivity to reward obtained during responding to CONC VI VI schedules. Differences in reward sensitivity appear to be due to changes in the type and amount of adjunctive responses, and may be directly related to DA receptor functions. DA D1 receptors appear to be part of a feedback loop about reward. In contrast, DA D2 receptors may regulate perseveration of an operant response. The role of DA D3 receptors is less clear. Research from our lab examined these hypotheses: Changes in sensitivity to reward obtained during a series of 5 CONC VI VI schedules during DA D1, D2, and D3 agonist exposure were correlated with changes in behavioral topography produced during drug exposure. The D1 agonist SKF38393 elicited general “search” behaviors which detracted from operant responding and reduced sensitivity to reward. The D2 agonist Quinpirole produced perseveration on the response lever, or the rat remained close to the lever but still. The DA D3 agonist PD 128907 had little effect on either adjunctive or operant responding. These data further establish how specific DA receptor activity may modulate choice behavior by altering the topography of responding.
 
42. Assessing Rat’s Preferences under the Effect of Naltrexone and Haloperidol
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
FRANCISCO JUSTINIANO VELASCO (University of Guadalajara, Mexico), Carlos F. Aparicio (University of Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to assess rat’s preferences under the effect of naltrexona and haloperidol. Three experiments were carried out. The first choice situation had eight alternatives separated one from another by barriers of 110 cm height. In four levers food pellets were provided according to concurrent VI schedules of 300, 600, 1400 and 700 seconds; the same schedules were used in the other four levers to provide saccharine pellets. In the second experiment all levers provided a mixture of food and saccharine pellets according to the same concurrent VI schedules; but the levers differed in the distance requirement: for four levers it was 75 cm and for the other four levers it was 110 cm. The third experiment was similar to second, but the differences were that short alternatives have food pellets and the others long alternatives have saccharine pellets. Responses output was not reduced by naltrexone, it was notoriously suppressed by haloperidol. Neither of the drugs changed the rat's preferences for visiting the preferred alternatives. These findings suggest that to change preferences the pharmacological treatment with naltrexone can be a necessary condition but is not sufficient. On other hand the haloperidol had motor effects.
 
43. Effects of Nasal Carbonic Anhydrase Inhibition on CO2 Discrimination in Zucker Rats
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
KATHERYN E. FERRIS (Allegheny College), E. Lee Coates (Allegheny College), Rodney D. Clark (Allegheny College)
Abstract: Carbonic anhydrase (CA) is a metallo-enzyme that catalyzes the reversible hydration of carbon dioxide to bicarbonate. It has been found in a small number of olfactory neurons in rats and may play a role in the detection of CO2. Using operant discrimination techniques, six female Zucker rats were trained to discriminate 25% CO2 under a fixed ratio 10 (FR 10) schedule of water presentation. Once baseline performances stabilized, rats were exposed to concentrations of CO2 ranging between 0.5 and 12.5% to determine threshold values. At present, the lowest threshold discriminated is 0.5%. Following threshold determinations, a CA inhibitor will be applied topically to the nasal mucosa, and the thresholds will be redetermined.
 
44. Hyperactivity in Adult Rats: Effects of Paternal Ethanol Exposure
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
AMBER WOOD (Allegheny College), Rodney D. Clark (Allegheny College)
Abstract: The present study was designed to examine the effects of ethanol as a potential paternal teratogenic agent. Three adult male rats were administered differing concentrations of Ethanol (0, 5, and 15%) for the length of a spermatogenesis cycle. The males were subsequently bred with receptive females. Offspring were housed under typical conditions until they reached adulthood (150 days of age). Spontaneous alteration, T-maze, and hang tests were conducted. While some marginal differences were observed between controls and both treatment groups, the most pronounced differences were observed under non-experimental conditions such as observing the locomotor pattern of each rat. Data were inconclusive under present experimental conditions.
 
45. Serial Seizures Impair Conditioning and Exploration in Developing Rats
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
JILL KRAUSE (Long Island University), John C. Neill (Long Island University)
Abstract: Brief serial seizures may cause impairment in acquisition of adaptive behaviors, and early persistent training may overcome these deficits. Sprague Dawley rats were administered flurothyl to induce seizures (3/day*6 days, postnatal day 6-11) (n=24) or control procedure (n=16). None developed epilepsy. Rats were assessed after weaning in an operant (lever) task and in an elevated plus maze. In the operant chamber, seizure rats were significantly different, in that they were: malnourished; needed more reinforcers to become trained on CRF; ate less pellets during shaping; displayed more bursts of presses; engaged in more lap running; engaged in more startled jumping behavior; more digging; and more time spent clinging to the wire ceiling of operant chamber; in the plus maze: more time in the closed arms; less exploratory head pokes; displayed significantly less lap running behavior; and spent significantly more time being sedentary during plus maze sessions. The rate of responding during FI10 and VI23 sec schedules of reinforcement did not differ between control and seizure animals. These data suggest that brief serial seizures may impair animals early in development in acquiring conditioned reinforcers, shaping and adaptive exploration; once successfully acquired, responding on initial schedules of reinforcement is not impaired.
 
46. Behavioral Neurogenomics of Aggression in Mice Lacking the Tailless Gene
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
ADAM PABLO JUAREZ (Vanderbilt University), Maria G. Valdovinos (Vanderbilt University), Maria H. Couppis (Vanderbilt University), Michael E. May (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Aggressive behaviors are of great concern to people who care for, provide services to, and with developmental disabilities. A number of studies examine the neurogenomics of aggression in animal models such as the tailless (tlx) mouse. The tlx gene encodes transcription factors for receptors expressed in the brain. Tlx gene deficiency results in telencephalon, corpus collosum, amygdala, and hippocampus reduction, and leads to visual, olfactory, and loco-motor deficits. Tlx mice exhibit behavior during testing that indicate decreased inhibition to tasks which control mice typically do not engage in readily (e.g. time spent distally on open arms of an elevated maze). The present study utilizes a resident/intruder model, in which wildtype mice are introduced to the tlx resident cage for 10m sessions. Measurements of latency to first attack, total duration of aggression, locomotion, and grooming are taken. During experiment 1, clozapine, a borad spectrum antagonist for multiple receptor types is injected at graduated levels. The same is done in experiment 2 with a specific serotonin 2A receptor antagonist. In general, aggression rates are lower than in baseline with the levels of grooming and locomotion remaining stable across conditions in both experiments.
 
47. Effects of NMDA on Water Consumption in Ethanol Pretreated Rats
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
ASHLY O'DONNELL (Allegheny College), Victoria Bushmire (Allegheny College), Rodney D. Clark (Allegheny College)
Abstract: NMDA-induced water consumption is examined in ethanol-pretreated rats. Six female Zucker rats, approximately six months old were used. NMDA (1.0-30.0mg/kg) dose response relations were determined. Consistent with previous findings, NMDA produced dose-dependent increases in water consumption. Each rat was allowed free access to a mixture of 85% water, 5% Karo syrup, and 10% ETOH for four days. Baseline and saline measures were recorded. NMDA was administered everyother day for nine days in a non-sequential order that varied across subjects. The total amount of water was measured before and after treatment with ethanol. NMDA-induced increases of water consumption were not observed following pretreatment with Ethanol.
 
48. Assessing the Ability of Kava Kava to Reduce the Effects of the Chronic Mild Stress (CMS) Procedure Using an Animal Model
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
DANIEL J. HOFFMAN (James Madison University), Sherry L. Serdikoff (James Madison University)
Abstract: Kava Kava is a nutraceutical marketed for its putative ability to reduce anxiety and other effects of stress. To determine whether Kava Kava is effective at mitigating the effects of stress, adult rats are exposed to chronic mild stress (CMS) in three 4-week conditions. Prior to the experiment, baseline measures of saccharin consumption and elevated plus maze exploration are collected for all rats. In the CMS condition, all rats are exposed to a variation of the CMS procedure. In the second condition, rats’ exposure to CMS is continued while all rats are treated with Kava Kava. In the third condition, CMS exposure continued for all rats while Kava Kava treatment is discontinued. Saccharin solution consumption is measured daily and performance in the open plus maze was assessed at the end of each condition. Behavioral deficits due to the effect of the CMS procedure are confirmed to the extent that rats show decreased saccharin consumption and less exploration of the open arms in the plus maze during the first condition. Anxiolytic properties of Kava Kava are revealed to the extent these behavioral deficits are reduced during the second condition and return during the third condition.
 
49. Sensitization to the Locomotor-Stimulating Effects of Heroin is Associated With Enhanced Motivation for Non-Drug Reward
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
ROBERT RANALDI (Queens College, City University of New York), Jonathan Egan (Queens College, City University of New York), Margaret Zellner (Queens College, City University of New York), Edith Capone (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: The goal of this study was to investigate whether or not sensitization to heroin is associated with enhanced motivation for non-drug reward. We hypothesized that repeated intermittent exposure to heroin would produce both sensitization to its locomotor-stimulant effects and enhanced responding maintained by a food-associated conditioned stimulus. Sixteen rats were exposed to an experimental protocol consisting of four phases. In Phase 1, the rats were placed in operant chambers with two levers that produced either a light or a tone, but no food, and lever presses were counted. In Phase 2, in the absence of the levers the rats were exposed to light and food pairings. In Phase 3, half the rats were treated with 2 mg/kg heroin and the other half with saline for nine consecutive sessions and placed in locomotor activity monitors after every treatment. In Phase 4, all the rats were placed in the operant chambers with levers present and presses resulted in either light or tone, but no food, as in Phase 1; lever presses were counted. The group treated with heroin in Phase 3 demonstrated a significant progressive increase in locomotor activity across sessions, indicating behavioral sensitization to the drug. All rats demonstrated a significant increase in responding on the light lever in Phase 4 compared to Phase 1, indicating a conditioned reward effect. Furthermore, the group sensitized to heroin pressed the light lever significantly more than the saline control group. Thus, sensitization to heroin is associated with enhanced motivation for non-drug reward.
 
50. Pesticide Exposure is Associated with Behavioral Deficits for Pre-Adolescent but not Adolescent Brazilian Children
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
LINCOLN S. GIMENES (Universidade de Brasília), David A. Eckerman (University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill), Patricia Regina L. Galvão (Universidade de Brasília), Rosane Curi de Sousa De Sousa (Instituto Oswaldo Cruz)
Abstract: Sixty-six children (ages 10 to 18, 36 m and 30 f) from either a school for farm children (N=39) or a nearby city school (N=27) completed nine behavioral tests using a portuguese-language version of the Behavioral Assessment and Research System (BARS) that was developed by researchers at the Oregon Health and Sciences University. Poor performance on six of these tests was associated with higher self-reported pesticide exposure for the twelve 10 – 11 year old participants. Performance for participants who were twelve years and older was not related to reported pesticide exposure. Performance was influenced by age and sex of participants in expected directions.
 
51. Resurgence as an Alternative Animal Model of Drug Relapse
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
CHRISTOPHER A PODLESNIK (Utah State University), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
Abstract: Relapse of alcohol abuse in humans has been modeled in animals, typically using the reinstatement procedure. In this procedure, the recovery of extinguished alcohol seeking is assessed following response-independent presentations of alcohol, alcohol cues, or stress (i.e., foot shock). It is unlikely, however, that these manipulations sufficiently represent all variables that lead to relapse in humans. In the present experiment, a novel model of alcohol relapse was examined. In condition 1, 4 rats lever pressed for a 10% vol/vol ethanol solution on a random-ratio (RR) 25 schedule of reinforcement. In condition 2, lever pressing was extinguished and an alternative response (i.e., chain pulling) was introduced and reinforced with a non-drug reinforcer (i.e., food pellets) on a RR 10 schedule. Finally, in condition 3, chain pulling for the non-drug reinforcer was extinguished and lever pressing recurred at levels comparable to those obtained in experiments on reinstatement. This novel animal model of relapse, adopted from experiments examining the recovery of food-maintained behavior, may be applied to further understand the variables that instigate alcohol relapse following the discontinuation of treatment programs that provide alternative sources of reinforcement to decrease alcohol use (e.g., community reinforcement approach) and the effects of pharmacological treatments for alcoholism.
 
52. Persistence of Rats’ Attending to Alcohol Stimuli Associated with Different Concentrations of Alcohol
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
CORINA JIMENEZ-GOMEZ (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
Abstract: The observing-response procedure provides an animal model of attending to stimuli and has been recently extended to the study of drug-associated stimuli. In this procedure, one response produces primary reinforcement and another response (i.e., observing response) produces stimuli correlated with the availability of the primary reinforcer. The observing-response procedure is useful because it provides measures of responding maintained by a drug-associated stimuli and the impact of that stimuli on drug-maintained responding. This experiment examined the effects of concentration of self-administered alcohol on the persistence of rats’ observing of alcohol stimuli when alcohol was no longer available (i.e., extinction). During extinction of alcohol responding, observing was more persistent when it produced a stimulus previously associated with a higher alcohol concentration (i.e., 20% vs. 5% vol/vol ethanol solution). Responding for alcohol was more resistant to extinction in the presence of an alcohol-associated stimulus than in its absence, but did not depend on alcohol concentration. These results suggest that attending to alcohol-associated stimuli is more persistent with stimuli previously associated with higher doses of alcohol. In addition, the persistence of attending to alcohol-associated stimuli and their impact on drinking appear to be dissociable.
 
53. Effects of D-Amphetamine on Pigeons in a Matching-to-Sample Flicker Frequency Discrimination Procedure
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
KATHRYN A. SAULSGIVER (University of Florida), Erin A. McClure (University of Florida), Eric Beecher (University of Florida), Clive D. L. Wynne (University of Florida)
Abstract: Disruption of time perception has long been held to be a fundamental property of dopamine-stimulating abused drugs. The effects of d-amphetamine on a previous matching to sample duration (MTSD) procedure were unclear as to whether the drug was effecting time perception or stimulus control in general so it remains unclear how disruptions in timing should best be understood. This study investigated whether the disruptive effects of d-amphetamine on the discrimination of flicker-fusion rates would be similar to those found with the previous timing task. Sigmoid functions depicting percent of choices allocated to the fast fusion rate were fit with a cumulative normal function and parameters were derived that indicated the amount of stimulus control obtained (Range). Range decreased under drug administration indicating that the effect of d-amphetamine on this discrimination procedure was to decrease stimulus control. A comparison of these results to the results of the previous MTSD procedure will be made.
 
54. Repeated Assessment of Delay Discounting by Pregnant Smokers for Hypothetical Outcomes.
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
JIN HO YOON (University of Vermont), Stephen T. Higgins (University of Vermont), Sarah H. Heil (University of Vermont)
Abstract: Delay discounting in pregnant smokers was assessed across various periods during and following pregnancy. Clients were smokers who independently quit after they found that they were pregnant and prior to their first assessment. Indeteriminacy points were calculated by asking clients to choose between two different hypothetical, monetary outcomes at different delays. Results showed a variety of relations between discounting and smoking status. Overall, greater discounting was observed during the first assessment in clients that eventually began smoking again when compared to clients that did not relapse. Additionally, clients that relapsed showed a greater increase in discounting when compared to those that did not relapse when discounting values were assessed across time.
 
55. Autoshaped Lever Pressing in Rats: Effects of Caffeine
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
TREVOR A. CLEMENTS (South Dakota State University), Debra J. Spear (South Dakota State University)
Abstract: The effects of caffeine on autoshaped lever-pressing behavior was evaluated for twelve naive juvenile female rats. Dosing was administered via gavage to the caffeine group (100 mg/kg) and water group (0.25 ml of distilled water) 15 minutes prior to each daily session. A third control group received no injections. Initial autoshaping sessions consisted of 1 hour of response-noncontingent pellet delivers approximately every minute (VT 1 schedule). A light above the right lever was briefly illuminated with each pellet delivery. Every lever press produced an immediate illumination of the light and an additional pellet delivery (a conc VT 1 FR 1 schedule). When a rat made at least 100 lever presses in a given session, for the following session the VT 1 component was removed and all pellet deliveries required one lever press (FR 1). When a rat made at least 100 lever presses under the FR 1 schedule, the requirement was increased for the following session to an FR 2. Number of lever presses per session and number of sessions to reach the 100 response criteria were measured. Caffeine altered both the average number of lever presses per session and the number of sessions to reach criteria.
 
56. Effects of a Cannabinoid Agonist on the Reinforcing Efficacy of Self-Administered Ethanol in Rats
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
ERICKA BAILEY (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Cannabinoid agonists increase the reinforcing efficacy of alcohol, but the mechanism of the effect is not clear. This experiment attempts to separate general increases in appetite from specific increases in the reinforcing effects of ethanol. The effects of a synthetic cannabinoid agonist (CP 55,490) on the reinforcing efficacy of ethanol and sucrose are being investigated. Twenty Long-Evans rats will be randomly separated into two groups and trained to self-administer either ethanol or a sucrose solution. Once responding under a progressive-ratio (PR) schedule has been established, PR sessions will cease while CP 55,490 is chronically administered by intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection two times a day for eight days. The following increasing doses will be used across days: 5 µg/kg, 10 µg/kg, 30 µg/kg, and 50 µg/kg. Seven days following the last injection, PR schedule sessions will resume for both the ethanol and sucrose groups. The reinforcing efficacy of ethanol or sucrose following chronic administration of CP 55,490 will be measured by the last ratio completed (i.e., breakpoint).
 
57. Dopamine Agonist and Antagonist in the Study of Choice
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
JORGE ARTURO BALDERRAMA TRAPAGA (Universidad Veracruzana), Carlos F. Aparicio (University of Guadalajara)
Abstract: It has been shown that choice behavior doesn't require steady state performance to show sensitivity to dynamic changes in reinforcement. Moreover, local effects of reinforcement on choice behavior were documented with concurrent performance in transition The present study assessed the generality of these findings in a choice situation where the changeover response requirement was manipulated (CR), and rats responded for food reinforcers under the effects of dopamine agonist (amphetamine 0.5 and 1.0 mg/Kg) and antagonist (haloperidol 0.05 and 0.10 mg/Kg). Every day a different reinforcer ratio (27:1, 9:1, 3:1, 1:1, 1:3, 1:9, 1:27) was arranged in two levers. Five changeover response requirements (1, 4, 8, 16 or 32 responses) were randomly scheduled within sessions, each providing 10 reinforcers and separated by a 60-s blackout. The results were consistent with those obtained in previous studies, choice favored with more responses the lever associated to the highest probability of reinforcement. Sensitivity to reinforcement, as estimated by the parameter s of generalized matching law, increased with increasing changeover response requirement. A comparison of two different environments of reinforcement (stable and dynamic) revealed that sensitivity to reinforcement was differentially affected by the drugs. Interestingly, preference changed with the rats experience in the choice situation, and with repetitive administrations of both drugs.
 
58. Effort as a Determineate of Tolerance to Cocaine Independent of Reinforcement Delivery
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
MATTHEW L. PORRITT (Western Michigan University), Alan D. Poling (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Development of tolerance to cocaine was examined under multiple fixed-ratio schedules with availability of reinforcement determined by average time to complete each schedule.
 
 
 
Poster Session #235
#235 International Poster Session - DDA
Sunday, May 28, 2006
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Grand Hall
59. Effects of Social Stimuli on Laughing and Smiling in Young Children with Angelman Syndrome
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER M. TEICHMAN (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), David M. Richman (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Eric Gernat (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract: Angelman syndrome (AS) is a genetic disorder that is associated with mental retardation, motor impairments, lack of vocal speech, and frequent smiling and laughing (Guerrini, et al., 2003), as well as repetitive and stereotyped motor behavior (Buntinx, et al., 1995; Clarke & Martson, 2000). Several studies have found that smiling and laughing in individuals with AS occur excessively and independently of environmental context (Elian, 1975; Nirenberg, 1991; Summers, et al., 1995). This has prompted many to consider some occurrences of smiling and laughing to be a form of stereotypic behavior in individuals with AS. However, these findings are not consistent, and some studies (Clarke, 2000; Leitner, Clarke, & Einfeld, 2005) did not find evidence to support that individuals with AS exhibit inappropriate smiling and laughing. This study used a multielement design to assess laughing and smiling in two children with AS when social stimuli were both present and absent. Results indicated that laughing and smiling were unaffected by social stimuli for both children. Interobserver agreement was collected for 83.3% and 37.5% of sessions. Interobserver agreement was 85.4% for smiling for the first child, and 96.2% for smiling and 97.5% for laughing for the second child. Key words: smiling, laughing, Angelman syndrome.
 
60. Fading Proximity and Increasing Independent Sitting During Noncontingent Reinforcement
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MANDY M. TRIGGS (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Sung Woo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Denise Kurek (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Brandon Johnson (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: The present study examined the effects of using a fading procedure to gradually increase independent sitting and proximity from an adult in a child with self-injurious behavior (SIB) maintained by access to physical attention. The participant was a 9-year-old female diagnosed with CHARGE syndrome. Using a combination of multielement and reversal design, two methods of fading were assessed: fading noncontingently and fading contingent on independent sitting without SIB. High rates of SIB were observed in the contingent fading condition. In the noncontingent fading condition, low to zero rates of SIB were observed and the terminal goal of 10 minutes of sitting independently at a distant proximity (4 ft) from the therapist was obtained. Results from this study suggest that fading noncontingently was successful in maintaining low rates of SIB while increasing independent sitting and proximity. Reliability data were collected during 34% of sessions.
 
61. A Comparison of Brief Functional Analysis Methodologies in an Outpatient Setting
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KAREN RADER (Louisiana State University), Nathan Call (Louisiana State University)
Abstract: One manner in which functional analysis methods have been adapted for use in outpatient clinics has been to have care providers serve as therapists (Northup et al., 1991). By including care providers, assessments may be completed in less time because their presence may function as discriminative stimuli. A potential drawback of using care providers as therapists is that they may not always implement assessment procedures with high integrity. The current study attempted to evaluate the usefulness of a simplified brief functional analysis methodology that manipulated only the antecedent variable in each test condition, in an effort to increase procedural integrity by care providers. Results of the simplified functional analysis were contrasted with those of a standard brief functional analysis that manipulated both antecedents and consequences. Data were examined for consistency of functional reinforcers identified as well as differences in procedural integrity across type of assessment. Interobserver agreement data were collected for greater than 50% of sessions and always exceeded 90% agreements for all dependent variables. Results of the two assessment methodologies matched with respect to the reinforcers identified to be maintaining problem behavior, and care providers were able to maintain high integrity with the simplified functional analysis.
 
62. An Evaluation of Enriched Environment on Automatically Maintained Disruptive Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JENELL EVELYN BERARD (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Jennifer L. Tessing (Bancroft NeuroHealth)
Abstract: Enriched environment has been demonstrated to be effective in reducing problem behavior that appears to occur in the absence of social consequences. The present study examined the effects of enriched environment on the disruptive behavior of an 11-year old boy with autism. Results of an analog functional analysis suggested that the participant’s disruption was automatically reinforced. A competing items preference assessment was conducted to identify multiple preferred leisure items that were associated with low levels of disruption. The effects of a multiple-item enriched environment on the participant’s rate of disruption were evaluated. Results indicated that rates of disruption decreased substantially and percentages of engagement with the competing items remained high throughout the treatment evaluation. Interobserver agreement data were collected during 25% of the baseline sessions and 59% of the treatment sessions. Mean exact agreement for disruption was 96% for the baseline sessions and 100% for the treatment sessions.
 
63. The Relative Effects of High and Low Preference Stimuli on Task-Related Behavior of Youths with Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JILL A. LARSEN (New England Center for Children), Richard B. Graff (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Stimuli to be evaluated on preference assessments are often selected because those items are thought to be highly preferred. If stimuli obtained during assessments contain only highly preferred items, the obtained preference hierarchies may not be reflexive of actual preference. This might explain why low preference stimuli sometimes function as effective reinforcers (e.g., Taravella, Lerman, Contrucci, & Roane, 2000). In this study, preference assessments were conducted with 2 adolescents with developmental disabilities. In the first assessment, only items suspected to be highly preferred were included. Although distinct preference assessments were generated, subsequent reinforcer assessments (ABAB design using single operant procedures) indicated that high and low preference stimuli were associated with similar response rates. A second preference assessment was then conducted, using the least-preferred stimulus from the original preference assessment, plus 7 new stimuli. The items ranked least preferred on the first assessment were now ranked as most preferred. During subsequent reinforcer assessments, the top-ranked item on the second preference assessment generated high response rates, while the item ranked last on the second assessment did not function as a reinforcer. During preference and reinforcer assessments, interobserver agreement data were collected in over 50% of sessions, and exceeded 95% for both participants.
 
64. The Generalization and Maintenance of Treatment Gains Produced by Non-contingent Food For Pica
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
STEVEN E. TROUT (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Jennifer L. Tessing (Bancroft NeuroHealth)
Abstract: Research has demonstrated that non-contingent access to preferred food items (NCR) is effective in reducing rates of pica. The present study evaluated the effectiveness of NCR (via a fanny pack) for reducing rates of pica across two settings for a 19-year-old male with autism. Results of an analog functional analysis indicated that the participant’s pica was automatically reinforced. An NCR treatment consisting of continuous access to preferred food in a bowl was implemented. After rates of pica decreased, the effects of delivering the preferred food items via a bowl or a fanny pack were compared. Results indicated that both methods were equally effective in reducing the participant’s pica. Finally, the effects of the NCR (fanny pack) treatment were evaluated in a naturalistic setting and during extended sessions. Results indicated that NCR (fanny pack) was effective at substantially reducing the participant’s rates of pica. These reductions in pica maintained when the treatment was implemented across the day. Interobserver agreement data were collected during 20% of the functional analysis sessions and 20% of the treatment sessions. Mean exact agreement for pica was 99% during both the functional analysis and treatment assessment.
 
65. Treatment of Food-Seeking Behavior in an Adolescent Diagnosed with Autism and Obesity
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
RICHARD A. GOYSOVICH (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Dawn E. Lingle (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Yaniz C. Padilla Dalmau (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Maladaptive feeding behaviors such as pica and food stealing are often observed among individuals with developmental disabilities. Some research has examined the effects of pairing discriminative stimuli with a verbal reprimand (Maglieri, DeLeon, Rodriguez-Catter, & Sevin, 2000) and/or an interruption procedure (Piazza, Hanley, and Fisher, 1996). The present study examined the use of discriminative control of communications to request food in an 11-year-old male diagnosed with Autistic Disorder and obesity. Initial assessment results demonstrated that the participant would engage in aggression to access edibles when food-seeking behavior (e.g., looking in trash cans) was blocked. Therefore, the participant was taught to appropriately request food using picture exchange. In order to signal when communications would and would not be reinforced, discriminative stimuli (an SD and S?) were introduced and presented contingent on attempts at food seeking behavior. Additional treatment components (i.e., competing stimuli and a DRO) were systematically introduced to further decrease problem behavior when food was not available. In addition, the availability of specific edibles varied across treatment sessions. Treatment effects were demonstrated across a series of reversals, and reliability data were collected during 54% of all assessment and treatment sessions and averaged above 80%.
 
66. Can the ABLA Test Results Predict Compliance to Instructions in Children with Developmental Delay?
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
RENE HIEBERT (University of Manitoba), Jennifer R. Thorsteinsson (University of Manitoba), Garry L. Martin (University of Manitoba), Dickie C. T. Yu (University of Manitoba & St. Amant Research Centre)
Abstract: The Assessment of Basic Learning abilities (ABLA) test is an easy-to-administer test of an individual’s ability to learn visual and auditory discriminations using six mini-learning tasks (called levels). ABLA levels are stable and hierarchically ordered. ABLA levels 3 and 4 are visual discriminations, while levels 5 and 6 are auditory discriminations. In this study, we assessed some children with developmental delay who were at ABLA level 4, and some who were at level 6. Caregivers were asked to present their children with instructions alone on some occasions and instructions with modeling and gestures on other occasions when assessing compliance with five age-appropriate tasks. Sessions were videotaped and rate of compliance to the prompts was determined. In addition, antecedents and consequences were monitored for procedural integrity. Data collected this far indicates that ABLA test results predict compliance to instructions versus instructions plus gestures and modeling. The results have implications for how best to recommend that parents present instructions to their children with developmental delay.
 
67. Assessment and Treatment of Self-injurious Behavior Maintained by Negative Reinforcement: A Comparison of Escape and Avoidance
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
ANNA E. CHIRIGHIN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Negative reinforcement is a common contingency maintaining self-injurious behavior (SIB) among persons with developmental disabilities (Iwata et al., 1994). However, few studies have examined whether the behavior is maintained by escape or avoidance, particularly within the context of academic instruction. The current study describes an 18-year old male diagnosed with Profound Mental Retardation who engaged in high rates of SIB. Results of functional analyses suggested he was more likely to engage in SIB during demand conditions. In addition, high rates of SIB were often observed during the transition to the demand condition which often carried over into the demand sessions. An assessment was therefore conducted to test whether SIB was more likely to occur during the presentation of demands or during transitions to complete demands. Zero rates of SIB were observed in both the control (nonacademic transitions) and academics-only conditions, while high rates were observed in the transition to academics condition, suggesting an avoidance rather than escape function. Results of this assessment were used to evaluate a treatment targeting transitions. Reliability data were collected during 50% of sessions and averaged 97 %. The outcome of this study demonstrates the necessity of examining the exact nature of the reinforcer maintaining behavior.
 
68. Cognitive-Behavioral Treatment for Phobias in a Child with Severe Behavior Problems and Developmental Delay
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
LINDSAY S. HAUER (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Thompson Davis (Louisiana State University), Patricia F. Kurtz (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Andrew W. Gardner (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Nicole B. Carman (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated the efficacy of one-session cognitive-behavioral treatment for specific phobias with typically developing children (Öst, 1989, 1997). However, this treatment has not been applied to phobias exhibited by children with disabilities. The present study examined the utility of one-session treatment in a child with developmental delay, severe behavior problems, and specific phobias of water and heights. Indirect assessments included a parent diagnostic interview (Anxiety Disorders Interview Schedule-IV-Parent) and child self-report of fear intensity (Fear Survey Schedule for Children-Revised). Also, direct observations of child task completion, social support seeking, and vocalizations were conducted during pre- and post- treatment probes. Treatment for each phobia consisted of one massed, graduated, in vivo exposure session incorporating modeling, verbal reinforcement, and cognitive challenges (Davis & Ollendick, 2005; Öst 1989, 1997). Results of indirect and direct observation indicated significant reductions in the clinical severity of fear of water and heights and in behavioral avoidance. Two-month follow-up data indicated that the participant no longer met diagnostic criteria for either phobia. Overall, results suggest good utility for this cognitive-behavioral treatment. Future research should evaluate the utility of direct observation in the assessment and treatment of phobias in children with developmental disabilities.
 
69. Enhancing the Lives of Individuals Living in Community Based Group Homes: A Review of the Literature over the Past 10 Years
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
NIALL JAMES TONER (Eden II Programs), Arie Sztulwark (Eden II Programs), Frank R. Cicero (Eden II Programs)
Abstract: With the downsizing and closing of many large institutions, the number of individuals being served in community based group homes has increased dramatically since the early 1980’s. These smaller residential settings provide many benefits to the consumers living within them than could larger institutional settings. Community residences, however, come with their own set of issues that often make clinical service delivery a challenge. Whereas past research was often conducted directly within the institutions, research projects in the fields of behavior analysis and developmental disabilities today are often conducted in analogue settings, such as university and hospital clinics. The current literature review investigated the settings in which research projects took place across five peer reviewed journals from 1995 through 2005. Reviewed journals included JABA, Behavior Modification, American Journal on Mental Retardation, Research in Developmental Disabilities and JADD. Data will be presented on the frequency of articles conducted within community-based residences annually across each journal compared to other settings. Data will also be analyzed by participants, theory, hypotheses and research design. Along with the visual display of data, implications of the research trends and future research directions for the fields of behavior analysis and developmental disabilities will be discussed.
 
70. Teaching Paraprofessionals to Promote Independent Transition in a Public School Classroom
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
SELENA RAUENZAHN (San Diego State University)
Abstract: Autism is characterized by a triad of impairments in the areas of socialization, communication and ritualistic behavior. Learners with autism tend to have strengths in following established routines and following visual cues and understanding of visuospatial relationships; however, in a classroom setting, learners tend to rely on adult prompts rather than environmental cues. Using a concurrent multiple baseline design, this study evaluated the effects of an intervention package on substitute and non-permanent paraprofessionals in a public school setting, which addressed the need to encourage independent transition in learners with autism. This study focused on teaching paraprofessionals to assist transitions without increasing prompt dependence for learners with Autistic Spectrum Disorder who also have mental retardation in a self-contained special education classroom in a public school.
 
71. Self-Monitored Token System Addressing Appropriate Classroom Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KATHERINE M WAMHOFF (University of Texas, Austin), Tonya Nichole Davis (University of Texas, Austin), Berenice de la Cruz (University of Texas, Austin), Mark O'Reilly (University of Texas, Austin)
Abstract: Developmental disability is a term encompassing an array of lifelong conditions. Developmental disabilities are characterized by intellectual impairment and delays in social and adaptive functioning. In addition, problem behavior is often associated with developmental disabilities. Problem behaviors are often addressed with behavioral managements systems that are teacher-directed. The purpose of this study was to determine if a six-year-old child with a developmental disability could successfully use self-monitoring to maintain a token system that was previously maintained by the teacher. Self-monitoring techniques have been shown to be effective behavior management strategies for individuals with disabilities. However, this study is addressing a young child who will be using a previously teacher-maintained system. The self-monitored token system addressed the child’s voice volume in the classroom. The child was first taught to differentiate acceptable and unacceptable voice volume. The child was then taught to monitor her behavior using the token system currently maintained by the teacher. A multiple baseline design across settings was used to evaluate improvement of voice volume. The child was able to self-monitor to maintain appropriate voice volume using the token system.
 
72. A Summary of Behavioral Histories of Young Children Exhibiting Self-Injurious Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
DENNIS DIXON (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Patricia F. Kurtz (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Michelle D. Chin (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John M. Huete (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Despite considerable attention by researchers and clinicians, self-injurious behavior (SIB) remains one of the most difficult disorders to treat. Recent findings suggest that it is unlikely that children with developmental delays will simply outgrow this behavior with time (Green, O’Reilly, Itchon, & Sigafoos, 2004). Researchers have increasingly noted the importance of early intervention (Berkson, Tupa & Sherman, 2001; Green et al., 2004; Kurtz et al., 2003), yet there remains a dearth of studies evaluating SIB in young children (Symons, Sperry, Dropik, & Bodfish, 2005). The present study provides a description of SIB in children under age 5 years referred for behavioral treatment of SIB. The behavioral histories of 65 children (mean age=32.44 months) were assessed via structured parent interview and record review. Mean onset of SIB was 16.1 months (range=1-38 months). In most cases, the first observed topography of SIB was headbanging (67%). The delay between onset of SIB and clinical services was 16.8 months (range=1-44 months). At start of services, children exhibited multiple topographies of SIB (mean=3.35) and multiple forms of problem behavior (mean= 3.395). Results are discussed in relation to the use of behavior analytic procedures for early identification and intervention of SIB.
 
73. A Comparison of Functional Analysis and Mand Analysis Results
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KELLY M. SCHIELTZ (University of Iowa), Jay W. Harding (University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (University of Iowa), John F. Lee (University of Iowa)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate whether destructive behavior and manding were maintained by the same social reinforcers. The participants were two preschool-aged boys with developmental disabilities who engaged in destructive behavior. All procedures were conducted in the boys’ homes by their mothers with investigator coaching. Inter-observer agreement was assessed across 30% of all sessions and averaged 97%. During Phase 1, functional analyses conducted within a multielement design showed that destructive behavior was maintained by both negative and positive reinforcement. During Phase 2, a manding analysis, conducted within the same test conditions as the functional analysis and within a multielement design, showed that touching a microswitch was maintained by social reinforcers. For one child destructive behavior and manding were maintained by the same social reinforcers. For the second child, destructive behavior was maintained by tangible and escape reinforcers, whereas manding was maintained by attention, tangible, and escape reinforcers. Keywords: functional analysis, mand analysis.
 
74. Increasing Vocabulary in Students with Developmental Disabilities: A Differential Outcome Procedure used in Stimulus Equivalence Paradigm
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
HIROFUMI SHIMIZU (Hawthorne Country Day School), Tina Marie Covington (Hawthorne Country Day School), Christopher S. McDonough (Hawthorne Country Day School)
Abstract: We examined the effect of a differential outcome procedure to increase student's vocabulary in the stimulus equivalence paradigm. Students with developmental disabilities participated in the study. In the typical equivalence study, two conditional relations are trained before equivalence tests. For example, a participant learns to match A to B and B to C at baseline training. After two conditional relations (AB and BC) are established, equivalence relations (AA, BB, CC, BA, CB, AC, and CA) are tested. In this study, during the baseline training the participant learned to select A conditionally on B. The presentation of C followed the selection as a differential outcome. After a conditional relation (AB) with the differential outcome (C) was established, the equivalence tests were implemented. The results will be discussed along with the application to instructional design.
 
75. Generalization of Differential Reinforcement Schedule Thinning
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
APRIL N. KISAMORE (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), Laura L. Grow (Marcus Autism Center), Robert-Ryan S. Pabico (Marcus Autism Center), Karen Meyers (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) is an effective procedure for decreasing the occurrence of maladaptive behavior. Despite the general efficacy of DRO, these procedures may result in schedules of reinforcement that may be cumbersome for caregivers to implement. For example, DRO procedures may be impractical in school settings in which reinforcer delivery is delivered on a dense schedule of reinforcement following the absence of problem behavior. In the current investigation, we described a method of thinning the DRO schedule to practical levels. A resetting DRO procedure was used in which the reinforcement delivery was withheld and delivered contingent on the absence of problem behavior for a specified interval. The DRO interval was gradually increased from 0 s until a terminal DRO interval (i.e., 19 min) was achieved. Following, successful decreases in levels of problem behavior the DRO procedures were generalized to the participant’s school setting using the same schedule thinning procedures. Reliability data were collected on at least 33% of all sessions and averaged over 90% for both participants. Results are discussed in terms of developing reinforcement-based interventions that can be easily transferred to naturalistic settings.
 
76. Evaluation of Reinforcing Efficacy Using Progressive-Ratio Schedules
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
LINDSAY C. PETERS (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children), Jonathan Seaver (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Progressive-ratio schedules may be used to evaluate the reinforcing efficacy of stimuli under increasing ratio requirements. Previous researchers have used several measures to analyze progressive-ratio data. These include the break point of responding, duration of pre-ratio pausing, cumulative number of responses, rate of responding at each ratio step, and the number of responses and reinforcers delivered at each ratio step across multiple exposures to the schedule. We extended these analyses by evaluating responding for 2 reinforcers found to be of differing preference using a paired-stimulus preference assessment (Fisher et al., 1992) by session response rate and session response frequency in addition to the measures mentioned. Inter-observer agreement was collected for 42.9% of sessions with 97.9% agreement. Results showed that different analyses are useful in evaluating various parameters of responding.
 
77. Escape to or Escape From? An Initial Evaluation of a Modified Functional Analysis Methodology
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
STEPHEN T. NORTH (May South), William A. Flood (May South), Donna J. North (Devereux Family Care)
Abstract: McCord, Thompson, and Iwata (2001) reported a permutation of the functional analysis methodology originally described by Iwata, Dorsey, Slifer, Bauman, and Richman (1982/1994) designed to investigate the determinants of problem behavior occasioned by transitions from one activity or location to another. These authors suggested three separate components that might influence behavior either alone or in combination: (1) termination of a prechange activity, (2) initiation of a postchange activity, and (3) movement from one location to another. In the present study, we modified the traditional functional analysis to evaluate the effects of termination of a prechange acitivity and initiation of a postchange activity on rates of self-injurious behavior exhibited by a 19-year-old male diagnosed with autism. Initial results indicated higher rates of SIB occurred during the condition associated with escape from a specific task activity to a specific preferred activity than during the condition associated only with escape from the task. These results, combined with elevated rates of SIB in the tangible condition suggested maintenance of problem behavior by social positive reinforcement, rather than the social negative reinforcement hypothesis suggested by the traditional functional analysis. Implications of these results on treatment development and future research are discussed.
 
78. Treatment of Elopement and its effects on Adjunctive Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA ROSS BROWN (Marcus Autism Center), M. Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Adjunctive behavior is defined as behavior that is maintained indirectly by the variables that control another behavior. Previous research has shown that adjunctive behavior may increase in frequency when other responses are exposed to intermittent reinforcement (Falk, 1971). However, few studies have examined the effects of treatment implementation on reduction of adjunctive behavior. The present investigation examined the effects of a treatment of elopement on adjunctive behaviors with a 7-year-old male diagnosed with autism in a reversal design. Prior to the implementation of the treatment, a functional analysis of elopement was conducted, which revealed elopement was maintained by attention in the form of reprimands and retrieval. Thereafter, a baseline condition of elopement was conducted. During these sessions, additional inappropriate behaviors were observed. Following the baseline condition, a treatment condition was implemented which consisted of noncontingent reinforcement (NCR) plus differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO). Results of this study suggested that the treatment of elopement not only decreased the target behavior but also lowered the associated adjunctive behavior. Reliability data were collected and 38% of all sessions and averaged over 80% for all dependent variables.
 
 
 
Poster Session #236
#236 International Poster Session - EAB
Sunday, May 28, 2006
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Grand Hall
1. The Effect of Activity Anorexia on Sensitivity to Social Reinforcement in Rats
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
AMY K DRAYTON (Eastern Michigan University), James T. Todd (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: It has been previously shown that in the context of Activity Anorexia (AA) the reinforcing value of food decreases and the reinforcement value of exercise increases. The purpose of this experiment is to examine the relative reinforcement value of social contact with other rats for activity anorexic rats. If the reinforcement value of social contact decreases along with the value of food, this suggests that the excessive exercise shown in AA produces an anhedonic effect.
 
2. The Emergence of Syntactic Relations in Children
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
GRAUBEN ASSIS (Para Federal University), Maria Elizângela Sampaio (Para Federal University), Cristiane Franco Elleres (Para Federal University), Marcelo Galvão Baptista (Para Federal University)
Abstract: This study sought to identify newly-emergent sentences, based on the position of each word in each independently taught sentence. The participant included six first grade children. A microcomputer presented a set of capital words, contained in three different sentences during chaining practice sessions. For example, on the first trial, the word “O” was presented in the “choice area” of the screen. After the child touched a word, it automatically moved to the “construction area” in the upper portion of the screen, and consequently, a cartoon appeared, together with verbal compliments such as “very good”, “good”. Next, two words were presented simultaneously, and the child would touch one, and then the other. When the words were touched in the correct order the same consequence ensued, and the same configuration of words appeared in different positions in the “choice area”. When the response was incorrect, the screen was filled with “1”s, and then a new set of words appeared. All of the children reached the pre-established criterion level. On the tests of connectivity and comprehension, four children responded accurately. These results demonstrated the stability of stimulus classes, and the tendency for new sentences to emerge without additional training. It was concluded that the stimuli utilized were functionally equivalent and influenced ordinal functions by reference to the position that each one occupied in the sentences. Key Words: equivalence, sequences, ordinal classes, sentence, children
 
3. Pigeons, Self-Control, and the Iterated Prisoner's Dilemma: Control by Experimental or Historical Contingencies?
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
SHAWN R. CHARLTON (University of California, San Diego), Edmund J. Fantino (University of California, San Diego)
Abstract: Several experiments have studied pigeon performance on an analog of the single-subject iterated prisoner’s dilemma. Results from these experiments are typically consistent with the interpretation that pigeons do not behave cooperatively, but rather allocate the majority of their responses to the operandum associated with the immediately larger outcome. However, a report (Baker & Rachlin, 2002, Psychonomic Bulletin & Review) suggested that under certain procedural conditions, pigeons could be trained to allocate their responses in a more cooperative pattern. Full interpretation of these results is confounded by pre-testing response biases that may also explain the observed outcomes. In order to separate the effect of pre-existing response biases from the impact of the experimental contingency, this experiment used a 2 X 3 between-subject design with 2 types of procedures (differential vs. non-differential signaling of the previous choice) and 3 levels of response bias (no bias, 15 days of bias training, and 30 days of bias training). Results indicate that the level of cooperation on the prisoner’s dilemma is a function of prior history with the response stimuli rather than a direct function of the experimental procedure.
 
4. Effects of Unconditioned and Conditioned Reinforcement Ratios on the Behavior of Dogs: 1 to 1 vs. 1 to 2
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
KATHRYN L. KALAFUT (University of North Texas), Michelle Lamancusa (University of North Texas), Jesus Rosales-ruiz (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Effects of Unconditioned and Conditioned Reinforcement Ratios on the Behavior of Dogs: 1 to 1 vs. 1 to 2. KATHRYN KALAFUT, Michelle Lamancusa and Jesus Rosales-Ruiz (University of North Texas) Abstract In the clicker training community it is a common practice to deliver a click (conditioned Sr+) and a treat (unconditioned Sr+) after every correct behavior. At the same time, some advocate the delivery of several clicks before a treat is delivered. There is much controversy over whether there is a difference in the effects of these two procedures. Recent research, however, has shown that the ratio has an effect on both the topography and frequency of behavior (Dunham, et. al., and Wennmacher, et. al., ABA 2005). Dunham at. al., studied the effects using a free-operant under FR1 as a baseline and Wennmacher, et. al. used two restricted operants under a FR1 schedule. The present research investigates the effects of these different reinforcement ratios using a free operant under a FR2. A multiple baseline across three dogs with reversals was used. After a baseline was established with a FR 2 schedule (clicking and treating after every 2 correct responses), each of the dogs correct responses was followed by a click, but reinforcement was only given after two correct responses were completed. Results are in progress.
 
5. The Effect of Familiar versus Unfamiliar Category Names on Training Stimulus Equivalence in Pre-school Children
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CHELSEA BRONEVITCH (University of Manitoba, Department of Psychology), Lisa C. Dreger (University of Manitoba, Department of Psychology), Stephen W. Holborn (University of Manitoba, Department of Psychology)
Abstract: Naming theory attributes the emergence of untrained equivalence relations among arbitrary stimuli, following training of stimulus pairs, to the development of categories through stimulus naming. Previous studies have provided support for the theory in pre-school children using unfamiliar (nonsense) words for category names to train stimulus pairs with arbitrary stimuli (uniquely shaped wooden blocks). The present research evaluated the effect of linguistically familiar versus linguistically unfamiliar category names on formation of equivalence relations in pre-school children. The children were trained in the stimulus pairs A-B and B-C using arbitrary shapes and, once criterion levels were met, the children were tested for the emergence of untrained pairs: B-A, C-B and C-A. Using an alternating conditions design, each of four children was trained to match three stimulus pairs with common English category names and a second set of three stimulus pairs with unknown, foreign language category names. The participants were subsequently tested for equivalence formation of untrained pairs in both category name conditions. Preliminary data suggest that training with familiar category names facilitates the formation of equivalence relations.
 
6. Taiwan ABA.
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
HUA FENG (National Chang-hua University of Education), Yi-feng Huang (Taichung Autism Education Association), Sharon Chien Chien (SEEK Education, Inc.), Yachen Terri Peng (SEEK Education, Inc.), Shu-Hwei Ke (ABA Educational Center, Taichung), Chia-Yu Chou (ABA Member), Chih-liang Chen (ABA Member)
Abstract:

The poster will present the development of ABA in Taiwan through the chapter, graduate study opportunities, and the national conference of Taiwan ABA.

 
7. Offensive Play Calling in Professional Football: An Application of theGeneralized Matching Relation
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
DEREK D. REED (Syracuse University), Thomas S. Critchfield (Illinois State University), Erin Ullett (Syracuse University)
Abstract: The generalized matching relation (GMR) is a mathematical expression describing the relationship between relative occurrence of concurrent behaviors and relative occurrence of reinforcement contingent upon those behaviors. In addition to describing performance on laboratory concurrent schedules, the GMRhas been applied to many situations outside the laboratory. Vollmer and Bourret (2000) used the GMR to evaluate college basketball players' allocation of responding to 2- and 3-point shots. Results suggested that these players' adherence to the matching law was near perfect. The present study sought to extend the work of Vollmer and Bourret (2000) by using the GMR to evaluate offensive play calling (pass vs. rush plays) by offensive coordinators in professional football. A variety of analyses based on season-aggregate data (one data point per team, or offensive coordinator) showed good fits ofthe GMR to play calling in the NFL, NFL Europe, CFL, and Arena Football League. These analyses, like those of Vollmer and Bourret, focused on group-aggregate data (one data point per individual). Further analyses of play calling ofindividual teams (offensive coordinators) for all 32 NFL teams generally supported the aggregate analyses.
 
8. Asymmetrical Changeover Requirement in Standard Independent and Forced Choice Situations
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANGEL JIMENEZ (Universidad de Guadalajara), Carlos F. Aparicio (Universidad de Guadalajara)
Abstract: Recent results of our laboratory have shown that increasing the separation of the reinforcement contingencies in concurrent variable interval – variable interval schedules in standard and forced choice situations produce different results. This finding was tested in two experiments that increased asymmetrically the changeover requirement in dynamic environments. Rats responded for food in two levers that differed in the probability of reinforcement, defining seven reinforcer ratios that changed seven times within sessions. To switch from the lean to the rich lever, a changeover lever required 1, 16, 32, and 48 responses; one response was required to switch from the rich to the lean lever. For a group of rats a forced choice situation was implemented. With a different group of rats the contingencies of reinforcement in one lever were independent of those scheduled for the other lever. The results showed that sensitivity to reinforcement increased with increasing changeover requirements in a forced choice situation. In the standard choice situation, however, sensitivity values were lower tha those obtained in the forced choice situation. The role of the asymmetrical changeover requirement in forced and standard choice situations will be discussed.
 
9. Progressive Ratio Schedules: The Effect of Contextual Signals on Rat’s Performance
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
PABLO COVARRUBIAS (Universidad de Guadalajara), Carlos F. Aparicio (Universidad de Guadalajara)
Abstract: The Mathematical Principles of Reinforcement (MPR) (Killeen, 1994) accurately explain performance in fixed ratio (FR) schedules of reinforcement. This study extended the applicability of MPR to progressive ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement. The main purpose was to assess whether the parameters of activation (a), response time (delta), and coupling (zeta) are modified by the type of reinforcer (food vs. saccharine), the size of the step (PR1 vs. PR3), and the contextual signals (noisy vs. quiet) in which the reinforcer is presented. The results showed that higher ratios were completed and superior values of the activation-parameter obtained with saccharine than with food pellets. In comparison with performance in the PR1, higher response rates and lower values of the response-time-parameter were obtained with the PR3 schedule of reinforcement. With changes in the contextual signal the values of the activation-parameter increased, but those corresponding to the response-time and coupling parameters decreased suggesting control by the contextual signal. Overall, the results showed that MPR is a suitable theory to explain the rat’s performance in PR schedules of reinforcement.
 
10. Identifying Unwanted Stimulus Control in Experimental Stimuli
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CAMMARIE JOHNSON (New England Center for Children), Sarah M. Chagnon (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: A pre-experimental analysis was conducted for arbitrary or abstract stimuli that were going to be used in basic stimulus equivalence research. Ten newly hired special needs teachers were given 18 stimuli with written instructions to sort the stimuli into three groups based on “logical properties.” Interobserver agreement data were recorded during sorting for all participants and agreement was 100%. The number of participants who placed each stimulus-stimulus pair in the same group was converted into probability measures. An analysis of these data indicated unwanted stimulus control that would likely compete with learned or emergent relations in the experiment-proper. Results are discussed in terms of avoiding pre-experimental unwanted stimulus control by analyzing stimuli prior to their assignment to classes in equivalence research.
 
11. Sucrose vs. Standard Pellets: An Analysis of Elasticity Under a Single Alternative Condition
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
SHILO L. SMITH RUIZ (Idaho State University), Alexa A. Wakley (Idaho State University), Erin B. Rasmussen (Idaho State University)
Abstract: Reinforcer palatability was studied comparing sucrose and standard pellets, using a behavioral economics approach. 12 male Long-Evans hooded rats approximately 3 months of age were trained to lever press. Once lever pressing was established, behavior under several 30 minute fixed ratio schedules of reinforcement (FR5, FR15, FR30, FR50, FR90, FR150) was examined. Rats completed the incremented sessions using standard pellets as reinforcement, then completed identical sessions using sucrose pellets as reinforcement. Elasticity of demand for sucrose vs. standard pellets was established by plotting numbers of reinforcers earned and response rate as a function of fixed ratio. Differences were observed in the number of reinforcers, response rates, the elasticity coefficient, and the p max of the demand curve.
 
12. Speed of Eating as a Determinant of the Bulimic Desire to Vomit
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
NATHAN H. AZRIN (Nova Southeastern University), Michael J. Kellen (Nova Southeastern University), Jeannie S. Brooks (Nova Southeastern University), Benita L. Forman (Donna Klein)
Abstract: A single-case controlled study found that a bulimic’s desire to vomit was virtually eliminated by slowed eating, but not by rapid eating. The present study attempted to determine whether this same relation was exhibited by a larger number, N=6, of bulimics who were instructed to eat at fast, slow or normal rates in a within-subject reversal design. For all 6 subjects, the urge to vomit was found to be greater during fast vs. slow eating after comparable amounts of food intake. Clinically, these results suggest that eating slowly might be incorporated in treatment for bulimic purging.
 
13. Stimulus Control of Resistance to Change
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TAKEHARU IGAKI (Keio University, Japan), Takayuki Sakagami (Keio University, Japan)
Abstract: Previous research examining stimulus factors on resistance to change have showed that key location does not control resistance to change. However, in the multiple concurrent schedules used in the previous research, each stimuli element (color and location) was presented to subjects with a different way. In other words, subject learned the correlation of color and location with reinforcement rates with a different way. To examine the role of key location further, we used a different kind of multiple concurrent schedules in which each concurrent-schedule component was arranged on the upper and lower keys. Four pigeons were trained on multiple concurrent schedules in which reinforcement rates summed across keys within components were varied systematically. Resistance to change for key location was greater for the component with the higher reinforcement rates. However, resistance to change for key color did not depend on the total reinforcement rate correlated with each key color. These results suggest that key location can also be incorporated into a stimulus factor that controls resistance to change, and that resistance to change depends not on the physical feature of stimulus such as color and location but on how these stimuli indicate reinforcement rates.
 
14. Using the Spontaneously Hypertensive Rat (SHR) as an Animal Model for Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (AD/HD): Assessing Impulsivity with a Concurrent Chains Procedure
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
M. BRAD KINCHELOE (James Madison University), Sherry L. Serdikoff (James Madison University)
Abstract: Five to seven percent of all school-aged children in the United States are diagnosed with attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder (AD/HD). Research using concurrent chains procedures has shown that individuals with AD/HD are more likely than non-AD/HD peers to choose smaller more immediate reinforcers as opposed to larger more delayed reinforcers. The current study was designed to examine the behavior of Spontaneously Hyperactive Rats (SHRs), a putative animal model of the disorder, using a similar procedure. The performance of six SHRs is compared with the performance of six control Wistar Kyoto rats (WKYs) in a concurrent chains procedure where delay-of-reinforcement and reinforcer magnitude are parametrically manipulated to determine indifference points for each individual. To the extent that indifference points differ for SHRs and WKYs in a manner consistent with more preference for smaller, more immediate reinforcers in SHRs, these data support continued use of SHRs as a laboratory animal model of AD/HD.
 
15. An Experimental Simulation of Infant Caregiving
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JENNIFER LYNNE BRUZEK (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas), Nicole M. Cotnoir (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The goal of this investigation was to identify the effects of infant crying on caregiver behavior within a simulated caregiving situation. Three undergraduate participants were exposed to a simulated caregiving condition during sessions lasting approximately 30 min. At the start of each session, a recorded infant cry was presented until the participant performed the target response (e.g., holding the child in a horizontal position and rocking) for three consecutive s. Crying was withheld as long as the participant continued to perform the target response. The target response varied across experimental sessions. Data collectors recorded the duration, frequency, or occurrence/nonoccurrence of a variety of caregiving responses (e.g., rocking, soothing statements) and negative emotional responses (e.g., negative comments). Interobserver agreement was assessed during a minimum of 30% of sessions for all participants and mean agreement was above 85% for all measures. Results for all three participants indicated that the removal of the cry was a reinforcer for caregiving behavior. Thus, this preparation may be useful for future studies of the role of negative reinforcement in the maintenance of adaptive human behavior.
 
16. The Effects of Various Instructions on the Tolerance of Delays to Reinforcement
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
ANURADHA DUTT (University of Iowa), Terry S. Falcomata (University of Iowa), John A. Northup (University of Iowa), Jason M. Stricker (University of Iowa), Kelly M. Vinquist (University of Iowa), Brenda J. Engebretson (University of Iowa)
Abstract: The purpose of this analysis was to examine the effects of different types of instructions on delay behavior with two children with ADHD. The specific information within the instructions regarding the contingencies in place was varied across conditions. Effects of various instructions were compared within an alternating treatments design across various conditions including reinforcement, extinction, and reinforcement with progressively increasing delay requirements. Results suggested that successful waiting occurred in the absence of problem behavior when instructions contained a description of the contingencies in place. IOA was obtained during at least 30% of all sessions and averaged above 90% for all target responses.
 
17. Choice Behavior, Experience, and Forager’s Efficiency
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JORGE ARTURO BALDERRAMA TRAPAGA (Universidad Veracruzana), Carlos F. Aparicio (Universidad de Guadalajara)
Abstract: It is well known that in choice situations behavior allocation favors with more responses the alternative associated to the highest probability of reinforcement. However, visiting the lean alternative too often may reduce the forager’s efficiency in maximizing reinforcement rate. The present study analyzed this possibility with rats in a situation where every day a different reinforcer ratio (27:1, 9:1, 3:1, 1:1, 1:3, 1:9, 1:27) was arranged in two levers. For each session, fifty reinforcers were scheduled according to five changeover response requirements (1, 4, 8, 16 or 32 responses), each providing 10 reinforcers and separated by a 60-s blackout. Within sessions the changeover response requirements were randomly selected without replacement. The results showed that visit durations and number of responses decreased in the levers with the rats’ experience in the choice situation, reducing notoriously the time necessary to obtain the 50 scheduled reinforcers. Sensitivity to reinforcement, as estimated by the parameter s of generalized matching law, increased with increasing changeover response requirement. But the animals experience in the present situation also determined the organisms’ sensitivity to dynamic changes in the reinforcer ratio. The role of the forager’s efficiency in choice situations will be discussed.
 
18. The Role of Limited-Hold Contingencies During Training and Testing in the Development of Stimulus Equivalence
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JESSICA A. MADRIGAL-BAUGUSS (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Despite the implication of stimulus equivalence in a wide variety of complex human behavior patterns, many questions underlying the basic stimulus control processes remain unanswered. The use of dependent measures other than percent of correct trials may help broaden our ability to ask additional questions about the phenomenon of stimulus equivalence. These measures include a systematic assessment of latencies and probabilities of responding on the various equivalence trial types. Two experiments explored the effects of a limited hold procedure that allowed subjects to passively skip a trial by not responding during the limited window of time. In Experiment 1, there was a limited hold on comparison selection during testing trials. In Experiment 2, there was a limited hold on comparison selection during training trials. Results from Experiment 1 show that accurate responding on different derived relations emerged at relatively similar rates. A low probability of skipping trials with a 2 s limited hold contingency occurred. Results from Experiment II show that although time limits placed on training trials did not systematically hinder or facilitate testing performances, response latencies on the test trials reliably decreased. Both experiments also attempt to draw attention to the particular values of the parameters involved.
 
19. Manipulation of Social Status using Caffeine, Ephedrine and Caffeine-Ephedrine Combinations: Effects on Individual and Group Matching in an Optimal Foraging Paradigm
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
VALERI FARMER-DOUGAN (Illinois State University), Jennifer Freytag (Illinois State University), Katrina M. Lakin (Illinois State University), Candace White (Illinois State University)
Abstract: Ideal free distribution predicts that the ratio of time spent by a group at two food patches will equal the ratio of obtained food at the patches. Unlike the matching law, however, it makes no prediction regarding individual member behavior. Indeed, previous studies show that group behavior conforms to the matching law, but individual behavior does not necessarily. Rather, competitive status of individual members correlates with undermatching values for individuals. Our previous research has shown that disruption of competitive status alters not only individual but also group matching. In the present study we manipulated status of the best and worst matcher in three groups of 5 rats via exposure to caffeine, ephedrine or their combination. These agents are established DA agonists with behavioral activation effects. Baseline rates of matching and social status were obtained for each animal and the group using CONC FT FT schedules in a large foraging box. High and low matching rats were identified. The high or low status rat was then exposed to caffeine, ephedrine or caffeine-ephedrine combinations. Changes in sensitivity to reward occurred during drug exposure across both the group and individuals, as expected.
 
20. The Influence of Training Conditions on Emergent Performances
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KIMBERLY SMITH (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Twenty-six participants, divided into three groups, learned to relate English words to Czech and Portuguese words in a matching-to-sample procedure. Half the word pairs were learned using English words as samples and foreign words as corresponding comparisons and the other half were learned with the foreign words serving as samples and English words as corresponding comparisons. The only difference in training across the three groups involved a programmed delay between the removal of the sample stimulus and the presentation of comparison stimuli. For Group 0, Group 2, and Group 8, the programmed delay values between sample offset and comparison onset were 0 s, 2 s, and 8 s, respectively. Test trials assessed the extent to which the trained conditional relations were symmetrical. The results suggest that the likelihood of transfer was greatest for the group that learned the task with the largest delay (i.e., an 8 s delay between sample offset and comparison onset). Potential mechanisms for these findings will be discussed.
 
21. The Effects of Verbalizing a Rule of Performance on the Acquisition of Variable and Stereotyped Responses in Adults
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
HECTOR MARTINEZ SANCHEZ (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Juan Moises De la Serna Tuya (University of Seville, Spain), Sofia Guri Hernandez Torres (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: Thirty-six college students emitted variable and stereotyped responses on matching-to sample tasks. Six groups of participants were exposed to a particular sequence of variability- and stereotypy- based contingencies. Variable responses were reinforced in one condition and stereotyped responses were reinforced in another condition. After each session (36 trials), verbalizing a rule related to performance was required as part of the experimental task in three groups. The other three groups of participants were exposed to the same sequences of variability and stereotypy, except that verbalization was not required. The acquisition of variable and stereotyped behavior was affected by the verbalization requirement in two ways: a) the sessions were longer than in the other groups; and b) there were more errors in the acquisition of both kinds of behaviors. These results suggest that requiring verbalization can affect variable and stereotyped discriminative performance.Keywords: variability, stereotypy, matching to sample, verbalizations, rules, key pressing, college students.
 
22. Teaching Perspective-Taking Skills to Typically Developing Children Through Derived Relational Responding
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
AMIE HEAGLE (Southern Illinois University), Ruth Anne Rehfeldt (Southern Illinois University), Maranda Trahan (Southern Illinois University), Joanna M. Kooistra (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Perspective-taking is a skill that requires a child to display knowledge of informational states in himself or herself and in others (Barnes-Holmes, Hayes, & Dymond, 2001). The major cited theory in the area of perspective-taking is the developmental perspective, or the Theory of Mind approach, while an alternate behavioral approach that is somewhat new to this area of concern is the Relational Frame Theory approach. This study used an extended version of the Barnes-Holmes protocol developed in a series of studies by McHugh et al., (2004) to teach typically developing children between the ages of 6-11 perspective-taking skills. This study evaluated the participants’ ability to show a number of simple and complex relations, examining both relation type (I-you, here-there, and now-then) and relational complexity (i.e., simple, reversed, and double reversed). Currently, this is the only study to date that has assessed these learned perspective-taking skills and tested for generalization of perspective-taking to new stimuli and real-world conversational topics.
 
23. Global and Local Effects of Additional Response-Contingent Stimuli in a Concurrent Schedule
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
NATHALIE JEANNE BOUTROS (University of Auckland, New Zealand), Michael C. Davison (University of Auckland, New Zealand), Douglas Elliffe (University of Auckland, New Zealand)
Abstract: Recent research (Davison and Baum, submitted) suggests that stimuli that are never paired with, but are perfectly positively correlated with, primary reinforcement can produce reinforcer-like effects on choice behaviour in a rapidly-changing procedure. The same stimuli, when perfectly negatively correlated with primary reinforcement, do not produce these effects. The present research attempted to replicate these results in a steady-state procedure. Half of the food reinforcers in a two-key concurrent schedule were removed and replaced with response-contingent red key-lights. Across conditions, the ratio of left to right food reinforcers was varied as was the food-stimulus correlation (either +1, -1 or 0). Generalized-matching analyses were calculated as a global measure of choice and preference pulses as a local measure. These analyses resulted in two somewhat surprising results: While the stimuli produced no detectable changes in sensitivity to reinforcement, suggesting no global effect, post-stimulus preference pulses were obtained, suggesting the existence of a local effect. This local effect was largely the same regardless of the food-stimulus correlation, a result contrary to that obtained by Davison and Baum.
 
24. Food at a Distance: Separating Food Sources and Temporal Control during a Concurrrent VI FT Schedule
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
RAQUEL ALO (West Virginia University), Kennon A. Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract: To investigate the effects of a concurrent FT schedule on responding controlled by a VI schedule, in Experiment 1, three pigeons were exposed to a VI 300s schedule (Baseline). Next, free-food according to an FT 100-s schedule was programmed in a hopper located on another panel, either 30 cm, 60cm, or 90cm from the hopper where the VI schedule reinforcers were delivered. The Baseline was then reinstated and the next condition arranged both the VI and the FT food delivery in the same hopper. Experiment 2 replicated Experiment 1, but the 3-s limited access to free-food was modified: the FT hopper remained on until a photocell was broken, after which 3-s access to free-food was available. During the baselines, responding was moderate and steady. The addition of the free-food in Experiment 1 disrupted responding according to the FT interval: as this interval elapsed, responding decreased. This negatively accelerated pattern of responding was a direct function of the distance between reinforcers delivered by each schedule, and it was more evident with the limited access. These results suggest that responding on the VI schedule was determined both by reinforcement under the VI schedule and the interreinforcement intervals of the FT schedule.
 
25. Response Cost for Illusionary Control is Sensitive to Price Alterations
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TAYLOR JOHNSON (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Prior research has shown that subjects will pay additional chips for the ability to have “illusory control” even though such “control” has no affect on the actual outcomes in gambling. The purpose of the present study was to investigate the effect of increasing cost magnitude on the purchasing behavior of “illusory control” across three different gambling games (Roulette, Slots and Craps) during four cost conditions: 1 chip, 2 chips, 5 chips and 10 chips. Participants were given the opportunity to purchase “illusory control” behavior across the three games. Variations in cost of control altered the purchasing behavior.
 
26. Evaluation of Different Learning Materials on University Students
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
IDANIA ZEPEDA (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Julio Varela (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Carlos Martinez Munquia (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Maria Avalos (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Sucel Moran (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Alejandro Corujo (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico)
Abstract: The aim of this study was to evaluate the effect of four different learning materials on students learning related to abilities on repetition, application and performance abilities. Materials were: 1) reading a printed text, 2) reading a printed text with illustrations, 3) watching a video clip and 4) listening to a tape. The participants were 20 university students. The students exposed a pre-test – selftraining – post-test design. The thematic content was the same for all presentations and consisted of three sections: principles and concepts of trigonometry, problem solving and instructions for 3-D shapes building. Results are discussed in terms of transfer facilities related to each of the presentations used.
 
27. Investigation of Poker Preferences among College Students
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
LAURA L. PORTERA (Southern Illinois University), Erica D. Pozzie (Bradley University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Research on gambling is limited and has not been well documented in terms of preference of poker hands on equal pay out schedules. In order to investigate more in this area, research was conducted using a computer simulated poker game. Participants had the choice between either a one hand poker game or a three hand poker game in which they were able to switch playing between two concurrent screens. Students were instructed to play either poker hands and “win” as many points as possible. Participants were encouraged to verbally explain rules governing their play between the single or multiple poker hands. The purpose of the current study analyzed concurrent recreational poker playing of 10 undergraduate college students. This study uses video poker to analyze preference between playing single versus multiple hands of poker on an equal pay out schedule and the verbal behavior that governs those preferences. The results, implications and suggestions for future research are discussed.
 
28. The Behavioral Functions of Stimuli Signaling Transitions across Rich and Lean Schedules of Reinforcement
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JESSICA B. LONG (West Virginia University), Michael Perone (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Pigeons responded on a mixed schedule with fixed-ratio components leading to small or large food reinforcers. Pecks on either of two observing keys converted the mixed schedule to a multiple schedule by turning on a color associated with the current component. The stimulus consequences of the observing responses were manipulated across conditions. The stimulus correlated with the large reinforcer functioned as a conditioned reinforcer — it maintained observing behavior — whereas the stimulus correlated with the small reinforcer did not. There was no evidence that the stimulus correlated with the small reinforcer functioned as an aversive stimulus
 
 
 
Poster Session #237
#237 International Poster Session - EDC
Sunday, May 28, 2006
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Grand Hall
107. Peer Mediated Establishing Operations as a Tacticto Condition Books and Toys as Reinforcers
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER ELIA (Columbia University Teachers College), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Lily Bayard (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: This study investigated the effectiveness of peer mediated establishing operations to increase correct responses to learn units in prerequisite to listener emersion programs and to condition looking at books as a reinforcer. The participants in this study were 3 four year old students who were diagnosed as preschoolers with a disability. Each student was paired with a peer who functioned at a reader writer level of verbal behavior and alternating learn units or pairing trials were presented. For the programs that utilized the implementation of learn units, when the peer emitted a correct response he was consequated with vocal or prosthetic reinforcement in an effort to increase the reinforcing value of the praise or item to the target student. In the book and toy conditioning programs the target student and the peer were presented with alternating pairing trials in which appropriate engagement with books or toys was paired with vocal praise and prosthetic reinforcement. A different peer was used for each of the conditioning programs to test if different peers affected the effectiveness of the peer mediated establishing operation as a tactic. The data from this study showed that the peer mediated establishing operation was an effective tactic to increase correct responses to learn units and decrease the number of sessions necessary for a student to meet a criterion level of accuracy for all prerequisite to listener emersion programs. Also, the peer mediated establishing operation was an effective tactic in increasing the student's appropriate engagement with books and toys during the treatment phase of the program. The peer mediated establishing operation was also effective in decreasing stereotype during post treatment probes on independent engagement with books during which the student received no prosthetic reinforcement for appropriately engaging with books.
 
108. Evaluating Preference Over the Course of a Day
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
TIMOTHY C. FULLER (University of Nevada, Reno), Alicia N. MacAleese (University of Nevada, Reno), Kenneth MacAleese (University of Nevada, Reno), Erin J. Pitts (University of Nevada, Reno), Mandy J. McClanahan (University of Nevada, Reno), Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Previous research has shown that when individuals with developmental disabilities are given the opportunity to choose between food and leisure items, they will choose food items over leisure items even when the leisure items are highly preferred. However, it is unknown whether individuals of typical development will also respond in similar ways. It is possible that very young children and children with developmental disabilities preference for these items will changeover the course of the day, which has not been demonstrated in the literature, but in fact may occur. In literature, it is common to simply run one preference assessment and use the top 2 or three items for duration of the task and never reassessing the preference. Therefore, this study evaluated preference changes throughout the day in order to determine if preference changes over the day due to various conditions being present (i.e., after snack, before lunch, after lunch, playing outside, playing with toys during free time, after nap, etc.). In addition, does allowing access to the items during the assessment change the outcome verses no access during the assessment.
 
109. A Comparison of Reinforcer Assessment Methods for Adolescents with Challenging Behaviors
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
MICHAEL A. LIND (University of Iowa), John A. Northup (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Class- or school-wide behavior management systems may insufficiently account for students’ varied reinforcer preferences, and therefore, unsuccessfully promote compliance and effort in school. Numerous studies have supported the use preference assessments for determining reinforcer potency for individual children. However, these approaches have been performed almost exclusively with young children and individuals with developmental disabilities, and it is doubtful that the strategies utilized in such cases would be appropriate for typically-developing adolescents. Accordingly, this study will investigate the relative reinforcer preferences of adolescents in a middle school Behavior Disorder (B.D.) classroom. Distinction will be made between the potency of students' preferences for edibles, tangibles, activities, teacher attention, time with peers, and opportunities for escape. In addition, the correspondence between students’ preferences via a concurrent-operants arrangement will be compared to their self-reported preferences on written and verbally-presented surveys. Finally, results will be compared to those originally obtained by Northup et al. (1996) and Northup (2000), who first employed this method to determine reinforcer preferences among a younger participant population. Results of this study may help professionals determine more efficient and accurate ways to facilitate compliance and academic productivity among diverse groups of behaviorally disordered adolescents.
 
110. Identifying Reinforcers for Individuals with Profound Multiple Disabilities
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
MANDY J. KUBO (California State University, Stanislaus/Pennsylvania State University), Karen Sniezek (California State University, Stanislaus)
Abstract: Students with profound multiple disabilities are often characterized as a population who are difficult to teach. Some feel that this difficulty may be due to ineffective methods in reinforcer identification. This study investigates the utility of a systematic preference assessment proposed by Pace, Ivancic, Edwards, Iwata, and Page (1985) to determine preferences of students with profound multiple disabilities and to determine if those preferences function as reinforcers. The results indicate that the systematic preference assessment was effective in identifying reinforcing stimuli for 2 of 3 individuals with profound multiple disabilities.
 
111. Reward Contingencies and Personal Freedom: Effects on Intrinsic Motivation and Performance
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
SHANE L. LYNCH (University of Alberta), Katherine M. Banko (University of Alberta), Judy Cameron (University of Alberta), W. David Pierce (University of Alberta)
Abstract: Reward procedures often depend on the interpersonal context. Reward contingencies presented in a controlling manner (coercive context) are expected to reduce performance and motivation (Sidman, 2001). When the same contingencies are presented in a way that promotes personal freedom (autonomous context) performance and motivation are expected to increase (Skinner, 1971). Undergraduate students (N=60) were randomly assigned to one of the 6 experimental conditions, in a 3 X 2 factorial design. A third of the participants received $10 for puzzle solving (engagement contingent), another third received the same payment for achieving a standard or level of performance (mastery contingent), and the remaining participants did not receive rewards. Half the participants solved puzzles in a coercive context involving high surveillance and time pressure while the other half performed the activity in an autonomous context—promoting self-regulation and choice. Next, participants had a 10 minute free-choice opportunity to do various activities (i.e. solve puzzles, read, etc.). The dependent measures were number of puzzle solutions, the amount of time spent on puzzles in the free-choice period, as well as ratings of task interest. Results showed that rewards for achievement or mastery increase performance and intrinsic motivation when the context emphasizes personal freedom.
 
112. Learned Industriousness and Intrinsic Motivation: Effects of Rewards for Effort on Task Involvement
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
AMBER L. GEAR (University of Alberta), Rhonda L. Wizniak (University of Alberta), Judy Cameron (University of Alberta), W. David Pierce (University of Alberta)
Abstract: Rewards for expending effort on tasks help people learn industriousness (Eisenberger, 1992). We extended this theory to the problem intrinsic motivation. If individuals are rewarded for expending high effort on a difficult task, sensations of high effort are conditioned, the activity takes on secondary reward value and people are likely to engage in the activity. The opposite occurs when rewards are tied to performance of tasks with low difficulty. University students (N = 162) solved puzzles in 2x2 factorial design with two levels of reward (reward/no reward) and two levels of task difficulty (easy/difficult). Intrinsic motivation was measured as time spent puzzle solving during a free-choice period. Results indicated a significant interaction of reward by task difficulty. As expected, participants who received rewards for doing a difficult puzzle task spent more time solving puzzles in the free choice period than participants doing the difficult task without rewards. In contrast, participants given rewards for performance of the easy puzzle task spent significantly less free time on puzzles than those doing the easy task without rewards. Overall, rewards tied to the degree of effort on a problem solving task determine the subsequent involvement in the activity in a free-choice situation.
 
113. Response Allocation Under Naturally Occurring Concurrent Schedule Arrangements
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
STACI L. SAYLORS (Utah State University), John C. Borrero (University of the Pacific)
Abstract: We evaluated the relation between naturally occurring rates of problem behavior and appropriate behavior using the matching equation with a 4 year-old typically developing child in a state funded preschool setting. Descriptive observations were conducted at various times during the typical daily routine at the preschool. Data were recorded on potential reinforcers, problem behavior and appropriate behavior. The data collected from these observations were analyzed retrospectively, assuming that one event (attention) served as a reinforcer. While the possibility of spurious relations exists, results showed covariation between both response forms and teacher attention.
 
114. Errorless Training Procedures Applied for the Acquisition of Academic Skills with Kids with Acquired Brain Injury
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
ADRIANA LOAEZA-CASTRO (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Gabriela De Guadalupe Téllez-Sánchez (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Alma Georgina Hernández-Mendoza (Centro Educativo Neurocom), Marco Raúl Campuzano-Rodriguez (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación), Jorge Luis González-Quijano (Neurodesarrollo y Comunicación)
Abstract: Children with acquired brain injury due to a vascular accident or involved in car accidents, experience a lost of several skills that were established previously. The present study will show the use of errorless training programs establishing skills previously learned in a boy with brain injury. The selected behaviors were unbutton, identification of vowels, recognition of pronouns and identification of parts of the body. For this research a changing criteria design was used. The base line was taken during three sessions, exposing the participant to tasks related to the behaviors explained before, measuring the presentation of each part of the behavioral chain. The intervention consisted on four phases, the first one was errorless teaching, followed by total and partial physical guide, were the therapist took the hand of the boy during all the chain of the behaviors described before, reinforcing constantly. The phases of the intervention were faded until reaching the criteria, which was 80% of correct response during three consecutive sessions, obtaining an average of 90% of reliability. The results are shown in graphs of single case, showing that the participant benefited from the intervention, obtaining an average of 95% of correct response of the skills that were taught.
 
115. Prompt Fading and Group Instruction: Transferring Stimulus Control from 1:1 Therapist to Lead Teacher
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
VICTORIA A. GALLANT (Pathways Strategic Teaching Center), Jennifer L. Marshall (Pathways Strategic Teaching Center), Erin Cote (Pathways Strategic Teaching Center)
Abstract: Skill acquisition in group settings is often a learning deficit of children with autistic spectrum disorder. Stimulus transfer from a 1:1 setting to a lead teacher in a group continues to be a challenging goal for many students with autism. According to research, students with autism acquire new skills when taught in a 1:1 applied setting. Thus, the educational goal is to transfer stimulus control from the 1:1 therapist to the group’s lead teacher. For most effective transfer, the lead teacher must be able to monitor reinforcement schedules, maintain a student’s attention and prompt appropriately. The prompt fading procedure created by the authors has proven to be effective in accomplishing this goal. Through data collection and systematic fading of the 1:1 therapist, several students at all age levels have reached 100% independence in a group setting as they are able to acquire skills through the direct instruction given by the lead teacher. Data displays the students attending and responding to the lead teacher in a group setting without the prompting of a 1:1 therapist. The procedure is highly effective and can be duplicated to use with children of all age groups and in varying settings.
 
116. Teaching Children with Disabilities Rock-Paper-Scissors
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER J. HUBER (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Scott W. Harrington (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Donald A. Wachelka (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Ralph N. Pampino (Quality Behavioral Outcomes), Marla Silversmith (Neurorestorative Specialty Services at UTHCT), James L. Soldner (Neurorestorative Specialty Services at UTHCT)
Abstract: On a typical playground, children with disabilities are frequently not included in games because they do not show they understand the rules. This is also true with games requiring two persons, such as the popular Rock-Paper-Scissors (RPS). Across three phases, children with disabilities were taught how to play RPS using visual cues and reinforcement for correctly identifying the winner of the round. The game also gave the children a problem-solving technique when deciding who will go first in a game or activity.
 
117. Teaching Pedestrian Safety Skills to a boy with Autistic Spectrum Disorder: Combined Effects of Response Cost and Positive Reinforcement
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
KOSUKE TAKAHASHI (University of Tsukuba, Japan), Fumiyuki Noro (University of Tsukuba, Japan)
Abstract: Pedestrian safety skills were taught to a 10-year-old boy with autistic spectrum disorder who exhibits risky behaviors under going to his school. The safe skills were defined as walking along the end of a road. The risky behaviors consisted of rushing out in front of vehicles, walking along the center of a road, and running. We employed response cost on his risky behaviors in simulated environment on the University roads. The risky behaviors decreased immediately, and he showed almost safe pedestrian skills. However the skills were not maintained without response cost. The safe pedestrian skills were maintained by gradually shifting from the response cost to the procedures which reinforces these skills (positive reinforcement). When the treatment based on positive reinforcement was introduced in his everyday situations, the safe skills were demonstrated immediately, and maintained also in the probe condition.
 
118. Teaching Young Children with Autism to Respond to a Communication Device when Lost
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
LISA M. RESTO (TheraCare), Tanya Ciancio (TheraCare), Kathleen Flanders (TheraCare)
Abstract: This study is a replication of a study that taught teenagers to seek assistance when lost by responding to a pager. In this study the researchers compare the acquisition rate of lower functioning children to the higher functioning children. The study also highlights the limitations that occurred. These children were between the ages of 4-8. The children were taught to respond to the pager by handing a communication card that indicated that they were lost, to a community member. Trials were initially conducted in the home environment, and then were conducted in specific community settings.
 
119. Asperger's Syndrome: Defining and Implementing Best Practices in Public School Settings
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
COLLEEN ANN O'LEARY-ZONARICH (The May Institute), Sandra Pierce-Jordan (The May Institute)
Abstract: This poster will review best practices, degree of implementation, and meaningful outcomes for elementary, middle, and high school students diagnosed with Asperger's Syndrome in public school settings in New England. An outlined checklist of best practices will be provided; including thorough assessment, academic and teaching strategies, behavior and social skills interventions, and comprehensive team involvement and communication. Data will be presented suggesting degree of implementation of best practice recommendations and critical programming components yields significant improvements in meaningful, functional performance spanning across home and school environments as presented in an AB multiple-baseline design. Discussion points will include staff and parent training options and opportunities, differences across grade levels, and the continued need for and impact of strong programming in public school systems.
 
120. Using Multiple Exemplar Instruction to Test the Presence of Naming in Identifying Parts of Speech
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
KOREN PHILENE BRIGHAM (Columbia University), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to test for the presence of naming by teaching selection of parts of speech followed by probing for production of novel examples of those same parts of speech. The students were three thirteen-year-old students classified as emotionally disturbed. The students were unable to identify parts of speech such as nouns, verbs adjectives and adverbs, a prerequisite classification skill to the problem solving skills necessary in completing worksheets presented to them in their class-room. The results show that the students had naming and that teaching selection responses resulted in the emergence of production responses.
 
121. A Study on the Relationship between Cognitive Abilities and Language Learning Skills for the Cerebral Palsied
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
SOON-GIL PARK (Nambu University, South Korea), Hun Sun Jun (Daegu University, South Korea)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to investigate the relationship between cognitive abilities and language learning skills for the cerebral palsied. In particular, this study was to compare cognitive and language learning skills between high and low groups of articulation abilities and between spastic and non-spastic groups. Furthermore, this study was focused on the correlation between the cognitive ability and language learning skills as well as the cognitive factors that can predict language learning skills. The 30 cerebral palsied were recruited from a special elementary school and they were compared to normal control children who had the same mental age as the 30 cerebral palsied in a K-SPM Raven Intelligence Test(Yim, 2004). The participants were presented Picture Consonant Articulation Tests(Kim, 2004) measuring the articulation ability of the cerebral palsied, phonological awareness tasks, short-term memory tests, and Visual-Perceptual Skills Test-Revised(Gardner, 1996). Moreover, The Basic Learning Skill Tests(Park et al, 2001) and A Picture-Vocabulary Test(Kim et al, 1995) were also measured to identify the language learning abilities of the cerebral palsied. The results of the study were as follows; First, the cerebral palsied showed lower levels of cognitive abilities in phonological awareness, short-term memory and visual perception compared to the normal children. It was also observed that they showed considerably lower ability in counting numbers of syllables and identifying phonemes in phonological awareness tasks. Moreover, the cerebral palsied were behind the normal children in short-term memory of numbers, as well as visual discrimination, visual memory, visual-spatial relationship, visual-sequential memory, visual figure-ground and visual closure in the Visual Perceptual test. On top of that, those with superior articulation ability showed better ability in counting the numbers of syllables, rime-phoneme distinction, and short-term memory of both numbers and letters. Spastic cerebral palsied were found to have a greater short-term memory of numbers than the non-spastic cerebral palsied. Second, the cerebral palsied had lower ability than the normal in language learning skills including reading, spelling, comprehension of sentences and vocabulary. Among the cerebral palsied, those with higher ability of articulation could bring out better results in vocabulary performance. Finally, it was found that there were significant correlations bet
 
122. Teaching Sign Language Using Stimulus Equivalence Procedures
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
GLEN L. MCCULLER (Stephen F. Austin State University), Chris Ninness (Stephen F. Austin State University), Robin Rumph (Stephen F. Austin State University), Amy Nicole Collins (Stephen F. Austin State University)
Abstract: Stimulus equivalence procedures have been proven effective and efficient in teaching a variety of functional skills. In addition, these procedures have been proven with a variety of populations and age ranges. This poster presentation will present the results of an investigation in which three participants are taught and assessed relations using verbal, printed, and signed stimuli.
 
123. Simultaneously Teaching Two Languages to a Child with Austim
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kristin N. Schirmer (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: Acquiring language is a known area of delay for people with autism. Acquiring two languages presents additional concerns regarding rate of skill acquisition. We designed instruction to teach early language skills to a child with autism in both English and Spanish. We will present data comparing two different instructional sequences, as well as data representing the total number of skills acquired while receiving instruction in English versus English and Spanish.
 
124. Teaching a Second Language to a Child with Autism Across Multiple Learning Channels Through the Use of Technology
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
AMY KING (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Sara J. Pahl (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kristin Wilkinson (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting)
Abstract: This poster will discuss the instructional design used to teach a second language to a young child with autism. The poster will show how technology was utilized to increase the student's acquisition and use of a second language. Student performance is graphed on the Standard Celeration Chart.
 
125. The Effects of a Social Listener Reinforcement Game on the Vocal Verbal Behavior of One Middle School Student
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
LILY BAYARD (Columbia University Teachers College), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Tracy Reilly-Lawson (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: This study tested the effectiveness of teaching a social listener reinforcement game on the conversational units, sequelics, wh questions, vocal approvals and vocal disapprovals of one Middle School student. In the listener game the student and a peer were each taught two sets of five science terms. The teacher presented alternating learn units in which she asked one student to define a science term mastered by his peer. When the student asked his peer for the answer and correctly repeated the answer the students moved up one space. When the students did not ask their peer the answer or did not correctly repeat the answer given to them the teacher moved up one space. The results of the study demonstrate that the social listener reinforcement game was effective in increasing the target student’s conversational units, sequelecs, wh questions, vocal approvals and vocal disapprovals during probe sessions conducted after the student and peer had met criterion on two games.
 
126. Teaching Receptive Language to a Child with Autism: An Alternative to traditional Discrete Trial Teaching
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
ANGELA A. MOUZAKITIS (Developmental Disabilities Institute and YAI/New York League for Early Learning), Kimberly M. Tynan (Developmental Disabilities Institute), Amy V. Doukas (Developmental Disabilities Institute), Maria Corazon P. Mobo (YAI/New York League for Early Learning), Angela Keating (YAI/New York League for Early Learning), Cindy M. Poscablo (YAI/New York League for Early Learning)
Abstract: The purpose of the study is to present a coordinated set of strategies that includes the use of cued time delay, contingent attention, and an increased array of items. The case study presented demonstrates how these coordinated strategies were used to help a child successfully identify objects receptively. This 3-year-old child has received home-based ABA services from March 2004 to the present. Initially the child was able to master the identification of several body parts and one-step directions, using traditional discrete trial methods. However the home-based ABA team did not meet with success when the same methods were used to introduce the skills related to identifying objects receptively. Subsequent attempts to teach these skills using the introduction and fading of voice cues, positional prompting, and natural environment teaching were also not effective. In total, ten various methods were used unsuccessfully. It was only when the home-based ABA team began to use the combination of cued time delay, contingent attention, and increased array of items, that the child began to meet with success. This presentation will graphically display and review the programs that had been unsuccessful; the teaching strategy that was utilized will be outlined and graphically displayed, and relevant research will be reviewed.
 
 
 
Poster Session #238
#238 International Poster Session - VRB
Sunday, May 28, 2006
5:30 PM–7:00 PM
Grand Hall
127. Does ABLA Test Performance Predict Picture Name Recognition With Persons With Severe Developmental Disabilities?
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
AYNSLEY K. VERBEKE (University of Manitoba), Garry L. Martin (University of Manitoba), Dickie C. T. Yu (University of Manitoba & St. Amant Research Centre), Toby L. Martin (University of Manitoba & St. Amant Research Centre)
Abstract: Research has shown that performance on the Assessment of Basic Learning Abilities (ABLA) test correlates with language assessments for persons with developmental disabilities. This study investigated whether performance on ABLA Level 6, an auditory-visual discrimination, predicts name recognition of persons with severe developmental disabilities. Five participants who passed ABLA Level 6, and five who failed ABLA Level 6 were each tested on five 2-choice discriminations that required them to point to pictures of common objects after hearing their names. Four of the five participants who had failed ABLA Level 6 failed all name recognition tasks. All five participants who had passed ABLA Level 6 passed all of the name recognition tasks. These results suggest that mastery of the ABLA auditory-visual discrimination may be an important bridging task for teaching naming skills to persons with severe developmental disabilities.
 
128. Establishing a Mand Repertoire in a Child Who is Deaf-Blind
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
KYLE BENNETT (Bright Horizons School), Joanne Bennett (Bright Horizons School)
Abstract: The community of deaf-blind individuals is quite diverse. While some have complete hearing and vision loss, many have varying degrees of hearing and visual impairments (Engleman, Griffin, & Wheeler, 1998). One of the many challenges of individuals who are deaf-blind is communication (Godfrey & Costello, 1995; Tedder & Sikka, 1993). Those who have some degree of hearing or vision may be able to communicate by using methods that take advantage of these senses. For instance, some communicate using vocal verbal behavior (Stremel & Schultz, 1995), manual sign language (Heller, Alberto, & Bowdin, 1995), modified pictures and communication boards (Heller, Ware, Allgood, & Castelle, 1994), and gestures (Engleman, Griffin, & Wheeler, 1998), to name a few. However, for those whose impairments include profound visual and hearing loss, the ability to communicate becomes more complicated and the systems that are available are more restricted (Watkins & Clark, 1991). The purpose of the current study was to establish a mand repertoire in child who is deaf-blind. A multiple-probe design across three mands was implemented. After failing to acquire a sign language repertoire, the child was taught to exchange objects for reinforcers by capturing establishing operations and implementing errorless learning teaching strategies.
 
129. PICA and Acquired Brain Injury: A Rule-Based Intervention
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
CHRIS M. SCHAUB (ReMed Recovery Care Centers), John Malikowski (Devereux Foundation)
Abstract: A Functional Assessment identified the variables maintaining PICA displayed by a 55-year-old man (In this report we give him the pseudonym, 'Joe") with an Acquired Brain Injury (ABI). Neurological testing and assessment had indicated that Joe's PICA occurred as a symptom of the Kluver-Bucy Syndrome. Traditional pharmacological interventions had proved unsuccessful in controlling this behavior, and the TBI literature contains little beyond medications a primary treatment modality. During Brief Functional Analysis (BFA) Joe engaged in PICA exclusively during alone conditions. This suggests that PICA was not socially mediated, and was instead the likely result of direct consequences such as oral stimulation, gustatory stimulation,or hunger cessation.We also assessed Joe's hoarding of inedible objects, which was a concern because it provided access to PICA behavior in remote locations. Therefore, a multiple choice questionnaire was administered to evaluate Joe's awareness of the behavior as related to social acceptability as well as health implications. In addition, a matching-to-sample procedure was used to confirm equivalent relations between all forms of stimuli representing PICA objects. This rejected the possibility that the behavior was a result of visual agnosia. A rule-based intervention was then implemented, which achieved systematic control over both PICA and hoarding.
 
130. Derived Relations and Cognitive Neuroscience: Semantic Priming and Event Related Potentials
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
EOGHAN J. RYAN (Anglia Ruskin University, Cambridge), Simon Dymond (University of Wales, Swansea), Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
Abstract: If derived relational responding is to provide a functional-analytic account of language and cognition, then it follows that many of the measures of language and thought processes typically employed in the cognitive laboratory, such as semantic priming, should be sensitive to derived stimulus relations. In the current study, adult participants were first exposed to conditional discrimination training designed to establish derived equivalence relations and were then presented with a standard lexical-decision priming task. The presentation of across-class prime and targets increased reaction times relative to within-class primes-target pairs. During this experiment, event related potentials (time-locked, averaged electroencephalograms) were recorded. In addition to the increased reaction times to across-class prime-target pairs, a larger N400 waveform was also recorded. This waveform has been shown in cognitive research to be sensitive to semantic relatedness. Taken together, these data lend support to the argument that derived relations constitute behavioural units of human language and cognition.
 
131. Accuracy Criteria and the Derived Relational Responding: Learning Expected in Training as Basis of Novel Differential Outcome
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
ALDO HERNANDEZ BARRIOS (Universidad Católica de Colombia), Diana Melissa Quant (Universidad Católica de Colombia), Martha Omeara (Fundación Universitaria Konrad Lorenz)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was test the effects of four types of accuracy criteria on the derived stimulus relations, used in conditional training by basic relationships (A-B and B-C), to generate three stimulus equivalent classes (three members each one). In the Experiment 1 set up the accuracy criteria of the 90% in the training of the A-B relations and B-C. In the Experiment 2 the subjects were exposed only to a block of rehearsals, without mattering its precision. In the Experiment 3, set up the accuracy criteria of the 90% for each conditional trained relations (i. e. A1-B1, B1-C1, etc.). In the Experiment 4 the subjects should complete a series of 10 serial rehearsals guessed right like accuracy criteria. We to show in this poster the preliminaries data and we suggested that there are independents aspects of the accuracy criteria used in the procedure of matching-to-sample, like influences in the learning and therefore in the stimulus derived relations.
 
132. Using Stimulus Equivalence to Remediate Basic Language Deficits in a 5 Year-Old Male with Autism
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
JADE CLAYTON (Rich Center for Autism), Georgia Backus (Rich Center for Autism), Lenore Collupy (Rich Center for Autism), Michael C. Clayton (Youngstown State University)
Abstract: Stimulus equivalence procedures have been widely used over the past 30 years, frequently in an attempt to remediate receptive/expressive language deficits. The present study utilized match-to-sample training to introduce three-member equivalence classes and test for derived relations in a 5-year-old child with autism. Prior to training, the child showed large gaps in his expressive and receptive repertoires. Following training, the child was able to successfully derive symmetrical and equivalence relations. He was also able to use elementary verbal operants such as echoics, tacts, and mands more functionally following training and testing of equivalence relations.
 
133. Increasing "Behavioral Attunement": Optimizing the Ratios of Manding Versus Mediation (i.e., Pliance) Within Ongoing Conversation
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
GENAE HALL (Behavior Analysis & Intervention Services), Robert G. Vreeland (Behavior Analysis & Intervention Services)
Abstract: Several aspects of the interaction between two participants in ongoing conversation appear relevant to maintaining the cooperative contingency between them. These include: 1) the relative ratios of manding versus mediation (i.e., pliance), 2) effective manding--using softened or disguised mands, and 3) effective mediation of reinforcement for mands, where mediation is timely as well as appropriate.In Baseline, the above dependent variables were scored over several sessions in segments of conversation. In Phase I of the study, each conversational participant was given feedback regarding his/her scores and those of his/her partner, then new scores were obtained over several sessions. In Phase II, if a participant's manding ratio was at least 10% higher than that of his/her partner, a role-playing procedure was used to teach him/her to a) identify the other person's mands, and b) effectively mediate reinforcement for those mands. If a participant's manding ratio was at least 10% lower than that of his/her partner, the individual was taught to a) identify the relevant motivational variables affecting him/her, and b) emit appropriate mands. The effectiveness of Phase I and Phase II interventions was assessed in a multiple baseline across dyads design.
 
134. Immediate Correction Procedures and their Effects on Learn Units to Criterion for Middle School Students
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
DANA VISALLI-GOLD (Columbia University Teachers College), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Dr. Shira A. Ackerman (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS)
Abstract: This study investigated the effects of an immediate correction procedure and the students’ use of answer keys on learn units to criterion for the target behaviors. There were 2 male participants ages 11 and 12. The participants were diagnosed with emotional and behavioral difficulties and functioned on a reader/writer level of verbal capability. During the correction procedure utilized during baseline, there was no attention to the antecedent within the correction procedure. Therefore, the immediate correction procedure was implemented. The students immediately reviewed and responded to the teacher’s behavior in the presence of the antecedent and teacher consequences which completed the learn unit. Following the implementation of the immediate correction procedure, the answer key procedure was implemented. The students immediately consequated their behavior using answer keys. The data showed both students emitted higher levels of correct responding during the immediate correction procedure and even higher levels during the answer key procedure. The students higher levels of correct responding significantly decreased their total learn units to criterion across the targeted behaviors. A functional relationship occurred between the implementation of the immediate correction procedure and the answer key procedure and the decrease in total learn units to criterion across behaviors for both participants.
 
135. The Effects of Visual Tracking on Learn Units to Criterion
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
BROOKE DEMARCO (Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Denise O'Sullivan (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS)
Abstract: This study tested the effects the Visual Tracking procedure on pre and post numbers of learn units to criterion to meet objectives across the participant’s matching repertoire programs. The participant in this study was a 4-year old male with pre-speaker, pre-listener levels of verbal behavior. The student in this study attends an annex of an early intervention program in a private CABAS model preschool in a 6:1:3 instructional setting. The baseline was in effect for 15 sessions. During the initial baseline phase the student did not meet criterion on any of his matching programs. During the intervention phase the Visual Tracking procedure was in effect for 41 sessions. The return to baseline phase was in effect for 15 sessions of the participant’s programs which were put in hold for the duration of the Visual Tracking procedure. The student met 3 long term objectives in his matching program, post Visual Tracking. The results showed that after the Visual Tracking procedure was implemented there was a significant decrease in learn units to criterion.
 
136. Discriminability of Second-Order Stimuli in Matching-To-Sample
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
MARIO SERRANO (Universidad de Guadalajara, Mexico), Alfredo Lopez (Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico, Iztacala), Gustavo Garcia (Universidad FrancoMexicana, Satelite)
Abstract: Three groups of four participants each one were exposed to a second-order matching-to-sample task and intramodal, extramodal, and extradimensional transfer tests. For all participants each matching relation (identity, similarity and difference) was cued by only one second-order stimulus. Groups differed in the differences between second-order stimuli: a) shape and color; b) shape; c) color. Correct performance in training and transfer tests was higher when second order stimuli differed in both shape and color. No differences between the remaining participants were observed. These results confirm a recent proposal about three different functional forms of identify the matching criterion under second-order stimuli.
 
137. Using Non-Vocative Pliance Training to increase Vocative Plaince Responses
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
KIMBERLY P. RAY (TCLC MS Beehavior Clinic), C. A. Thomas (TCLC MS Beehavior Clinic)
Abstract: Using standard RFFC training with children with developmental disabilities and providing a whole langugae model with delayed reinforcement contingenct on verbalizations drastically decreased the training time for vocative responses regarding what is widely considered TFFC.
 
138. Conditioning the Role of the Listener and its Effect on the Emission Speaker Listener Exchanges
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
MARCIA WARD (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland), Juliet M. Quinlan (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland), Jennifer Mary McMullen (ABACAS Drogheda, Ireland), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School)
Abstract: The data show that up to 50% of children with autism remain non – vocal verbal (Charlop, Schreibmann, & Thiebodeau, 1985). “Research clearly demonstrates that many children with autism who receive science based intervention learn to talk”(Krantz & McClannahan, 1998, p.191). However even those children with autism who do learn to talk, their speech often remains under the control of the verbal behaviour of others, cues or other non -verbal referents in the environment (Charlop, et al. 1985). Various tactics such as time delay (Charlop et al, 1985) and script fading (Krantz and Mc Clannahan , 1998) have been utilised to teach ‘spontaneous’ speech or vocal verbal behaviour under non verbal antecedent control to children with autism. These behavioural repertoires have proven to difficult to generalise, or remain task specific (Charlop, 1985). Recent research has examined the process through which individuals come into contact with the contingencies of reinforcement related to exchange of reciprocal listener / speaker roles (Chu, 1998; Greer & Keohane, under review).Sometimes in the case of children with developmental delays in particular autism , the listener does not function as a conditioned reinforcer for the student (Greer & Keohane, under review). An ABA multiple baseline design across participants across two settings was utilised in this study. The results demonstrated a functional relationship between the intervention employed and the emergence of sequelics and conversational units (Greer & Keohane, under review)
 
 
 
Business Meeting #239
BACB University Contact Faculty Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
International Ballroom North
Chair: Gerald A Shook (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Presenting Authors:
The BACB university contact faculty meeting will address new developments in the Behavior Analyst Certification Board that relate to universities with BACB approved course sequences and approved practica. All BACB university contact faculty are urged to attend or send a faculty representative.
 
 
Business Meeting #240
Behaviorists Interested in Gambling Special Interest Group (BIG SIG)
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Piedmont
Chair: Ginger R. Wilson (Nyansa Learning Corporation)
Presenting Authors:
The purpose of this meeting is to discuss the events of our special interest group in the last year and potential areas of expansion. Discussion will also focus on our gambling book and newsletter, in addition to activities for the next year and election of BIG SIG officers.
 
 
Business Meeting #241
Editorial Board Meeting for the Behavior Analyst Today and All BAO Journals
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Auburn
Chair: Michael Weinberg (Orlando Behavior Health Services, LLC)
Presenting Authors:
The editorial board for the Behavior Analyst Today will meet to discuss journal business for the coming year, review status of operations in the preceding year, policy issues, editorial processes, submission policy and criteria, and answer questions from those in attendance.
 
 
Business Meeting #242
Editorial Board, Behavior and Social Issues
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Edgewood
Chair: Mark A. Mattaini (Jane Addams College of Social Work, University of Illinois, Chicago)
Presenting Authors:
The editorial board will discuss plans to expand access and submissions to the journal, as well as plans for upcoming special issues.
 
 
Business Meeting #243
Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior Special Interest Group
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
University
Chair: Cynthia J. Pietras (Western Michigan University)
Presenting Authors:
The EAHB SIG aims to promote experimental anlyses of human behavior. The agenda for the 2006 SIG meeting includes: award ceremony for winners of the 2005/2006 Student Paper Competition; soliciting nominations for the 2007 Distinguished Career Award, discussion of the EAHB Bulletin (online journal), review of fees and membership, and other SIG-related business.
 
 
Business Meeting #244
Journal of Behavioral Education Editorial Board and Information Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Fairlie
Chair: Phillip J. Belfiore (Mercyhurst College)
Presenting Authors:
The journal of behavioral education will hold its annual editorial board meeting and general information session. The purpose of this meeting is to update the board on the current status and future directions of the journal, and to inform the general public regarding the availability of the journal as an outlet for applied scholarly submissions.
 
 
Business Meeting #245
Mid-American Association for Behavior Analysis Business Meeting
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Marietta
Chair: Kevin P. Klatt (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire)
Presenting Authors:
The Mid-American Association for Behavior Analysis (MABA) will be holding the semi-annual business meeting to discuss the 2006 convention.
 
 
Business Meeting #246
Parents and Professionals Sharing the Conference Experience
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Roswell
Chair: Pamela H. Gorski (Reaching Potentials Inc.)
Presenting Authors:
This meeting provides an opportunity for parents of children receiving behavior analytic services and for professionals to gather in an informal setting to discuss the conference and common issues. Autism treatment is expected to be a major topic. Pam Gorski, executive director of Reaching Potentials, an ABA parent support services agency, will host this meeting. Refreshments will be provided.
 
 
Business Meeting #246a
Rehabilitation and Independent Living Special Interest Group
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Vinings
Chair: Michael P. Mozzoni (Timber Ridge Group, Inc.)
Presenting Authors:
N/a
 
 
Business Meeting #247
SIG Español
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Techwood
Chair: Mapy Chavez-Brown (Wagner College)
Presenting Authors:
El SIG Español se dedica a la difusión del análisis del comportamiento entre los miembros del ABA que hablan español, asi como a la comunidad de habla hispana.
 
 
Business Meeting #248
Verbal Behavior Special Interest Group
Sunday, May 28, 2006
7:00 PM–7:50 PM
Spring
Chair: William F. Potter (California State University, Stanislaus)
Presenting Authors:
The VB SIG is dedicated to promoting research, teaching and general dissemination of news related to Verbal Behavior. The purpose of the meeting is to network people involved or interested in VB, as well as establish projects and activities related to VB. Everyone is invited to attend.
 
 
Reunion #249
Alum. & Friends of St. Cloud State University
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Vancouver
Chair: Gerald C. Mertens (St. Cloud State University)
A social gathering of alum. & friends of St. Cloud State University
 
 
Reunion #250
Auburn University Reunion for Students, Alumni, and Friends
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Greenbriar
Chair: James M. Johnston (Auburn University)
Auburn University Reunion for Students, Alumni, and Friends
 
 
Reunion #251
Behavioral School Psychology
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Lenox
Chair: Richard Anthony Doggett (Mississippi State University)
To promote the communication, collaboration, and fraterization between school psychologists and others who espouse the utilization of behavioral principles in the practice of school psychology.
 
 
Reunion #251a
Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies Reunion
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
International Ballroom South
Chair: Dwight Harshbarger (Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies)
N/a
 
 
Reunion #252
Columbia University and CABAS®
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Baker
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School)
A social event for graduates, current students, and friends of the Columbia University Programs in Behavior Analysis and CABAS® professionals and friends around the world.
 
 
Reunion #254
Minnesota Autism Service Providers
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Manila
Chair: Timothy R. Moore (Minnesota Autism Center)
Old friends and new, come to our reunion of sorts to mix, mingle, and catch up. Anyone who provides or provided ABA services to children with autism in the Minneapolis/St. Paul metropolitan area are welcome. Let's meet at the reunion and then proceed to another venue for polydipsia.
 
 
Reunion #255
National Autism Center Hospitality Hour
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Kennesaw
Chair: Joseph N. Ricciardi (The National Autism Center)
The National Autism Center invites all interested conference participants to learn about the Center's projects, activities, and goals for the upcoming year. Join us for beverages and desserts.
 
 
Reunion #256
Relational Frame Theory & Acceptance and Commitment Therapy Researchers and Practitioners Reunion, Planning Party, and Jam Session
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Montreal
Chair: Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy and Relational Frame Theory researchers, practitioners and other interested ABA members are invited to gather for an informal meeting. The purpose of the meeting will be to share resources, network, and socialize.
 
 
Reunion #257
The Ogden R. Lindsley Standard Celeration Chart Share
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Hong Kong
Chair: Malcolm D. Neely (Learning Courses)
Chart Share provides ALL to see, hear, and share data across the behavior spectrum using daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly Standard Celeration Charts presented rapidly on overhead transparences in spirited friendship.
 
 
Reunion #259
University of Kansas
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Inman
Chair: Edward K. Morris (University of Kansas)
To bring together past and present graduate students and faculty members.
 
 
Reunion #260
University of North Texas Reunion
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Cairo
Chair: Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas)
Students, Alumni and Friends of the Department of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas
 
 
Reunion #261
Western Michigan University: Reunion for Alumni, Students and Friends
Sunday, May 28, 2006
8:00 PM–9:50 PM
Courtland
Chair: R. Wayne Fuqua (Western Michigan University)
This is a social event, a reunion for the alumni, students and friends of Western Michigan University
 
 
Expo Poster Session #262
#262 ABA Expo - ABA Accredited Graduate Training Programs
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
1. Applied Behavior Analysis at St. Cloud State University.
ERIC RUDRUD (St. Cloud State University), Kimberly A. Schulze (St. Cloud State University), John T. Rapp (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: The masters in ABA at St. Cloud State University offers an accredited program both in an on-campus and distance format.
 
2. Behavior Analysis and Therapy On-Line at Southern Illinois University.
STACEY L. SMALL (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The continuing growth in computer technology has made possible for nontraditional and unconventional means of delivering behavior analysis course material to interested students. One such method of course delivery is via the Internet. Web-based courses however, are often criticized for not being as rigorous or challenging as traditional on-campus courses delivered by traditional means. Furthermore, it is a common belief that web-based courses fail to provide students with effective learning experiences because of the lack of personal interaction with a faculty member. This poster will discuss the emerging trend of web-based training in behavior analysis, present a program description of such training at Southern Illinois University, and show comparative data between on-campus and off-campus students suggesting that quality control is possible in cyberspace. Strategies for developing web-based training beyond the traditional college course will be presented and include topics such as in-services, job training, and brief staff enhancement lectures.
 
3. Behavior Analysis and Therapy Program at Southern Illinois University.
MARK R. DIXON (Southern Illinois University), Anthony J. Cuvo (Southern Illinois University), April S. Worsdell (Southern Illinois University), Paula K. Davis (Southern Illinois University), Ruth Anne Rehfeldt (Southern Illinois University), Brandon F. Greene (Southern Illinois University), Stacey L. Small (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: This poster will present an overview of the Behavior Analysis and Therapy Program at Southern Illinois University. We will provide interested students with information regarding admissions procedures, funding opportunities, current research, and graduate job placements. This poster will also contain a description of our graduate curriculum, distance learning opportunities, and information on the southern Illinois region.
 
4. Behavior Analysis at California State University, Stanislaus.
WILLIAM F. POTTER (California State University, Stanislaus), Bruce E. Hesse (California State University, Stanislaus), Jane S. Howard (California State University, Stanislaus), Gina M. Pallotta (California State University, Stanislaus), Gary D. Novak (California State University, Stanislaus)
Abstract: The Master's program at CSUS offers a unique combination of behavior analytic training, while also preparing students to be a licensed Marriage and Family Therapist (MFT). We have four BCBA faculty on staff and licensed psychologists. Visit our website at psyc.csustan.edu for more information.
 
5. Behavior Analysis at Queens College and the Graduate Center, CUNY.
ANNE FETHERSTON (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Michelle C. Garruto (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Matthew A. Taylor (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York)
Abstract: An overview of graduate studies in behavior analysis at Queens College and the Graduate Center of CUNY is presented. Opportunities are described for Doctoral study in the Learning Processes Program, for Masters studies at Queens College in the Clinical Behavioral Applications in Mental Health Settings and in the General Psychology program, and for the Advanced Certificate Program in Applied Behavior Analysis (a post-baccalaureate non-degree program offering in- depth training in applied behavior analysis and preparation for New York state or national certification exams). Faculty interests at the Doctoral level in applied behavior analysis research, learning theory, stimulus control, equivalence class formation, language development, contingencies of reinforcement, developmental disabilities, and infant learning offer the student intensive training in a broad range of areas in basic and applied behavior analysis. The Doctoral program offers a specialization in Developmental Disabilities. For students with applied interests, practicum experiences in applied behavior analysis are available at a wide range of public and private institutions.
 
6. Behavior Analysis at West Virginia University.
VENNESSA L. WALKER (West Virginia University), Christy A. Alligood (West Virginia University), Karen G. Anderson (West Virginia University)
Abstract: The behavior analysis program at West Virginia University exists to train students in basic research, theory, and applications of behavior principles. Through research, course work, and practica, students develop skills in the experimental analysis of animal and human behavior, as well as a strong methodological and conceptual background for developing and applying behavioral technologies. The basic, conceptual, and applied areas are integrated in the curriculum; however a student may emphasize either basic or applied research. The goal of the program is to produce a psychologist who is qualified to teach a variety of courses in psychology, who can function effectively in either an academic or an applied setting and who can use the principles and findings of the science of behavior in solving significant problems of human behavior.
 
7. Behavior Analysis Graduate Programs at Western Michigan University.
JAMES E. CARR (Western Michigan University), Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University), Cynthia J. Pietras (Western Michigan University), Ron Van Houten (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: This poster describes Western Michigan University's ABA accredited graduate training programs in Behavior Analysis.
 
8. Behavior Analysis Programs at the University of Nevada, Reno.
PATRICK M. GHEZZI (University of Nevada, Reno), Mark P. Alavosius (Western Michigan University), Jared A. Chase (University of Nevada, Reno), Steven C. Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno), Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno), Jeremy E. Rafacz (University of Nevada, Reno), W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Behavior Analysis training at the University of Nevada-Reno is conducted via a junior-colleague model and includes supervised experience and instruction in: the philosophies of behaviorism the theory and methodology of behavior analysis basic and applied research in human behavior basic research in animal behavior application of behavioral principles to organizational administration and consultation, instructional design and technology, parent and teacher training, and clinical populations participatory governance and fiscal management The aim of the Program is to provide comprehensive training in behavior analysis, out of which more specialized basic, applied, and theoretical interests may be developed. A balance of basic, applied, and theoretical training is sought. The 5 year Doctoral Program trains graduates to teach, do research, and work as consultants or administrators in the public and private sectors. The 2.5 Year Professional Masters Program trains graduates for employment as senior service providers in such fields as developmental disabilities, education, mental health, or business and industry. The Satellite Degree Programs train full-time employees at their work sites across the country under contractual agreement with sponsoring human service agencies.
 
9. The Department of Applied Behavioral Science (formerly known a HDFL) at the University of Kansas.
GREGORY J. MADDEN (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Edward K. Morris (University of Kansas)
Abstract: In 2004, the Department of Human Development and Family Life at the University of Kansas became the Department of Applied Behavioral Science. The departments and the faculty are largely the same, but now more focused on behavior-analytic research and scholarship for improving the human condition. The poster will describe the department and the ABA-accredited doctoral programs, the faculty, and graduate student research and placement.
 
10. Graduate and Undergraduate Training at the University of North Texas.
MANISH VAIDYA (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The poster describes the undergraduate and graduate programs leading to Bachelor's and Master's degrees in Behavior Analysis, respectively. In addition, the poster provides a description of the non-classroom based curricular and extracurricular activities that enhance the training experience at the University of North Texas. Examples include projects in nonhuman laboratories, area zoos and humane societies and many opportunities to work with individuals with developmental delays of all varieties.
 
11. Graduate Programs in Special Education at The Ohio State University.
SHEILA R. ALBER-MORGAN (The Ohio State University), Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University), Gwendolyn Cartledge (The Ohio State University), Ralph Gardner III (The Ohio State University), Theresa Hessler (The Ohio State University), Moira Konrad (The Ohio State University), Nancy A. Neef (The Ohio State University), Diane M. Sainato (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: The Ohio State University's M.Ed. program in Special Education is a full-time behaviorally oriented master's program that leads to Ohio licensure as a special education teacher in Early Childhood Special Education, Mild/Moderate Educational Needs, or Moderate/Intensive Educational Needs. The M.A. program in Applied Behavior Analysis emphasizes the development, implementation, and evaluation of behavioral interventions for improving socially significant behavior. Full- and part-time M.A. students fulfill their practicum and research program requirements in a wide variety of school, residential, employment, and other community settings. The Ph.D. program prepares full-time students for leadership positions in special education whose research and teaching are guided by the philosophical, scientific, and technological principles of applied behavior analysis. The curriculum develops each student's knowledge and skills in six competency areas: (a) conceptual analysis, (b) research and scholarship, (c) design and application of educational interventions, (d) professional communication, (e) administration and collegial relations, and (f) teaching and advising. The M.A. and Ph.D. programs are accredited by the Association for Behavior Analysis through 2007. Each program includes a course sequence pre-approved by the Behavior Analysis Certification Board as meeting the coursework requirements to sit for the BCBA examination.
 
12. Simmons College.
MICHAEL J. CAMERON (Simmons College), Susan Ainsleigh (Simmons College), Katherine A. Johnson (Simmons College and Advances Learning Center), Michael F. Dorsey (Simmons College)
Abstract: Simmons College offers a Ph.D. in Applied Behavior Analysis. as well as an ABA Accredited M.Ed. and Ed.S. Graduate program in Behavioral Education. The Behavioral Education program prepares educators and behavior specialists to assess and support learners with special needs in diverse educational settings. The program was designed to address a nationwide shortage of educators with formal training in behavioral education; a shortage of graduate programs that focus on behavioral education in public school settings; and a shortage of Board Certified Behavior Analysts™. This program covers the methods, principles, and procedures of applied behavior analysis, with an emphasis on using behavior analysis and behavioral support in both specialized and inclusive general education settings. The course sequence is approved by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board™ and meets the coursework requirements for the Board Certified Behavior Analyst™ (BCBA) examination. In fact, Simmons students boast a significant 91 percent pass rate on their BCBA exams.
 
13. University of Maryland Baltimore County ABA MA Track.
DAVID M. RICHMAN (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), A. Charles Catania (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University), Sung Woo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: The UMBC Department of Psychology and the Kennedy Krieger Institute’s Department of Behavioral Psychology offer an Applied Behavior Analysis Master of Arts Psychology track that is accredited by the Behavior Analysis Certification Board and Association for Behavior Analysis. The poster will provide a brief overview of the program, application requirements, and description of faculty interests.
 
 
Expo Poster Session #263
#263 ABA Expo - Graduate Training Programs
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
14. The ABA Program at the Chicago School of Professional Psychology.
CHARLES T. MERBITZ (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: This Expo Poster presents the exciting new ABA Masters Program at the Chicago School of Professional Psychology (CSOPP). The Chicago School is a not-for-profit graduate school for professional psychology at which approximately 1000 students are currently studying. This 48 credit-hour aims to produce graduates with outstanding ABA and clinical skills. The CSOPP ABA courses are BACB approved, so that Program graduates are eligible for the BCBA Exam and credential, and field placements in a variety of settings are available. Our campus is located downtown in the heart of Chicago. Note that students who wish to experience a behavioral approach to graduate education, such as the use of the Keller Plan aka the Personalized System of Instruction (PSI), and Precision Teaching methods, are urged to investigate CSOPP. Our faculty members Chris Leonhard, Ph.D., ABPP, David Pyles, Ph.D., BCBA, John Smagner, Ph.D., Diana Walker, Ph.D. and the Program Director, Charles Merbitz, PhD, BCBA, welcome you to the CSOPP Poster at the ABA Expo and invite your questions.
 
15. ABA Training Opportunities at the New England Center for Children.
DANIEL GOULD (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: This poster wil present the graduate and undergraduate training programs, post-masters degree program in behavior analysis, graduate assistantships, internships, field placements, research opportunities, and financial support for graduate study available at the New England Center for Children (NECC). Three on-site master's degree programs, one in applied behavior analysis (Northeastern University), one in special education: severe special needs (Simmons College) and one in counseling psychology/behavioral therapy (Framingham State College) are offered at NECC. A two-year post-masters degree training program in behavoir analysis is also offered. An innovative undergraduate training program, modeled after "semester abroad" programs, provides full academic credit plus extensive practical experience. NECC serves as an internship site for numerous other Boston-area graduate training programs in a variety of health-care disciplines. An active research program includes nationally and internationally recognized experts in the field of autism and behavior analysis. In collaboration with senior program staff, the research department provides opportunities for research and experience and supervision of theses and dissertations. Financial support for all students who are employees of NECC is provided, and ranges from partial tuition reimbursement to full support (including full tuition, housing, stipend, plus regular employee benefits).
 
16. Advanced Training in Developmental Disabilities and Applied Behavior Analysis at the Kennedy Krieger Institute and the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine.
KATHERINE D. FALWELL (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Danielle N. Dolezal (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Sung Woo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Michael F. Cataldo (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: The Kennedy Krieger Institute and the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine provides predoctoral and postdoctoral training in developmental disabilities, pediatric psychology, and applied behavior analysis.
 
17. Applied Behavior Analysis at The University of Houston, Clear Lake.
DOROTHEA C. LERMAN (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Alyson N. Hovanetz (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Margaret J. Strobel (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Allison Serra Tetreault (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Alice A. Keyl (University of Houston, Clear Lake)
Abstract: Applied Behavior Analysis is a specialization area within the General Psychology Master's program at The University of Houston, Clear Lake. The goal of the specialization is to provide students with a well-rounded foundation in psychology and applied behavior analysis through an integrated sequence of coursework, practicum, and research activities. Students obtain competency in the basic principles of learning and the application of these principles with particular emphasis on interventions for individuals with developmental disabilities. Practicum and research experiences are available in home, school, and clinic settings. A limited number of graduate assistantships are available each year. All students complete a major research project prior to graduation, as well as the BACB-approved course sequence. Students completing the coursework and practicum requirements are eligible to sit for the BCBA exam. Furthermore, graduates are prepared to pursue doctoral degrees in psychology or behavior analysis.
 
18. Applied Behavior Analysis Concentration at Nova Southeastern University.
CHRISTINE REEVE (Mailman Segal Institute), Melissa N. Hale (Mailman Segal Institute, Nova Southeastern University), Anibal Gutierrez Jr. (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: The Mailman Segal Institute offers a masters concentration in applied behavior analysis(ABA) in collaboration with the Counseling Studies Institute at NSU. The academic coursework is provided in an online format to provide access to students across the country. The online instruction offers accessibility and flexibility along with a quality educational opportunity for the mature, independent student.
 
19. Applied Behavior Analysis in Special Education at the University of Utah.
ROBERT E. O'NEILL (University of Utah)
Abstract: Information will be provided on opportunities for the study of ABA in the Department of Special Education at the University of Utah. The poster will include faculty research interests and activities, information on coursework, and information on department programs, application processes, and student financial support.
 
20. Behavior Analysis at the Florida Institute of Technology.
JOSE A. MARTINEZ-DIAZ (Florida Institute of Technology & ABA Tech), Elbert Blakely (Florida Institute of Technology), Nikki L. Keefer (Florida Institute of Technology), Matthew P. Normand (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: The Applied Behavior Analysis program at Florida Tech will be described.
 
21. Behavior Analysis Training at California State University, Fresno.
JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (California State University, Fresno), Criss Wilhite (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: California State University, Fresno offers both undergraduate and Masters level graduate training programs in applied behavior analysis. Both programs curricula are consistent with BACB standards for academic experience. The graduate program also ensures that students meet the Boards supervised experience requirements necessary for certification. The undergraduate program offers students a broad-based education in various applications of behavior analysis that is intended to prepare them for certification at the associate level and/or graduate study in the field. The Masters program is designed to provide students with research and practical experience related specifically to school-based interventions and autism treatment. This presentation will provide an overview of prerequisites for applying to the program, program expectations, descriptions of courses and practicum placements, and an overview of faculty interests.
 
22. Behavioral Intervention in Autism: An Online BCBA-Level Curriculum.
RICHARD K. FLEMING (University of Massachusetts Medical School), Charlotte Mandell (University Of Massachusetts), Richard Seigel (University of Massachusetts, Lowell), Beth Sulzer-Azaroff (Browns Group, Naples), Charles Hamad (University of Massachusetts Medical School)
Abstract: Behavioral Intervention in Autism is a 5-course online graduate curriculum that is BACB approved at the BCBA level and offered through UMASS Online. This BIA curriculum comprehensively covers the application behavior analysis principles, procedures and programs with persons with autism and related developmental disabilities. This poster describes the purpose, content and methods of BIA in detail.
 
23. Educational Psychology/ABA Program at the Marcus Institute and Georgia State University.
ASHLEY C. GLOVER (Marcus Autism Center), Robert-Ryan S. Pabico (Marcus Autism Center), Joanna Lomas (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University)
Abstract: The Educational Psychology/ABA Program at the Marcus Institute is offered through Georgia State University. This program provides students with a wide range of opportunities and skills to pursue an academic or professional career in Applied Behavior Analysis. In collaboration with the educational psychology program at Georgia State, students will have the opportunity to work at the Marcus Institute and apply the techniques taught from the required ABA classes. Specifically, the Masters program will provide graduate students with the experience to work or consult in schools, early intervention programs, day programs, residential settings, and home-based programs. Approximately 87% of students at the Marcus Institute program are presenters at the 2006 ABA convention. Additionally, the educational psychology program at the Masters level prepares students to pursue a variety of career paths, including research, evaluation, and the applied practice of a number of disciplines, including K-12 instruction. The pre-approved masters program curriculum allows students to be eligible to take the Board Certified Behavior Analysis examination (BCBA).
 
24. Florida State University at Panama City Master's Program in Behavior Analysis.
JON S. BAILEY (BMC, FSU, FABA), H. Allen Murphy (Florida State University, Panama City), Timothy M. Weil (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The poster will describe FSU, Panama City's master's program in behavior analysis. Representatives from the program will be available to meet and talk with interested students.
 
25. Graduate Programs in Applied Behavior Analysis at Caldwell College.
PATRICK R. PROGAR (Caldwell College), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell College), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell College)
Abstract: Caldwell College, a private liberal arts college located in a quiet suburban New Jersey community 20 miles from New York City, is home to two graduate programs in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA). Both programs prepare students for employment within the fields where there are growing demands for competent professionals with expertise in ABA: namely, developmental services and special education. The Post-Baccalaureate Certificate Program in ABA consists of a BACB-approved six-course curriculum (18 credits). These same 6 courses also make up the core of the 39-credit Masters program in ABA. Students in the MA program are required to complete a research thesis. New Jersey is home to a variety of successful private agencies and public school programs that work with Caldwell College to support training for students in behavior analysis and to provide practicum experience. Caldwell College offers a student/faculty ratio of 13 to 1, small classes, and individualized attention.
 
26. Graduate Training in Behavior Analysis and Behavior Therapy at Eastern Michigan University.
JAMES T. TODD (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: This poster describes graduate training opportunities in behavior analysis and behavior therapy in the Psychology Department at Eastern Michigan University. Eastern Michigan offers an M.S. in Clinical Behavioral Psychology and a new Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology (with a behavior analysis/behavior therapy concentration). The department features upgraded facilities including a new freestanding psychology clinic. Seven tenure-track faculty members have training and experience in behavior analysis and behavior therapy. Research opportunities are available in human and non-human behavior. Both programs include courses, practica, and internships appropriate for licensure in Michigan. Competitive graduate assistantship support is available at the M.S. level. Ph.D. students receive a fellowship with full tuition support and a stipend. (APA accreditation for the Ph.D. program is pending.)
 
27. Graduate Training in Behavior Analysis at North Dakota State University.
ASHLEY RANDALL (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Amy C. Mackner (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Carrie M. Brower-Breitwieser (North Dakota State University), Marie R. Schaff (North Dakota State University)
Abstract: The Department of Psychology at North Dakota State University offers a masters degree in clinical psychology with an emphasis in behavior analysis. Masters students get behavior analysis training through course work, practicum experiences, and applied research projects. Five graduate courses have a behavioral or behavior analysis emphasis. Graduate students can conduct behavioral and functional assessments and functional treatments with children and individuals with developmental disabilities in a variety of practicum settings in the community. Graduate students can design, conduct, and write manuscripts of applied behavior analysis research projects conducted with Dr. Ray Miltenberger. Most graduate students with ABA interests are authors on a number of ABA conference presentations and journal publications based on their research. Students who graduate with their masters have been successful in achieving behavior analysis certification.
 
28. Graduate Training in School Psychology at Louisiana State University.
MICHAEL J. VANCE (Louisiana State University), Nathan Call (Louisiana State University), Chisato Komatsu (Louisiana State University), Karen Rader (Louisiana State University), Nicole M. Trosclair-Lasserre (Louisiana State University), Valerie M. Volkert (Louisiana State University)
Abstract: This poster will describe the APA-Accredited School Psychology Program at Louisiana State University and introduce the faculty to prospective doctoral students. The conceptual philosophy of the LSU School Psychology program is broadly empirical with an emphasis in behavior analysis. The program focuses on children as they function within family, school, and community systems. Using a close mentorship approach, the program prepares students to develop interventions for behavior and academic problems. Each student has intensive and frequent contact with faculty members, particularly his or her major professor. Current research projects focus on functional assessment, intervention, and parent/teacher training. Hands-on training in schools, clinics, hospitals, and institutions is emphasized. The program offers a sequence of courses that has been approved by the Behavior Analysis Certification Board. Faculty and students will be available to answer questions.
 
29. Idaho State Universitys Graduate Programs in Special Education and Applied Behavior Analysis.
STEPHANIE M. PETERSON (Idaho State University), Lloyd D. Peterson (Idaho State University), Gail Coulter (Idaho State University), Deb Hedeen (Idaho State University), Jessica Friedner (Idaho State University)
Abstract: This poster will describe various graduate programs offered in the College of Education at Idaho State University. These programs are consistent with the philosophies and principles of behavior analysis as it applies to developing programs for individuals with disabilities. The poster will describe faculty interests, student achievements, admission criteria, exit criteria, and requirements of each of the individual programs.
 
30. Masters Program in Clinical Psychology/Applied Behavior Analysis at East Carolina University.
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University)
Abstract: East Carolina University has a clinical psychology program of study that leads to a Master of Artsdegree in psychology and eligibility for licensure in North Carolina as a Licensed Psychological Associate. Students are admitted to one of two tracks within the program: Child Clinical Psychology or Adult Clinical Psychology. Students can elect to specialize in Applied Behavior Analysis and take a series of courses that will make them eligible for certification as a nationally Board Certified Behavior Analyst. The program requires a minimum of 51 hours of instruction and is generally completed in two years. The program provides classroom training in ethics, behavioral assessment and psychological diagnosis, applied behavior analysis, behavioral research, and behavior therapy. In addition to classroom learning, students will engage in a supervised practicum experience in a behaviorally-oriented setting in their first year. During their second year, students will spend 1000 hours in on-site internship placements under the supervision of a Licensed Psychologist and Board Certified Behavior Analyst. Finally, students will gain research experience through the completion of a behaviorally-oriented masters thesis project.
 
31. Masters Programme in Applied Behaviour Analysis at the University of Wales, Bangor, UK.
J. CARL HUGHES (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Stephen J Noone (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Alexander Toogood (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Richard P. Hastings (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Marguerite L. Hoerger (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Pauline Horne (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor)
Abstract: In 2003 we developed the first Masters course in Applied Behaviour Analysis in Europe. The course is designed and taught by Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBA) and has been approved by the Behavior Analysis Certification Board (BACB) as providing content eligibility for students to sit the full BCBA exam (3rd Task List). In line with the British University system, the course is offered at three levels: Post-graduate Certificate, Post-graduate Diploma, and Masters. In the design and running of the course we have attempted to use behavioural principles in the instructional materials, learning environments, and in the assessment of students learning. We utilise computer based instructional packages, direct instruction, and, Precision Teaching approaches, such as SAFMEDS and Standard Celeration Charting. The course can be taken in one year or on a part-time basis (either two or three years in duration). Each year we enrol approximately 30-35 students from a wide range of backgrounds: early autism intervention projects, challenging behaviour units, social services, special education, and new graduates. Our main aim is to make a significant contribution to training competent behaviour analysts.
 
32. May Institute Graduate Training Opportunities.
JANE I. CARLSON (The May Institute), Gary M. Pace (The May Institute), Alan E. Harchik (The May Institute), Robert F. Putnam (The May Institute), Dennis C. Russo (The May Institute)
Abstract: May Institute Graduate Training Opportunities.
 
33. Middle Tennessee State University Graduate Training in Behavior Analysis.
BELINDA TRAUGHBER (Middle Tennessee State University), Kim J. Ujcich Ward (Middle Tennessee State University)
Abstract: Middle Tennessee State University offers a Master's in Clinical Psychology with a specialization in Behavior Analysis. All classroom instruction required for the BCBA exam is incorporated into the training program.
 
34. MSc/Postgraduate Diploma in Applied Behavior Analysis.
DENIS P. O'HORA (University of Ulster, Coleraine), Julian C. Leslie (University of Ulster, Coleraine), Michael Keenan (University of Ulster, Coleraine)
Abstract: Within the island of Ireland and in the U.K. as a whole there has been an increasing demand for science-based solutions to social problems. The discipline of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) has an established pedigree that can help meet these aims. The postgraduate Diploma/MSc course, taken part-time over two years (or a shorter period for the Diploma), will lead students, who may be graduates from a range of backgrounds, towards becoming professionals in ABA. While on the course, they will complete a period of supervised work experience in an appropriate location. The Masters provides students with the opportunity to maximise their theoretical and conceptual knowledge in behaviour analysis, to develop their skills in behavioural assessment and to ensure that they acquire the ability to work in partnership with clients as they plan and implement programmes that are aimed to establish, strengthen and/or weaken targeted behaviours.
 
35. Programs in Special Education at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas.
RENEE KOEHLER VAN NORMAN (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Matthew Tincani (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
Abstract: The University of Nevada, Las Vegas offers graduate training in special education at the masters and doctoral levels with coursework, research, and field experience opportunities in applied behavior analysis. UNLV is an urban research university situated in Southern Nevada, the nations fastest growing major metropolitan community. The Department of Special Education has M.Ed., M.S., Ed.D. and Ph.D. programs with the availability of a course sequence pre-approved by the Behavior Analysis Certification Board as meeting the coursework requirements to sit for the BCBA examination. The UNLV campus contains two state-of-the-art research facilities for applied behavior analytic research, and a variety of behavior analytically-focused research and field experience opportunities are available within the Clark County School District and private schools and clinics in Southern Nevada. For students who wish to study full-time, financial assistance in the form of graduate assistantships is available.
 
36. The School Psychology Program at Syracuse University: Focus on Research-Based Practice.
FLORENCE D. DIGENNARO REED (Syracuse University), Derek D. Reed (Syracuse University), Caron Inglis (Syracuse University), Tanya L. Eckert (Syracuse University), Brian K. Martens (Syracuse University), Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University)
Abstract: This poster at the ABA Expo will overview the doctoral training program in School Psychology at Syracuse University including training philosophy, specialized skill tracks, faculty, and opportunities for graduate students. The program is fully accredited by the American Psychological Association and holds licensure-qualifying status in New York State. Four full-time and one half-time faculty members have primary responsibility for training the programs 22 doctoral students. Based on a scientist-practitioner model, training includes specialized tracks in: (a) applied behavior analysis, (b) school-based consultation and intervention, (c) academic assessment and instructional intervention, (d) preschool and family, and (e) neuropsychology. All students previously admitted to the program have received 100% funding throughout their graduate career. Opportunities for practicum placements include area schools, hospitals, community mental health agencies, and on-campus clinics. Students have applied for and been awarded APA-accredited pre-doctoral internships at sites such as The Crestwood Childrens Center, The Devereaux Institute, The Kennedy Krieger Institute, The Marcus Institute, The May Institute, and The Monroe-Meyer Institute. Graduates of the program are eligible for BCBA and NCSP certification as well as psychology licensure upon completion of required post-doctoral hours.
 
37. Special Education Graduate Program at Penn State.
BETH SPICER (Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract: The purpose of the poster is to present various program options for the Special Education Graduate Program at Penn State.
 
38. Temple University Behavior Analysis.
MICHAEL J. TOBIA (Temple University), Philip N. Hineline (Temple University), Saul Axelrod (Temple University), Betsy Wurstner (Temple University), Michelle Ennis Soreth (Temple University), E. Terry Mueller (Temple University)
Abstract: This poster details the Applied Masters Program in Behavior Analysis and the Doctoral Program in Behavior Analysis available at Temple University.
 
39. University of North Carolina Wilmington (UNCW) Applied Behavior Analysis Master's Degree Program.
MAUREEN THERESA ARO (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Anne K. Stull (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Ruth M. Hurst (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Carol Pilgrim (University of North Carolina, Wilmington)
Abstract: The Applied Behavior Analysis (clinical) concentration is a 50 credit hour program that trains students in the theory, science, and practice of behavior analysis. The program focuses especially on evidence-based approaches in behavioral assessment and interventions with individuals with developmental disability, such as autism. This concentration prepares students for licensure in North Carolina as a Licensed Psychological Associate (LPA), and for certification as a Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA). This concentration takes approximately 2 1/2 years to complete and includes a six month/1000 hour internship.
 
40. University of the Pacific Masters Program in Applied Behavior Analysis.
JOHN C. BORRERO (University of the Pacific), Holly Ayn White (University of the Pacific), Cris T. Clay (University of the Pacific)
Abstract: The University of the Pacific offers a Master of Arts degree in Psychology with an optional emphasis in Applied Behavior Analysis. The 30-unit MA program typically requires 2 years and includes an empirical thesis. All students are given opportunities to participate in a wide range of clinical settings (e.g., schools, community programs) in order to develop assessment and intervention skills. Five Board Certified Behavior Analysts are members of the Faculty and Staff and can provide the necessary supervision for those interested in sitting for the Behavior Analysis Certification Board examination. Nearly all graduate-students receive substantial tuition and stipend support through university teaching and other assistantships.
 
41. Utah State University Doctoral Programs in Applied Behavior Analysis.
CHARLES L. SALZBERG (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University), Robert L. Morgan (Utah State University), Benjamin Lignugaris/Kraft (Utah State University), Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University), David E. Forbush (Utah State University)
Abstract: The Department of Special Education at Utah State University offers doctoral specializations in (1) Special Education, (2) Applied Behavior Analysis, (3) Rehabilitation, and (4) Disabilities Studies. These programs have a common core of coursework and specialization courses in each area. The doctoral program features extensive mentoring and individualization of the program based on student background and interests. In the program, students gain experience in (1) college teaching, (2) supervision, (3) research, (4) professional writing for publication, (5) making professional presentations, and (6) grant writing. Financial support is available for qualified students.
 
42. Utah State University: Behavior Analysis Training in the Department of Psychology.
TIMOTHY A. SHAHAN (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: This poster provides an overview of the training program in behavior analysis in the department of psychology at Utah State University. Laboratory facilities and the current research interests of faculty will be described. In addition, opportunities for applied experiences will be discussed.An overview of admissions and funding opportunities will be provided.
 
43. Western Michigan University: APA-Accredited Clinical Psychology Program.
R. WAYNE FUQUA (Western Michigan University), Scott T. Gaynor (Western Michigan University), Linda A. LeBlanc (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Western Michigan University: APA-Accredited Clinical Psychology Program.
 
44. Western Michigan University: Industrial Organizational Psychology Program.
JOHN AUSTIN (Western Michigan University), Eric J. Fox (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: This poster describes Western Michigan University's Industrial Organizational Psychology Masters
 
 
Expo Poster Session #264
#264 ABA Expo - ABA Board
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
45. ABA's Education Board.
PAMELA G. OSNES (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Gwen Dwiggins (The Ohio State University), Jennifer L. Austin (California State University, Fresno), Janet S. Twyman (Headsprout)
Abstract: This poster will detail the mission, goals, and objectives of ABA's Education Board and its committees, the Council of Directors of Graduate Training Programs in Behavior Analysis and the Accreditation Board. To be described will be the year's goals and progress toward meeting them, as well as goals for 2006-2007.
 
 
Expo Poster Session #265
#265 ABA Expo - ABA Committee
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
46. ABA Student Committee.
CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (West Virginia University), Shawn R. Charlton (University of California, San Diego), Marianne L. Jackson (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: This poster summarizes the ABA Student Committee's activities over the past year and goals for the future.
 
 
Expo Poster Session #266
#266 ABA Expo - Special Interest Groups
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
46.

Applied Animal Behavior Special Interest Group.

EDUARDO J. FERNANDEZ (Indiana University), Jennifer L. Sobie (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

The Applied Animal Behavior Special Interest Group (SIG) of the Association for Behavior Analysis (ABA) was created to promote research and application of behavior analytic principles to the field of animal training. Members of the SIG are interested in or involved in animal training with a wide range of animals, both domestic (e.g., dogs, horses) and exotic (e.g., zoo animals). Each year at the ABA convention, members of the Applied Animal Behavior SIG present research-based and theoretical papers and posters. To support such endeavors, the SIG makes available to its members research tools to aid in the design, implementation and dissemination of results of studies assessing the efficacy and/or contribution of behavior analysis in animal behavior, including the annual presentation of the Marion Breland Bailey Award for Student Research and Scholarship. The poster will display SIG member activities, photos of animal facility tours from past conferences, and will include a compellation of animal related presentations scheduled for the 2006 conference. Officers from the Applied Animal Behavior SIG will be available during the poster session to discuss the SIG's activities and goals with interested ABA members.

 
47. Behavioral Gerontology Special Interest Group.
JONATHAN C. BAKER (Western Michigan University), Paige Raetz (Western Michigan University), Linda A. LeBlanc (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Behavioral Gerontology SIG is comprised of a group of ABA professionals interested in aging topics ranging from basic research to applied issues related to clinical and organizational interventions. The SIG meets every year at the ABA convention and would love to have you join them. The SIG sponsors a student presenter award every year for a student symposium or poster presentation in aging. The SIG collaborates to coordinate symposia and invited events for each year's convention. Finally, the SIG publishes an electronic newsletter twice a year to keep the membership informed of happenings in the field and upcoming events.
 
48. Behaviorists for Social Responsibility.
MARK A. MATTAINI (Jane Addams College of Social Work, University of Illinois, Chicago), Elizabeth T. Merbitz (Jane Addams College of Social Work, University of Illinois, Chicago)
Abstract: Behaviorists for Social Responsibility is an ABA SIG. This poster will describe our activities, including the journal Behavior and Social Issues, and will encourage membership and active involvement in the SIG.
 
49. Behaviorists Interested in Gambling Special Interest Group (BIG SIG).
GINGER R. WILSON (Nyansa Learning Corporation), Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Charles A. Lyons (Eastern Oregon University)
Abstract: This poster will highlight all BIG SIG members and their affiliation. In addition, this poster will highlight all BIG SIG related activities at ABA 2006.
 
50. Clinical Special Interest Group.
ANN BRANSTETTER-ROST (Southwest Missouri State University)
Abstract: The clinical special interest group is a group of ABA members who specialize in clinical applications of behavior analysis. Our members work in various setting with varied populations. The mission of the SIG is to promote clinical behavior analysis, and to share our work with each other, as well as the public at large. If you are interested in clinical applications of behavior analysis, this poster will provide information on mission, membership, and meetings.
 
51. Development and Behavior Analysis Special Interest Group.
JACOB L. GEWIRTZ (Florida International University)
Abstract: The Development and Behavior Analysis SIG will present the current activities of and future plans for the organization.
 
52. Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior SIG.
CYNTHIA J. PIETRAS (Western Michigan University), Eric A. Jacobs (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Jennifer M. O'Donnell (Mountain States Employers Council)
Abstract: The EAHB-SIG aims to promote the development of the experimental analysis of behavior with human subjects. The SIG maintains an online journal fo the publication of human research, sponsors a yearly student paper competition, and at ABA delivers an EAHB Distinguished Career Award.
 
53. The Health, Sport & Fitness Special Interest Group.
MICHAEL A. KIRKPATRICK (Wesley College, Dover, Delaware)
Abstract: The Health, Sport & Fitness (HSF) Special Interest Group (SIG) at ABA: International consists of behavior analysts, students, athletes, and health buffs with an interest in applying behavioral principles to promote health-positive behavior. At the annual ABA conference, we organize symposia and paper sessions, hold a business meeting, and sponsor work-out sessions. We promote research and interdisciplinary collaboration, sponsor a student research award, and offer a forum for new ideas. Our newsletter is free to members and published 1-4 times per year. A Yahoo-group permits open online discussion on any relevant topic. Anyone sharing our interests is welcome to join.
 
54. Instructional Design SIG Anyone?
GUY S. BRUCE (Appealing Solutions, LLC)
Abstract: Instructional design is a tool for solving "know-how" problems. It can be used to design more efficient teaching and training programs for staff and clients, so that organizations and individuals achieve desired results. For example, an effective behavior management plan should include an efficient training program for those language, social, work, and daily living skills that persons with learning difficulties need to achieve their personal goals. In the same way, staff need efficient training programs so that they will quickly learn the skills they need to help clients achieve their goals. Teachers and trainers at any level can use instructional design to help their students rapidly acquire the skills they need to be effective in their careers, whether these careers are in behavior analysis or in other fields.Those interested in learning more about instructional design are invited to attend a SIG meeting at this conference. Attendees will be asked to talk about their current instructional design projects and to plan SIG activities for the coming year.
 
55. Interbehaviorists SIG.
THOMAS L. SHARPE, JR. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas)
Abstract: Interbehaviorists SIG.
 
56. The Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) Network.
RHIANNON M. FANTE (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The poster will describe OBM Network activities over the past year, and encourage membership in the organization.
 
57. Parent-Professional Partnership.
SUZANNE M. BUCHANAN (COSAC)
Abstract: The number of consumers who attend the ABA Convention has increased in recent years. The PPP SIG enhances the conference experience for these consumers, particularly parents of children with autism. Through this venue, the SIG will provide materials of interest to parents and professionals alike. Materials will include the Autism SIG Guidelines and specific information on effective parent and professional collaboration. This venue will also provide networking opportunities for parents and professionals.
 
58. Positive Behavior Support Special Interest Group.
MATTHEW TINCANI (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Cynthia M. Anderson (University of Oregon), Patricia Egan (State University of New York, Plattsburgh)
Abstract: The Positive Behavior Support SIG is for members of ABA who are interested in behavior analysis and positive behavior support. Objectives of the SIG include increasing the number and visibility of PBS presentations at the ABA conference; disseminating accurate information about PBS to ABA’s membership; promoting methodologically sound, data-based PBS research; and facilitating open dialogue among behavior analysts and proponents of PBS. We encourage anybody interested in the PBS SIG to stop by our poster at the ABA Expo or to attend the PBS SIG business meeting (see the convention program book).
 
59. Speech Pathology and Applied Behavior Analysis Special Interest Group (SPABA SIG).
JAMIE M. SEVERTSON (Western Michigan University), Barbara E. Esch (Esch Behavior Consultants, Inc.), Christine M. Louisignau (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The mission of the Speech Pathology and Applied Behavior Analysis (SPABA) Special Interest Group is to promote communication and collaboration between speech/language pathologists (SLPs) and behavior analysts in the dissemination of behaviorally oriented speech and language research and in the application of evidence-based practices. Members are speech pathologists, behavior analysts, and students in these two fields who advocate a behavioral approach to address speech/language problems both clinically and through empirical research. During this first year of organization, activities focused on promoting interest in the group to increase membership. These activities included creating a brochure, publishing several newsletter articles to introduce SPABA to speech pathologists and behavior analysts, and identifying universities that have both speech pathology and behavior analysis programs. Future goals include re-designing the website to include tutorials on ABA and autism and to provide links to SLP and ABA publications and organizations. SPABA is also interested in creating regional groups of speech pathologists and behavior analysts who can meet throughout the year and collaborate on projects of mutual professional interest.
 
60. Standard Celeration Society (SCS) Special Interest Group: Charting the Course for the Future.
MICHAEL FABRIZIO (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Abigail B. Calkin (Calkin Consulting Center), Nicholas M. Berens (University of Nevada, Reno), William J. Helsel (AGILE Learners Program at PLEA), Katherine Sandra MacLeod (University of Utah), Jesus Rosales-ruiz (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Since 1990 the Standard Celeration Society has comprised a collegial organization for all persons who use Standard Celeration Charts to monitor and change human behavior frequencies. The Society's members come from a diverse background. They apply the Chart to all levels of education, including pre-school, elementary and middle school, high school, and college, as well as to all types special education. Additionally, members have used the Chart in human services organizations, business and industrial applications, performance management and improvement consulting, parenting and child rearing, self-management projects and general scientific analysis of national and world economic and social problems. The Society encourages the development and growth of a science of human behavior and learning, and promotes using the Standard Celeration Chart to further that objective. Moreover, the Society seeks research to create data-based functional applications derived from the science of behavior and learning. Ultimately, we have a society to create a more loving, less fearful world. Mission Statement: The basic mission of the Standard Celeration Society is to promote standard measurement and monitoring of behavior frequencies and their celerations.
 
 
Expo Poster Session #267
#267 ABA Expo - Chapters
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
1. A Behavior Analysis Group for the Northland.
GERALD C. MERTENS (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: An informational recruiting display for a forming affiliate chapter.
 
2. ABA Espana: Opportunities for Behavior Analysis Practice and Training.
JAVIER VIRUES ORTEGA (Instituto de Salud Carlos III), Tomas Jesus Carrasco-Gimenez (Universidad de Granada), Gloria Fernandez (Gabinete de Psicologia Altair)
Abstract: This poster will briefly review the history of behavior analysis in Spain. We will introduce ABA Espana, Asociacion para el Avance de la Ciencia de la Conducta (ABA-AACC). The training and clinical activities developed by ABA-AACC will be described in some detail. In addition, we will mention job options, expansion plans and visit for international students offered by ABA-AACC.
 
3. Alabama ABA.
RYAN M. ZAYAC (Auburn University), Amy S. Polick (Auburn University)
Abstract: The Alabama Association for Behavior Analysis (ALABA) was founded in 1992 as an affiliate chapter of ABA. Its membership is largely from the human services community in Alabama. ALABA operates with an executive director and board and sponsors an annual convention in the fall and publishes a newsletter.
 
4. Behavior Analysis Association of Michigan.
JAMES T. TODD (Eastern Michigan University), Heather M. Anson (Eastern Michigan University), Joseph K. Golson (Eastern Michigan University), Erin Lynch (Eastern Michigan University), Jennifer Bullock (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: This poster will announce the 21st annual convention of the Behavior Analysis Association of Michigan and give updates on other BAAM events and activities in 2006 and 2007. The Behavior Analysis Association of Michigan has been organized to support and promote scientific research on the basic principles of behavior and the extension of those principles to create demonstrably effective and humane outcome-based therapies with the primary goal of establishing and enhancing functional independent living skills.
 
5. Behavior Analysis in Iceland.
RAGNAR S. RAGNARSSON (ICEABA), Iris Arnadottir (ICEABA), Einar T. Ingvarsson (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Z. Gabriela Sigurdardottir (University of Iceland), Ingibjorg Sveinsdottir (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Anna I. Petursdottir (University of Akureyri), Valdimar Sigurdsson (Cardiff University)
Abstract: Icelanders are a nation of 290,000 people. On August 15th 2004, 35 of them founded the Icelandic Association for Behavior Analysis (ICEABA). ICEABA´s purpose is to increase the influence of behavior analysis in Iceland and it is open to everyone willing to work towards its goals. Among the goals of ICEABA is to increase the number of students who get graduate degrees in behavior analysis; offer workshops and lectures; increase research; design a website about ICEABA and behavior analysis and create and maintain an Icelandic lexicon of behavior analytic terms. Today, more than a dozen Icelanders have a graduate degree in behavior analysis and 10 are currently studying in the field, abroad. Three Icelandic Universities have offered courses with behavior analytic content since 1974. Icelandic behavior analysts work in the private and public sectors; mainly in educational services, universities and for people with disabilites. ICEABA members share information on a Yahoo listserve they founded in 1999. So far this list has generated more than 2000 letters.
 
6. Behavior Analysis Society of Illinois
SELMA J. MARTINEZ (ABA Chicago & The RACE School)
Abstract: Behavior Analysis Society of Illinois
 
7. California Association for Behavior Analysis.
LEEANN CHRISTIAN (Regional Center of Orange County), H. Keith Massel (Vista Psychological Center)
Abstract: CalABA's presentation at the ABA Expo will report the year's activities and achievements and facilitate recruitment. It will also include an announcement of the 25th Western Regional Conference to be held in February 2007.
 
8. Chicago Association for Behavior Analysis.
CHARLES T. MERBITZ (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: This Expo Poster marks another year for the Chicago Association for Behavior Analysis (CABA). Serving Chicago and northern Illinois, CABA is one of the oldest organizations in the USA. The CABA President, Charles Merbitz, PhD, BCBA, and the CABA members welcome you to the CABA Poster at the ABA Expo and invite your questions.
 
9.

Connecticut Association for Behavior Analysis.

ERICA Q. SMITH (Institute of Professional Practice, Inc.)
Abstract:

The Connecticut Association for Behavior Analysis (CTABA) was formed in 2003 to assist in the development and advancement of the field of behavior analysis within the state of CT through research, education, and dissemination of information. CTABA is dedicated to promoting the theoretical, experimental, and applied analysis of behavior across a wide array of applications and audiences. This poster will present an overview of the Chapters membership and activities including the annual convention, fundraising efforts, and the newsletter.

 
10. The Experimental Analysis of Behaviour Group (EABG) - UK and Europe.
CHARLES FERGUS (School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), J. Carl Hughes (School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor)
Abstract: The Experimental Analysis of Behaviour Group (EABG) is the UK’s leading behaviour analysis organisation. With over 400 members we have organised international meetings for over 25 years. In recent years our meetings have been held at the University College London and continue to provide an exciting forum for the dissemination and discussion of high quality behaviour analytic research from across Europe and further a field. The next biennial meeting of the EABG will be in held in London Easter, 2007. The EABG now works in collaboration with the European Association for Behaviour Analysis (EABA). The next meeting of the EABA is in Milan, Italy, July 18th -21st 2006. The evidence from both the EABG and the EABA meetings suggests that behaviour analysis in the UK and Europe is faring well. The European Association for Behaviour Analysis, and its allied Journal the European Journal of Behaviour Analysis, mark exciting endeavours in the continuing development of behaviour analysis across Europe.
 
11. The Florida Association for Behavior Analysis at 25.
GRETCHEN S. THWING (AdvoServ), James F. McGimsey (AdvoServ), Kevin Murdock (Hillsborough County Public Schools, Florida), H. Allen Murphy (Florida State University, Panama City)
Abstract: FABA, the first statewide association for behavior analysis with a current membership of 1,021, celebrated its 25th anniversary in Sarasota on September 21-23, 2005 with historical sessions and a gala banquet. This presentation will include highlights from the 2005 conference, current and past legislative efforts, FABA Local Chapter activities, and an update on the September 2006 conference. Representatives from the Association will be available to elaborate and answer questions.
 
12.

Georgia Association for Behavior Analysis.

COBY JOHN LUND (IBS, Inc.), Bradley S. Bezilla (May South, Inc.), Michele Wixson (May South, Inc.), Sandra Black (May South, Inc.), Kim Small (May South, Inc.)
Abstract:

Georgia Association for Behavior Analysis.

 
13. Greater Boston ABA.
JOHN STOKES (Charles River ARC), Joseph N. Ricciardi (The National Autism Center)
Abstract: A common issues that many behavior analyst experience once out of graduate school is the feeling of professional isolation and the lack of continuing education opportunities. The Greater Boston Association for Behavior Analysis (GBABA) is an organization dedicated to furthering the role of applied behavior analysis with-in the greater Boston region of Massachusetts. The organization strives to accomplish this goal by providing a monthly speaker series on subjects of interest to its members. Each month a behavior analyst presents, for approximately two hours, on a subject of interest to the field. The goal of having a monthly presentation is two fold, to bring behavior analysts together on a monthly basis to provide a forum to share ideas and experiences and secondly to provide an outlet for ongoing development for applied practitioners.
 
14. HABA: Behavior Analysis in the Islands.
KIMBERLY A. SMALLEY (BCRC), Patricia I. Wright (Honolulu, Hawaii), Catherine H. Wilson (BCRC)
Abstract: Behavior Analysts in Hawaii continue to build best practice. Come see how we have grown.
 
15.

Japanese Association for Behavior Analysis.

NAOKO SUGIYAMA (Yamawaki Gakuen College)
Abstract:

Japanese Association for Behavior Analysis.

 
16. Israel Association for Behavior Analysis.
AMOS E. ROLIDER (Emek Yezreel College, Israel)
Abstract: Israel Association for Behavior Analysis.
 
17. Kansas Association for Behavior Analysis.
LINDA S. HEITZMAN-POWELL (University of Kansas and Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Kimberly K. Bessette (University of Kansas), Jessica A. Royer (Partners in Behavioral Milestones), Catherine Cote (University of Kansas), Edward K. Morris (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The Kansas Association for Behavior Analysis (KansABA) was founded in 2002 and has since held two scientist-practitioner state conferences and hosted a national science conference. In the future, though, KansABA will become more service and practitioner based, serving especially the needs of persons with developmental disabilities. The poster will describe the chapter governance and committees, and its new directions.
 
18. Maryland Association for Behavior Analysis.
JENNIFER L. CROCKETT (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Stephanie A. Contrucci Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lisa M. Toole (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Sung Woo Kahng (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: The Maryland Association for Behavior Analysis (MABA) was founded in 1998 to serve as a scientific and professional reference group for those in Maryland who identify themselves as scientists or practitioners that embrace the principles and practices of behavior analysis. MABA evolved out of this core at Maryland’s universities, who’s members included A. Charles Catania, Richard Foxx, Don Hake, and Michael Cataldo. Although the interest in, and personnel for, a more formal organization had been present for many years, it was not until several years later that specific circumstances arose to provide sufficient interest and motivation to get organized. The driving forces behind this organization were Wayne Fisher (MABA’s first president), Michael Cataldo, and Lynn Bowman (MABA’s first secretary and treasurer, known throughout the organization as Madam MABA). Since its inception, one of the primary activities of the organization has been to organize and sponsor an annual meeting to serve as a forum for the presentation of scientific and technological achievements as well as for discussion of the affairs of the organization. When MABA was originally founded, it consisted primarily of individuals from the State of Maryland. Since its inception, MABA has grown to over 250 members and has brought together behavior analysts from the Mid-Atlantic region (e.g., Maryland, Delaware, Virginia, Pennsylvania, West Virginia, and New Jersey). MABA has provided behavior analysts in this region an opportunity to learn from distinguished speakers such as Joseph Brady, A. Charles Catania, Michael F. Cataldo, Wayne Fisher, Gina Green, Brian Iwata, Gerald Shook, Judith Favell, Michael Perone, Patrick Friman, Kennon A. Lattal, Philip Hineline, Bridget Taylor, Brian K. Martens, M. Jackson Marr, Carol Pilgrim, Jack Michael, Timothy Vollmer, and Mark Lewis. MABA continues to be a strong and growing organization that serves as the voice of behavior analysis within the Mid-Atlantic region.
 
19. Mexican Society of Behavior Analysis.
CARLOS A. BRUNER (National University of Mexico)
Abstract: With 30 years of age, the Mexican Society of Behavior Analysis is the second oldest psychological society in Mexico. Its main mission is to disseminate our discipline across the country. To accomplish its mission the society relies on the Mexican Journal of Behavior Analysis and on its Biannual Conventions. The journal has published uninterruptedly three issues per year since 1975, belongs to the most prestigious indexes in our field, publishes papers in either Spanish or English, prints 500 copies of each issue and is distributed globally. In addition to our journal the society also organizes biannual conventions. Since 1975, the society has held 17 conventions in different Mexican cities, each with an average attendance of about 500 participants. Its is interesting to note that although our group is considered small, it is also considered the most prestigious within Mexican psychology. Our Seventeen Biannual Convention of Behavior Analysis, held in the city of San Luis Potosi on September 2005 was very successful, showing that our discipline is alive and well in Mexico.
 
20. Mid-American Association for Behavior Analysis.
SARAH TILLMAN (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota), Ruth Anne Rehfeldt (Southern Illinois University), Kevin P. Klatt (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire)
Abstract: The Mid-American Association for Behavior Analysis (MABA) is an affiliated chapter for persons interested in basic and applied behavior analysis. The MABA organization holds an annual conference each fall. Behavior analyts can learn more about the organization and establish membership at the ABA Expo.
 
21. New Jersey ABA.
MARLENE COHEN (Rutgers University), Patrick R. Progar (Caldwell College)
Abstract: NJABA's presentation at the ABA Expo will provide an overview of last year's accomplishments. Some of the highlights include feedback from our first Annual Conference, plans for a winter 2006 Current Dimensions Workshop featuring Bill Heward and a winter 2007 Current Dimensions workshop featuring Jon Bailey, and plans for our second Annual Conference in August 2006, which has been expanded to two days and will include a keynote presentation by Carl Binder. We will also provide an overview of the progress of our new Government Affairs Committee, which is focusing efforts on formal recognition of certification by the BACB in New Jersey.
 
22. North Carolina Association for Behavior Analysis.
R. M. (DUKE) SCHELL (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Jamie Clary (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Barbara Metzger (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County School), Ruth M. Hurst (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Maureen M. Schepis (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Beth Schmitt (Caswell Center), Jody Deacon (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center), Ya-yu Lo (University of North Carolina, Charlotte), Katrina Ann Johnson (East Carolina University)
Abstract: The North Carolina state chapter of the Association for Behavior Analysis, founded in 1988, celebrates the accomplishments of behavior analysis for her citizens. North Carolina has a long and proud history of behavior analysis and continues to champion the benefits of behavior analysis through an annual conference highlighting those accomplishments.
 
23. Ontario Association for Behaviour Analysis (ONTABA)
ROSEMARY A. CONDILLAC (RACK Consulting & Training), Carobeth Zorzos (Toronto Preschool Autism Service), Amy J. Barker Deptuch (ABI Behaviour Services), James C. K. Porter (Kerry's Place Autism Services)
Abstract: The Ontario Association for Behaviour Analysis (ONTABA) is a professional organization with the goals of promoting and supporting an interest in behaviour analysis through public education, student and professional development, networking, and consultation. ONTABA is an affiliate chapter of the Association for Behavior Analysis, International. ONTABA was founded in 1993 and has almost 300 members from many fields, including psychology, education, developmental services, corrections, acquired brain injury services, nursing, health care, and organizational behaviour.
 
24. Our Journey to reach MEAABA.
NOUR AL-QASSAB (Middle East Arab ABA), Laila A. Alkadhem (Middle East Arab ABA)
Abstract: The process of establishing the first Middle East ABA regional chapter reveals unyielding effort by its founders.Lack of behavior technology has left negative impact on children with autism and their families in the region. SABA award was the catalyst to begin the dissemination of behavior analysis in the area. The individualize effort funneled into group effort where parents, professionals and paraprofessionals have worked together toward their noble mission. The commitment of the regional chapter toward promoting behavior science regionally carries along with it many hopes toward an overall processional growth of ABA in a very dynamic part of the world.
 
25. Penn ABA: Pennsylvania Association for Behavior Analysis.
KIMBERLY A. SCHRECK (Pennsylvania State University, Harrisburg), Richard M. Foxx (Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract: This poster will illustrate Penn ABA's most recent activities and its dedication to the commonwealth and ABA students.
 
26. Polish Association for Behavior Analysis.
MONIKA M. SUCHOWIERSKA (Warsaw, Poland)
Abstract: To update the ABA membership on Polish ABA. Since its founding in 2000, Polish ABA (PABA) has been fulfilling its goals of developing and disseminating knowledge about behavior analysis as a science of behavior and about radical behaviorism of B.F. Skinner as a philosophy of this science. In five years, PABA has grown to approximately 50 members, disseminated knowledge about conceptual, experimental and applied behavior analysis to students and professionals interested in behavioral approaches in Poland, became affiliated with ABA, hosted the second European ABA conference, was chosen as the next site for the ABA delegation, and participated in creating the first specialization in the country devoted to applied behavior analysis. PABA Executive Council plans to maintain and strengthen ties between PABA and ABA International and to become a true member of the international community of behavior analysts.
 
27. Polish Association for Behavioral Therapy.
ANNA BUDZINSKA (Institute for Child Development in Gdansk)
Abstract: The Polish Association for Behavioral Therapy (PSTB, Polskie Stowarzyszenie Terapii Behawioralnej) is a national non-profit organization for individuals actively pursuing behavioral therapy. In the most general terms, the mission of the Association is to provide comprehensive professional assistance to persons affected with emotional, intellectual and social dysfunctions and their families. In addition, the Association extends assistance to professionals involved with applied behavioral analysis.HistoryThe Polish Association for Behavioral Therapy (PSTB) was registered on July 17, 2002 as a national non-profit organization with the National Court Registry by the Administrative Court. Since October 2002, the office of the Association has been at Osiedle Zielone 28 in Kraków. In December 2004, the Polish Association for Behavioral Therapy (PSTB) was granted the status of an affiliated chapter of the Association for Behavior Analysis International.MembershipCurrently, there are over 110 members of the Polish Association for Behavioral Therapy (PSTB) throughout Poland. There are PSTB members in each facility implementing behavioral therapy in Poland, and over 85% are professionals.Organizational UnitsAs a result of the dynamic growth of the Polish Association for Behavioral Therapy (PSTB), in 2004 (only two years since its creation) the organization was faced with the necessity of broadening its activities by providing intensive support for the initiatives of local members in various cities in Poland. Consequently, and in keeping with the by-laws, new branch offices of PSTB have been established.CooperationPSTB works closely with the following organizations international: Association for Behavior Analysis International, Princeton Child Development Institute in the USA and domestic (within Poland): Instytut Wspomagania Rozwoju Dziecka (Institute for Child Development) in Gdansk, Polskie Stowarzyszenie Psychologii Behawioralnej (Polish Association for Behavioral Psychology), AUTYZM – POLSKA (Autism – Poland), Krajowe Towarzystwo Autyzmu (National Autism Society)
 
28. The Swedish Association of Behavior Analysis.
NED CARTER (SALAR, Stockholm, Sweden), Kenneth Nilsson (Behavior Analysis Group, Sweden)
Abstract: The poster is intended for the ABA Expo and will describe the Swedish Association for Behavior Analysis.
 
29. TABA: An Organization Comes of Age.
MICHAEL S. TONOS (TEAM Evaluation Center, Inc.), Timothy D. Cripps (The Habilitation Corporation), Clayton R. Cea (Behavioral Services of Tennessee)
Abstract: After ten years of completely volunteer-run administration, TABA began to negotiate a relationship with a Tennessee University. TABA’s history differs from many other affiliate chapters in that it began with practitioners and has developed relationships with university faculty. Many other organizations began, if not within an academic institution, with the commitment and support of a university. This poster frames TABA’s future with regards to its history and plans for the discipline in Tennessee.
 
30.

Taiwan ABA.

HUA FENG (National Chang-hua University of Education), Yi-feng Huang (Taichung Autism Education Association), Sharon Chien Chien (SEEK Education, Inc.), Yachen Terri Peng (SEEK Education, Inc.), Shu-Hwei Ke (ABA Educational Center, Taichung), Chia-Yu Chou (ABA Member), Chih-liang Chen (ABA Member)
Abstract:

The poster will present the development of ABA in Taiwan through the chapter, graduate study opportunities, and the national conference of Taiwan ABA.

 
31. The Texas Association for Behavior Analysis (TxABA).
JEFFREY C. ENZINNA (Texana MHMR Center, Rosenberg, TX), William H. Edwards (Behavioral Innovations, Inc.)
Abstract: The Texas Association for Behavior Analysis (TxABA) is an ABA Affiliated Chapter with 450 total members and 50 voting members. The primary activities of TxABA involve hosting the annual conference which rotates geographical location between Dallas and Houston and promoting behavior analysis throughout the state of Texas. The average attendance of the annual conferences ranges from 250 to 450 persons, and is comprised of practitioners, academic professionals, students, community participants such as parents, and other professionals such as psychologists, educators, occupational therapists, speech pathologists, and social workers. The conferences bring together behavior analysts from across the state of Texas and the surrounding states, and provide a valuable resource for all attendees to gain information on the latest basic and applied topics from around the country as well as internationally. Recent speakers have included such key figures as Dr. Jack Michael, Dr. Ray Miltenberger, Dr. Dorothea Lerman, Dr. Jeff Sigafoos, and Dr. Jerry Shook. Recent topics have included the current status of the Behavior Analysis Certification Board, preference, choice making, and self-determinism, training and generalization of safety skills to prevent gun play in children, further research on procedural refinements to and extensions of functional analysis methodologies, and Skinner's molecular interpretation of behavior.
 
32. Venezuelan Association for Behavior Analysis
GUILLERMO E. YABER (AVACO), Gustavo Peña (AVACO)
Abstract: The mission of AVACO (Venezuelan Association for behavior analysis, a chapter of ABA) is to promote the study and application of the principles of behavior to human beings and other organisms, in Venezuela. It includes the conceptual, experimental, and applied behavior analysis as well as service delivery. AVACO serves students, professionals and the general public interested in behavior analysis. AVACO offers continuing education and is planning to certify individuals and develop an accreditation system for behavior analysis teaching programs. Through its web site and electronic list offers a month bulletin that includes information regarding courses, seminars and diverse materials for education, research and service delivery in behavior analysis. AVACO´s office is located at the experimental psychology lab. of the Andrés Bello Catholic University in Caracas Venezuela. Every year, At the school of psychology of this university, AVACO offers workshops in topics related with behavior analysis.
 
33. Vermont Association for Behavior Analysis.
SHONA L. MARSTON (Sd Associates, Behavioral Consultants), David L. Powsner (Sd Associates, Behavioral Consultants)
Abstract: The poster will articulate our mission and describe the range of VABA activities, current and intended.
 
34. WABA: Wisconsin's Association for Behavior Analysis.
ROGER FRANK BASS (Carthage College), Kevin P. Klatt (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Matthew E. Andrzejewski (University of Wisconsin, Madison)
Abstract: A brief history of the brief history of WABA, the organization's initiatives, and invitation to participate will be offered. Current interests of members and plans for advancing ABA at the state level will be covered. Work with the Wisconsin Early Autism Project and parent groups will be put into the context of efforts to locate and train behavior analysts to work with these groups. Concerns regarding funding and certifying behavior analysts will be addressed. Suggestions for future initiatives will be solicited.
 
 
Expo Poster Session #268
#268 ABA Expo - Around the World
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
91. Canadas First Bachelors Degree In Behavioral Psychology.
GARY A. BERNFELD (St. Lawrence College), Sheelagh Jamieson (St. Lawrence College), Deborah K. Smith (St. Lawrence College)
Abstract: St. Lawrence College began offering a new Bachelor of Applied Arts (Behavioural Psychology) degree in September 2004. This program provides the most comprehensive training in the behavioural sciences at the undergraduate level in Canada. Students are trained in the latest behavioural techniques used in a variety of areas such as acquired brain injuries, autism, addictions, developmental disorders, psychiatric disorders, and special education, as well as adult and youth corrections. Graduates may pursue additional post-secondary education (e.g. graduate school in this area, as well as in teaching, social work, etc). The major areas of study within the program are applied behaviour analysis and cognitive behaviour therapy, as well as behaviourally-orientated courses in Abnormal and Developmental Psychology, Statistics, etc. Classroom based courses combined with three practicum opportunities [totalling over 1100 hours] ensure both knowledge and skill development in assessing behavioural patterns and designing effective programs to achieve behavioural change and skill development. The program has received strong support from past ABA presidents as well as recognised leaders in both research and applied settings across North America. Data from a needs-based survey show a strong demand for a full time degree in the field of behavioural sciences.
 
92. EJOBA (European Journal of Behavior Analysis)
ERIK ARNTZEN (Akershus University College), Per Holth (The Behavioral Center, Oslo), Arne Brekstad (Norwegian Association for Behavior Analysis)
Abstract: The European Journal of Behavior Analysis has been published since 2000. We have today 1100 subscribers. EJOBA is published by the Norwegian Association for Behavior Analysis, and is primarily for the original publication of experimental reports and theoretical/conceptual papers relevant to the analysis of the behavior of individual organisms. Review articles will also be considered for publication. In addition, we will print target articles for discussion, to which readers are invited to respond in the next issue of the journal. We have also published special issues on equivalence, bereavement and precision teaching.
 
93. Nakayoshi Kids Station: Young Autism Project and Peer Support Project.
TAKAHIRO YAMAMOTO (Sophia University), Yoshiaki Nakano (Sophia University), Masami Makino (Nakayoshi Kids Station), Maiko Miyazaki (Nakayoshi Kids Station), Yuki Ito (Nakayoshi Kids Station), Akiko Kato (Nakayoshi Kids Station)
Abstract: Nakayoshi Kids Station (NKS) have two projects, the Young Autism Project and the Peer Support Project. NKS Young Autism Project embarked on an early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) in young children with autism in Tokyo, Japan. The project is one of the replication sites for UCLA Young Autism Project. NKS Peer Support Project is an innovative prevention effort helping schools promote mental health and positive school climate by teaching social skills to students as part of a guidance curriculum. Our mission is to promote all childrens mental health from a preventive, interventional, and educational point of view.
 
 
Expo Poster Session #269
#269 ABA Expo - Other Organizations
Sunday, May 28, 2006
10:00 PM–12:00 AM
Grand Hall West
1. The Center for Autism and Related Disorders.
DOREEN GRANPEESHEH (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Jonathan J. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Jiyeon H. Yoo (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Adel C. Najdowski (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Arthur E. Wilke (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.)
Abstract: The Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD) is a large-scale behavior-analytic organization committed to the effective treatment of children with autism and related disorders. Following the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis, CARD develops individualized assessment and treatment plans for individuals with autism. CARD was established 15 years ago and currently has 13 US-based offices and 3 international offices, providing services to nearly 1,000 children internationally. CARD also maintains an active Research & Development (R & D) Department. The CARD R & D team is committed to science as the most objective and reliable approach to evaluating effective treatments for autism. Our mission is to conduct empirical research on assessments and treatments for autism and to disseminate our research findings and derived technology through publication and education of professionals and the public. CARD also maintains an Institutional Review Board (IRB) that is approved by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services Office of Human Research Protection. This poster will provide information about our clinical services, current R & D activities, employment opportunities, employee educational programs, as well as our intern and clerkship programs.
 
2. Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders Southern Illinois University.
ANTHONY J. CUVO (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: This poster will present information about the Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders at Southern Illinois University. The Center serves as a practicum, internship, and research site for graduate students in the Behavior Analysis and Therapy Program, an ABA accredited graduate training program. The Center is a regional center for autism in southern Illinois and performs assessment of children, individual and group interventions, parent and community provider training, as well as a comprehensive program evaluation and research.
 
3. Division 25 of the American Psychological Association.
ERIC A. JACOBS (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract: Division 25 was founded in 1964 to promote basic research in the experimental analysis of behavior, to encourage applications of such research to human affairs, and to cooperate with other divisions whose interests overlap with the Division. Division 25 is also the voice of behavior analysis within the APA. If behavior analysts are not strongly represented in APA, then APA is unlikely to advocate for us when they speak with government officials, funding agencies, and to the general public. The stronger our numbers, the louder our voice. Stop by the poster at this year's expo to learn more about Division and about how you can help simply by joining. With annual dues as low as $22 the time to join Division 25 is now.
 
4. The Faison School for Autism.
DANIEL J. IRWIN (The Faison School for Autism), Kimberly Oertel (The Faison School for Autism), Tiffanie N. Ellis (The Faison School for Autism), Vicki Lo (The Faison School for Autism), Jennifer Wade (The Faison School for Autism), Jason Detzel (The Faison School for Autism), Katherine M. Matthews (The Faison School for Autism)
Abstract: The Faison School is a state licensed, not-for-profit program, which is a key component to the Autism Center of Virginia at Virginia Commonwealth University. The Faison School is dedicated to providing services for students who are diagnosed within the autism spectrum. The school uses only evidence-based methodologies when treating individuals with autism. We employ techniques of applied behavior analysis, the proven method for long-term outcomes. The school based program offers an early intervention program beginning at 18 months and provides both academic and life skills programs for the school age program through the age of 22. It operates year round, providing students with 30 hours per week of intensive treatment in a 1:1 to 1:3 staff to student ratio. A team of professional staff, who have undergone intensive training, collaborates to assess the needs of each child, coordinate programs, implement goals, and evaluate progress. The Faison School currently serves 28 students on site, as well as provides off-site services and consultation.
 
5. Graduate Internet Coursework in Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas.
LESLIE S. BURKETT (University of North Texas), Sigrid S. Glenn (University of North Texas), Susan R. Miller (University of North Texas), Ana Barbara Neves (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The Department of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas offers two distant programs in behavior analysis. 1) The internet program is a sequence of five self-paced courses, designed by full-time faculty, to meet the needs of individuals who cannot obtain coursework in behavior analysis locally. The courses are multimedia, highly interactive, and cover the academic content required by the Behavior Analysis Certification Board (BACB). Students may also earn a 15-SCH academic Certificate in Applied Behavior Analysis for completing the 5-course internet sequence. 2) The department's 42-SCH master's degree program in behavior analysis (accredited by the Association for Behavior Analysis) is also offered to students at a distance by contract with agencies that agree to suppport their employees' participation in a master's degree program. Distant cohorts include 20 or fewer students, have the same degree requirements as on-campus students, and a faculty composed of UNT full-time faculty and adjunct faculty located near or at the participating agencies. Courses include teleconferencing, in-person classes by local/distant faculty, and web-based activities.
 
6.

May South, Inc. Excellence in Research, Service, and Training.

BRADLEY S. BEZILLA (May South, Inc.), Michele Wixson (May South, Inc.), Sandra Black (May South, Inc.), R. Jade Fraiser (May South, Inc.), Bridgette A. Amo (May South, Inc.), Oscar Ellis, III (May South, Inc.)
Abstract:

May South, Inc. Excellence in Research, Service, and Training.

 
7. National Autism Center.
MICHELLE H. BRASIER (National Autism Center)
Abstract: National Autism Center.
 
8. Nyansa Learning Corporation.
TESA T. DAHL (Nyansa Learning Corporation), Ginger R. Wilson (Nyansa Learning Corporation), Beth A. Porter (Nyansa Learning Corporation)
Abstract: Nyansa Learning Corporation provides early intervention services to young children diagnosed with or at risk of having autism or related developmental disabilities. We are vendored as an Early Start Service Provider with Regional Center of Orange County and we are a licensed non-public agency in Orange County, California.This poster will provide a description of the services provided by Nyansa Learning Corporation, including teaching techniques, staffing ratios, staff qualifications and training opportunites.
 
9. St Amant Preschool ABA Program.
ANGELA CORNICK (St. Amant Research Centre), Daniela Fazzio (St. Amant Research Centre), Amy Elizabeth Sigurros Marks (St. Amant Research Centre), Carole S. M. Marion (St. Amant Research Centre), Kristin Kebernik (St. Amant Research Centre), Corley D. Magnusson (St. Amant Research Centre), Kirsten M. Wirth (St. Amant, University of Manitoba)
Abstract: The St. Amant ABA Preschool Program is a publicly funded program offering 36 hours of individual ABA training weekly to preschool children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder. The program aims at designing highly intensive and structured home-based teaching environments, targeting skill acquisition as well as elimination of challenging behaviour. The ABA program is expanded from the child's home to other environments (e.g., nursery school, daycare, play groups), according the child's readiness and individual skill acquisition goals. Key features of the program are described, including curriculum, evaluation methods, staffing ratios, staff qualifications, in-house training, and undergraduate and graduate practicum courses offered in partnership with the Psychology Department at the University of Manitoba.
 
10. To the Internet and Beyond: Converting Past Division 25 Recorders to Electronic Form.
AMY K DRAYTON (Eastern Michigan University), James T. Todd (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: This poster depicts the transition of the Division 25 Recorder from print to digital format. Over the coming months we will convert the Division 25 Recorders to digital format for electronic distribution.
 
11. The Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis.
STEPHEN NOONE (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), J. Carl Hughes (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Alexander Toogood (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor), Richard P. Hastings (Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis, School of Psychology, University of Wales, Bangor)
Abstract: The Wales Centre for Behaviour Analysis (WCBA) was granted formal approved as a University of Wales Centre in September 2004. The aim of the WCBA is to contribute, through the application of behaviour analysis theory and methods, to the understanding of basic human learning processes and to establish positive behaviour change in children and adults using individual and larger-scale interventions. The rationale for creating a formal centre based at the University was to unite a number of existing applied and basic research streams with two significant developments in training and applied provisions in ABA at Bangor. The first of these is the newly established Masters level training in Applied Behaviour Analysis: the course was started in 2003 and is the first European BCBA approved Masters in ABA. The second development is the establishment of the Bangor Centre for Developmental Disabilities; this is a new school and residential provision that exists to provide a service to children with developmental disabilities and severe behaviour disorders through ABA. The WCBA holds regular open research and planning meetings designed to encourage collaboration between researchers and applied providers and dissemination of research and best practice. The WCBA aims to contribute significantly to the training of the next generation of basic and applied researchers through the Masters training course and other research, consultation, and training initiatives.
 

BACK TO THE TOP

 

Back to Top
ValidatorError
  
Modifed by Eddie Soh
DONATE
{"isActive":false}